You are on page 1of 1052

Dynamic balance

www.develop.de

Service Manual Field Service

ineo+ 550

FIELD SERVICE TOTAL CONTENTS
SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS ..............................................................S-1 IMPORTANT NOTICE ................................................................................................S-1 DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION ..............................................................................................S-1 SAFETY WARNINGS .................................................................................................S-2 WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE ........................................................S-18 MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT .....................................................................................................................S-21 Composition of the service manual ................................................................................. C-1 Notation of the service manual ....................................................................................... C-2

bizhub C550 Main body
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 9 Adjustment/Setting...................................................................................................... 255 Troubleshooting........................................................................................................... 515 Appendix ..................................................................................................................... 663

Standard controller
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 31

DF-611
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5 Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 25 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 51

LU-301
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3 Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 31 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 37

FS-517/608
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 5 Adjustment/Setting........................................................................................................ 49

i

Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................... 101

PK-512/513
General ........................................................................................................................... 1 Maintenance ................................................................................................................... 3 Adjustment/Setting ......................................................................................................... 9 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................ 17

ii

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS
Read carefully the safety and important warning items described below to understand them before doing service work.

IMPORTANT NOTICE
Because of possible hazards to an inexperienced person servicing this product as well as the risk of damage to the product, KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. (hereafter called the KMBT) strongly recommends that all servicing be performed only by KMBT-trained service technicians. Changes may have been made to this product to improve its performance after this Service Manual was printed. Accordingly, KMBT does not warrant, either explicitly or implicitly, that the information contained in this service manual is complete and accurate. The user of this service manual must assume all risks of personal injury and/or damage to the product while servicing the product for which this service manual is intended. Therefore, this service manual must be carefully read before doing service work both in the course of technical training and even after that, for performing maintenance and control of the product properly. Keep this service manual also for future service.

DESCRIPTION ITEMS FOR DANGER, WARNING AND CAUTION
In this Service Manual, each of three expressions “ DANGER”, “ WARNING”, and “ CAUTION” is defined as follows together with a symbol mark to be used in a limited meaning. When servicing the product, the relevant works (disassembling, reassembling, adjustment, repair, maintenance, etc.) need to be conducted with utmost care. DANGER: Action having a high possibility of suffering death or serious injury WARNING: Action having a possibility of suffering death or serious injury CAUTION: Action having a possibility of suffering a slight wound, medium trouble, and property damage Symbols used for safety and important warning items are defined as follows:

:Precaution when servicing the product. :Prohibition when servicing the product. :Direction when servicing the product.

General precaution General prohibition General instruction

Electric hazard High temperature

Do not touch with wet hand Unplug

Do not disassemble Ground/Earth

S-1

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

SAFETY WARNINGS
[1] MODIFICATIONS NOT AUTHORIZED BY KONICA MINOLTA BUSINESS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are renowned for their high reliability. This reliability is achieved through high-quality design and a solid service network. Product design is a highly complicated and delicate process where numerous mechanical, physical, and electrical aspects have to be taken into consideration, with the aim of arriving at proper tolerances and safety factors. For this reason, unauthorized modifications involve a high risk of degradation in performance and safety. Such modifications are therefore strictly prohibited. the points listed below are not exhaustive, but they illustrate the reasoning behind this policy.

Prohibited Actions DANGER
• Using any cables or power cord not specified by KMBT.

• Using any fuse or thermostat not specified by KMBT. Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. • Disabling fuse functions or bridging fuse terminals with wire, metal clips, solder or similar object. • Disabling relay functions (such as wedging paper between relay contacts)

• Disabling safety functions (interlocks, safety circuits, etc.) Safety will not be assured, leading to a risk of fire and injury. • Making any modification to the product unless instructed by KMBT • Using parts not specified by KMBT

S-2

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[2] POWER PLUG SELECTION
In some countries or areas, the power plug provided with the product may not fit wall outlet used in the area. In that case, it is obligation of customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) to attach appropriate power plug or power cord set in order to connect the product to the supply.

Power Cord Set or Power Plug WARNING
• Use power supply cord set which meets the following criteria: - provided with a plug having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and - the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and - provided with three-conductor cable having enough current capacity, and - the cord set meets regulatory requirements for the area. Use of inadequate cord set leads to fire or electric shock. • Attach power plug which meets the following criteria: - having configuration intended for the connection to wall outlet appropriate for the product's rated voltage and current, and - the plug has pin/terminal(s) for grounding, and - meets regulatory requirements for the area. Use of inadequate cord set leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock. • Conductors in the power cable must be connected to terminals of the plug according to the following order: •Black or Brown:L (line) •White or Light Blue:N (neutral) •Green/Yellow:PE (earth) Wrong connection may cancel safeguards within the product, and results in fire or electric shock.

kw

S-3

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[3] CHECKPOINTS WHEN PERFORMING ON-SITE SERVICE
KONICA MINOLTA brand products are extensively tested before shipping, to ensure that all applicable safety standards are met, in order to protect the customer and customer engineer (hereafter called the CE) from the risk of injury. However, in daily use, any electrical equipment may be subject to parts wear and eventual failure. In order to maintain safety and reliability, the CE must perform regular safety checks. 1. Power Supply

Connection to Power Supply WARNING
• Check that mains voltage is as specified. Connection to wrong voltage supply may result in fire or electric shock. • Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having same configuration as the plug. Use of an adapter leads to the product connecting to inadequate power supply (voltage, current capacity, grounding), and may result in fire or electric shock. If proper wall outlet is not available, advice the customer to contact qualified electrician for the installation. • Plug the power cord into the dedicated wall outlet with a capacity greater than the maximum power consumption. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. • If two or more power cords can be plugged into the wall outlet, the total load must not exceed the rating of the wall outlet. If excessive current flows in the wall outlet, fire may result. • Make sure the power cord is plugged in the wall outlet securely. Contact problems may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and the risk of fire. • Check whether the product is grounded properly. If current leakage occurs in an ungrounded product, you may suffer electric shock while operating the product. Connect power plug to grounded wall outlet.

kw

S-4

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Power Plug and Cord WARNING
• When using the power cord set (inlet type) that came with this product, make sure the connector is securely inserted in the inlet of the product. When securing measure is provided, secure the cord with the fixture properly. If the power cord (inlet type) is not connected to the product securely, a contact problem may lead to increased resistance, overheating, and risk of fire. • Check whether the power cord is not stepped on or pinched by a table and so on. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether the power cord is damaged. Check whether the sheath is damaged. If the power plug, cord, or sheath is damaged, replace with a new power cord (with plug and connector on each end) specified by KMBT. Using the damaged power cord may result in fire or electric shock. • Do not bundle or tie the power cord. Overheating may occur there, leading to a risk of fire.

• Check whether dust is collected around the power plug and wall outlet. Using the power plug and wall outlet without removing dust may result in fire. • Do not insert the power plug into the wall outlet with a wet hand. The risk of electric shock exists. • When unplugging the power cord, grasp the plug, not the cable. The cable may be broken, leading to a risk of fire and electric shock.

S-5

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Wiring WARNING
• Never use multi-plug adapters to plug multiple power cords in the same outlet. If used, the risk of fire exists.

• When an extension cord is required, use a specified one. Current that can flow in the extension cord is limited, so using a too long extension cord may result in fire. Do not use an extension cable reel with the cable taken up. Fire may result. 2. Installation Requirements

Prohibited Installation Places WARNING
• Do not place the product near flammable materials or volatile materials that may catch fire. A risk of fire exists. • Do not place the product in a place exposed to water such as rain. A risk of fire and electric shock exists.

When not Using the Product for a long time WARNING
• When the product is not used over an extended period of time (holidays, etc.), switch it off and unplug the power cord. Dust collected around the power plug and outlet may cause fire.

S-6

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Ventilation CAUTION
• The product generates ozone gas during operation, but it will not be harmful to the human body. If a bad smell of ozone is present in the following cases, ventilate the room. a. When the product is used in a poorly ventilated room b. When taking a lot of copies c. When using multiple products at the same time

Stability CAUTION
• Be sure to lock the caster stoppers. In the case of an earthquake and so on, the product may slide, leading to a injury.

Inspection before Servicing CAUTION
• Before conducting an inspection, read all relevant documentation (service manual, technical notices, etc.) and proceed with the inspection following the prescribed procedure in safety clothes, using only the prescribed tools. Do not make any adjustment not described in the documentation. If the prescribed procedure or tool is not used, the product may break and a risk of injury or fire exists. • Before conducting an inspection, be sure to disconnect the power plugs from the product and options. When the power plug is inserted in the wall outlet, some units are still powered even if the POWER switch is turned OFF. A risk of electric shock exists. • The area around the fixing unit is hot. You may get burnt.

S-7

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Work Performed with the Product Powered On WARNING
• Take every care when making adjustments or performing an operation check with the product powered. If you make adjustments or perform an operation check with the external cover detached, you may touch live or high-voltage parts or you may be caught in moving gears or the timing belt, leading to a risk of injury. • Take every care when servicing with the external cover detached. High-voltage exists around the drum unit. A risk of electric shock exists.

Safety Checkpoints WARNING
• Check the exterior and frame for edges, burrs, and other damage. The user or CE may be injured. • Do not allow any metal parts such as clips, staples, and screws to fall into the product. They can short internal circuits and cause electric shock or fire. • Check wiring for squeezing and any other damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire. • Carefully remove all toner remnants and dust from electrical parts and electrode units such as a charging corona unit. Current can leak, leading to a risk of product trouble or fire. • Check high-voltage cables and sheaths for any damage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

S-8

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints WARNING
• Check electrode units such as a charging corona unit for deterioration and sign of leakage. Current can leak, leading to a risk of trouble or fire. • Before disassembling or adjusting the write unit (P/H unit) incorporating a laser, make sure that the power cord has been disconnected. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. • Do not remove the cover of the write unit. Do not supply power with the write unit shifted from the specified mounting position. The laser light can enter your eye, leading to a risk of loss of eyesight. • When replacing a lithium battery, replace it with a new lithium battery specified in the Parts Guide Manual. Dispose of the used lithium battery using the method specified by local authority. Improper replacement can cause explosion. • After replacing a part to which AC voltage is applied (e.g., optical lamp and fixing lamp), be sure to check the installation state. A risk of fire exists. • Check the interlock switch and actuator for loosening and check whether the interlock functions properly. If the interlock does not function, you may receive an electric shock or be injured when you insert your hand in the product (e.g., for clearing paper jam). • Make sure the wiring cannot come into contact with sharp edges, burrs, or other pointed parts. Current can leak, leading to a risk of electric shock or fire.

S-9

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Safety Checkpoints WARNING
• Make sure that all screws, components, wiring, connectors, etc. that were removed for safety check and maintenance have been reinstalled in the original location. (Pay special attention to forgotten connectors, pinched cables, forgotten screws, etc.) A risk of product trouble, electric shock, and fire exists.

Handling of Consumables WARNING
• Toner and developer are not harmful substances, but care must be taken not to breathe excessive amounts or let the substances come into contact with eyes, etc. It may be stimulative. If the substances get in the eye, rinse with plenty of water immediately. When symptoms are noticeable, consult a physician. • Never throw the used cartridge and toner into fire. You may be burned due to dust explosion.

Handling of Service Materials CAUTION
• Unplug the power cord from the wall outlet. Drum cleaner (isopropyl alcohol) and roller cleaner (acetone-based) are highly flammable and must be handled with care. A risk of fire exists. • Do not replace the cover or turn the product ON before any solvent remnants on the cleaned parts have fully evaporated. A risk of fire exists.

S-10

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

Handling of Service Materials CAUTION
• Use only a small amount of cleaner at a time and take care not to spill any liquid. If this happens, immediately wipe it off. A risk of fire exists. • When using any solvent, ventilate the room well. Breathing large quantities of organic solvents can lead to discomfort.

S-11

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[4] Used Batteries Precautions
ALL Areas CAUTION Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer’s instructions. Germany VORSICHT! Explosionsgefahr bei unsachgemäßem Austausch der Batterie. Ersatz nur durch denselben oder einen vom Hersteller empfohlenen gleichwertigen Typ. Entsorgung gebrauchter Batterien nach Angaben des Herstellers. France ATTENTION Il y a danger d’explosion s’il y a remplacement incorrect de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du même type ou d’un type équivalent recommandé par le constructeur. Mettre au rebut les batteries usagées conformément aux instructions du fabricant. Denmark ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri - Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandøren. Finland, Sweden VAROlTUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. Norway ADVARSEL Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri. Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefalt av apparatfabrikanten. Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner.

S-12

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

[5] Laser Safety
• This is a digital machine certified as a Class 1 laser product. There is no possibility of danger from a laser, provided the machine is serviced according to the instruction in this manual.

5.1

Internal Laser Radiation
semiconductor laser

Maximum power of the laser diode Maximum average radiation power (*) Wavelength *at laser aperture of the Print Head Unit

30 mW 12.9 µW 775-800 nm

• This product employs a Class 3B laser diode that emits an invisible laser beam. The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print head unit. • The print head unit is NOT A FIELD SERVICEABLE ITEM. Therefore, the print head unit should not be opened under any circumstances.

Laser Aperture of the Print Head Unit

A00JP0C501DA

S-13

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS U.S.A., Canada (CDRH Regulation) • This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation Performance Standard according to the Food, Drug and Cosmetic Act of 1990. Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the U.S. Food and Drug Administration of the U.S. Department of Health and Human Services (DHHS). This means that the device does not produce hazardous laser radiation. • The label shown on page S-16 indicates compliance with the CDRH regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United States.
.

CAUTION • Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode Wavelength All Areas CAUTION • Use of controls, adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation exposure. semiconductor laser Maximum power of the laser diode Wavelength Denmark ADVARSEL • Usynlig laserstråling ved åbning, når sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af funktion. Undgå udsættelse for stråling. Klasse 1 laser produkt der opfylder IEC60825-1 sikkerheds kravene. halvlederlaser Laserdiodens højeste styrke bølgelængden 30 mW 775-800 nm 30 mW 775-800 nm 30 mW 775-800 nm

S-14

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS Finland, Sweden LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT VAROITUS! • Laitteen käyttäminen muulla kuin tässä käyttöohjeessa mainitulla tavalla saattaa altistaa käyttäjän turvallisuusluokan 1 ylittävälle näkymättömälle lasersäteilylle. puolijohdelaser Laserdiodin suurin teho aallonpituus 30 mW 775-800 nm

VARNING! • Om apparaten används på annat sätt än i denna bruksanvisning specificerats, kan användaren utsättas för osynlig laserstrålning, som överskrider gränsen för laserklass 1. halvledarlaser Den maximala effekten för laserdioden våglängden 30 mW 775-800 nm

VARO! • Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina näkymättomälle lasersäteilylle. Älä katso säteeseen.

VARNING! • Osynlig laserstråining när denna del är öppnad och spärren är urkopplad. Betrakta ej stråien. Norway ADVERSEL • Dersom apparatet brukes på annen måte enn spesifisert i denne bruksanvisning, kan brukeren utsettes för unsynlig laserstrålning, som overskrider grensen for laser klass 1. halvleder laser Maksimal effekt till laserdiode bølgelengde 30 mW 775-800 nm

S-15

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

5.2

Laser Safety Label

• A laser safety label is attached to the inside of the machine as shown below.

* Only for the U.S.A.

A00JP0E507DA

5.3

Laser Caution Label

• A laser caution label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown below.

A00JP0C503DA

S-16

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

5.4

PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING THE LASER EQUIPMENT

• When laser protective goggles are to be used, select ones with a lens conforming to the above specifications. • When a disassembly job needs to be performed in the laser beam path, such as when working around the printerhead and PC drum, be sure first to turn the printer OFF. • If the job requires that the printer be left ON, take off your watch and ring and wear laser protective goggles. • A highly reflective tool can be dangerous if it is brought into the laser beam path. Use utmost care when handling tools on the user’s premises. • The Print head is not to be disassembled or adjusted in the field. Replace the unit or Assembly including the control board. Therefore, remove the laser diode, and do not perform control board trimmer adjustment.

S-17

SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS

WARNING INDICATIONS ON THE MACHINE
Caution labels shown are attached in some areas on/in the machine. When accessing these areas for maintenance, repair, or adjustment, special care should be taken to avoid burns and electric shock.

WARNING
Do not burn used toner cartridges. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous.

CAUTION
The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot. Touching any part other than those indicated may result in burns.

WARNING
Do not position the used waste toner box so that it is standing on end or tilted, otherwise toner may spill.

WARNING
Do not burn used Imaging Units. Toner expelled from the fire is dangerous.

S-18

High voltage This area generates high voltage. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. A00JP0E509DA S-19 . Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock.SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage This area generates high voltage.

Do not remove caution labels. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. contact our service office. S-20 .SAFETY AND IMPORTANT WARNING ITEMS High voltage This area generates high voltage. High voltage This area generates high voltage. A00JP0E510DA CAUTION: • You may be burned or injured if you touch any area that you are advised not to touch by any caution label. Be careful not to touch here when the power is turned ON to avoid getting an electric shock. If any caution label has come off or soiled and therefore the caution cannot be read.

4. To determine the cause of the accident.MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT 1. If a report of a serious accident has been received from a customer. follow the regulations specified by every distributor. the distributor who has been notified first must immediately take emergency measures to provide relief to affected persons and to prevent further damage. an on-site evaluation must be carried out quickly and KMBT must be notified. S-21 . For reports and measures concerning serious accidents. 3. in accordance with instructions issued by KMBT. 2. If an accident has occurred. conditions and materials must be recorded through direct on-site checks.

MEASURES TO TAKE IN CASE OF AN ACCIDENT Blank Page S-22 .

and the timing of operation of each part. ADJUSTMENT/SETTING: TROUBLESHOOTING: APPENDIX: Explanation of utility mode. connector layout drawings. service mode. maintenance steps. and paper path COMPOSITION/OPERATION: Explanation of configuration of each unit. and product specifications Explanation of service schedule. and firmware version up method etc. and their countermeasures etc. removal/reinstallation methods of major parts. and mechanical adjustment etc. <Theory of Operation section> OUTLINE: Explanation of system configuration. overall layout drawing are attached. Theory of Operation section gives. timing chart. a rough outline of the service schedule and its details. as information required by the CE at the site (or at the customer’s premise). service tools. a rough outline of the object and role of each function. Field Service section gives. the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system. Explanation of lists of jam codes and error codes. unit configuration. C-1 . the object and role of each adjustment. error codes and supplementary information. The basic configuration of each section is as follows. and control system <Field Service section> GENERAL: MAINTENANCE: Explanation of system configuration. as information for the CE to get a full understanding of the product. However some options may not be applied to the following configuration. operating system. maintenance steps.Composition of the service manual This service manual consists of Theory of Operation section and Field Service section to explain the main machine and its corresponding options. product specifications. Parts layout drawings.

When the size has only the short edge feeding with no long edge feeding. Brand name The company names and product names mentioned in this manual are the brand name or the registered trademark of each company. Feeding direction • When the long side of the paper is parallel with the feeding direction. C. The feeding direction which is perpendicular to the short edge feeding is called the long edge feeding. [S] will not be added to the paper size.0/2000 Windows NT/2000/XP Windows 98/Me/ NT/2000/XP When the description is made in combination of the OS’s mentioned above: B. each of the products is described as follows: (1) bizhub C550: (2) Microsoft Windows 98: Microsoft Windows Me: Microsoft Windows NT 4.0: Microsoft Windows 2000: Microsoft Windows XP: Main body Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT 4.0 or Windows NT Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows 98/Me Windows NT 4. • Short edge feeding will be identified with [S (abbreviation for Short edge feeding)] on the paper size. Product name In this manual. <Sample notation> Paper size A4 A3 Feeding direction Long edge feeding Short edge feeding Short edge feeding Notation A4 A4S A3 C-2 . it is called short edge feeding.Notation of the service manual A. No specific notation is added for the long edge feeding.

SERVICE MANUAL FIELD SERVICE 2007. 1.02 Ver.0 .

3.0 are left as they are. a revised version will be issued with a revision mark added as required. 2.0 has been changed in Ver. • To indicate clearly a section revised. — Revision mark Issue of the first edition Descriptions of revision . A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.0 deleted. show 1 in the lower outside section of the corresponding page. When any change has been made to the descriptions in the service manual. Therefore.0 only are shown with those for Ver. show 1 to the left of the revised section.0 has not been changed in Ver. 3. 3. A number within 1 represents the number of times the revision has been made.Revision history After publication of this service manual. the descriptions given in this service manual may not coincide with the actual machine. 2.0: The revision marks for Ver. 2. 2. 2007/02 Date 1.0 Service manual Ver. NOTE Revision marks shown in a page are restricted only to the latest ones with the old ones deleted.0: The revision marks for Ver. the parts and mechanism may be subject to change for improvement of their performance. • When a page revised in Ver. Revision mark: • To indicate clearly a section revised. • When a page revised in Ver.

............................................................... 12 FS-517/608 ........................................7 3...........................3 3.1 3..................................... 18 3...............................................................................................................1 Periodical check ....... 2.................2 3.....9 i ....................................2 3..............................................................................6........................................................................6.....................................................2.....................8 3............2 3.......... 21 Cleaning of the PH window Y/M/C/K................................3............... 25 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy ............................................................... 15 Replacement parts............. 2007 CONTENTS bizhub C550 Main body General 1.......................................................................................3 3.........................................3.................. 15 Replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set...................................................................................... 9 Service schedule .......................6...................... 15 CMS corresponding parts list...... 15 Maintenance parts .......0 Feb............................Field Service Ver. 9 Main body ...................1.........................................................6...... 22 Cleaning of the paper dust remover.2 3................... 1 Product specifications ...1 3....2.6 3.................... 10 DF-611 ....................................................... 16 Cleaning parts......................... 9 Main body .4.................................6......4 3..............6........................... 13 PK-512/513 .. 16 Concept of parts life.........2...............6 Maintenance items.........2 3.... 14 CMS corresponding parts .............................3................................................................................................................................5 3................................1......................................... 3 General Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance bizhub C550 Maintenance 3...................................1.....................................2. 19 Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)................. 28 3.............. 1......................................................................... 9 Options..............................................5 3...................................2..............................6..............................4 3................................................. 10 CMS corresponding parts...1 3........................5 3................................................................................... 9 DF-611 ...........3 3................................... 24 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller ...........2 3...6..................................................................... 11 LU-301 ............................................................. 24 Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers .......... 21 Cleaning of the electrostatic charger wire Y/M/C .... 27 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller ..................4.... 3......................1 3............ System configuration......1 3.......6.... 23 Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port.......................... 21 Cleaning of the timing roller ..................4 3.......3 3........................................................3 3...............

......18 3.......................................1 5............................... 59 Function outline ...............................................................................................................23 3.............................................................................................................................................. 55 Maintenance kit........................................................................................ 48 Replacing the transfer roller unit .........................6...............6.3................ 59 Appendix 5................................ 54 Copy materials ............................2 Service tool .. 36 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up roller .........................3........... 31 Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller.........24 4....................................................................................20 3................1 4..............................2 5....................................................13 3...................3 5..6....6... 4..........................................2......1 Troubleshooting 5.............................................3......2 5.21 3.......................................1 5...........................5 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006 ........ 54 CE tool list ............................6...............................0 Feb.19 3.... 42 Replacing the ozone filter ..........6....................... 56 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Windows Command Prompt ...............4 Firmware rewriting by compact flash .................................3................................ 35 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller ......2.........3 5....Field Service Ver............. 33 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller..................... 67 5.............................................................. 52 Replacing the fusing unit ................................. 46 Replacing the toner cartridge .............................................2 4................................................................6...... 72 ii .................................................. 56 Correspond model ..............2 Firmware upgrade..............................7 5....................6...............15 3.........................................................3...................6...............................2..............................6 5......... 55 4........................... 46 Replacing the transfer belt unit ....................2.............................. 45 Replacing the color toner filter .......4 5.. 56 Writing into the compact flash.....................................6..22 Maintenance 3................................................................................... 53 3.....................1 Adjustment / Setting 4....................3...............................................................................10 bizhub C550 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy................................................... 2007 3..............6.....................6.............................. 60 Update of software.................6... 40 Replacing the waste toner box.............3 4...........................8 5........................................................... 55 Waste toner box..3...........................................11 3.................................... 63 Details of each function ........ 59 Installation of software ................... 32 Replacing the tray 3 separation roller ......................................... 55 Imaging unit single parts (IU)...... 56 Outline ...................................... 38 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy........12 3...........4 5..................16 General 3.......... 65 How to write firmware data ........................................................... 59 System environment ....................2...................................6....................... 62 Screen .... 41 Replacing the imaging unit .......... 5.......................14 3........ 55 Toner cartridge single parts (T/C) ................................... 56 Service environment ..6...17 3.............2.......3......................... 1...

................. 100 Front right cover ....... 92 Upper front cover /2 ................3 6....................................................... 81 Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW ............................................................. 94 Upper left cover.........................................5.........................................................3.................... upper rear cover /2................................................5....... 89 Lower front door ................ IR right cover...................................................................... 76 Other ...................13 6........................................................3.............................4..................... 76 Firmware rewriting ........................................................Field Service Ver....................................................................3................... 98 Interface cover. 101 Exit tray (option: OT-503) .......1 6..................... 97 IR left cover..............3....22 Disassembly/assembly procedure ....... 88 Upper front door ......................................... 76 Preparations for firmware rewriting .....................2...... 72 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Action when data transfer fails ............0 Feb...........21 6........................................1 5.. 104 Tray 3/4 ............1 6................ 98 Original glass ......... 95 Rear left cover.............4 5...16 6..................................3...........15 6......3..........3...................2...................... 79 Error code list for the Internet ISW........................................................................................ rear right cover /4 ...................................................................1 5..................................................................................................................................14 6........... 105 6....................10 6.....................................5...3 5...........3........... 97 IR front cover.1 6....................... rear right cover /1......................3................ 89 iii .................... 85 Cleaning parts list ............2 5.................................................4.....3.............................................................................................................3........................17 6...........3............................. IR upper rear cover /2 ........................................................................5............................ IR upper front cover.. 95 Lower left cover .....20 6......18 6.......................... rear right cover /3........ 6..... 93 Lower front cover .................. 90 Upper front cover /1 .....................2 5....3.........2 6..................19 6...................................................................................... 100 Upper rear cover /1.. 75 Outline..........................3.............5 6......5 5..............2 Updating method.........3....5 6.......................................3 6............................................. 84 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts)..............3..................................8 6.............................................................................. 96 IR rear cover............................. 2007 5.....9 6............................ 103 Tray 1/2 ........................... rear right cover /2...... 1................................................................................5............................... 76 Service environment ...................... 101 Control panel assy ..................................................3..... 99 Manual bypass tray rear cover .................................2 6.... lower rear cover .....7 6.................12 6.............3.......................................................3..................................3.......................................3............3. 84 Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items .............................................4 6....................................6 6. IR upper rear cover /1............................... 96 Paper exit rear cover .........................11 6. 92 Right front cover................... 85 Disassembly/assembly parts list .....

.................................3........................ 150 MFP board (MFPB).... 141 DC power supply (DCPU) ..53 6..............39 6............ 155 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) .............. 151 How to open PWB box.........................3.................................................................................................... 111 Original glass moving unit.......3..............................................3......3..................................................................................40 6............ 110 CCD unit ...........................................................3............................ 145 Printer control board (PRCB)................................. 154 High voltage unit/2 (HV2)...................................................3..........28 6............43 6.3.......................... 138 PH relay board (REYB/PH).... 134 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) ...3...........................30 General 6.......................3..............................................................0 Feb.......45 6. 105 PH unit .................... 166 Operation panel I/O board (OPIOB) .............3...................... 167 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1).......................................................26 6............50 6..................................3............47 6.......................3........ 146 Slide interface board (REYB/SL) ....................3.........Field Service Ver.. 1..............3........................3..........................3..... 148 Fan motor relay board (REYB/FAN)..........48 Troubleshooting 6...........................................................................................3.............46 6. 165 Operation panel control board (OPCB).................37 6..........58 6.....3...............................44 6..................................................................................................................................32 6.............. 124 Main drive unit ......52 6.......................... 126 LCC drive unit ........ 128 IR assy........................................... 136 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) ...............................................42 6........................3..........................................................................3.....3.............. 156 High voltage unit/1 (HV1)........................................ 157 IH power supply (IHPU) ...............................................34 6......................... 2007 6...3....................................................................27 6....................3..........................................3...............3....3......... 168 6............................ 115 Scanner assy .............41 Adjustment / Setting 6................3................................................................... 119 IH coil (FH1).......................................33 6.....................49 6........54 6.................................3...........................................51 6......................................................... 142 Relay drive board (REDB) ............29 6.......... 106 Duplex unit ....................3. 120 Intermediate transport roller assy ....................................................25 6..................35 6........................................................56 6...................24 6.3..3.............3.............31 6.......................59 iv ......23 bizhub C550 LCD module............... 149 PCI board (PCIB)........................3.............................................. 113 Glass step sheet ............................................55 Appendix 6....57 6......... 167 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2)...3............ 109 Manual bypass tray unit ............................................................36 Maintenance 6.....38 6........................ 162 Operation panel inverter board (OPINVB) ..................................... 140 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) ..3.....................3........................ 137 Inverter board (INVB)..................................... 117 Hard disk.......... 137 Image processing board (IPB) ........

.... 1........3........................66 6........................................................83 6...................................... 184 Color PC drum motor (M16).....90 6.................95 6..3..........3...........61 6..................................92 6.......................3.....3.................................................... 184 Color developing motor (M17)...........75 6.......................................................3.3.. 214 Horizontal transport clutch 1(CL3) ........... 196 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) ...3......... 199 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) ....................... 207 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14)....................................... 209 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) ...... 176 Original glass moving motor (M202) .....................3......................0 Feb...................................... 169 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General ADU transport motor/2 (M32)...3.Field Service Ver........................89 6...................................................... 215 Horizontal transport clutch 2 (CL4) ........................................... 193 K developing motor (M19) .............................. 171 Scanner motor (M201) ................. 195 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23) ..................................................................94 6... 170 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27) ..3................87 6.3................................... 198 Take-up motor (M22).3............ 181 Transport motor (M25) ..................................62 6..............................82 6....................60 6.................77 6........................... 188 Fusing motor (M30)...................... 208 Toner supply motor/Y (M9).....................................3.......................71 6...... 182 Vertical transport motor (M26) ...3.............85 6.......................3...88 6................76 6............................................................. toner supply motor/M (M10)...............3...3.3... 185 Registration motor (M2) ............................ 196 Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) ......79 6..... 213 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2) ...........3..............................................3......................96 ADU transport motor/1 (M31).............81 6......................................................................68 6....................3...........................78 6.........................................3........64 6.. 194 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6) . 202 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) .........65 6.............................................. 185 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3)............... 192 K PC drum motor (M18)........3...........70 6.............................67 6................3.............. 179 Waste toner agitating motor (M20)......................................................... 197 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) ....................74 6........ 200 Cleaner motor (M38) .................... 186 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29)...............................3.............. 215 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6)......93 6.......................................3............. 183 Transfer belt motor (M1).3................................3...........................72 6..................3.....91 6.........69 6.....................3.............. 216 v .......................80 6........................................ 191 Exit motor (M4) ........ 2007 6....................................86 6.3............................. 194 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8) ............... ....................................63 6................. toner supply motor/K (M12)..73 6.......................................... toner supply motor/C (M11).................................................................3.............................................................3.3........ 189 Switchback motor (M33) ................................................84 6........3... 207 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) ...3..........

................................4.................................................4............................................... 247 Lens ...........6 6..............................13 Adjustment / Setting 6...................................... 1...............4................................................ 267 vi ......................3................................3.......8 Maintenance 6...................................4........100 Tray 3/4 lift wire . 240 Tray 2 transport roller..................................................................4...3 6................. 251 6.......11 6............................3.. 244 Manual bypass tray feed roller ..................................4......... IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R)................................4........4............3......0 Feb.................................. 256 Utility Mode function tree .................................4....................................4.................................... 242 Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller ................................................................................................. 217 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F)......4..4....................4.......................... 240 Tray 2 separation roller .......... 246 Scanner rails........................................99 6.................................. 255 Utility Mode ...... 238 Transfer belt unit ...............5 6..............98 6.............................................................4 Cleaning procedure ............. 246 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) .................4............ 245 Original glass .4................................101 Fuse (F1) *USA only..............4............ 245 Manual bypass tray separation roller ......................................20 Troubleshooting 6..4...............................................................................................................4...................... 248 6.......4................ 8.. 237 6......................................... 241 Tray 3 separation roller ............................6.................................................3 How to use the adjustment section ................. 245 Intermediate transport roller . 247 CCD sensor ....................................... 8......................................................10 6................................ 249 Option counter.....14 6...... 220 6..........................................................................7 6.........................................2 General 6......................................................17 6................................................................................16 6.......................... 238 Tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller ....................................15 6...................................... 239 Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller .......................1 Adjustment/Setting Appendix 7......................................................6 Mount the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) ..........................3..................................................... 2007 6............ 218 Scanner drive cables ... 244 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller ...........9 6.......... 241 Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller ...........................................................................2 8.....................5 6................22 6.................................... 238 Tray 1 separation roller ..4.... 231 6..... 256 Touch Panel Adjustment...Field Service Ver.........................21 6.. 251 Installation method for the key counter .......................................................................97 bizhub C550 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7)......................1 8.........4.18 6........19 6................................................12 6.................. 239 Tray 1 transport roller.... 243 Tray 4 separation roller ....... 244 Tray 4 transport roller.................................4................4 6..............................................1 6.......... 257 Utility Mode function setting procedure .................................. 242 Tray 3 transport roller...........................

...3 8......................................... 267 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Exiting .........................3.............................6 8............................... 316 User Authentication/Account Track .6............................................................. 1....... 396 vii . 282 Printer Settings .......8 8.............................................................................4.1 8..5 8................................................6............................4................................. 397 Fusing Transport Speed..............................1 8.. 289 Adjustment item list ......5 8..................................................................9 8....4 10.............6................................2 Service Mode function tree.. 396 Fusing Temperature ...................................................2 8..3..................7 8......................................................5...................5 Date & Time Setting mode screen ............................1 10....................................................................... 270 Limiting Access to Destinations .....................................................1 Service Mode function setting procedure ................................................................................................... 10........2 8...................4.......... 395 Color Alignment Adjustment ..............6................................................ ...........6......................Field Service Ver................................................... 272 Administrator Settings................. 374 One-Touch User Box Registration ..... 321 Network Setting............................................................................5...... 373 Security Settings ................... 268 User Settings ...................................5 8.............5......4 8................................................. 2007 8..........................7 8..... 388 10...................3 10................3........................... 316 One-Touch/User Box Registration............................. 284 Change Password ........................... 267 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions..... 267 Create One-Touch destination .....................4 8..............6 8..............................................................................................................................................................4. 359 System Connection ..................... 388 10.....2 8.6 8.......5........10 9....................................... 288 System Settings ................. 268 Create User Box.................................6...................................2 8................................................................0 Feb.................................................................................................................................. Procedure .. 289 Administrator/Machine Settings .......2 10.. 272 Custom Display Settings ........4 8................................ 398 Org..........6............................3 8..........3 8........................................................................................................................................................................1 8.....................................................................................................................5..................4..................................................3 Date/Time Input mode ...................3 8. 399 10................................ 395 10................................... 398 Printer Area....................4............................................4.............1 8....................................6.............................................................. Size Detecting Sensor Adj...........4........................5............3.................................... 276 Copier Settings ......................................4 Machine ............1 10......... 358 Printer Settings .......................6........ 271 System Settings ....... 386 Service Mode .................................. 327 Copier Settings ...................... 278 Scan/Fax Settings ...................... 390 10................ 359 Fax Settings ...............................5................................... 288 Change E-mail Address ....................6...

.....3 10.............................. 413 Transfer Belt........................ 430 List of the CS Remote Care error code ..........................................................8...............7.................. 430 Detail on settings .........4 10..........Field Service Ver...................7 10................................. 410 10........................................................7..7.......................6...12 Dev...........................6.8 10...... 410 10.......11 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment.......................... 418 Thick Paper Density Adjustment...12 Lead Edge Erase Adjustment . 409 Skew adjustment.....................................14 Split Line Prior Detection .............................6.......... 416 Background Voltage Margin..... 408 Color Registration Adjustment ....................................... 417 Stabilizer ........................................................ 441 10.............. 413 10........................13 Thick Paper Mode....8 Adjustment / Setting 10................7..3 Gradation Adjust ........................................................ 424 Setup confirmation.. 421 10........... 421 Setting up the CS Remote Care ............ 418 Paper separation adjustment .8 10.......................6....................................................................... 412 10....4..........4.................................. 413 10...................11 Monochrome Density Adjustment.......4........................1 10.............................................................................................................................................................. 2007 10....... 429 Calling the center from the administrator.......2 Outlines...1 10................................. 441 Serial Number....................................6 Imaging Process Adjustment.. Bias Choice................................................................................................................................................................ 413 10.............. 404 Printer Resist Loop ......................................................8..................................................4 10............. 442 viii ...............10 LD adjustment........................................................................................................................4..............6...6 10........2 10.............................................................9 10........................................................8.......5 Firmware Version............... 440 10......4................3 Marketing Area .................................................................................. 421 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care..........................7................... 430 Checking the transmission log .....4........6 10..........6 bizhub C550 Scan Area .. 419 Maintenance 10............ 429 Calling the maintenance ...........................................7 CS Remote Care ..6................................................6....................10 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care ...................7.2 10.........7 10..................................7.........................5 10........................................... 420 10................6.................................9 Appendix 10...... 1.....1 10....................7...... 415 TCR Level Setting........................................................................................7...........7..........................................8 System 1 ...................................6........................................................5 10............................6........4..............6.................10 TCR Toner Supply ............................................................................................................................... 441 Tel/Fax Number...........4...............0 Feb............ 414 D Max Density ...................................................................6. 412 General 10............. 419 10....................... 436 Troubleshooting 10........................ 412 10...............7 10...................................................................4..................................9 10.. 416 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment .......................... 419 10.....................................................................................

.....................................................................................9 No Sleep ............................................................................................................. 454 10.................................................................................................9.....................................11 Data Capture................... 447 LCC Size Setting................9...............8 10. 2007 10.................................12 Split Line Detect................................. 454 10............................................................... 456 10.9... 443 Initialization ...................................................................................................... Setting.......................10............... 442 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General Foolscap Size Setting ................. 446 Option Board Status.......7 10........ 448 10.. 442 Original Size Detection ........................................9 Service Call History (Data) .....................................Field Service Ver............................9.....................................................9....8... 454 10..10...........10............10.............................................................................................................................. 448 10.....................4 10...............1 10...............................14 Network Fax Settings ..... 457 10......................................................................3 10.......................................................................................... 446 Consumable Life Reminder...............10. 445 10............... 457 10........8........................................2 10............10 Line Mag Setting ....................... 451 10............8................................5 Warning.....8.......................9 HDD .....0 Feb................8 Counter of Each Mode ..................... 444 10......................................................................... 447 Scan Caribration .........................................4 Service Call Counter .....4 10... 455 10.................................................................12 Fax Connection Error ............................................ 455 10.....................12 Post card transfer table ....................................................................... 445 Image Controller Setting ..................................... 456 10...............10..8.9...................10......................... 452 10................9..... 457 ix ..........................10........................... 445 10...... 447 Software Switch Setting ............7 Service Total ........................9...9...... 443 10...................................9 System 2..............................................9................10 ADF Paper Pages .................. 1.......11 Communication System Setting ..10...... 443 Charging CH cleaning ................................6 Maintenance ..8...............................10.....9......................................................................7 10.................................9.................10.................................8.... 455 10..................................................................................................................................3 Jam ...............................................................................................................9.............................................................................13 Stamp..........1 Procedure .....................2 Life .... 442 Install Date .............................. 446 Unit Change .................................... 453 10.............8......................... 456 10..............................................10..13 Split Line Counter .............................6 10............................................................................9.......................................................................10 Trouble Isolation .10 Counter .................5 10.....................5 10..................................................................... 456 10............... 445 10...........8......... 456 10.................................................8 10................................. 449 10.11 Paper Jam History......6 10.................... 447 LCT Paper Size Setting.10...........................................................................................................

8 Memory/HDD State .............................................. 2007 10............... 480 Troubleshooting 10.... 460 10................................................................2 Adjustment List .......................12.......................11.........................................12............1 Machine Management List. 461 10................3 Parameter List.........................11 List Output ............................................................................5 Temp........................................................................................... 1......................... 474 Maintenance 10..............................0 Feb.................11.......................................................................4 Level History 2 ............. & Humidity.............17.................................................................... 482 10..... 458 bizhub C550 10............................12......12...10 IU Lot No.................................................... 475 10..........................2 Gradation Pattern .................... 479 10................... 482 10.... 460 10..................... 479 10..........13 Test Mode ................................................................................1 Procedure for test pattern output ................... 482 10..17 Internet ISW ..................................................................................8 CMM pattern ............................................13......... 479 10...........3 Halftone Pattern.........................................................17............... 474 10.........................................................13.................................5 Solid Pattern ...........12................16 Finisher.................... 460 10..........2 HTTP Setting ................................14 Parts Counter (Fixed).........................................11 Adjustment Data List............. 478 Adjustment / Setting 10.4 Lattice Pattern........................................12..................................................................11............ 483 10........................................................................................4 Service Parameter .............................................................. 480 10..................................1 Sensor Check ........................13.................................................9 Color Regist ..........7 Fax Analysis List ..............12............ 481 10....................13...................................... 477 10................................. 474 10.......6 CCD Check............................1 Internet ISW Set ... 483 10....... 460 10...........5 Protocol Trace...........7 8 Color Solid Pattern..14 ADF .................................................... 460 10.................9 Running Mode ......................15 FAX........................ 460 10..... 478 10.........6 Fax Setting List .........................12 State Confirmation.................................................................................................................................................... 483 10.........7 Memory/HDD Adj................................ 483 10.........................................................................................................13. 460 General 10.........................12.........................................................11...................................12.. 483 10....Field Service Ver.....13...........................................6 Color Sample ................................12....... 483 Appendix x .................10 Fax Test .................................................................................... 475 10....11......... 461 10.................................................................................................................................................11.......10........................... 473 10...................................................................................................................11........................................13...............................................12..... 481 10.......... 483 10............................................................................................................................................................................ 460 10......................................................13.............................13.........................................3 Level History1 ...13........................................................ 478 10.......2 Table Number .............

..................1................................. 491 12......................... 492 Management Function Choice .... 503 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit ............................... 488 Administrator Feature Level .................3 Settings in the Enhanced Security.................... 489 CE Authentication .....3 FTP Setting ...............1...............................................2 Enhanced Security function tree........1....3...............................5 11................ 501 Scanner position adjustment........................1 Trouble resetting ..... 499 13........................ Mechanical adjustment ............................................................................................................................. 487 11...4 11.3 11.................................................................2 Mechanical adjustment of the paper feed section ..................................................... 489 NVRAM Data Backup........1 11..................................3................................. 487 11....................2 Procedure ......................2............5 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt ........... 505 Tray3/4 paper size change ... 490 Billing Setting ..... 491 Exiting ..1...............................1 12...........................................................................3....................................1 11..............................................1...............................6 11....................................1..............................................................5 Download .. CE Password........................................ 486 11...........................................2 11.1 Billing Setting function setting procedure.............................4 14.................1...........1...............................3 14........................ 491 12.............2 12.........................1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section..3................ 488 11............ 492 12.......1 xi ..................................3.......3.........3............................................. 498 Procedure for resetting....................2 14......0 Feb................... 506 14............................. 488 Administrator Password ........................... 490 Operation Ban release time ..........................3............... 500 14........................................1 12............... 500 14......................................................................................................................... 487 Exiting .. 490 Administrator unlocking................................................3........................................1... Enhanced Security ...............................................................................................................................................2 Contents to be cleared by reset function ..............................................................................................................................................1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure ......................................... 484 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 10........7 11......3 Settings in the Billing Setting ................. 506 14.. 493 Coverage Rate Clear ...............................................17......................... 487 11.............1 14......................................................................................................................................... 502 Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit ............................ 491 12....2 Procedure . 489 IU Life Stop Setting .........................................3....................................................................................................................................... 485 10.......................................................17............................ 487 11............................ 499 13..............................................3 13..Field Service Ver.................................................2 Billing Setting function tree ............ 1.............. 491 12.8 12................ 499 14............. 500 Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit ........................................................17.. 2007 10..............................4 Forwarding Access Setting ..3...................... Counter Setting ........

....... 512 Troubleshooting General 15........................................................ 535 P-8: Yellow imaging unit failure .................2....................................3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section ....... 510 PC drive gear positioning adjustment .....7 16...........4 16..........................................6 Maintenance Adjustment / Setting 15............3................................. 523 Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section ......Field Service Ver......................1............................3... 515 15........... 535 P-6: Cyan imaging unit failure.................13 Misfeed at duplex transport section . 534 D-2: Read guide trouble....................1 Misfeed display resetting procedure ................... 522 Misfeed at manual bypass feed section ..............................3 Alert code list ........................ 535 P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure............ 508 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit ....2 bizhub C550 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2....................................................................................................................1.........................3.............. 507 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4............... 512 14.1 Misfeed display ............ 529 15....................................12 Misfeed at exit section .................................... 531 16........................................... 2007 14... 520 Misfeed at tray 3 feed section ........ 532 S-1: CCD gain adjustment failure ...................................................................................3.. 525 Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section .......2 16........................................................10 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section ........................................... 517 15.................................0 Feb..................... 530 Troubleshooting 16..................................................................................................2........................................3....................................... 524 Misfeed at vertical transport section .................................2 Sensor layout..................................................................................... Malfunction code............... 534 P-5: IDC sensor (front) failure .....................3 15............3...2 15...................................................2................. 534 Appendix 16................1 14..................................................................................11 Misfeed at tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section.....5 16.........7 15...2....2.........................................8 xii ..................1 16....................3.........................................3.......................2........................3...................................................................4 15......................................................6 16.......................................3...........3............................................................................................4................2................................3..... 1......... 531 16................................ Jam display ...........2...... 527 15.................. 518 Misfeed at tray 1 feed section .......2 Solution .......................................3..................4 Mechanical adjustment of the main drive unit section ..2.......1 Alert code ............................... 515 15........................................................... 534 D-1: Split line detect......1 Initial check items .....1 14................3............................. 535 P-7: Magenta imaging unit failure ... 526 15...................... 521 Misfeed at tray 4 feed section .1 16............................ 519 Misfeed at tray 2 feed section .......... 518 15.9 15... 510 14...........3 14............................................... 516 15.....................3 Solution ........2............................. 535 16..5 15.. 528 15.......8 15.................................................................

......5....2. 570 C0105: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing........ 576 16...............5...16 P-31: PC home sensor (K) malfunction ..........................................14 P-22: Color regist adjust failure.......2....... 575 16........................................................ 575 16........5 Solution....................2......Field Service Ver...........5.9 C0104: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn ......................14 C2162: PC charge (Y) malfunction ........... 574 16.................................................. 1.. 576 16............................................................5......................................................................3....................................................25 C225A: K developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing ............................. 571 C0208: Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality......................5 16.................................1 Trouble code list .......... 2007 16..........5..... 572 C0301: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn .................10 C2151: Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation.......8 16.......5...........4 How to reset..................................... 574 16.......... 577 16...................................................................2...........................3 Trouble code ...5......... 570 C0204: Tray 2 feeder up/down abnormality........7 16.... 537 16....23 C2258: Cleaner motor’s turning at abnormal timing ........ 572 C0351: Paper cooling fan trouble.........5..26 C225B: K PC drum motor’s failure to turn...................... 575 16.2...........1 16..13 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure ........6 16.0 Feb........................................... 577 16......11 P-16: PC charge cleaning trouble 1 ........ 570 16.. 539 16.................4 16...........................10 P-14: Skew correction trouble ..........5............ 537 16..15 C2163: PC charge (K) malfunction ..........................5................2 16..............5........5.....2...............22 C2257: Cleaner motor’s failure to turn .5................................................................5.......................... 576 16..............2...............................................20 C2255: Color developing motor’s failure to turn ....................................................5.............5........................................... 570 C0202: Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality.........................3 16................................................13 C2161: PC charge (M) malfunction.......... 577 16..............5.................................. 578 xiii ...21 C2256: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing ................24 C2259: K developing motor’s failure to turn . 535 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 16......................5............ 573 C2101: PC charge cleaning malfunction.............5................5..12 P-18: PC charge cleaning trouble 2 .........................5.19 C2254: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing ........................5......................................................... 569 16... 536 16...........17 C2204: Waste toner agitating motor’s failure to turn ..................................................2.......9 P-9: Black imaging unit failure.........5.. 571 C0206: Tray 3 feeder up/down abnormality............ 538 16............... 575 16.................. 536 16...12 C2160: PC charge (C) malfunction ......... 575 16..18 C2253: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn . 536 16.16 C2164: PC charge malfunction .............................15 P-27: Secondary transfer ATVC failure ...................................................................11 C2152: Transfer belt pressure welding alienation ................5.................... 539 16......... 575 16. 573 16............................................................ 577 16............... 537 16..5............................... 576 16........5......

.................38 C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor......5......... 585 16...................................................35 C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor . 587 16....... 587 16....................................5...........60 C3305: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 3 failure to turn ....Field Service Ver..........43 C255B: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure ......62 C3424: Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side) ......5.. 579 16.....................63 C3425: Fusing heaters trouble (NC sensor) .......56 C3201: Fusing motor failure to turn ......5............................. 583 16............5...................5.............................5..............29 C2352: Color toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn............................28 C2351: K toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn........................................................................................30 C2353: IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn.......................... 581 16.5......5.42 C255A: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure ..........53 C2A04: EEPROM access error (TC K) ....... 585 16......27 C225C: K PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing.. 585 16...5.........39 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor ....46 C2651: EEPROM access error (IU C) ................... 583 Maintenance 16..............5..............5....... 580 16................................. 583 16........ 578 16.....5....... 578 bizhub C550 16... 581 General 16....32 C2451: Release new transfer belt unit............5... 588 16....................5......44 C255C: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure .5..................51 C2A02: EEPROM access error (TC M) .............................58 C3303: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 1 failure to turn ......5......5.....5............37 C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor.......................................... 2007 16.................................5............................................0 Feb.......... 584 Adjustment / Setting 16...... 589 16..................31 C2354: Rear side cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ..... 586 16..................... 579 16...... 582 16...................... 588 Appendix 16.........................5.............................................5....................54 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure ........59 C3304: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 2 failure to turn ..48 C2653: EEPROM access error (IU Y) ....45 C2650: Main backup media access error ...5.......... 584 16.........5..........................5.....57 C3202: Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing ......36 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor . 580 16...5.. 581 16.....33 C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor.... 589 xiv ......5...... 582 16............5............................... 585 16......... 587 16......61 C3423: Fusing heaters trouble (pressurizing side) .......... 585 16..............5.................. 585 16...............55 C3102: Fusing roller failure to turn .5..................5................... 582 16......................... 589 16..................... 586 16.......................................50 C2A01: EEPROM access error (TC C)......41 C2559: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure .5..................34 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor .40 C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor ...........5.47 C2652: EEPROM access error (IU M) .......49 C2654: EEPROM access error (IU K) . 1........5.5. 583 16...............5. 585 Troubleshooting 16..5. 585 16.52 C2A03: EEPROM access error (TC Y) ....... 582 16......

..................88 C5305: IH cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn .......65 C3721: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Center of the heating roller) ........................................Field Service Ver............5................. 592 16..96 C6704: Image input time out....................5........5...................69 C3724: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side)............ 597 16......5...........................................89 C5306: IH cooling fan motor/3’s failure to turn .78 C3924: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (soaking side) ............... 594 16..........71 C3825: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC sensor) ....................................................... 590 16.... 593 16......... 591 16...............5...92 C5370: MFP control board cooling fan motor’s failure to turn ....................5...... 591 16.. 600 16....... 596 16........70 C3822: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) ....5........... 600 xv ................................................5.. 599 16................... 593 16...........72 C3823: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (pressurizing side)592 16.....................5...............79 C3B02: IH malfunction (CPU) .....95 C6301: Optical cooling fan motor’s failure to turn .76 C3925: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (NC sensor) .........5.......................... 1.....85 C5104: Transfer belt motor’s failure to turn ............. 599 16.................................................. 591 16................................. 595 16.................. 599 16..................5....................................................................................5..83 C4301: PH cooling fan motor failure to turn ......93 C6102: Drive system home sensor malfunction... 596 16.............5..........5...............68 C3723: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (pressurizing side) .................... 593 16......................5......87 C5304: IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn .......... 590 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 16.......97 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure ........... 595 16.................... 594 16. 590 16..............................0 Feb........................ 598 16..........84 C4501: Laser malfunction ........5............5.......5. 591 16...........5....5....................................5.........81 C3B04: IH malfunction ....66 C3722: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) ................86 C5105: Transfer belt motor’s turning at abnormal timing ............64 C3461: Release new fusing unit ................................... 593 16..............5..........................5... 590 16........5............77 C3923: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (pressurizing side) .. 592 16...............5...............................5.....................91 C5354: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn ..................75 C3922: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Edge of the heating roller) 592 16.....5...94 C6103: Slider over running ...........................5.73 C3824: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking side) .......80 C3B03: IH malfunction (monitor)........90 C5351: Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn ...............................5...................... 593 16..........67 C3725: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC sensor)............5...................5................................................................................... 598 16... 592 16...........................74 C3921: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Center of the heating roller) .............5........82 C4101: Polygon motor rotation trouble....5.......... 2007 16....5. 595 16........... 597 16.

.........122 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error...............107 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) ..............103 CA053: Controller start failure ................ 605 16........116 CD009: Hard disk error 5....... 604 16........ 602 16..........5. 604 Maintenance 16....... 604 16..5........ 601 16.5..... 602 16......................................5................99 C9401: Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection.......................5..5.............133 CD242: Encryption board mounting error ..... 602 16................ 602 16........................... 606 xvi ............ 604 16.0 Feb.............5................................................. 606 16..........................115 CD008: Hard disk error 4. 2007 16.......................... 602 16.............................................. 606 16..................5........ 604 16................................................... 605 Appendix 16..................112 CD005: Hard disk error 1...119 CD00C: Hard disk error 8 ........ 604 16.............................111 CD004: Hard disk access error...............5................................................ 602 General 16.......5............125 CD011: Hard disk out of specifications mounted...............................104 CC001: Vendor connection failure ....... 602 16.................................5........5............106 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) .................................5... 604 16........................................... 604 16.............................113 CD006: Hard disk error 2.......... 605 16................108 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT)..........5..........................................5....... 605 16.134 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting .....5.................................................................120 CD00D: Hard disk error 9 ..117 CD00A: Hard disk error 6 ..................................................98 C6F01: Scanner sequence trouble 1 ...........................................118 CD00B: Hard disk error 7 ....5....................123 CD020: Hard disk verify error ....................101 CA051: Standard controller configuration failure .............129 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure.........5........... 604 16......114 CD007: Hard disk error 3........................132 CD241: Encryption board setting error ....5... 606 16..............................5.........105 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC).................... 601 16........ 604 16..5...............5..................................................102 CA052: Controller hardware error......127 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy ...............124 CD010: Hard disk unformat .5.................................... 605 16................................................................. 604 16...........126 CD201: File memory mounting error ..5....5..............................5..............................5....................................... 604 16.. 603 16................................................................130 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection........................5.............. 605 16.....5.........................................121 CD00E: Hard disk error A ...............................Field Service Ver........................... 604 Adjustment / Setting 16...........128 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 ..........5...................... 603 16......................5.......................................................................................5.................................5........5. 601 bizhub C550 16................................................................109 CC164: ROM contents error (MSC)........... 1......5.....5..........110 CD002: JOB RAM save error...100 C9402: Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection....... 604 Troubleshooting 16....131 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting ......5........... 603 16.........

.......... 607 16...................................135 CD401: NACK command incorrect ...............................1 18.............................1................................................................. 612 17...............2 18....................................144 CE004: Event error ...................................... 620 xvii .......................................................5.....................1 How to read element date.....5................... LU-301 ............. 607 16...........................2 Control panel indicators do not light..............................................................................................................5.......................................... 611 17................ 610 17.............5................................ 607 16... 618 Scanner system: white lines in sub scan direction......................................................2 18..........5............. 612 17............................ 607 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 16..3 Fusing heaters do not operate.............................................................................. and colored bands in sub scan direction ......................140 CD406: ACK receiving timeout ... 607 16................................151 CEEE2: Scanner section undefined malfunction ..............5................145 CE005: Memory access error ..................................5........ 609 16......143 CE003: Task error ..3 Solution.. white bands in sub scan direction....................................................................1 17...................................5...............................5................................................ 607 16.. 615 Level history 1 .........146 CE006: Header access error ..........................5................................. 607 16...........................................1 18.....................................................................136 CD402: ACK command incorrect ......................5 Power is not supplied to option ...........................5........... 618 18....................................1...........5......149 CE002: Message and method parameter failure ....................5........................................................137 CD403: Checksum error ....................................138 CD404: Receiving packet incorrect...... 608 16...................................................................... 611 17................. 614 18.... 607 16........... 613 Image quality problem ..... 611 17...............5..................150 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring .......................5......................................................................................... 614 18.......................5...2.....................1 Machine is not energized at all (DCPU operation check) ..................... 1..............................3 18........... 609 16.........................................147 CE007: DIMM initialize error .1..5...........148 CD3##: NVRAM data error ......................... 607 16....................................3......5................................. 607 16..............................5.................0 Feb......... colored lines in sub scan direction............................4 Power is not supplied to DF-611........................ 616 Level history 2 . 612 Finisher ........................... 607 16... 2007 16...... Power supply trouble ...... ...........1 Table number ......................... 607 16.............................2 How to identify problematic part ............................................152 CEEE3: Engine section undefined malfunction ..........................139 CD405: Receiving packet analysis error ....141 CD407: Retransmission timeout ................................................ 607 16........................ 609 16....................................... 617 Initial check items................ 612 17....... 620 18.....142 CE001: Abnormal message queue ....................5..............................................Field Service Ver..................................

.......................... 644 18......................3....3.......8 18. 651 18.............3 18.........11 Scanner system: defective ACS... blotchy image .......3..............3.......................................... 645 Troubleshooting 18.. 648 18....................................... and colored bands in main scan direction...... 622 Scanner system: color spots... and colored bands in main scan direction................. 625 Scanner system: incorrect color image registration.......3.....9 18.................. 631 18........................3..... 639 18..............................7 General 18.............................. 629 18...........3........... colored lines in sub scan direction.............................................6 18.... colored lines colored bands in sub scan direction...............3... 652 18.................................................... 649 18....................................................... 623 Scanner system: fog ............... 633 18...................3.. white bands in sub scan direction............ and colored bands in sub scan direction ......... white bands in main scan direction...... 647 18. 628 Scanner system: distorted image .................4 18...... sync shift (lines in main scan direction) ............18 Printer monocolor: uneven density in main scan direction ............ 635 18...21 Printer monocolor: foggy background ....................28 Printer 4-color: white lines in main scan direction....3.......23 Printer monocolor: colored spots........ 2007 18... 641 18. 1...3................................................................3..............3.... white spots......... white bands in main scan direction.....3.......30 Printer 4-color: uneven density in main scan direction ....... colored lines in main scan direction.......31 Printer 4-color: low image density . 636 Adjustment / Setting 18...................29 Printer 4-color: uneven density in sub scan direction .....2 bizhub C550 Scanner system: white lines in main scan direction...........................................................Field Service Ver................12 Scanner system: blank copy.. colored lines in main scan direction........... 637 18.....3.......................... 638 18. 642 18............. rough image...................5 18......3.......... white bands in sub scan direction. 653 Appendix xviii .... 627 Scanner system: skewed image .......14 Scanner system: uneven density ..................................................................16 Printer monocolor: white lines in main scan direction..........................................3..20 Printer monocolor: gradation reproduction failure.3.............0 Feb.....3.........3....................... 626 Scanner system: moire ........ 646 18..............3...... colored lines in main scan direction........................... 634 18..........13 Scanner system: abnormal image ...................................3........................................................3............3........................................3.......3............25 Printer monocolor: blank copy..............................10 Scanner system: low image density...............................27 Printer 4-color: white lines in sub scan direction........ white bands in main scan direction.3..................3.......3.. 650 18...................22 Printer monocolor: void areas.............................................24 Printer monocolor: blurred image .19 Printer monocolor: low image density... 632 Maintenance 18........................ black copy.. 624 Scanner system: blurred image................................ colored bands in main scan direction....26 Printer monocolor: uneven image................... 630 18...............................3...................................................................17 Printer monocolor: uneven density in sub scan direction ......................................15 Printer monocolor: white lines in sub scan direction........ black copy........

.......1..................................................5 19.........32 Printer 4-color: poor color reproduction ........................................................................................................................3 19...39 Printer 4-color: uneven image ..... 656 18....... 693 xix .................................. 675 19.. 661 Appendix 19............................................................................................................................................. blurred image..... 657 18.. 655 18................3.......................... 658 18............................. 684 Timing chart .................................. 673 Tray4 ..35 Printer 4-color: colored spots .................................................................1 21......................................................................1 Main body .. 2007 18..............3....................... 670 Tray1 ..........1...........................................................................................1..............................1 Main body ..................................4 19................... 1.......33 Printer 4-color: incorrect color image registration ........................................................................................................................................................................................................................................................... 654 bizhub C550 Appendix Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General 18.........38 Printer 4-color: back marking .....................2 1-sided mode ....... offset...............................1....................................... 663 19.........................................................34 Printer 4-color: void areas..................................2............................. 683 20................................................................... 692 2-sided mode .4 OT-503 (option) ................ 677 19......................5 FS-517/608 (option)................................................3. 659 18............... 664 Bypass tray section ..... 674 19....0 Feb..............1...........36 Printer 4-color: poor fusing performance......... 679 19..............3 LU-301 (option)............................. 692 21.........................6 19.............................................................................1................................................... 691 21.3......................................2... white spots .....................6 PK-511 (option).................................................................3...........3........... 672 Tray3 ............ 691 21.................... 21............................................1 19...........3.....................................................................37 Printer 4-color: brush effect...................... Parts layout drawing ....................... 663 Engine section ............................................................. 660 18...........................................................2 DF-611...............................................1......2 DF-611...... Connector layout drawing...... 678 19............2 19...............................................Field Service Ver...3.............................................................. 671 Tray2 . 663 19..........................................7 IR section ...

Appendix bizhub C550 Troubleshooting Adjustment / Setting Maintenance General xx Blank Page Field Service Ver.0 Feb. 1. 2007 .

System configuration [8] 1/2 System front view [9] [2] [1] [7] [8] [4] [3] [5] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] Main body Authentication Unit (Biometric Type) AU-101 Working table WT-502 Fax multi line ML-501 Large capacity unit LU-301 [6] [7] [8] [9] Finisher FS-517 Finisher FS-608 Punch kit PK-512/513 Output tray OT-503 A00JF1C501DA 1 General bizhub C550 . System configuration General 1.0 Feb. 1. 2007 1.Field Service Ver.

1. 2007 [2] [1] [8] [7] [3] [6] General [4] [5] A00JF1E503DA [1] [2] [3] [4] Main body Stamp unit SP-501 Fax kit FK-502 Security kit SC-503 [5] [6] [7] [8] Scan accelerator kit SA-501 Local interface kit EK-602 Vendor kit VK-501 Key counter kit KIT-1 2 .0 Feb. 1. System configuration 2/2 System rear view bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.

and bias system tem Fusing system Heating system Belt IH fusing system Heating: IH heating. HMT developing system DC comb electrode scorotron system with electrode cleaning function Red LED system Exposure system Exposure density Developing system Charging system Neutralizing system Image transfer system Belt image transfer system (1st)/roller image transfer system (2nd) Paper separating sysCombination of curvature. separating claws.0 Feb. Type Copying system Printing process PC drum type Scanning density Exposure lamp Platen Original scanning Registration Paper feeding separation system Mirror scanning CCD optical system * Sheet through system when DF-611 is used Rear left edge Manual bypass : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism Tray 1 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism Tray 2 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism Tray 3 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism Tray 4 : Roller separation system with pick-up mechanism 1 polygon 2 beam x 4 LD exposure and polygon mirror scan system Equivalent to 1800 dpi in main scanning direction × 600 dpi in sub scanning direction Dry 2 components developing method. Soaking: Halogen lamp 3 General Stationary (mirror scan) bizhub C550 . Product specifications 2. 2007 2.Field Service Ver. Type Product specifications Combination scanner and printer console type Electrostatic dry-powdered image transfer to plain paper Laser electrostatic printing system OPC drum: KM-12 (OPC with high mold releasability) 600 dpi White rare-gas fluorescent lamp 30 W A. 1.

Thick 3. x1. x2. Functions bizhub C550 Types of original Max. 16K. Product specifications B.001 increments A3 Wide. and three-dimensional objects A3 or 11 x 17 Max. or less 264.00 mm/s 132.000 x1.000 Metric area Inch area Metric area Inch area Metric area Inch area Metric area Tray 1/Tray 2 Tray 3/Tray 4 Manual bypass tray Copy exit tray capacity Plain paper (When OT-503 is Thick paper mounted) OHP transparencies Inch area x0. 8 x 13 *1.294.500.224. 8K. or less (When the sub power switch is turned (at ambient temperature of 23° C/73.214.414. x0. A3 to A5S. or less (main power switch is turned ON) Leading edge: 4. x1. Thick 4.707. books.545. x0.154. A3 to B6S.866 x0.2. 8 1/2 x 11.785 x1.00 mm/s General Image loss First copy time Thick 2. 16K.250 to ×4. Rear edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch). Front edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch) (Tray1/2 A4 or 8 1/2 x 11.816. 16K. x2. A6S. A6S. post card 11 x 17 to 8 1/2 x 11. x0.5 sec. x0. 2007 Sheets.000 A4.00 mm/s 216. 1. Envelope. Thick 1+ 4. x1. or less 6. x0. OHP.647. 8K. 12 1/4 x 18 Enlargement Zoom ratios memory Variable zoom ratios Paper size ×0. A5.00 mm/s card.3 sec.2 mm (3/16 inch). 2-sided: 45 copies/min x1. original weight Multiple copies Field Service Ver.000 3 memories in 0.733. postcard S Metric area Inch area 250 sheets 10 sheets 1 sheet A3 wide. 12 1/4 x 18 4 . plain Color print paper) Fixed zoom ratios Full size Reduction 1-sided: 55 copies/min. 2-sided: 55 copies/min 1-sided: 45 copies/min.500. Trailing edge: 3 mm (1/8 inch).0 Feb. B5.4° F and ON during the main power switch being ON) rated source voltage) 85 sec. postcard 11 x 17 to 5 1/2 x 8 1/2. Label sheet Copying speed for Monochrome print multi-copy cycle (A4 or 8 1/2 x 11. full size) Monochrome print Color print Processing speed Plain paper monochrome Plain paper/full color Thick 1. x0. original size Max. 5 1/2 x 8 1/2. Post 108. 2 kg 1 to 9999 Warm-up time 30 sec. 8 x 13 *1. x1.

75 to 68 lb) Thick paper 4 *2 (257 to 300 g/m2 / 68. 16K. curled paper.2 mm 5 1/2 to 18 inch *1: Excluding stabilized paper. and recycled paper. 2007 C. 5 1/2 x 8 1/2. 1.0 to 457.25 to 80 lb) Postcards Envelopes Labels Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 Multiple bypass ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍ (500 sheets) (500 sheets) (1500 sheets) (1000 sheets) (150 sheets) – – – – – – – – – ❍ (20 sheets) *3 ❍ (100 sheets) ❍ (80 sheets) ❍ (70 sheets) ❍ (60 sheets) ❍ (50 sheets) ❍ (50 sheets) ❍ (10 sheets) ❍ (50 sheets) 90 to 311.25 to 32 lb) Thick paper 1+ *1 (121 to 157 g/m2 / 32 to 41.Field Service Ver. Automatic duplex unit : Only the plain paper weighing 64 to 90 g/m2 (17 to 24 lb) or thick paper weighing 91 to 256 g/m2 (24. 8 1/2 x 11.7 to 457. Product specifications Paper source (maximum tray capacity) Type Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2 / 17 to 24 lb) Translucent paper OHP transparencies (crosswise feeding only) Thick paper 1 *1 (91 to 120 g/m2 / 24.1 mm 5 1/2 to 12 1/2 inch Length 182.75 lb) Paper type Thick paper 2 *1 (158 to 209 g/m2 / 42 to 55. Paper 2. A5.5 lb) Thick paper 3 *2 (210 to 256 g/m2 / 55.25 to 68 lb) are reliably fed. *3: Monochrome print only.2 mm 7 1/4 to 18 inch A4.0 Feb.7 to 311. postcard S 139. *2: Image is not guaranteed when thick paper 3/4 is used. 5 General bizhub C550 .1 mm 3 1/2 to 12 1/4 inch ❍ ❍ ❍ (400 sheets) (400 sheets) (1150 sheets) ❍ ❍ (280 sheets) (280 sheets) ❍ ❍ (250 sheets) (250 sheets) ❍ ❍ (200 sheets) (200 sheets) ❍ (800 sheets) ❍ (750 sheets) ❍ (500 sheets) ❍ (700 sheets) ❍ (450 sheets) ❍ (600 sheets) ❍ (400 sheets) – – – ❍ (200 sheets) – ❍ (200 sheets) – – – – – – – – – – Copy paper dimensions Width 139. B5.

483 mm (D) *3 93.000 W or less Dimensions Space requirements Weight Machine IU and TC 650 *2 (W) x 777 (H) x 1.5 inch (H) 2. Y. Maintenance bizhub C550 Machine durability No. K 5% K 5% General E. Operating environment Temperature Humidity Levelness 10 to 30 °C / 50 to 86° F (with a fluctuation of 10° C / 18° F or less per hour) 15 to 85% (Relative humidity with a fluctuation of 10%/h) Difference between front and back.000 prints 5 pages/job 6 pages/job C. F. whichever is earlier 5. right and left should be 1 degree or under. 120 V. 1.2.650 W or less 1. 190. of pages printed per month (average) Standard copy mode Standard original density Color print Monochrome print Color print Monochrome print Color print Monochrome print Field Service Ver. Machine specifications Power requirements Voltage: Current: AC 100 V. 6 . 220-240 V 100 V 110 V 120 V 127 V 230 V Frequency: Max power consumption 15 A 15 A 16 A 16 A 10 A 50 to 60 Hz ± 3 Hz 100 V 110 V 120 V 127 V 230 V 1.155 mm (H) 25.500. 2007 2.0 (W) x 58.000 prints or 5 years. 127 V.0 Feb.25 inch (D) *3 Approx. 14.5 kg / 32.360 (W) x 1. and the upper right door is open. Product specifications D.5 (D) x 45.0 lb (without IU and TC) Approx. the paper feed tray is slid to the maximum.0 lb *2: Width when the manual bypass tray is closed *3: Space requirements are the values when the finisher is slid to the maximum.0 kg / 419. M.920 W or less 2.000 prints 20.500 W or less 1.000 W or less 2.5 *2 (W) x 30.

1. Print functions Type RAM HDD Interface Frame type Supported protocols Built-in printer controller 1.2 or later/Mac OS X 10. 7 General bizhub C550 . 2007 G. 2-sided: 55 ppm 1-sided: 45 ppm. Scan to SMB. Ethernet II. 10.0 (SP6a) Mac OS 9. Apple Talk (EtherTalk) 1-sided: 55 ppm. plain Color print paper) Printer language PCL5e/c Emulation PCL6 (XL Ver. Scan functions Driver Compatible operating systems Scan speed (A4 or 8 1/2 x 11) / DF-611 Scannable range Functions Resolution KONICA MINOLTA scanner driver Windows 2000. Ethernet SNAP TCP/IP.3. 2.2.3. Macintosh (PowerPC/Intel processor) Server Windows NT4.Field Service Ver. Ethernet 802.0 (SP6a)/2000/2003 Windows 2000/XP Windows NT4. 2-sided: 45 ppm Print speed Monochrome print (A4 or 8 1/2 x 11.2. A3) Scan to E-mail. Scan to FTP.1) Emulation PostScript 3 Emulation (3011) Equivalent to 1800 dpi in main scanning direction × 600 dpi in sub scanning direction PCL Latin 80 Fonts Postscript 3 Emulation Latin 137 Fonts IBM PC/AT compatible machine.024 MB (shared with the main body) 60 GB (shared with the main body) Standard Option 2. 10. NETBEUI.0/1.0 Ethernet 802. Windows XP/XP 64bit Edition Monochrome 70 pages/min Full color Same as the copier (Max. Product specifications Ethernet (1000Base-T/100Base-TX/10Base-T) USB2.4 Print resolution Printer fonts Supported computer Supported operating systems Client H.0 Feb.1 USB 2. IPX/SPX. Scan to BOX 200/300/400/600 dpi NOTE • These specifications are subject to change without notice.

2007 General bizhub C550 Blank Page 8 . 1. Product specifications Field Service Ver.0 Feb.2.

000-print No.Field Service Ver. 3. 1.000 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 9 bizhub C550 .1.1 3.000 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 300. LU-301 Guarantee period: Conforms to the guarantee period of the main body 10 20 30 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 135 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 225 230 240 Service item 300.1. Periodical check Maintenance 3.000-print No.1 Periodical check Service schedule Main body Guarantee period: 5-year or 2.000 ● 300.500. of times 8 B.000 ● ● ● ● ● 450.2 DF-611 Maintenance Guarantee period: 5-year or 1.200.000-print ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● No.000 200. of times 23 5 3. of times 24 16 8 5 Upon ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● each call ● (100.000 3.1.000) ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● 150.3 Options A. 2007 3.000 originals feed 100 105 110 115 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 Service item 50.000 prints 10 15 20 30 40 45 50 60 70 75 80 90 100 105 110 120 130 135 140 150 160 165 170 180 190 195 200 210 220 225 230 240 Service item x 10.000 x 10. PK-512/513 Guarantee period: Conforms to the guarantee period of the main body 10 20 30 40 45 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 135 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 225 230 240 Service item x 10.000 x 10.0 Feb.000-print 5 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● No. FS-517/608.000) ● ● 200. of times 24 12 8 Upon each call ● ● ● ● (100.

B.1 Main body A. Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 150. 1. see [Unit Change] on “Adjustment/Setting. For details of setting. 3.000 When TC (Y.0 Feb. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall Image transfer Around waste toner port section Duplex section Duplex transport roller C.000) ● ● ● ● ● *1 *1 *1. Maintenance call (per 100. 1 2 3 Processing section Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Color toner filter Qt.000-print) No. Parts to be replaced by users (CRU) No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Processing sections Class Parts to be replaced Imaging unit Y/M/C Electrostatic charger wire Y/M/C PH window Y/M/C/K Toner cartridge Y/M/C Toner cartridge K Image transfer Waste toner box section Cycle 100.2 bizhub C550 Maintenance items NOTE • Cleaning/replacement cycle for each maintenance item of main body/options can be evaluated with each life counter value of [Service mode] → [Counter] → [Life].000-print) No.3. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Conveyance section Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Timing roller Paper dust remover Qt.C) is replaced When TC is replaced 27.2.447 *2: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.M.” See P. ⎯ ⎯ 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall 10 .2 Clean Replace ● Descriptions *1 Maintenance *1: The parts can be replaced either by user or service engineer. Periodical check Field Service Ver.000 (57.000 45. 2007 3.

2007 D. bizhub C550 . 1. Maintenance call (per 50.000-original feed) No. Periodical parts replacement 3 (per 450.000-print) No. ⎯ ⎯ 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. 1 2 Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Manual bypass Pick-up roller tray Feed roller Tray 1 Separation roller assy Tray 2 Pick-up roller 4 Tray 3 Tray 4 Feed roller Separation roller 5 6 7 Fusing section Fusing unit Processing section Imaging unit /K Ozone filter Qt.2.2 DF-611 A. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall 11 Maintenance *1: Replace those three parts at the same time. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Conveyance section Scanning section Paper feed section Paper feed section Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Roller and rolls Scanning guide Reflective sensor section Qt.Field Service Ver. Periodical check Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall 3 *1 *1 E. Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 300.0 Feb.000-print) No. ⎯ ⎯ 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions Overall Image transfer Transfer belt unit section 3. 1 2 3 4 Conveyance section Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Transfer roller unit Qt.

⎯ ⎯ 2 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 Lubrication Descriptions Overall *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.000-original feed) bizhub C550 No. 12 . 1 2 3 4 5 Paper feed section Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Qt. Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 200. 3. ⎯ ⎯ 1 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● *1 Lubrication Descriptions Maintenance 1 2 3 4 5 Overall *1: Replace those three parts at the same time.3. Periodical check Field Service Ver. 2007 B. Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Pick-up roller Paper feed section Feed roller Separation roller Qt.3 LU-301 A. Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 300.2.000-print) No.0 Feb. 1.

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 3.2.4 FS-517/608

3. Periodical check

No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Class

Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance

Qt. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 10 4

Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

Lubrication

Descriptions

Overall

Conveyance section

Conveyance roller Swing belt /Up

FS-517 only

Folding section Folding roller Horizontal conveyance Horizontal transport roller section Main drive unit Main tray section Drive section Shift drive unit Paper exit drive section Staple section Paper exit roller Intermediate conveyance roller

(●) (●) (●) (●) (●)

Paper exit 12 section 13 Conveyance section

B. Periodical parts replacement 1 (per 200,000-print)
No. 1 2 3 4 Conveyance section Staple section Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Paper assist roller Stapler unit (FS-608 only) Qt. ⎯ ⎯ 1 2 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions

Overall

C. Periodical parts replacement 2 (per 300,000-print)
No. 1 2 3 Staple section 4 Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Stapler unit/ Fr (FS-517 only) Stapler unit/ Rr (FS-517 only) Qt. ⎯ ⎯ 1 1 Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions

Overall

13

Maintenance

bizhub C550

A. Maintenance call (per 100,000-print)

3. Periodical check 3.2.5
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

PK-512/513

A. Maintenance call (per 100,000-print)
No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Punch unit main body Punch scraps collection section Exterior section Class Parts to be replaced Paper feed and image conditions Appearance Punch edge Punch scraps box Punch scraps full sensor Exterior parts Qt. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Check Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● ● Lubrication Descriptions

Overall

Maintenance

14

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3. Periodical check

3.3
3.3.1

CMS corresponding parts
CMS corresponding parts
bizhub C550 Maintenance

• “CMS” stands for “customer maintenance support,” and this is applicable when the user wants to change parts by himself. 3.3.2
No 1 2 3 4 5 6 Image transfer section Processing section

CMS corresponding parts list
Section Corresponding parts Imaging unit K Color toner filter Ozone filter Transfer belt unit Cycle 300,000 150,000 300,000 450,000 450,000 300,000 Clean Replace ● ● ● ● ● ● Ref. page P.42 P.46 P.45 P.48 P.52 P.53

Transport section Transfer roller unit Fusing section Fusing unit

3.3.3

Replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set

• There are six types of parts correspond to CMS, but parts should be replaced as a set of two parts listed below (3 patterns) for conducting CMS. Pattern 1: Imaging unit K + Color toner filter Pattern 2: Fusing unit + Ozone filter Pattern 3: Transfer belt unit + Transfer roller unit * Below are the reasons for replacing CMS corresponding parts as a set. • CMS corresponding parts are prepared as a kit according to the patterns listed above. • Life counter cannot be reset by the user even if the color toner filter, the ozone filter, or the transfer roller unit is changed by itself.

15

3. Periodical check

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3.4
bizhub C550

Maintenance parts

• To ensure that the machine produces good copies and to extend its service life, it is recommended that the maintenance jobs described in this schedule be carried out as instructed. • Replace with reference to the numeric values displayed on the Life counter. • Maintenance conditions are based on the case of A4 or 8 1/2 x 11, standard mode and low power mode OFF.
* Standard mode Color 5 pages per job B/W 6 pages per job

3.4.1

Replacement parts

A. Main body
No. Classification 1 2 Tray 1 Parts name Feed roller Separation roller assy Pick-up roller Feed roller Tray 2 Separation roller assy Pick-up roller Feed roller Tray 3 Separation roller Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Pick-up roller Feed roller Manual bypass tray Separation roller assy Pick-up roller Transfer roller unit Fusing unit Imaging unit Y/M/C Imaging unit K Ozone filter Toner cartridge Y/M/C Toner cartridge K Color toner filter Qt. 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 300,000 450,000 300,000 100,000 300,000 300,000 27,000 45,000 150,000 450,000 (57,000) Parts No. A00J 5636 ## A00J A566 ## *2 A00J 5636 ## A00J 5636 ## A00J A566 ## *2 A00J 5636 ## A00J 5636 ## A00J 5636 ## *2 A00J 5636 ## A00J 5636 ## A00J 5636 ## *2 A00J 5636 ## A00J 5636 ## A00J A666 ## *2 A00J 5636 ## A00J R715 ## A00J R721 ## *3, *5 A00J R722 ## *4, *5 ⎯ ⎯ A00J R731 ## ⎯ ⎯ A00J R700 ## A00J R714 ## A0AT WY0 *6 Descrip Ref. tions page P.25 P.27 P.25 P.28 P.31 P.28 P.32 P.33 P.32 P.35 P.36 P.35 P.38 P.40 P.38 P.52 P.53 P.42 P.45 P.46 P.46 P.48 P.41

Maintenance

3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Tray 4 12 13 14 15 Conveyance 16 section 17 18 19 20 Processing 21 section 22 23 Fusing section

24 Image trans- Transfer belt unit 25 fer section Waste toner box

*1: Actual durable cycle is the life counter value. *2: Replace those three parts at the same time. *3: 110 V to 120 V areas only. *4: 220-240 V areas only.

16

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3. Periodical check

B. DF-611
No. Classification 1 2 3 DF-611 Parts name Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Qt. 2 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 200,000 200,000 200,000 Parts No. 9J07 3301 ## 4030 3005 ## *2 9J07 3409 ## *3 Descrip tions Ref. Page

*1: Actual durable cycle is the life counter value. *2: Replace those three parts at the same time. *3: See DF-611 service manual. C. Option
No. Classification 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FS-517 FS-608 LU-301 Parts name Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Paper exit roller Intermediate conveyance roller Paper assist roller Stapler unit (FS-608 only) Stapler unit/ Fr (FS-517 only) Stapler unit/ Rr (FS-517 only) Qt. 1 1 1 10 4 1 2 1 1 Actual durable cycle *1 300,000 300,000 300,000 100,000 100,000 200,000 200,000 300,000 300,000 Parts No. A00J 5636 ## A00J 5636 ## *2 A00J 5636 ## 122H 4825 13QE 4531 20AK 4210 15JM-5011 A07RA7350 A07RA7360 *3 Descrip tions Ref. Page

*1: Actual durable cycle is the life counter value. *2: Replace those three parts at the same time. *3: See each option service manual.

17

Maintenance

bizhub C550

*5: This part number include the ozone filter. *6: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.

3. Periodical check 3.4.2
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

Cleaning parts
Parts name Electrostatic charger wire PH window Timing roller Paper dust remover Actual cleaning cycle *1 When toner cartridge C/M/Y is replaced When toner cartridge is replaced Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 50,000 Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) Upon each call (100,000) FS-517 only ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ *1 Descriptions Ref.Page P.21 P.21 P.22 P.23 P.24 P.24

No. Classification 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 DF-611 11

Processing section Conveyance section

Image transfer Area around the waste section toner collecting port Duplex section Duplex transport roller Pick-up roller Feed roller Separation roller Rollers and rolls Scanning guide Reflective sensor section Conveyance roller Swing belt /Up Folding roller Horizontal transport roller Punch edge Punch scraps box Punch scraps full sensor Exterior parts

Maintenance

12 13 14 FS-517 15 FS-608 16 17 18 PK-512 19 PK-513 20

*1: See DF-611 service manual.

18

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3. Periodical check

3.5

Concept of parts life
Description A waste toner full condition is detected when about 3,000 printed pages have been produced after a waste toner near full condition has been detected. The number of prints made is counted. *5 When the maximum number of printed pages is reached, the print is inhibited. Life value (Specification value) – Max. number of printed pages

Waste toner box

57,000 *1,2

Fusing unit

300,000

350,000 *3

Transfer roller The number of prints made is counted. *5 unit The number of prints made is counted. *5 The number of prints made is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the belt has turned translated to a corresponding value of the number of copies made and the value, whichever reaches the life specifications value, is detected. (However the maximum number of prints is detected by counting hours through which the belt has turned.) When the maximum number of printed pages is reached, the print is inhibited. The number of prints made is counted. *5 The number of color prints made is counted. *5 The hours which the PC drum has turned is compared with the value of the number of hours through which the Imaging roller has turned translated to a corresponding value of hours and the value, whichever reaches the life specification value, is detected. * The hours which the PC drum has turned is the value of the number of distance through which the PC drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value.

450,000

550,000

Ozone filter Color toner filter

300,000 150,000

305,000 152,000

Imaging unit C/M/Y

3,599 M *4

3,926 M *4

Imaging unit /K

11,126 M *4

11,780 M *4

*1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions. *2: Once the toner-full is detected, it has to be replaced with the new waste toner box in order to reset. *3: The initiation of any new print cycle is inhibited when the maximum number of printed pages is reached. *4: The mark “M” is indicated the value of the number of distance through which the PC drum has run translated to a corresponding value of the number of hours and the value. *5: The count condition is different according to the paper length of the sub scanning direction.
Paper length of sub scanning direction Less than 216 mm 216 mm to 432 mm over 432 mm Count value 1 count 2 counts 3 counts

19

Maintenance

Transfer belt unit

450,000

550,000 *3

bizhub C550

3. Periodical check

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

bizhub C550

A. Conditions for life specifications values • The life specification values represent the number of copies made or figures equivalent to it when given conditions (see the table given below) are met. They can be more or less depending on the machine operating conditions of each individual user.
Item Job type Paper size Color ratio CV/M Original density No. of operating days per month Description Monochrome : Making 6 copies per job Color : Making 5 copies per job A4 / 8 1/2 x 11 Black to Color = 4:1 Black: 20,000 / Color: 5,000 B/W = 5 % for each color, 5 % for monochrome 20 days (main power switch turned ON and OFF 20 times per month)

B. Control causing inhibited printing for one part when an inhibited-printing event occurs in another part
Maintenance
Purpose In order to reduce the maintenance call times: when printing prohibiting is reached for any of the following parts, make printing prohibited also for other parts whose life value is reached, and replace those parts at the same time. Fusing unit, image transfer belt unit, imaging unit /C, imaging unit /M, imaging unit /Y, imaging unit /K

Target parts

20

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3. Periodical check

3.6

Maintenance procedure (periodical check parts)
bizhub C550 Maintenance

NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure of maintenance represents the ethanol (ethyl alcohol). 3.6.1 Cleaning of the electrostatic charger wire Y/M/C

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Electrostatic charger wire Y/M/C: when toner cartridge Y/M/C is replaced B. Procedure 1. Open the lower front door.
[1]

2. Slowly pull out the charger-cleaning tool [1] as far as possible. Next, slowly push in the chargercleaning tool as far as possible. Repeat the above operations three times. NOTE • Move the charger-cleaning tool slowly all the way to the end of either way.

A00JF2C523DA

3.6.2

Cleaning of the PH window Y/M/C/K

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • PH window Y/M/C/K: when toner cartridge is replaced B. Procedure 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Pull out tray 1 and remove the cleaning tool [1] from tray 1.

[1]

A00JF2C532DA

21

3. Periodical check

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 3. Insert the cleaning tool [1] into the print head cleaning opening [2], pull it out, and then repeat this back-andforth movement two or three times. NOTE • When using the cleaning tool, put the side with “UP” stamping [3] face up. • Clean the PH window of each CMYK color. • When cleaning the PH window of K color, release the IU lock lever.

bizhub C550

[2]

[1]

[3]
A00JF2C533DA

Maintenance

3.6.3

Cleaning of the timing roller

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Timing roller: Every 100,000 prints (upon each call) B. Procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the timing roller [1] clean of dirt.

[1]
A00JF2C001DA

22

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 3.6.4 Cleaning of the paper dust remover

3. Periodical check

B. Procedure 1. Open the upper right door. 2. Pushing the hook [1], remove the paper dust remover [2].

[1]

[2]

A00JF2C002DA

3. Using a brush, whisk dust off the paper dust remover [1].

[1]
A00JF2C003DA

23

Maintenance

bizhub C550

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Paper dust remover: Every 100,000 prints (upon each call)

3. Periodical check 3.6.5
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

Cleaning of the area around the waste toner collecting port

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Area around the waste toner collecting port: Every 100,000 prints (upon each call) B. Procedure 1. Open the lower front door. 2. Remove the waste toner box. See P.41 3. Wipe the areas around the waste toner collecting port [1] clean of spilled toner and dirt using a soft cloth dampened with water or alcohol.

Maintenance

A00JF2C004DA

3.6.6

Cleaning of the duplex transport rollers

A. Periodically cleaning parts/cycle • Duplex transport rollers: Every 100,000 prints (upon each call) B. Procedure 1. Open the duplex door.
[1]

2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol, wipe the transport rollers [1] clean of dirt.

[1]

A00JF2C005DA

24

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 3.6.7 Replacing the tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller

3. Periodical check

B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 1. 2. Remove the tray 2 paper feed unit. See the replacement procedures 1 to 8 in “Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller.” See P.28
[1]

3. Remove the harness from the wire saddles [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

[2]

A00JF2C007DA

[2]

[1]

4. Remove four screws [1], take out the tray1 paper feed unit [2] with the upper right door open.

[1]
A00JF2C008DA

[2]

5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 separation roller installation plate assy [2].

[1]
A00JF2C009DA

25

Maintenance

bizhub C550

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 1 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 1 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints

3. Periodical check

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 1 feed roller cover [2].

bizhub C550

[2]

[1]
A00JF2C010DA

[2]

[1]

7. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [3].

Maintenance

[1]

[3]
A00JF2C011DA

[2]

[3]

8. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 1 feed roller [3].

[1]

A00JF2C012DA

26

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3. Periodical check 9. Remove the C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and bearing [3], and remove the tray 1 pick-up roller [4].

[1]

[3]

[2] [4]

A00JF2C013DA

10. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 11. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. See P.27 12. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [1st.]. See P.454 3.6.8 Replacing the tray 1 separation roller assy
Maintenance

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 1 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 1. 2. Remove the manual bypass tray rear cover See P.100 3. Open the manual bypass tray door. 4. Opening the jam clearing cover [1], remove two screws [2] and take out the tray1 separation roller assy [3].

[1]

[2]

[3] [2]
A00JF2C014DA

27

bizhub C550

3. Periodical check

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 5. Remove the C-clip [1],and remove the tray 1 separation roller assy [2].

bizhub C550

[1]

[2]

A00JF2C016DA

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 3.6.9 Replacing the tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller

Maintenance

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 2 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 2 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. 1. 2. 3. Procedure Slide out the tray 2. Open the lower right-side door. Remove the manual bypass tray rear cover See P.100 4. Open the manual bypass tray door. 5. Remove the rear right cover /4 See P.99
[2]

6. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the harness from the two wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3]. NOTE • When reinstalling the harness, route it so that the two harness ties [4] are positioned as shown in the illustration on the left.

[3]

[4]

[1]
A00JF2C018DA

28

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3. Periodical check 7. Remove four screws [1], and remove the tray 2 paper feed unit [2].

[1]
A00JF2C019DA

[2]

8. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller installation plate assy [2].

[1]
A00JF2C020DA

9. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 2 feed roller cover [2].

[2]

[1]

A00JF2C021DA

29

Maintenance

bizhub C550

[2]

3. Periodical check

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 10. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [3].

bizhub C550

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]
A00JF2C022DA

[2]

[3]

11. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2], and remove the tray 2 feed roller [3].

Maintenance

[1]

A00JF2C012DA

[1]

12. Remove C-clip [1], C-ring [2] and bearing [3], and remove the tray 2 pick-up roller [4].

[3]

[2] [4]

A00JF2C013DA

13. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 14. Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy. See P.31 15. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [2nd.]. See P.454

30

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 3.6.10 Replacing the tray 2 separation roller assy

3. Periodical check

B. 1. 2. 3.

Procedure Slide out the tray 2. Open the lower right door. Open the manual bypass tray door.
[3] [1]

4. Opening the jam clearing cover [1], remove two screws [2] and take out the tray 2 separation roller assy [3].

[2]
A00JF2C023DA

[1]

5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 2 separation roller assy [2].

[2]

A00JF2C016DA

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

31

Maintenance

bizhub C550

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 2 separation roller assy: Every 300,000 prints

3. Periodical check 3.6.11
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

Replacing the tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 3 feed roller: Every 300,000 prints • Tray 3 pick-up roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Slide out the tray 3.
[2]

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray 3 paper feed cover [2].

Maintenance

[1]
A00JF2C024DA

[2]

[1]

[2]

3. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2], and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [3].

[1]

[3]

A00JF2C025DA

[1] [2]

4. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 3 feed roller [2].

A00JF2C026DA

32

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

3. Periodical check 5. Remove the C-clip [1], and remove the tray 3 pick-up roller [2].

[1]

[2]

A00JF2C027DA

6. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal. 7. Remove the tray 3 separation roller. See P.33 8. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [3rd.]. See P.454 3.6.12 Replacing the tray 3 separation roller
Maintenance

A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 3 separation roller: Every 300,000 prints B. Procedure 1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. See the replacement procedures 1 to 4 in “Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller.” See P.32
[1]

2. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 3 [2] to the end.

[2]

[1]

A00JF2C028DA

33

bizhub C550

2007 3. 1. Remove the C-clip [1]. and remove the tray 3 paper feed unit [2]. Disconnect two connectors [1]. and remove the tray 3 separation roller [2]. reverse the order of removal. To reinstall. Remove two screws [1]. Maintenance [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C031DA [2] [1] 5. [2] bizhub C550 [3] [1] A00JF2C029DA 4.0 Feb. 34 . Periodical check Field Service Ver. A00JF2C032DA 6. NOTE • When reinstalling the harness.3. route the harness so that the harness tie [3] is positioned as shown in the illustration on the left. and remove the harness from two edge covers [2].

2007 3.000 prints . A00JF2C033DA [1] [2] 3.000 prints • Tray 4 pick-up roller: Every 300. Periodical check B. A00JF2C026DA 4.0 Feb. and remove the tray 4 feed roller [2]. and remove the tray 4 pick-up roller [2].6. Remove the C-clip [1]. reverse the order of removal.Field Service Ver. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 4 feed roller: Every 300. and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [3]. Procedure 1. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2]. 1. To reinstall. Slide out the tray 4. Remove the C-clip [1]. 35 Maintenance [2] [2] bizhub C550 A. [1] [2] A00JF2C027DA 5.13 Replacing the tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller 3. [1] [3] [1] 2.

” See P.454 3. Remove the tray 4 separation roller. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Tray 4 separation roller: Every 300. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [4th. See P. and remove the harness from three edge covers [2]. Disconnect three connectors [1].14 Replacing the tray 4 separation roller A.0 Feb. Remove the two screws [1] and pull out the tray 4 [2] to the end.6.3.35 2. See the replacement procedures 1 to 4 in “Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller. 1. [2] [1] [1] A00JF2C035DA 36 . See P.]. Maintenance [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C034DA 3. Procedure 1.36 7. 2007 bizhub C550 6. Periodical check Field Service Ver.000 prints B.

bizhub C550 . 1. To reinstall. [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C036DA [1] A00JF2C037DA 6. reverse the order of removal. 37 Maintenance [2] 5.0 Feb. Periodical check 4. and remove the tray 4 paper feed unit [2]. Remove two screws [1]. Remove the C-clip [1].Field Service Ver. 2007 3. and remove the tray 4 separation roller [2].

and remove the manual bypass tray feed roller cover [2].6.0 Feb. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy. [4] [2] [1] A00JF2C040DA 38 . Maintenance [2] A00JF2C038DA [1] [2] [1] 3. Periodical check 3. and remove the manual bypass tray upper cover [2]. Remove the spring [3].” See P.15 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray feed roller: Every 300.000 prints B. Remove two screws [1]. Remove two screws [1].3. Remove two C-clips [1] and two bearings [2]. 1. 5. Procedure 1. and remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy [4]. A00JF2C039DA [1] [2] [3] 4. 2007 Replacing the manual bypass tray feed roller/manual bypass tray pick-up roller A.000 prints • Manual bypass tray pick-up roller: Every 300.40 [1] [1] 2. See the replacement procedures 1 to 2 in “Manual bypass tray separation role assy.

and remove the manual bypass tray pick-up roller [3]. 2007 3. 1.454 39 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . 9. See P. See P. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.40 10. [2] [3] A00JF2C041DA [1] 7. and remove the manual bypass tray feed roller [3].Field Service Ver. To reinstall. reverse the order of removal. Remove three C-rings [1] and two bearings [2]. Periodical check 6.0 Feb. Remove two C-rings [1] and bearing [2]. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Manual Tray]. [2] [3] [2] A00JF2C042DA 8.

3. Opening the jam clearing cover [1]. and spring [4]. reverse the order of removal. and remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy [3]. 1. Remove the E-ring [1].16 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Remove the C-clip [1] and two bearings [2]. Periodical check 3. and remove the shaft [2]. Open the manual bypass tray door.6. 2.000 prints B. 2007 Replacing the manual bypass tray separation roller assy A. [1] Maintenance [2] [3] [2] A00JF2C043DA [3] [4] [2] 3. [2] [3] A00JF2C045DA 5. 40 . [1] A00JF2C044DA [1] 4. To reinstall. guide plate [3]. remove the two screws [2] and take out the manual bypass tray separation roller assy [3].0 Feb. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Manual bypass tray separation roller assy: Every 300. Procedure 1.

See P. Mount the enclosed cap [2] included in the new waste toner box to the waste toner box [1] that has been removed at the step 2. 2007 3.17 Replacing the waste toner box 3. [1] 2. Release the securing levers [1] for the waste toner box.Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF2C507DA [2] 4. Place the waste toner box [1] with the cap attached into the plastic bag [2].000 prints . 1. and then remove the waste toner box [2]. Open the lower front door. Removal procedure 1. [2] [1] A00JF2C506DA [2] 3. Periodical check B.6.24 41 Maintenance bizhub C550 A. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Waste toner box: Every 57. Clean the surface around the waste toner collecting port.0 Feb. [1] A00JF2C508DA 5.

2. Reinstall procedure bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Release the securing lever [1] for the imaging unit. and close the lower front door.0 Feb.6. [1] A00JF2C509DA 3. Removal procedure 1. See P.18 Replacing the imaging unit Maintenance A. use the same procedure to replace other imaging units Y/M/C. Remove the waste toner box.000 prints NOTE • Although the procedure shown below is for the replacement of the imaging unit K.3. Periodical check C. Open the lower front door. B. 2007 1. Install the new waste toner box [1]. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Imaging unit Y/M/C: Every 100.000 prints • Imaging unit K: Every 300. [1] A00JF2C510DA 42 . 1.41 3.

[1] [2] A00JF2C513DA 43 Maintenance .0 Feb. 2007 3.Field Service Ver. 2. Peel off the tape. Remove the imaging unit from its packaging. 1. Periodical check 4. Remove the imaging unit [1]. Remove the imaging unit [2] from the black protective bag [1]. Reinstall procedure 1. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C511DA C. and then remove the packing material [1]. [1] [1] A00JF2C512DA 3.

Periodical check Field Service Ver.3. Remove the packing material [1] and securing material [1]. 1. 2007 4.0 Feb. and close the securing lever for the imaging unit. Insert the new imaging unit [1] into the machine. Remove the protective sheet [1] for the PC drum. [1] Maintenance A00JF2C515DA 6. [1] bizhub C550 [1] [1] A00JF2C514DA 5. [1] A00JF2C516DA 44 .

replace the color toner filter included the box.46 3. Procedure 1. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Ozone filter: Every 300. See P. 2007 3.19 Replacing the ozone filter Maintenance A. [1] A00JF2C527DA 2. 1.0 Feb. and close the lower front door.454 45 bizhub C550 . See P.Field Service Ver. Install the waste toner box [1]. To replace the imaging unit K. and then install the new ozone filter. Periodical check 7. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Ozone Filter]. [1] A00JF2C509DA 8.6.000 prints B. Remove the ozone filter [1].

454 3.000 prints • Toner cartridge K: Every 45. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Toner cartridge Y/M/C: Every 27. Open the upper front door. Periodical check 3. Removal procedure 1. 2007 Replacing the color toner filter A. Pull out the empty toner cartridge [1]. Remove the color toner filter [1].000 prints NOTE • Although the procedure shown below is for the replacement of the toner cartridge K.000 prints B. B. 2.20 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Color toner filter: Every 150.6. Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Color Toner Filter].0 Feb.3. [1] A00JF2C502DA 46 .6. Procedure 1.21 Replacing the toner cartridge A. and then install the new color toner filter. See P. 1. [1] A00JF2C539DA Maintenance 2. use the same procedure to replace other toner cartridges Y/M/C.

. [1] A00JF2C603DA [1] 3. 1. Periodical check [1] A00JF2C503DA 2. Remove the protective tape [1].0 Feb. [2] A00JF2C504DA 4. Reinstall procedure 3. Close the upper front door. Remove the new toner cartridge [1] from its packaging.21 47 Maintenance bizhub C550 1. and then shake the cartridge up and down 5 to 10 times. 2007 C.Field Service Ver. Align the toner cartridge [1] with the slots [2] in the cartridge compartment. and then insert the cartridge. Clean the electrostatic charger wire See P.

0 Feb. [1] A00JF2C046DA Maintenance 3. Periodical check 3. 1. Slide the image transfer entrance guide [1] towards the back of the main body and remove it. Procedure 1. Remove the screw [1] and the upper right door stopper [2]. [1] [2] A00JF2C047DA 4.000 prints B.22 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Open the upper right door. 2007 Replacing the transfer belt unit A. [1] A00JF2C048DA 48 .3. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Transfer belt unit: Every 450. 2. Loosen the shoulder screw [1] and slide the image transfer entrance guide stopper [2] towards the back of the main body.6. NOTE • Slide the image transfer entrance guide [1] towards the back of the main body and remove it.

0 Feb. bizhub C550 [2] [1] . 1. 2007 3. Periodical check 5. Remove the rail [1] that aids in mounting the transfer belt unit from the tray 1. Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks [2] towards the right of the main body to unlock the transfer belt. [1] [2] A00JF2C049DA A00JF2C050DA 49 Maintenance [1] 6.Field Service Ver. NOTE • Remove two screws [1] and pull the two transfer belt locks [2] towards the right of the main body to unlock the transfer belt.

Grip the parts [1] of the transfer belt unit and slide it out until it touches the stopper [2] of the rail. Install the rail [1] on the main body and secure it with two shoulder screws [2]. Periodical check Field Service Ver.3. NOTE • Do not touch the surface of the transfer belt unit. • Cover the transfer belt unit with something such shade cloth to protect its surface from dust or foreign matter.0 Feb. 1. bizhub C550 [3] [1] [2] Maintenance [2] A00JF2C051DA [2] [1] 8. [1] A00JF2C052DA [1] 9. 2007 7. Change the way of holding the transfer belt unit [1] as shown in the picture and remove it. A00JF2C053DA 50 . NOTE • Make sure that the protrusion (at two places) on the rail is inserted into the dowel holes [3] (at two places) on the main body.

To reinstall. Select [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust] and carry out gradation adjust. be sure not to allow the contact [1] to hit the screw [2] of the transfer belt unit lock. bizhub C550 .413 51 Maintenance [2] 10. make sure that the two transfer belt unit locks [1] are completely unlocked. Periodical check NOTE • When removing/reinstalling the transfer belt unit. reverse the order of removal. [2] [1] A00JF2C609DA [1] [1] NOTE • Insert the transfer belt unit with care not to allow its docking gear to be damaged by hitting it against the rail or associated part. [2] A00JF2C608DA 11.0 Feb. • Before reinstalling the transfer belt unit. See P. 1. Insert the transfer belt unit by pressing the area [2] (two places) shown in the illustration on the left until the transfer belt unit is fitted into its place.Field Service Ver. 2007 3.

3. remove the transfer roller unit [2]. Unlock the lock levers [1] of the transfer roller unit (at two places). Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places). [2] A00JF2C056DA 3. Periodical check 3.000 prints B. [2] 2. 1.23 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.454 52 . Select [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [Life] and clear the count of [Transfer Roller Unit]. mount the new transfer roller unit [2]. Lock the lock levers [1] (at two places). Reinstall procedure [1] 1. Holding onto the lock levers [1] (at two places).3. [1] Maintenance A00JF2C055DA C. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Transfer roller unit: Every 450. Open the upper right door.6. NOTE • Make sure that the levers are locked in position both at front and rear. Removal procedure 1.0 Feb. 2007 Replacing the transfer roller unit A. 2. See P.

grip it with both hands to avoid letting the fusing unit fall down. 2007 3. Before replacement operations. [1] [1] A00JF2C057DA [1] 3.24 Replacing the fusing unit CAUTION 3.0 Feb. Procedure 1. 53 Maintenance bizhub C550 . reverse the order of removal.Field Service Ver.000 prints B. NOTE • When removing the fusing unit.6. Periodically replaced parts/cycle • Fusing unit: Every 300. 2. To reinstall. 1. Open the upper right door. Periodical check • The temperature gets high in the vicinity of the fusing unit. Hold the position as shown in the left and remove the fusing unit [1]. make sure that more than 20 minutes have elapsed since the main and sub power switches were turned off. You may get burned when you come into contact with the area. Loosen two screws [1] of the fusing unit. A00JF2C058DA 4. A.

4. bizhub C550 Service tool CE tool list Tool name Shape Personnel Parts No. Maintenance PH window cleaning jig pad A00JF2C526DA 1 A00J 1098 ## Transfer belt unit extension rail A00JF2C524DA 1 A00J R728 ## Slit glass cleaning jig A00JF2C527DA 1 A01H 1005 ## 9J06 PJP1 ## A3 Color chart 4036fs2577c0 1 9J06 PJP2 ## 11 x 17 Compact flash 4037F2C601DA 1 A00J R902 ## 54 . Service tool Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 4.1 Original glass moving unit height adjustment jig 9J06F2C637DA 1 9J06 PJG0 ## PH window cleaning jig A00JF2C525DA 1 This part number A00J R729 ## include the cleaning pad. Remarks 4.

55 Maintenance 27.2 Toner cartridge single parts (T/C) Parts name T/C black T/C yellow T/C magenta T/C cyan Replacing period *1 45. See P.1 Copy materials Imaging unit single parts (IU) Parts name IU black IU yellow IU magenta IU cyan Replacing period 300.2 4.000 prints bizhub C550 . 2007 4. Service tool 4.000 prints 27.2.19 4.0 Feb.000 prints 100.000 prints 27.000 prints 100. 1.000 prints *1: Life value that can be achieved with a probability of 90% even with product-to-product variations and fluctuating operating environmental conditions taken into consideration.2. when the T/C is used under the conditions of B/W ratio 5% for each color 4.3 Waste toner box Parts name Waste toner box Replacing period *1 57.19 4.000 prints See P.2.000 prints 100.Field Service Ver.2.000 prints *1 *1: A waste toner full condition is detected with detecting the actual waste toner emissions.4 Maintenance kit There is no setting for the maintenance kit.

and the other is by downloading over a network using the Internet ISW.5.2.1 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Windows Command Prompt Service environment • OS: Windows 2000/XP • Drive which enables writing/reading of compact flash • Compact flash (Service tool: A00J R902 ##) 5.2 5. 2007 5.1 • There are two ways to update the firmware: One is by directly connecting with the main body using the compact flash.” 56 . 5. Put the data of firmware in the optional directory.2 Writing into the compact flash 1. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) Maintenance 4038F2E562DB NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****. 1. bizhub C550 Firmware upgrade Outline 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver.exe.0 Feb.2.

and specify the directory to be uncompressed. 2007 5. and check the drive name.Field Service Ver. delete it before uncompressing. and then uncompress it. Firmware upgrade 4038F2E563DB 3. Double-click the firmware data. “card_work” folder is created in the selected directory and the data is decompressed in this folder. which was recognized in the Windows. .0 Feb. 1. Mount the compact flash on the PC. • When the firmware data is decompressed. bizhub C550 2. (F-drive in the following figure) 4036fs2623e0 57 Maintenance NOTE • When old firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed.

1. NOTE • When removing the compact flash. 58 . which was recognized through the procedure 3.5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. and push the “Enter”. 4038F2E565DB 9.bat. “VERIFY OK” appears. 8. be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. Specify the drive of compact flash.bat” is executed. data writing into the compact flash is started. CHECKSUM is executed.0 Feb. 5. Use the command prompt to move into the uncompressed directory.” (Input the C: \bizhub\card_work>mkcf m2 f (drive number): in the below figure. Remove the compact flash from PC. Once the “mkcf. Click [Start] → [Program] → [Accessories] → [Command Prompt] to open the command prompt. 6.) Maintenance bizhub C550 A00JF2E568DA 7. If CHECKSUM value is precisely matched. Upon completion of writing. 2007 4. and execute the “mksf.

• Drive that is able to Read/Write compact flash 59 Maintenance • Write firmware data into the compact flash card.3.2 Function outline • The following functions are available with this software.3. • Windows 2000.3. 5.66 Advanced functions Create a Firmware Image from a card Format a card Display information about a card • Acquisition the information of firmware data written into the compact flash card. Function type Basic functions Function name Write Firmware to a card Description Compare Firmware with a card • Compare the firmware data written into the compact flash card with the one saved in PC.0 Feb.3 • This software is designed as the tool to write firmware data of MFP/printer released by KMBT into the compact flash card. NOTE • vxWorks form is not applicable See P. 2007 5. Firmware upgrade 5.1 Correspond model • Correspond models of the software is as follows. See P. See P. 1. See P.66 5.66 • Format the compact flash card by the FAT or vxWorks form.65 bizhub C550 Preparations for firmware rewriting by Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006 . Computer CPU Correspond OS Required memory Others • IBM PC/AT compatible machine • Pentium III / 500 MHz or higher is recommended.65 • Create the firmware image form using the firmware data written into the compact flash card. See P.3 System environment • The following system environments are required or recommended to use the software.Field Service Ver. 256MB (Windows XP/2003) is recommended. Color machine B/W machine • bizhub C250/C300/C350/C351/C352/C450/C550 • bizhub C250P/C352P/C450P • bizhub 200/250/350 • Di2510/3010/3510/2510f/3010f/3510f 5. Windows XP or Windows Server 2003 • More than 128 MB (Windows 2000).

NOTE • Install the software to the PC with the administration authentication.0 Feb. 9J06F2E700DA 60 . 1. Firmware upgrade 5. 1.3. 2007 Installation of software • Follow the procedures shown below to install the software. 9J06F2C673DA Maintenance 2. Double click [setup.4 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. • When any anti-virus program is activated. quite the program before the installation.exe] to start the installation of the software. Click [Next >].5.

Field Service Ver.0 Feb. and click [Next>]. After checking the contents of license agreement. 1. . 2007 5. select [I accept the terms in the license agreement] and click [Next >]. Select the installed destination folder of Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. 9J06F2E702DA 61 Maintenance bizhub C550 3. Firmware upgrade 9J06F2E701DA 4.

Field Service Ver. Click [Install] to start installation. Quite the program if the software is activated. Click [Finish] to complete the installation. 6. 1.5. Select [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006] of [Add/Remove Programs] in Windows Control Panel menu to delete the program. Firmware upgrade 5.0 Feb. • Follow the procedures shown below to delete (uninstall) the program. 1. delete (uninstall) the currently installed program and install the new version. 9J06F2E708DA 5.5 Update of software • To update the software version.3. 2. 2007 bizhub C550 9J06F2E703DA Maintenance 7. Shortcut file will be created inside Windows Start menu ([Program] → [KONICA MINOLTA] → [Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006]). 9J06F2E709DA 62 .

• To display the dialog to enable the advanced functions.6 Screen 5.64 • To select the function to be used. 2007 5. See P.65 • To select the compact flash drive to which the data to write. • Select the check box of [Enabled Advanced Features] to enable advanced functions at main window.0 Feb. Firmware upgrade When the advanced mode is selected [1] [2] [3] [4] Maintenance [6] [5] 9J06F2E704DA [1] [2] [3] About Copyright Info Settings • To display the outline of the tool. Advanced mode . corresponds to the card you wish to write to: 63 bizhub C550 A. [4] What would you like to do? [5] Select the location of the Firmware to write to the card: [6] Select the drive letter that • To select the location where the firmware is stored in PC. • To display the license agreement and version information of the tool. See P. Main window • The main window will be displayed after activating the software.Field Service Ver. 1.3. • Displayed screen is different between Basic mode and Advanced mode. • Main window consists of 2 patterns: Basic mode.

LastUsed : The drive used at previous time is selected. • Not available yet. Although it take less time for data writing compared to the case with sums calculation.5. FAT : The format to be used by all models that the software supports. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. [2] [3] Default Drive Letter [4] [5] Default Image Block Size Calculate sums when writing [6] Folder for Temporary Files • Set the folder for saving temporary files during the tool is activating.0 Feb. 64 . • Select the default card format during software starting. it fails to ensure the reliability of the written data. [1] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] Maintenance 9J06F2E705DA [1] Enable Advanced Features Default Setting for Card Format • Enable the setting of advanced functions at the dialog by selecting the check box. it takes more time for data writing compared to the case without sums calculation (Basically this mode shall be selected. The temporary file is automatically deleted after the operation completes normally. vxWorks : Not available yet.) • If [No] is selected. • If [YES] is selected. • Set whether to calculate check sums during data writing. • Select how to set default of compact flash drive during software starting. None : [Please Select] is displayed on the screen every starting and the drive should be selected every time. 1. However. data consistency can be ensured by data verification of check sums during data writing. 2007 bizhub C550 B. Also advanced functions can be selected at the main window. • Other settings will be enabled by selecting the check box of [Enabled Advanced Features]. Settings dialog • It will be displayed by clicking [Settings] at main window. check sums calculation is skipped during data writing.

tar.img) into the compact flash. display the check sum information (comparison result dialog) of the firmware data of the compact flush and the file. • The firmware data (file) format saved in PC shall consistent with the one written into the compact flash.3.Field Service Ver.img. 1. it is not covered under warranty.tar. (2) Compare Firmware with a card • Compare the firmware data written into the compact flash and the one (file) saved in PC. <Corresponding models and firmware file type> File type Models C550 C450/C450P/C351 C352/C352P/C300 C350 C250/C250P Di2510/3010/3510/ 2510f/3010f/3510f 200/250/350 Indexed firmware type Mosel2_cf.gz or *.img Compressed firmware type Uncompressed firmware type Di3510/350/250/ 200 firmware type ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ma001a NOTE • The above-mentioned [Indexed firmware type] and [Di3510/350/250/200 firmware type] shall be comprised of multiple files and one of the files shall be named as above.tar. • To write the image file data (*.img. • After the comparison. The FW data of the models shown below can be written.gz *. use the compact flash with the same capacity as the one used for the original image file. Basic functions (1) Write Firmware to a card • To write FW data into the compact flash. 65 Maintenance ma001 bizhub C550 . • [Uncompressed firmware type] means the image file that is uncompressed the compressed firmware file. • C350 firmware requires the compact flash over 64 MB. • To write FW data into the compact flash.7 Details of each function 5.gz ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ *. 2007 5.gz rhein1_cf. The FW data of the models shown below can be written. Firmware upgrade A.tar.gz rhein3_cf. • [Compressed firmware type] means the compressed formed image file that is created using the tool’s function of the [Create a Firmware Image from a card].gz tss2_cf. • Firmware of C550/C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P requires the compact flash over 128 MB.0 Feb.tar. Although the compact flash with larger capacity than the original one can be used.gz rhein2_cf.

Maintenance bizhub C550 66 .gz). • After the firmware data is written into the compact flash. the uncompressed data would occupy too much capacity. • For the series of Di3510/200/250/350 series.5. The information to be displayed is according to the type of written FW data. • To write the firmware data into the compact flash. it becomes the own file style that is different from the FAT. which makes file control difficult. Advanced functions (1) Create a Firmware Image from a card • Create the image file from the firmware data written into the compact flash. 1. and the compact flash that the firmware data is written cannot be browsed on the Windows OS.img). This function allows us to save the various type of firmware data in the compact flash as the image file and hold as copy data. the card should be formatted in FAT form to clear (initialize) the description of the compact flash. Therefore this tool doesn't create uncompressed firmware file (*. 2007 B. (2) Format a card • Make format of the compact flash in FAT or vxWork form. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. • For the series of C550/C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P.img. Create the image file by dumping directly the data in the card. The image file is written into the compact flash in the uncompressed form. NOTE • In current version. check sums of each firmware data is displayed.0 Feb. MSC version is displayed. only FAT format is available but not vxWork format. • The created FW image file is automatically compressed and created as the Compressed firmware file (*. (3) Display information about a card • Display the information of the firmware data written into the compact flash. however.

and specify the directory to be uncompressed.” 2.3. delete it before uncompressing. Double-click the firmware data.exe. (C:\bizhub in the below figure) . 2007 5.0 Feb. In the case of C550/C450/C450P/C351/C352/C352P/C300/C250/C250P series 1.Field Service Ver. 9J06F2E711DA NOTE • When old firmware is still left in the specified directory to be uncompressed. 1.8 How to write firmware data 5. and then uncompress it. 67 Maintenance bizhub C550 A. Firmware upgrade 9J06F2E710DA NOTE • The file name of firmware data consists of the “Release Date_Version_CHECKSUM-****. Put the firmware data in the optional directory.

5. Maintenance 9J06F2E706DA 68 . Mount the compact flash on the PC. which was recognized in the Windows. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. and check the drive name. 1. Start Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. 2007 bizhub C550 3. Select the check box of [Write Firmware to a card]. NOTE • When using the external compact flash drive such as USB be sure to connect them before starting this tool. (F-drive in the following figure) 9J06F2E712DA 4. 5.0 Feb.

Select the file type [C450/ C351/C352/ C300/C350/C250 Indexed Firmware]. Click [Open]. 9J06F2E714DA 69 Maintenance bizhub C550 .gz" (### is for model name) is displayed.Field Service Ver.tar. and select.gz” will not be displayed. confirm that only "###_cf. 1.0 Feb. Click [Browse]. 9J06F2E713DA 8. Firmware upgrade 9J06F2E707DA 7. NOTE • If the file extension is set to be not displayed in Windows. 2007 6. 9. the file name “. Move to the folder decompressed at step 2. 5.

re-confirm the firmware data and the written destination drive. In the dialog. bizhub C550 NOTE • The drives other than the compact flash that is recognized as “Removable Disk” can be selected for the writing destination. the screen goes back of the main window. [Write] button is changed form gray into active status. When clicking [Write] button. and click [YES]. Select the drive that the compact flash is inserted. If these drives are selected mistakenly to make the writing. (If [NO] is clicked. which is confirmed at step 3. 12. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. it may give fatal damage on Windows system or delete the saved data. Therefore pay close attention when selecting the drive. Maintenance 9J06F2E715DA 11. the following dialog is displayed. 1.) 9J06F2E716DA 70 .0 Feb.5. 2007 10.

NOTE • When removing the compact flash. 9J06F2E717DA NOTE • The contents displayed on the screen may different according to the model type. 2007 13.0 Feb. 1. When the writing is completed. The above is the screen displayed for firmware data writing of bizhub C450. Take out the compact flash from the PC. 16. the following screen appears. Firmware upgrade NOTE • Writing a card is a resource intensive operation for your computer .Field Service Ver. and data writing starts.do not attempt to multitask (use the computer for anything else) during the writing procedure. 15. 71 Maintenance bizhub C550 . Confirm each check sums are identical and quit Firmware Imaging Toolkit 2006. In this screen. 14. Click [Yes]. 5. be sure to check if data is written as normal and then remove it according to the precise removing method. check sums will be compared between the firmware data and one written into the compact flash.

Turn OFF the main power switch. Turn ON the main power switch and the sub power switch. Insert the compact flash card [1] into the slot. 5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 72 . Control panel shows F/W items to be updated. Remove the screw [1] and the metal blanking plate [2]. 2007 5.4 bizhub C550 Firmware rewriting by compact flash • The firmware is updated using the compact flash. Remove the interface cover.1 Updating method NOTE • NEVER remove or insert the compact flash card with the machine power turned ON.99 [2] 3. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C059DA 4.5. 1.4. [1] A00JF2C060DA 5. 2. 1. See P.0 Feb. 6.

(The Start key blinks blue. Check that the control panel shows the message indicating that the data has been rewritten correctly ([Downloading Completed]). (Select [YES]. Firmware upgrade A00JF2C557DA MFP CONTROLLER SCANNER PRINTER MFP board (MFPB) Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) *2 ADF (DF-M) FINISHER RU ZU DF control board (DFCB) FNS control board (FSCB) *3 Transfer control board (TRCB) *3 Not used *1: The optional fax kit is necessary for the above procedure. 12. 8.) 5. Remove the compact flash card from the slot. Turn OFF the main power switch. the Start key starts blinking red. 1. 73 Maintenance F/W to be updated Appropriate board bizhub C550 .) 9. Turn ON the main power switch. *3: The optional finisher FS-517/608 is necessary for the above procedure. and close the front door. *2: The optional fax multi line ML-501 is necessary for the above procedure.0 Feb. 2007 7. Select the particular type of F/W to be updated.) 10. Check also the check sum value ([Check Sum ####]) shown on the control panel. (At this time. 11.Field Service Ver. Press the [START].

Never turn the main power switch OFF until either the serial number input screen or the trouble code screen is displayed. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. Maintenance bizhub C550 A00JF2E582DA 13. Select [Firmware Version].0 Feb. 74 . data may sometimes be internally updated. Make sure if the version of firmware is updated. 1. 15. the following message will be displayed.5. 2007 NOTE • When turning the main power switch ON for the first time after the firmware is updated. Call the Service Mode to the screen. In that case. 14.

0 Feb. 2007 5.4. Firmware upgrade 1. 1. 2. MFP CONTROLLER SCANNER PRINTER MFP board (MFPB) Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) FAX BOARD CONTROLLER1 Fax board (Main) *1 FAX BOARD CONTROLLER2 Fax board (Sub) *2 ADF (DF-M) FINISHER RU DF control board (DFCB) FNS control board (FSCB) *3 Transfer control board (TRCB) *3 *1: The optional fax kit is necessary for the above procedure. If the procedure is still abnormally terminated. Perform the data rewriting procedure again. If the procedure is abnormally terminated. change the board that has caused “NG” and carry out data rewriting procedure.Field Service Ver. change the compact flash for a new one and try another rewriting sequence.2 Action when data transfer fails 5. *3: The optional finisher FS-517/608 is necessary for the above procedure. indicating that rewriting has been unsuccessful (in which case the Start key lights up red). *2: The optional fax multi line ML-501 is necessary for the above procedure. take the following steps. 75 Maintenance bizhub C550 • If “NG” appears on the control panel. 3. .

A00JF2E583DA 76 . • The main body is connected to such a network environment that the firmware can be downloaded on the internet using the ftp or http protocol. Maintenance 5.5 bizhub C550 Updating the firmware with the Internet ISW Outline 5. The “Internet ISW” will not operate under the following conditions. Internet ISW Set 1. See P.1 • [Internet ISW] is the system which gives the instruction for updating the firmware with the control panel of the main body. the firmware can be updated when the CE is at the user’s without firmware data. 2007 5.5.483 A. • Sub power switch is set to OFF. Touch [Internet ISW Set] which is available from [Internet ISW]. • Main power switch is set to OFF. With the Internet ISW.2 Service environment The following conditions are necessary for using the Internet ISW function.5. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver.5. 5. the network parameter. Call the Service Mode to the screen. so the main body will automatically receive the firmware from the program server over a network for updating.3 Preparations for firmware rewriting • For using the Internet ISW. program server address as well as firewall address need to be set to the main body. refer to Adjustment/Setting “Internet ISW”. • When the following setting is set to “ON”: [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • The main body has the job currently performing. 1.0 Feb.5. • For details of each setting item. 2.

Connection Setting Proxy Authentication • Set the login name and the password which • Perform the setting for accessing FTP server. Proxy Server • For connecting via proxy server. 3 1. Select [Connection Time Out]. 2. the client with restriction sets the port number. and enter the password on the on-screen keyboard. and set the time for the connection time out between 30 and 300 seconds. may be necessary for authentication when accessing to the proxy server. Select [Log-in Name]. Select [Port Number]. set the proxy server address and the port number. Step 0 1 2 Connecting by http Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. and select [ON]. Firmware upgrade NOTE • Settings such as server setting. 2. Select the [Server Address]. [Administrator Setting] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] B. 3. Connection Time-Out • Select [Connection Time-Out]. perform the setting for a proxy server. and select [ON]. and set the port number for the proxy server from 1 through 65535. select [Authentication]. and set the port num1. *PASV Mode: This mode is for transferring the file with FTP under the condition where communication is restricted such as inside the firewall. • When the following setting is set to “ON”. select name on the on-screen keyboard. and select [ON]. and select [ON]. • When connecting to the program server using a proxy server. “ON” cannot be selected on this setting. [PASV Mode]. When connecting in PASV mode. time for the connection time out from 1 through 60. 2007 3. Since with PASV mode. and set the proxy server address by IP addressing scheme or FQDN scheme. Protocol setting • It performs the setting concerning the protocol (ftp or http) for connecting to the Internet ISW. and set the accessing to the proxy server. and touch [END].0 Feb. 1. and enter the login 3. will be available by selecting “ON” on this setting. Touch [ON]. ⎯ Data Input Setting • Touch [FTP Setting]. Select [Password]. 2.Field Service Ver. When Authentication is necessary for ber for FTP server from 1 through 65535. data transmission port can be secured to enable the file transmission. 1. Connect Proxy • For connecting via proxy server. Select [Port Number]. 5. Connecting by ftp 4 5 77 Maintenance bizhub C550 . select [ON]. Data Input Setting • Touch [HTTP Setting]. etc.

Maintenance A00JF2E584DA 3. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. Forwarding access setting • To make the access setting for the program server which stores the firmware data. and touch [END]. Select [User ID]. 1. 5. Touch [END] to finish setting. and enter the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded on the on-screen keyboard. 2. NOTE • Enter the URL which matches to the protocol to be used. Select [Internet ISW] which is available from [Service Mode]. 4. Select [File Name]. and touch [END]. and touch [END]. Touch [Forwarding Access Setting]. 1. Select [URL]. and touch [END]. 7. When connecting to http http://(host name or IP address)/directory name or https://(host name or IP address)/directory name When connecting to ftp ftp://(host name or IP address)/directory name 6. Select [Password]. and enter the password which is necessary for connecting to the program server on the on-screen keyboard. 78 .0 Feb. and enter the user ID which is necessary for connecting to the program server on the on-screen keyboard. and enter the directory which stores the program server address and the firmware on the on-screen keyboard by URL method.5. 2007 bizhub C550 C.

ask the administrator for permission beforehand. A00JF2C557DA B. The main body will automatically start running.0 Feb. Touch [ISW Start]. 1. A00JF2E585DA 3. 1. Firmware upgrade A. . 2007 5. The message to indicate the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting or transferring data. During firmware updating 1.5.Field Service Ver. Perform the following setting. Select the F/W to be updated. 4.4 Firmware rewriting 5. 79 Maintenance bizhub C550 NOTE • When performing the Internet ISW. and it starts accessing the server. and start downloading. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Download] 2. Conducting rewriting on the control panel. • DO NOT turn OFF the main/sub power switch while downloading.

(2) Failing to update the firmware due to the network trouble 1. restart the main body. an error code and the message will be displayed. Completed or failed (1) Firmware updated normally 1. touch [settings] on the standby screen. Touch [Download]. and touch [OK]. 1. Maintenance 80 .0 Feb. • Firmware can be updated with the Compact flash with the main power switch OFF. 2.81 (3) Failing to update the firmware after downloading has started 1. NOTE • Return to the standby screen without fail after turning the main power switch OFF/ ON if the firmware is not updated. the ROM in the main body will be deleted. Firmware upgrade Field Service Ver. 2007 bizhub C550 C. restart the main body in auto or manual mode to display the outcome. Restart the main body in auto or manual mode. and touch [OK] to return to the main screen.5. Check the settings for the network by error codes. When updating failed to complete due to the trouble on connecting to the network. 3. See P. NOTE • For error codes. and check the Network settings again. and restart the Internet ISW. Once firmware updating has started. When it failed right after updating has started. refer to “Error code list for the Internet ISW”. When updating on the control panel. 2. When the Firmware is normally updated. and try updating again. and shift to the standby screen to retry downloading. It can be used with the firmware version before conducting updating.

inform the corresponding error code to KONICA MINOLTA. Confirming the firmware version Call the Service Mode to the screen.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. Firmware upgrade 5. Check if the firmware version is updated. inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. the message on the status and the error code will be displayed on the control panel. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem. • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. the error code will be sent to the CS Remote Care center. 3. 1. 2007 D. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • Check the status of the following setting. When updating with CS Remote Care.5. Select the [Firmware Version].5 • When a trouble occurred while conducting the Internet ISW and it was not normally connected. 2. <Sample display> A00JF2C556DA Error code Control panel Description Countermeasure • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. 1. Error code list for the Internet ISW 5. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem. 0x00000001 Illegal error on the control 0x00000010 Parameter error 81 Maintenance bizhub C550 .

again. • ISW being executed by other method. • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally. • Wait for the current job to be completed and try it again. 0x00005### 0x00006### • Check to see if FTP server operates normally. 0x00007### 0x1000 0100 0x10000101 0x10000102 • It cannot be accepted because the sub • Turn sub power switch ON and try it power switch is OFF. Error concerning the network • Others FTP error • Reply code when it failed to be connected • Check the network environment of the User. 0x00002### 0x00003### FTP error • Error reply code for the user command • Check to see if FTP server operates or pass command normally. etc. FTP error • Error reply code for CWD command FTP error • Error reply code for the TYPE command. 0x00004### • Check to see if FTP server operates normally. • Wait for about 30 minutes and try it again. 1. FTP error • Error reply code for the PORT command. user’s name. 0x00111000 Error concerning the network • Connection has been completed. Maintenance 0x00110010 0x00001### • Check to see if FTP server normally operates. Firmware upgrade Error code Field Service Ver. 2007 bizhub C550 Control panel Description Countermeasure • Check the User’s network environment.0 Feb. Error concerning the network • Disconnection occurred Error concerning the network • The network is not connected. • It cannot be accepted because of the job currently being executed. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Transfer access setting] • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally. • Check the network environment of the User. (LAN cable’s connection) • Check the status of the following setting. completed. 82 .5. • Check to see if the FTP server operates normally. Error concerning the network • Communication timeout.• Wait for the current Internet ISW to be cuted. 0x00111001 0x00111100 0x00111101 0x00111110 Error concerning the network • It cannot be connected to the server. • Check to see if FTP server operates normally. • Set the PASV mode to “Invalid”. FTP error • Error reply code for the PASV command. and try it again. • The Internet ISW is already being exe. • Check the IP address. FTP error • Error rely code for the RETR command.

it has to be in the “Failed” status unless the Internet ISW is successfully conducted. 1. inform the corresponding error code to the KONICA MINOLTA. • When it is identified to be the different type of F/W. • There is no space for F/W data to be downloaded. • The header of the file which has been read has an error. 0x10000107 File access error • The file downloaded has an error. 0x20000000 The temporary error when running the subset • When starting the Internet ISW in a normal program. [Service Mode] → [Internet ISW] → [Internet ISW setting] • If the above process does not solve the problem. with the subset program.0 Feb. (It failed to lock the operation. 83 Maintenance 0x10000108 • The area F/W is stored is destroyed. • Check sum error 0x10000104 0x10000106 • Check if the following setting is set to “Valid”. and another ISW is necessary. Firmware upgrade 0x10000103 • It failed to prohibit the job.) → It failed to lock the job because the operation is already locked with PSWC. • The size of the file to be downloaded is too large. • Check to see if the downloaded F/W is of the correct type. This code is used temporarily to make it in error status.Field Service Ver. etc. bizhub C550 Description Countermeasure . 2007 Error code Control panel 5. During the process by the subset program. the rebooting will start • Wait until ISW is automatically exeand the Internet ISW will be executed cuted on MFP side.

D. • Do not remove or loosen any of the red-painted screws in the field. • Where it is absolutely necessary to touch the ICs and other electrical components on the board. • The removal procedures given in the following omit the removal of connectors and screws securing the circuit board support or circuit board. be sure to ground your body. 1. Variable resistors on board NOTE • Do not turn the variable resistors on boards for which no adjusting instructions are given in Adjustment/Setting.0 Feb. a screw lock in blue or green series color is applied to the screws. 84 . be sure to apply a screw lock after the screws are tightened. • The screw lock is applied to the screws that may get loose due to the vibrations and loads created by the use of machine or due to the vibrations created during transportation. B. Paint-locked screws • To prevent loose screws. only one representative screw may be marked with the red paint. Maintenance C. Removal of PWBs CAUTION • When removing a circuit board or other electrical component.1 A. Other Field Service Ver. 2007 6. Red-painted screws • The screws which are difficult to be adjusted in the field are painted in red in order to prevent them from being removed by mistake. bizhub C550 Other Disassembly/adjustment prohibited items 6. It should also be noted that. • If the screw lock coated screws are loosened or removed. when two or more screws are used for a single part.6. refer to “Handling of PWBs” and follow the corresponding removal procedures.

2.97 P.Field Service Ver.100 P.89 P.97 P.94 P.99 P. Other 6.105 P.100 P.98 P.92 P.93 P.105 P.101 P. page P.97 P.95 P.111 P.103 P.99 P.97 P.0 Feb.2 6.96 P.97 P. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Disassembly/assembly/cleaning list (other parts) Disassembly/assembly parts list Section Upper front door Lower front door Upper front cover /1 Upper front cover /2 Right front cover Lower front cover Upper left cover Lower left cover Rear left cover Paper exit rear cover Upper rear cover /1 Upper rear cover /2 Lower rear cover Front right cover Interface cover Exterior parts Rear right cover /1 Rear right cover /2 Rear right cover /3 Rear right cover /4 Manual bypass tray rear cover IR front cover IR right cover IR left cover IR rear cover IR upper rear cover IR upper left cover IR upper rear cover /1 IR upper rear cover /2 original glass Control panel assy Exit tray (option: OT-503) Tray 1/2 Tray 3/4 LCD module Units PH unit Duplex unit Manual bypass tray unit CCD unit Original glass moving unit Part name Ref.96 P.106 P.97 P. 2007 6.90 P.98 P.99 P.92 P.95 P. 1.110 P.99 P.100 P.99 P.104 P.109 P.113 85 Maintenance bizhub C550 .97 P.1 No.101 P.100 P.

170 P.126 P.151 P.150 P.6.115 P.179 P.165 P.156 P.184 bizhub C550 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) Original glass position control board (OGPC) Inverter board (INVB) Image processing board (IPB) PH relay board (REYB/PH) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) DC power supply (DCPU) Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) Slide Interface board (REYB/SL) Fan motor relay board (REYB/FAN) Boards PCI board (PCIB) MFP board (MFPB) JMP board (JMPB) NVRAM board (NRB) High voltage unit/2 (HV2) Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) High voltage unit/1 (HV1) IH power supply (IHPU) Operation panel inverter board (OPINVB) Operation panel control board (OPCB) Operation panel I/O board (OPIOB) Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) ADU transport motor/1 (M31) ADU transport motor/2 (M32) Bypass tray up down motor (M28) Bypass paper feed motor (M27) Motors Scanner motor (M201) Original glass moving motor (M202) Waste toner agitating motor (M20) Transport motor (M25) Vertical transport motor (M26) Transfer belt motor (M1) Maintenance 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 86 . Other No.136 P.168 P.128 P.134 P.182 P.138 P.169 P.137 P.183 P.141 P.155 P. Section Glass step seat Scanner assy Hard disk Units IH coil (FH1) Intermediate transport roller assy Main drive unit LCC drive unit IR assy Part name Field Service Ver.124 P.171 P.142 P.0 Feb.145 P.167 P.146 P.162 P.117 P.176 P.137 P.120 P. 1.151 P.171 P.151 P.119 P.167 P. 2007 Ref.149 P.181 P.166 P.148 P.157 P. page P.140 P.

217 P.209 P.193 P. 2007 No.194 P.196 P.189 P.185 P.198 P.207 P.216 P.207 P.237 87 Maintenance bizhub C550 P.188 P.196 P.Field Service Ver.220 P.191 P.186 P.200 P. page P. Other Ref.0 Feb.209 P.192 P.209 P.231 P.202 P.209 P.215 P.216 P. IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) Scanner drive cable Tray 3/4 lift wire Fuse (F1) * For North America only 6.199 P. 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 Others Clutches Motors Section Part name Color PC drum motor (M16) Color developing motor (M17) 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) Registration motor (M2) Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) Fusing motor (M30) Switchback Motor (M33) Exit motor (M4) K PC drum motor (M18) K developing motor (M19) Tray 1 lift-up motor (M6) Tray 2 lift-up motor (M8) Tray 3 lift-up motor (M23) Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) Take-up motor (M22) Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) Cleaner motor (M38) 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14) Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) Toner supply motor/Y (M9) Toner supply motor/M (M10) Toner supply motor/C (M11) Toner supply motor/K (M12) Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) Horizontal transport clutch 1 (CL3) Horizontal transport clutch 2 (CL4) Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5) Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7) IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F).185 P.195 P.184 .194 P.213 P. 1.215 P.214 P.208 P.218 P.197 P.

247 P.245 P.0 Feb.6.2 bizhub C550 No.241 P.242 P.247 P. Other 6. 1.245 P.243 P.248 Maintenance 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 88 . page P.244 P.240 P.245 P.238 P.246 P.241 P.240 P.239 P.244 P.238 P.243 P.239 P. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 Tray 3 Tray 2 Tray 1 Field Service Ver.238 P.241 P.246 P.242 P.2.244 P.240 P. 2007 Cleaning parts list Section Processing section Transfer belt unit Tray 1 feed roller Tray 1 pick-up roller Tray 1 separation roller Tray 1 transport roller Tray 2 feed roller Tray 2 pick-up roller Tray 2 separation roller Tray 2 transport roller Tray 3 feed roller Tray 3 pick-up roller Tray 3 separation roller Tray 3 transport roller Tray 4 feed roller Tray 4 Tray 4 pick-up roller Tray 4 separation roller Tray 4 transport roller Manual bypass tray feed roller Manual bypass tray Manual bypass tray pick-up roller Manual bypass tray separation roller Transport section Intermediate transport roller Original glass Scanner rails IR Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) Lens CCD sensor Part name Ref.

3 6. 4. 2007 6. Remove the screw [1] and two spacers [2]. 1.1 Disassembly/assembly procedure Upper front door 2. [1] A00JF2C063DA 89 . [2] [1] A00JF2C061DA 3. Slide the upper front door [1] to the left to remove it. Other 6.Field Service Ver.0 Feb. bizhub C550 Maintenance [1] A00JF2C062DA 1. Open the upper front door. and remove the stopper [3]. Remove the C-clip [1].3.

Remove five screws [1]. 1.6. [2] [1] A00JF2C064DA 3.3. Open the lower front door. Remove the screw [1].0 Feb. 2007 Lower front door 2.2 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Remove the harness cover [1]. and remove the sensor cover [2]. Maintenance [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C065DA 4. Other 6. 1. [1] A00JF2C066DA 90 . and remove the stopper [1].

2007 6. [2] A00JF2C067DA [2] 6. 1.0 Feb. Other 5. and remove the waste toner full sensor assy [2]. and remove the waste toner agitating motor lock sensor assy [2]. [1] A00JF2C068DA [2] 7.Field Service Ver. and remove the ground terminal [2]. Remove the screw [1]. Remove the screw [1]. [1] A00JF2C069DA 91 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . Remove the screw [1].

1. and remove the upper front cover /2 [2].3. Remove two screws that have round leading ends [1]. Remove the screw [1].3 Upper front cover /1 2.6. Other Field Service Ver. 1. and remove the upper front cover /1 [2]. Remove the screw [1] one for each of hinge at the lower front door.0 Feb. and take out the lower front door [2]. [1] bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C070DA 6. Remove the tape that fastens the harness. Open the upper front door.4 Upper front cover /2 1. Remove the right front cover. [1] Maintenance [2] A00JF2C071DA 6. [1] A00JF2C072DA 92 .3. 2007 8. See P. 9.93 [2] 2.

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.5 Right front cover

6. Other

1. Remove the upper front door. See P.89 2. Open the upper right door. 3. Remove the front right cover. See P.101 4. Open the lower front door. 5. Remove two screws [1], and remove the stoppers [2] of the upper front door and the lower front door.

A00JF2C073DA

[2]

6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the right front cover [2].

[1]

A00JF2C074DA

93

Maintenance

[1]

[2]

bizhub C550

6. Other 6.3.6
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 Lower front cover

1. Slide out the tray 1/2. 2. Remove the front right cover. See P.101
[1] [1]

3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the lower front cover [2]. NOTE • Do not remove it in rush as it is connected to the harness.

[2]
A00JF2C075DA

Maintenance

[2]

[1]

4. Turn back the lower front cover [1] and remove four screws [2].

A00JF2C076DA

5. Remove two empty display lenses [1].

[1]
A00JF2C077DA

94

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.7 Upper left cover

6. Other

[2]

[1]

2. Remove six screws [1], and remove the upper left cover [2].

[1]
A00JF2C078DA

6.3.8

Lower left cover
Maintenance

1. Slide out the tray 1/2/3. 2. Remove the lower rear cover. See P.100 3. Remove two covers [1].

[1]

A00JF2C079DA

[1]

[2]

4. Remove eight screws [1], and remove the lower left cover [2].

[1]
A00JF2C080DA

95

bizhub C550

1. Open the lower front door.

6. Other 6.3.9
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 Rear left cover

1. Remove the upper left cover. See P.95 2. Remove the upper rear cover /2. See P.100 3. Remove three screws [1], and remove the rear left cover [2].

[1] Maintenance

[2]

A00JF2C081DA

6.3.10

Paper exit rear cover

1. Remove the rear left cover. See P.96
[2]

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2].

[1]

A00JF2C082DA

[2]

3. Remove two screws [1], and slide the paper exit rear cover [2] to remove it.

[1]

A00JF2C083DA

96

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.11

6. Other

IR rear cover, IR right cover, IR upper rear cover /1, IR upper rear cover /2
[5] [6] [9] [10] bizhub C550 [1]
A00JF2C084DA

[4]

[8]

[2]

[7]

[3] Maintenance

1. Remove three screws [1] and the shoulder screw [2], and take out the IR rear cover [3]. 2. Remove three screws [4] and take out the IR right cover [5]. 3. Remove two shoulder screws [6] and three screws [7], and take out the IR upper rear cover/1 [8]. 4. Remove two screws [9] and take out the IR upper rear cover/2 [10]. 6.3.12 IR left cover, IR upper front cover

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[6]

[1]
A00JF2C085DA

1. Remove three screws [1] and the shoulder screw [6], and remove the IR left cover [2]. 2. Remove the screw [3] and two shoulder screws [4], and take out the IR upper front cover [5].

97

6. Other 6.3.13
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 IR front cover

1. Remove the IR upper front cover. See P.97 2. Remove the upper front cover /1. See P.92 3. Remove the IR left cover. See P.97
[1]

4. Remove four screws [1], and remove the IR front cover [2]. NOTE • Do not remove it in rush as it is connected to the harness.

Maintenance

[2]

[1]
A00JF2C086DA

[1]

[3]

5. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. 6. Remove three screws [2], and remove the machine condition monitor board assy [3]. 7. Remove two empty display lenses.

[2]
A00JF2C087DA

6.3.14

Original glass

1. Remove the IR right cover. See P.97
[1] [2]

2. Remove each screw [1], and remove the original glass fixing bracket (near side/inmost side) [2].

[1] [2]
A00JF2C088DA

98

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

6. Other 3. Remove the original glass [1].
bizhub C550

[1]

A00JF2C089DA

6.3.15

Interface cover, rear right cover /1, rear right cover /2, rear right cover /3, rear right cover /4
[8] [9] [2] [8] [7] [3] [1] [7] [4] [3] Maintenance
A00JF2C090DA

[3] [5] [8] [6] [10] [11] [5]

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Unhook the three tabs [1] and take out the interface cover [2]. Remove three screws [3], and remove the rear right cover /1 [4]. Remove two screws [5], and remove the rear right cover /2 [6]. Remove two filters [7]. Open the upper right door. Remove three screws [8], and remove the rear right cover /3 [9]. Remove three screws [10], and remove the rear right cover /4 [11].

99

6. Other 6.3.16
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 Manual bypass tray rear cover
[2]

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the Manual bypass tray rear cover [2].

[1]

A00JF2C580DA

6.3.17

Upper rear cover /1, upper rear cover /2, lower rear cover
[3]

Maintenance

[1] [2] [1] [3] [4]

[6]

[5]

[5]

A00JF2C091DA

1. Remove four screws [1], and remove the upper rear cover /1 [2]. 2. Remove the rear right cover. See P.99 3. Remove the color toner filter. See P.46 4. Remove eight screws [3], and remove the upper rear cover /2 [4]. 5. Remove six screws [5], and remove the lower rear cover [6].

100

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.18 Front right cover

6. Other

[2]

2. Remove three screws [1], and remove the front right cover [2].

[1]

A00JF2C092DA

6.3.19

Control panel assy
Maintenance

1. Remove the upper front cover /1. See P.92 2. Remove the upper front cover /2. See P.92
[1]

3. Remove the cover [1].

A00JF2C093DA

[2]

4. Remove three screws [1] and take out the control panel support cover [2].

[1]

A00JF2C094DA

101

bizhub C550

1. Open the manual bypass tray door.

6. Other

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 5. Remove the screw [1], and remove the cover [2].

bizhub C550

[2]

[1]
A00JF2C095DA

[2]

6. Loosen two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2].

Maintenance

[1]

A00JF2C096DA

7. Remove three screws [1], and remove the control panel assy [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]
A00JF2C097DA

102

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.20 Exit tray (option: OT-503)

6. Other

1. Remove two screws [1], and remove the exit tray [2].

[1]

[2]
A00JF2C517DA

[1]

[2]

2. Remove the screw [1], and remove the connector cover [2].

A00JF2C518DA

[2]

[1]

3. Disconnect the connector [2] of the fan unit [1].

A00JF2C519DA

103

Maintenance

bizhub C550

6. Other

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 4. Remove two shoulder screws [1] and two screws [2], and remove the fan unit [3].

bizhub C550

[1] [3]

[2]

Maintenance

A00JF2C520DA

6.3.21

Tray 1/2

NOTE • Tray 1 and 2 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 1. 1. Slide out the tray.
[2]

2. Remove two screws [1], and remove the tray [2].

[1]
A00JF2C432DA

104

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.22 Tray 3/4

6. Other

1. Slide out the tray.
[2]

2. Remove two screws [1] and six screws [2], and remove the tray [3].

[1] [1]

[3]

[2]
A00JF2C433DA

6.3.23

LCD module

1. Remove the control panel assy. See P.101 2. Remove the operation panel control board. See P.166 3. Remove the operation panel I/O board. See P.167
[1]

4. Remove eleven screws [1] and take out the LCD module protective cover [2].

[1]

[2]
A00JF2C098DA

105

Maintenance

bizhub C550

NOTE • Tray 3 and 4 has the same mechanism. The procedure is mainly for the tray 3.

6. Other

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 5. Disconnect the flat cable [1], and remove the LCD module [2].

bizhub C550

[2]

[1]
A00JF2C099DA

6.3.24

PH unit CAUTION

Maintenance

• Do not replace the printer head unit while the power is ON. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness. • Do not disassemble or adjust the printer head unit. Laser beam generated during the above mentioned activity may cause blindness. 1. Remove the upper left cover. See P.95 2. Remove the lower left cover. See P.95
[1] [2] [1]

3. Remove twelve screws [1], and remove the PH unit protective shield [2]. NOTE • Do not remove it in rush as it is connected to the connector.

[1]
A00JF2C160DA

106

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

6. Other 4. Disconnect the connector [1].
bizhub C550

[1]
A00JF2C161DA

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]
A00JF2C100DA

6. Disconnect three connectors [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]
A00JF2C101DA

107

Maintenance

5. Unplug two flat cables [1] and removed if from the cable guide [2]. Remove the screw [3] to remove the ground terminal [4]. NOTE • Handle the flat cables carefully. Remove them from the cable guide with care while making it parallel to the guide.

6. Other

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 7. Remove the screw [1] and take out the plate spring [2].

bizhub C550

[2]

[1]

A00JF2C102DA

8. Hold up the PH unit [1] slightly and pull it toward to remove.

Maintenance

[1]
A00JF2C103DA

9. Select [Skew adjustment] after selecting [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Skew adjustment], and input the adjustment value that is put on the side of the replaced PH unit. See P.410

A00JF2C569DA

10. Execute [Skew adjustment] and [Skew adjustment reset] after selecting [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Skew adjustment]. 11. To reinstall, reverse the order of removal.

108

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.25 Duplex unit
[1] [3] [2]

6. Other

1. Remove two screws [1] and two tabs [2] to take out the duplex unit cover [3].

A00JF2C105DA

2. Open the duplex unit door. 3. Remove three screws [1].

[1]

A00JF2C106DA

4. Open the upper right door, and remove the tab [1].

[1]
A00JF2C107DA

109

Maintenance

bizhub C550

6. Other

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 5. Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the duplex unit.

bizhub C550

[1]
A00JF2C108DA

6.3.26

Manual bypass tray unit

1. Remove the rear right cover /4. See P.99
Maintenance

2. Disconnect two connectors [1], and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover [3].

[3] [2]

[1]
A00JF2C109DA

3. Remove two screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray rear cover [2].

[2]

[1]

A00JF2C110DA

110

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

6. Other 4. Remove six screws [1], and remove the manual bypass tray unit [2]. NOTE • Be sure not to drop the unit when removing the screw.

[1]

[2] [1]

A00JF2C111DA

A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the original glass. See P.98
[1]

2. Remove nine screws [1], and remove the image processing board protective shield [2].
[2]

[1]
A00JF2C156DA

111

Maintenance

6.3.27

CCD unit

bizhub C550

6. Other

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 3. Remove the flat cable [1]. 4. Remove four screws [2], and take out the CCD unit [3].

bizhub C550

[2]

[3]

[2]

[1]
A00JF2C113DA

B. Reinstall procedure 1. Set the CCD unit to the mounting position at the center of the scale, and fix it with four screws.
Maintenance

A00JF2C115DA

2. Reinstall the original glass. 3. Turn ON the main power switch and sub power switch. 4. Carry out the [Cross Direction Adjustment]. If the specifications are not met, loosen the CCD unit mounting screws and move the CCD unit in the sub scan direction as necessary. See P.406 NOTE • Hold the CCD unit by hand when moving it. NEVER use a screwdriver or similar tool to tap to move it, as a varied distance between the CCD sensor and lens results. • When CCD unit is replaced, [Scan Calibration] and [Line Mag Setting] under [System 2] available in Service Mode should be OFF.

112

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 6.3.28 Original glass moving unit

6. Other

A. Removal procedure 1. Remove the IR left cover. See P.97 2. Remove the IR front cover. See P.98 3. Remove the original glass. See P.98 4. Remove the original glass moving motor. See P.179 5. Remove the glass step sheet. See P.115
[1] [2]

6. Remove four screws [1], and remove the original glass moving unit cover [2].

[1]
A00JF2C416DA

[4]

[3]

[3]

[4]

7. Remove the C-ring [1] and the collar [1] one each, and remove the belts [3] of both sides of the original glass mounting unit out of the gear [4]. NOTE • Be sure the direction of the collar [2] to be as shown in the left illustration when mounting it.

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2] [2]

A00JF2C417DA

113

Maintenance

bizhub C550

[1] 2.0 Feb. Reinstall procedure NOTE • When replacing the original glass moving unit. Other Field Service Ver. and remove the original glass moving unit [2]. • Write down the type and numbers of the spacer [3]. The same numbers of the spacer of the same type with what is written should be mounted when replacing the original glass moving unit. 1. 1. Maintenance [2] [3] A00JF2C419DA B. 2007 8. take out the original glass moving unit cover. NOTE • Use care not to lose the spacer [3] mounted on each screw. Remove four screws [1]. [2] [1] A00JF2C420DA 114 . Clean the inside of the glass well since it cannot be easily cleaned once it is mounted. When mounting the new original glass moving unit. clean the glass surface of the original glass moving unit. Set the spacers [1] and mount the original glass moving unit [2] to the machine. Disconnect the connector [1]. NOTE • Make sure to set the spacers [1] which are exact same type and number as before removing the original glass moving unit. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C418DA [3] [1] 9.6.

30 6.29 Glass step sheet A. See P. Perform the following setting. 6. Tighten four screws [1] fully. Removal procedure 1. 2007 6. [Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj] See the DF-611 Service Manual. Remove the IR left cover. 1. [1] A00JF2C421DA 5. Other 3. See P. Follow the removing procedures in the opposite steps.Field Service Ver.0 Feb.3.503 A00JF3C013DA 4. [1] A00JF2C398DA 115 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . and remove the glass step sheet [2]. See P. Remove three screws [1]. Tighten four screws [1] loosely and adjust the height of the original glass moving unit.97 [2] 2.

and mount it with three screws [2].0 Feb. Other B.30 116 . [1] [1] [2] [2] A00JF2C400DA 3. [Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj] See the DF-611 Service Manual. Perform the following setting. Mount the glass step sheet [1] to the original glass moving unit [2]. NOTE • Set the sheet [3] under the cover of the original glass moving unit [4]. 2007 1. bizhub C550 [4] [4] [3] [3] A00JF2C399DA Maintenance [3] 2. See P. • Use care not to bend the edge of the glass step sheet.6. Reinstall procedure [1] [2] Field Service Ver. 1. Set the points [1] of the glass step sheet to the edge of the scale plate on the original glass moving unit.

Remove two screws [1]. bizhub C550 A. Remove the original glass. See P. Remove two screws [1]. 1. [2] A00JF2C423DA 117 Maintenance [1] 3. Reinstall procedure [1] 1. [1] A00JF2C422DA [2] A00JF2C423DA B. Fix the exposure lamp [2] to the scanner assy with the two screws [1]. Other [2] 2.3. Removal procedure 1.30 Scanner assy 6. and remove the scanner assy [2]. and remove the exposure lamp [2] from the scanner assy.98 .0 Feb. 2007 6.Field Service Ver.

1. [Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj] See the DF-611 Service Manual. Perform the following setting. tighten the two screws [2]. Slide the mirror unit until it hits the end of the IR right frame. 5. [2] [2] [1] A00JF2C425DA 6.0 mm 4. When the length is ensured. Tighten the scanner assy [2] with the two screws [1] temporarily.6. See P. bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C422DA 3. Provide the length of 21. Move the scanner assy and the mirror unit to the end of the right. 2007 2.0 mm between the end of the left indentation [1] on the scanner assy upper surface and the end of the IR right frame upper surface.30 118 . Other Field Service Ver. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C424DA 21.0 Feb.

31 Hard disk 6.3. and remove the hard disk drive assy [2].148 . Remove four screws [1]. NOTE • When the hard disk is replaced. See P. 2007 6. select [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.0 Feb. Open the printer control board assy and put it to the hook of the machine frame. See the steps 1 to 3 of slide interface board removing procedure.] → [HDD Format] in Service Mode for logical format. Remove four screws [1]. [2] [1] A00JF2C118DA 119 Maintenance [2] 3. [1] A00JF2C116DA [1] A00JF2C117DA [1] 4.Field Service Ver. bizhub C550 1. 1. Disconnect the connector [1]. Other 2. and remove the hard disk drive [2].

D: The harness with gray color is installed with the M3 screw. See the steps 1 to 12 of IH power supply removing procedure. Remove the fusing unit. Remove the IH power supply protective shield.32 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. B: The harness with orange color is installed with the M4 screw.3. B C D A E Maintenance F A00JF2C460DA A: The harness with the longest orange color is installed with the M4 screw. 1. See P. See P.53 2. 1. F: The harness with black color is installed with the M4 screw.162 120 . The terminal leakage may cause fire. Other 6.0 Feb. C: The harness with orange color is installed with the M3 screw.6. E: The harness with black color is installed with the M4 screw. 2007 IH coil (FH1) Warning • Tighten the screws of the lead wire terminal of the IH power supply fully to the direction specified.

[2] A00JF2C224DA 121 Maintenance 4. 2007 6. Other 3. bizhub C550 [1] . Remove three screws [1]. and remove the exit tray front cover [2]. 1. and remove the exit tray right cover [2]. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness.Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF2C120DA [1] [2] A00JF2C570DA [1] 5.0 Feb. Remove the screw [1].

bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C225DA [2] 7.0 Feb. and remove the metal plate [2]. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C226DA [1] 8. 2007 6. Remove the screw [1]. [2] A00JF2C227DA 122 . 1. Disconnect the connector [1]. and remove the harness from the harness guide [2].6. and remove the harness guide [2]. Other Field Service Ver. Remove the screw [1].

and remove the ground terminal [2]. [1] A00JF2C121DA 10. Other 9. Remove the fixture of the IH coil [1] as shown in the left illustration. Remove the screw [1].0 Feb.Field Service Ver. 2007 6. [1] [2] A00JF2C122DA 11. Remove the harness from two edge covers [2]. [1] A00JF2C123DA 123 Maintenance bizhub C550 . 1.

remove the IH coil [2]. 1. and slide the lower right door [2] to the direction as shown in the illustration to remove it. Other Field Service Ver.101 4. See P. See P.99 3.3. Remove three screws [1].6.0 Feb. Remove the rear right cover /2 and rear right cover /4. Removing the harness [1]. [2] [1] A00JF2C125DA 124 .33 Intermediate transport roller assy 1. 5. 2. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C124DA Maintenance 6. Open the manual bypass tray door. Open the lower right door. Remove the front right cover. 2007 12.

Remove three screws [1].0 Feb. Disconnect the connector [1]. 2007 6. 1. and remove the harness from four wire saddles [2] and two edge covers [3]. [3] [2] [1] A00JF2C126DA [2] 7. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C127DA 125 bizhub C550 . and slide the intermediate transport roller assy [2] to the direction as shown in the illustration to remove it. Other 6.Field Service Ver.

[2] A00JF2C129DA 126 . See the steps 12 to 15 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. See P.193 6. Remove the K PC drum motor. See P. See P.157 [2] 10. See P.53 2. See P.48 3.156 8. See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure.0 Feb. Remove the K developing motor.185 5. and remove the harness guide cover [1]. Remove the service EEPROM board. Remove the fusing unit.6. See P. Remove the color PC drum motor. Remove the screw [1].194 7. Unhook the tab [1]. Remove the transfer belt motor. and remove the harness guide [2]. See P. Other 6.34 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. See P.202 9. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy. 2007 Main drive unit Maintenance 1. 1. Remove the color developing motor.3. [1] A00JF2C128DA [1] 11.184 4. See P. Remove two harness guides on the high voltage unit/1.

2007 6. Other 12.Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. Remove four screws [1]. and remove the gear [2]. Remove the harness from eight wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. and remove the fusing pressure retraction unit [2]. [2] A00JF2C132DA 127 Maintenance bizhub C550 [3] [1] . [2] A00JF2C131DA [1] 14. Remove the E-ring [1]. [2] [1] A00JF2C130DA [1] 13. and disconnect the connector [3].

make sure to adjust the positioning of the PC drive gear when mounting the color PC drum motor. Remove the intermediate transport roller assy. Other Field Service Ver. See P. See P. [1] bizhub C550 [2] A00JF2C133DA [1] 16.6.0 Feb. Remove nine screws [1]. See the steps 1 to 9 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. 2007 15. 1. and remove the main drive unit [2]. Remove three screws [1]. Remove four screws [1].512 6. and remove the lower right cover [2]. and remove the metal plate [2].3. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy.35 LCC drive unit 1.157 2. See P.124 [2] 3. Maintenance [2] [1] A00JF2C134DA NOTE • When the color PC drum motor is removed to take out the main drive unit. [1] A00JF2C135DA 128 .

the C-clip [2]. 2007 6. and remove the harness from two edge covers [1].0 Feb. Disconnect two connectors [2]. Remove the harness from six wire saddles [1]. Other [1] [3] A00JF2C136DA [1] 5. 1. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C137DA 6. Remove two E-rings [1]. . [1] A00JF2C138DA 129 bizhub C550 [4] [2] [1] 4. the bearing [3] and the gear [4].Field Service Ver.

Remove three screws [1].6. Disconnect three connectors [1].0 Feb. [2] A00JF2C141DA 130 . 2007 7. 1. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2]. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C140DA [1] 9. and remove the metal plate [2]. bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C139DA 8. Other Field Service Ver.

and remove the cover [3]. 2007 6. 1. 13. Other 10. and remove the ground terminal [2].Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [2]. Remove the screw [1]. [1] A00JF2C144DA 131 Maintenance bizhub C550 [2] . [2] [1] A00JF2C143DA [3] [2] 12. [1] A00JF2C142DA [1] 11. Remove the harness from seven wire saddles [1] and edge cover [2]. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].0 Feb.

Maintenance A00JF2C146DA [2] [1] [2] 16. [2] [3] [2] A00JF2C606DA 132 . Disconnect the connector [1].0 Feb. [1] bizhub C550 A00JF2C145DA [1] 15. Other Field Service Ver. 1. 17. 2007 14. Remove seven screws [2]. and remove the power supply code unit [3]. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1]. Remove three wire saddles [1].6.

[1] [1] A00JF2C147DA [2] 19. Remove seven screws [1] of the LCC drive unit. Other 18. Remove the LCC drive unit [2] clearing the harness [1]. 1.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. 2007 [1] 6. [1] A00JF2C148DA 133 Maintenance bizhub C550 .

Other 6. 1.101 8.3.100 7. 2007 IR assy 1. See P.36 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Remove the screw [1].6. [1] A00JF2C427DA 134 . Remove the control panel assy. Remove the IR left cover. See P. and remove the harness from six wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. Disconnect two connectors [3].97 6. Remove the IR upper rear cover /1 and the IR upper rear cover /2.97 5.98 3.97 4. See P.0 Feb. Maintenance [3] [2] [1] A00JF2C426DA [2] 9. and remove the ground terminal [2]. See P. See P.97 2. Remove the IR rear cover. See P. Remove the IR front cover. Remove the upper rear cover /1 and the upper rear cover /2. See P. Remove the IR right cover.

[1] A00JF2C566DA [1] 12. A00JF2C429DA 135 Maintenance bizhub C550 [2] . 1. Disconnect the connector [2].Field Service Ver. and remove the harness from five wire saddles [1]. [1] A00JF2C428DA [2] 11. 2007 6.0 Feb. Other 10. Loosen the two screws [1] and remove the connector [2]. Remove three screws [1] that fix the IR cable.

1. [1] bizhub C550 [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C430DA Maintenance 6.0 Feb. [1] [2] A00JF2C149DA 3. [1] A00JF2C150DA 136 . Remove the IR upper rear cover.37 Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) 1.97 [2] 2.6. Other Field Service Ver. Disconnect five connectors [1] and the flat cable [2]. Remove four screws [1]. 2007 13.3. and remove IR assy [2]. and remove the scanner relay board [2]. Remove eight screws [1]. See P.

3. Disconnect three connectors [1]. Remove the IR upper rear cover. Remove two screws [1]. [1] A00JF2C153DA 137 Maintenance 3.0 Feb. Remove the IR upper rear cover. and remove the original glass position control board [2]. Other 2.38 Original glass position control board (OGPCB) 6.3.97 [2] [1] 2. [1] A00JF2C151DA [2] [1] A00JF2C152DA 6. See P. See P.39 Inverter board (INVB) 1. 1. bizhub C550 1. Disconnect eight connectors [1] and the flat cable [2].Field Service Ver. 2007 6.97 .

Remove four screws [1] to take out the Inverter board assy [2]. and remove the image processing board protective shield [2]. 2007 3.40 Image processing board (IPB) 1. 1. Other Field Service Ver.0 Feb.6. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C155DA 6. Remove four screws [1]. See P. bizhub C550 [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C154DA [2] 4.98 [1] 2. [2] [1] A00JF2C156DA 138 . Remove nine screws [1]. Remove the original glass. and remove the inverter board [2].3.

2007 6.Field Service Ver.0 Feb. 1. Other 3. [1] A00JF2C579DA 139 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . A00JF2C157DA [2] 4. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the image processing board [1]. unplug the IR cable connector [2]. [1] A00JF2C158DA 5. Remove the two bolts [1]. Loosen two screws [1].

0 Feb. and remove the PH unit protective shield [2]. make sure to update the firmware. See P. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C159DA 6. Remove twelve screws [1]. NOTE • When the image processing board is replaced. [1] A00JF2C160DA 4.41 PH relay board (REYB/PH) Maintenance 1. NOTE • Do not remove it in rush as it is connected to the connector. [1] A00JF2C161DA 140 . 1. and remove the image processing board [2].6.3.95 [1] [2] [1] 3. Remove six screws [1].95 2. Other Field Service Ver. See P. 2007 6. Disconnect the connector [1]. Remove the upper left cover. Remove the lower left cover.

4. See P.100 2.42 Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) 1. and remove the paper feed/transport drive board protective shield [4]. Remove seven screws [3]. Remove five screws [1]. 1. Remove the lower rear cover. See P. and remove the PH relay board [2]. and remove the metal plate [2]. [1] A00JF2C162DA [2] 6.3. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the PH relay board [1]. Remove two screws [1]. 2007 6. [3] A00JF2C166DA 141 Maintenance bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF2C163DA 6.99 [1] [2] [4] 3.0 Feb. Remove the rear right cover /2. Other 5.

1.43 DC power supply (DCPU) 1. Remove six screws [2]. Other [1] bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Remove two wire saddles [1]. and remove the metal plate [2]. [3] A00JF2C166DA 142 . Remove the lower rear cover. 5.99 3. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the paper feed/transport drive board [1].0 Feb. Maintenance [1] [3] A00JF2C165DA 6. Remove the rear right cover /2.95 [1] [2] [4] 4. 7.6. 2007 5.100 2. Remove the lower left cover. Remove two screws [1]. A00JF2C164DA [2] 6. Remove seven screws [3]. See P.3. See P. See P. and remove the paper feed/transport drive board protective shield [4]. and remove the paper feed/transport drive board [3].

and remove the DC power supply protective shield [2]. [1] [2] A00JF2C167DA [3] [2] 7. Remove eighteen screws [1]. [1] A00JF2C168DA [1] [1] 8. 2007 6. 1. and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3]. Disconnect the connector [1]. and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].Field Service Ver. Other 6. [1] [2] A00JF2C169DA 143 Maintenance bizhub C550 .0 Feb. Disconnect the connector [1].

Other Field Service Ver. Remove all the connectors on the DC power supply [1]. [1] A00JF2C172DA 144 . 1. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C170DA 10. 2007 9.0 Feb. Remove the harness from five wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2].6. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C171DA 11.

2007 12.Field Service Ver.142 connector: red harness: black connector: white harness: black [1] 2. Clearing the harness. NOTE • For reinstallation.3. connector: red harness: white connector: white harness: white A00JF2E598DA 145 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . Remove all the connectors from the relay drive board [1]. Other [1] A00JF2C173DA 13. Remove the DC power supply. [1] A00JF2C174DA 6. See P. position the connectors so that the harness hangs down from the connectors. Remove five screws [1]. 1. 6.44 Relay drive board (REDB) 1. hold up the DC power supply [1] to remove it.0 Feb.

See P. Other Field Service Ver.3. Remove five screws [1]. 2007 3.6.100 Maintenance [2] [1] 2.0 Feb.45 Printer control board (PRCB) 1. and remove the printer control board protective shield [2]. 1. bizhub C550 [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C176DA 6. [1] A00JF2C177DA 146 . and remove the relay drive board [2]. Remove the upper rear cover /2. Remove fifteen screws [1].

Remove all the connectors on the printer control board [1]. NOTE • When reinstall the harness. and remove the printer control board [2]. NOTE • When the printer control board is to be replaced. [1] A00JF2C180DA 147 Maintenance bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. [1] [1] A00JF2C178DA [1] 4. 2007 [2] 6. Remove eight screws [1]. set the ferrite core [2] and route the harness as shown in the illustration on the left. 1. rewriting the firmware to the latest one. Other 3. Remove the harness from eleven wire saddles [1].0 Feb. A00JF2C179DA [2] [1] 5.

See P. and hold up the printer control board assy [2] to remove it. [1] A00JF2C181DA [1] Maintenance [2] [3] 3. 1. Other 6. Remove all the connectors and flat cables on the slide interface board [1].6. Remove nine screws [1]. 2007 Slide interface board (REYB/SL) 1. Open the printer control board assy [1] to the direction as shown in the illustration put the two tabs [2] to the hook of the machine frame [3]. A00JF2C183DA 148 . A00JF2C182DA [1] 4.100 [2] [1] 2.3. Remove the upper rear cover /2.46 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.0 Feb.

and remove the slide interface board [2]. 6.47 Fan motor relay board (REYB/FAN) 1. Other [1] A00JF2C184DA [1] [2] 6. Open the printer control board assy and put it to the hook of the machine frame. Disconnect the connector [1]. See P. Disconnect two connectors [1]. See the steps 1 to 3 of slide interface board removing procedure.3. 2007 5.148 2.Field Service Ver. A00JF2C185DA 6. 1. Remove five screws [1].0 Feb. [1] A00JF2C186DA 149 Maintenance bizhub C550 .

and remove the MFP board protective shield [2].100 2. Remove fifteen screws [1].99 [2] [1] 3. and remove the fan motor relay board [2]. [2] A00JF2C187DA 6.3. See P.48 PCI board (PCIB) Maintenance 1. Other [1] bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Remove the rear right cover /1. Remove three screws [1]. Remove the upper rear cover /2. and remove the PCI board assy [2]. See P. [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C189DA 150 . 1. Remove three screws [1]. 2007 3.0 Feb.6. [1] A00JF2C188DA 4.

Disconnect the flat cable [1] and the connector [2].Field Service Ver.150 [2] 2. [1] A00JF2C192DA 151 Maintenance .49 MFP board (MFPB) 1. 1. and remove the PCI board [2]. Remove the PCI board assy. Other 5. 2007 6.3. Remove six screws [1]. Remove the support parts [1]. bizhub C550 A00JF2C190DA [1] [2] 6. See P. [1] A00JF2C191DA 6.0 Feb. See the steps 1 to 4 of PCI board removing procedure.

0 Feb. Remove six screws [1] and six bolts [2]. Disconnect two connectors [3]. and remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover [2]. Slide the MFP board [2] toward the direction shown by the arrow and remove the connector. [1] A00JF2C196DA 152 . 2007 3. Pull the MFP board [2] to the front and remove it. Maintenance [1] [2] A00JF2C195DA [2] [1] 5. 1.6. 6. Other Field Service Ver. and remove the port bracket [3]. 7. Remove ten screws [1] of the MFP board. bizhub C550 [2] [3] [1] A00JF2C194DA [1] [3] 4.

NOTE • When the MFP board is to be replaced. Other 8. Remove two memories [1] on the MFP board. [1] A00JF2C200DA 153 Maintenance bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. 1. [1] A00JF2C199DA 10. 2007 6. rewriting the firmware to the latest one.0 Feb. [1] A00JF2C198DA 9. Remove the JMP board [1] on the MFP board. Remove the NVRAM board [1] on the MFP board.

1.100 2. See P.0 Feb. 2007 How to open PWB box 1.3. See P. and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge cover [3].50 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Remove the upper rear cover /2.99 [3] 3.6. Disconnect two connectors [1]. [1] Maintenance [2] A00JF2C203DA [1] [2] 4. Remove the rear right cover /1. [1] A00JF2C205DA 154 . Remove five screws and open the PWB box [2]. Other 6.

Field Service Ver. 2007 [1] 6. Other NOTE • When closing the PWB box [1]. [1] A00JF2C206DA 155 Maintenance bizhub C550 . make sure that the edge cover [2] is closed as shown in the illustration on the left. 1. Open the PWB box.0 Feb.51 High voltage unit/2 (HV2) 1. See P. Remove all the connectors on the high voltage unit/2 [1].154 2. [2] A00JF2C599DA 6.3.

and remove two harness guides [2]. and remove the high voltage unit/2 [3].0 Feb.52 Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) 1.154 [1] [2] 2. [3] A00JF2C209DA 156 . Maintenance [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C208DA 6.6. See P. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2]. Remove five screws [1]. Other Field Service Ver. Open the PWB box. bizhub C550 [2] [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C207DA [3] [1] 4.3. 1. and take out the service EEPROM board [3]. 2007 3. Remove five screws [1] and four tapping screws [2].

rear right cove /3 and rear right cove / 4. [1] A00JF2C211DA 157 Maintenance bizhub C550 .3. rear right cove /2. See P.53 High voltage unit/1 (HV1) 6. Remove the rear right cove /1.Field Service Ver. upper rear cover /2 and lower rear cover.100 2. See P. 2007 6.142 4. [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C210DA 6. Remove the upper rear cove /1. Other 1. 1.154 [2] [1] 5.0 Feb. See P.99 3. Open the PWB box. See P. Remove the DC power supply. Remove all connectors and the flat cable on the paper feed/transport drive board [1]. Remove the harness from eight wire saddles [1] and three edge covers [2].

Maintenance A00JF2C213DA [2] 9. 2007 7. [1] A00JF2C214DA 158 . bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C212DA 8.6. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. 1. Other Field Service Ver. Remove four screws [1].0 Feb. and remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy [2]. Disconnect eight connectors.

Other 10. Remove five cable holders [1] and clear the flat cables [2]. [2] A00JF2C215DA 11. [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C216DA [1] 12.Field Service Ver. Remove four screws [1] and take out the reinforcing plate [2].0 Feb. [2] A00JF2C217DA 159 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . Disconnect four connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/1 [1]. 1. 2007 6.

and remove the harness guide [2]. Disconnect four connectors [1]. Remove four screws [1]. [1] A00JF2C246DA 160 . Other Field Service Ver. hang the harness [2] on the hook. 2007 13. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C219DA 15.6. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C218DA [1] 14. Be sure to take the slack out of the harness. Disconnect four connectors [1]. 1.0 Feb. NOTE • When reinstalling the connectors.

0 Feb. [2] A00JF2C221DA 18. Other 16. 1. [1] A00JF2C222DA 161 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . Disconnect the connector [2] on the high voltage unit/1 [1].Field Service Ver. Remove nine screws [1]. and remove the harness guide [2]. [2] A00JF2C220DA [1] 17. 2007 6. Remove three screws [1].

B C D A E F A00JF2C460DA A: The harness with the longest orange color is installed with the M4 screw. Remove the upper front cover /2. 2007 19. Other Field Service Ver. The terminal leakage may cause fire. bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C223DA 6.6. 1. Remove the upper front cover /1. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the high voltage unit/1 [2].3. D: The harness with gray color is installed with the M3 screw.92 162 .92 2. See P.0 Feb. F: The harness with black color is installed with the M4 screw. See P. E: The harness with black color is installed with the M4 screw.54 IH power supply (IHPU) Warning Maintenance • Tighten the screws of the lead wire terminal of the IH power supply fully to the direction specified. 1. B: The harness with orange color is installed with the M4 screw. C: The harness with orange color is installed with the M3 screw.

Disconnect two connectors [1]. and remove the IH power supply protective shield [2].93 4.0 Feb. Remove the right front cover. 2007 3. Remove the screw [1]. See P. 1. [1] A00JF2C230DA 163 bizhub C550 . [1] A00JF2C228DA 6. Remove the paper exit rear cover. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C229DA [2] [1] 7. Other 5. Remove nine screws [1].Field Service Ver.96 6. See P.

Maintenance [1] A00JF2C232DA 164 . Disconnect two connectors [1]. 1.6. bizhub C550 [1] [1] A00JF2C231DA 9. Remove six screws [1] and remove the terminals of each harness.0 Feb. 2007 8. Other Field Service Ver.

101 [2] [1] 2. and remove the IH power supply [2]. [1] A00JF2C235DA 165 Maintenance 6. and take out the operation panel inverter board [3].Field Service Ver. 1. See P. [1] A00JF2C233DA 1. Remove nine screws [1]. Remove two screws [1] and two connectors [2].55 Operation panel inverter board (OPINVB) bizhub C550 [1] [2] . and remove the control panel lower cover [2].0 Feb. Other 10. 2007 6. [1] A00JF2C234DA [2] [3] [2] 3. Remove five screws [1]. Remove the control panel assy.3.

Remove the control panel lower cover.101 2. Remove the control panel assy. See the step 2 of operation panel control board removing procedure. [1] A00JF2C238DA 166 . 2007 Operation panel control board (OPCB) 1. [1] A00JF2C237DA [2] 5. Remove four screws [1] and take out the control panel support Assy [2]. [1] A00JF2C236DA Maintenance [2] 4. Disconnect three connectors [1] and two flat cables [2].56 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.3. Remove five screws [1].0 Feb. See P. and remove the operation panel control board cover [2]. 1. Other 6.6. See P.166 [2] [1] 3.

Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2]. 3.3. Remove two screws [3].3. [4] [1] A00JF2C310DA 167 bizhub C550 [2] .57 Operation panel I/O board (OPIOB) 1.0 Feb. Other 6. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the edge cover [2].104 [3] [2] [3] 2. Remove two bolts [1] and three screws [2]. Remove the tray1/2. and take out the operation panel I/O board [4] as holding the sub power switch [3]. [3] [4] [2] A00JF2C240DA 6. and take out the operation panel control board [3]. take out the tray1 lift-up motor assy [4] and turn it around. See P.58 Paper size detect board/1 (PSDTB/1) 1. [3] [1] A00JF2C239DA 6.Field Service Ver. 2007 6. See P.105 Maintenance [1] 2. Remove the LCD module. 1.

Unhook two tabs [2] and remove the paper size detect board/1 assy [3].3. [1] [2] [2] A00JF2C242DA [1] 6.0 Feb. and remove the paper size detect board/1 [2]. Disconnect the connector [1]. 2007 4. take out the tray2 lift-up motor assy [4] and turn it around. Other [3] bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 3. Remove the lever [1].104 [3] [2] [3] 2. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C243DA 6. 1. [4] [1] A00JF2C604DA 168 .6.59 Paper size detect board/2 (PSDTB/2) 1. See P. Remove the tray1/2. 5. Remove two screws [3]. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the edge cover [2].

[2] [1] A00JF2C247DA 169 Maintenance bizhub C550 [3] [1] . Remove the duplex unit. 1. and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2] and the edge cover [3]. and remove the paper size detect board/2 [2].Field Service Ver. Disconnect the connector [1]. Unhook the tabs [2] and remove the paper size detect board/2 assy [3].60 ADU transport motor/1 (M31) 1.3.0 Feb. 2007 6.109 [3] 2. 5. Other 4. [2] [2] A00JF2C245DA [1] 6. See P. [2] A00JF2C243DA 6. Disconnect the connector [1]. Remove the lever [1].

6. and remove the ADU transport motor/1 [2]. Remove two screws [1]. See P. 2007 3. Remove the duplex unit. bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C248DA [2] 4. 1. Disconnect the connector [1]. Other Field Service Ver. Remove three screws [1]. and remove the ADU transport motor/1 assy [2].61 ADU transport motor/2 (M32) 1.3. [1] A00JF2C250DA 170 . Maintenance [1] A00JF2C249DA 6.0 Feb.109 2.

and remove the ADU transport motor/2 assy [2]. See P. and remove the ADU transport motor/2 [2].0 Feb. Remove two screws [1]. and remove the manual bypass tray upper cover [2]. Remove the manual bypass tray unit.110 [1] 2.62 Bypass tray up down motor (M28) / bypass paper feed motor (M27) 1. [1] A00JF2C251DA [2] 4. Remove two screws [1]. Remove six screws [1]. [1] A00JF2C252DA 6. [2] A00JF2C253DA 171 Maintenance bizhub C550 [2] .3.Field Service Ver. Other 3. 2007 6. 1.

Remove seven screws [1]. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C254DA [1] 4. 1. and remove the metal plate [2]. and remove the hinge [3]. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. Other Field Service Ver. Remove two E-rings [1] and the shaft [2]. 2007 3. [1] [2] A00JF2C256DA 172 .6.0 Feb. Maintenance [1] [3] [2] A00JF2C255DA [1] 5.

Disconnect two connectors [1]. <3> Secure the harness to the harness guide.Field Service Ver. Other 6. <1> Fit the harness into the place as shown in the illustration on the left. <2> <3> A00JF2C600DA 173 Maintenance . bizhub C550 A00JF2C257DA [1] [1] <1> NOTE • When reinstalling the harness and connectors which were removed in step 6.0 Feb. 1. 2007 6. route the harnesses following the procedure shown in the illustrations on the left. <2> Insert the two connectors and route the harness as shown in the illustration on the left.

NOTE • Do no pull forcedly as the harness is connected. and remove the metal plate [2]. [1] Maintenance [1] A00JF2C259DA 9. [2] bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C258DA 8. Pull the manual bypass tray drive assy [1] to the direction shown as the illustration to remove it.6. Remove six screws [1]. Remove four screws [1].0 Feb. Other Field Service Ver. 2007 7. 1. [1] A00JF2C260DA 174 .

[1] [3] A00JF2C262DA [2] 13. and remove the bypass paper feed motor [2]. Remove the screw [1] and the connector [2]. [1] A00JF2C263DA 175 Maintenance bizhub C550 . 2007 6. Remove two screws [1]. Disconnect the connector [3]. 1.0 Feb. and take out the bypass tray up down motor [3]. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1] and the edge cover [2].Field Service Ver. Other 10. 12. [1] [2] [3] A00JF2C261DA [2] 11.

6.97 [1] [4] 3. 1. Remove the IR upper rear cover /1.3. Other 6. See P.97 2. [1] [1] A00JF2C265DA 176 . [2] Maintenance [3] A00JF2C264DA 5. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1]. 4.0 Feb. See P. Then remove the screw [3] to take out the 20 degree sensor assy [4].63 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 2007 Scanner motor (M201) A. Remove the connector [1] and take out the harnesses from two wire saddles [2]. Remove the IR rear cover. Removal procedure 1.

2007 6.0 Feb. bizhub C550 [1] . [2] [3] [1] A00JF2C268DA 177 Maintenance [1] 7. [2] [1] A00JF2C266DA [2] A00JF2C267DA 8. Other 6. Disconnect the connectors [1] and remove three screws [2]. 1. Remove the spring [1] and the belt [2]. and take out the scanner motor assy [3]. Remove six screws and take out the ADF table [2].Field Service Ver.

Other Field Service Ver. 1. Reinstall procedure [2] Maintenance [1] 1. Turn the pulley and make sure that the belt does not ride up on the pulley teeth. bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C269DA B. [2] [2] A00JF3C538DA [1] [4] [3] [4] [2] [4] A00JF3C526DA 2.6. and remove the scanner motor [2]. 2007 9. 3. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws [2]. Remove two screws [1]. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left. slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring [3]. 4. 178 . Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the scanner motor assy into position. Perform this step three times.0 Feb.

Remove the IR rear cover. Disconnect the connector [1].64 Original glass moving motor (M202) 6. A00JF2C577DA 179 Maintenance bizhub C550 1. Remove the IR upper rear cover /1 and IR upper rear cover /2.97 2.97 . A00JF2C575DA [1] [1] 4.3. Remove the harness from two edge covers [1] and two wire saddles [2]. [2] A00JF2C576DA [1] 5. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. 1. 2007 6. Other [1] 3. See P.Field Service Ver. See P.0 Feb.

1. and remove the original glass moving motor assy [2]. Remove two screws [1]. Other [2] bizhub C550 [1] Field Service Ver. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C578DA [2] [1] 7. 2007 6. [1] A00JF2C574DA 180 .6. Remove two screws [1]. and remove the original glass moving motor [2].0 Feb.

0 Feb. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1].65 Waste toner agitating motor (M20) 6.3. Remove the wire saddle [1]. See P. Remove two screws [2] of the bracket [1]. Remove the PH relay board.Field Service Ver. 2007 6.140 . [3] [4] A00JF2C273DA 181 bizhub C550 1. A00JF2C271DA [1] 3. connector [2] and two screws [3]. Other [1] 2. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C272DA [2] [1] 4. and take out the waste toner agitating motor [4]. 1.

Remove two screws [1].3. See P. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2]. Remove the lower rear cover. Remove two screws [3]. Remove the rear right cover /2 and rear right cover /4. 1. See P. [1] Maintenance A00JF2C274DA [4] 4. 5. [3] [2] [1] A00JF2C275DA 6. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1].66 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.100 2. and remove the metal plate [4]. Other 6. [1] [3] [2] A00JF2C276DA 182 . and remove the transport motor cover [2]. 2007 Transport motor (M25) 1.99 3. and remove the transport motor [3].6.0 Feb.

1.67 Vertical transport motor (M26) 6.0 Feb. Remove two screws [1]. 2007 6. and remove the vertical transport motor [2].3. [1] A00JF2C279DA 183 bizhub C550 1. Remove two screws [1]. and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2]. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C278DA [2] 4. [1] A00JF2C277DA [1] 3. Remove the lower rear cover. Disconnect the connectors [1].Field Service Ver. Other [2] 2.100 . See P. and remove the vertical transport motor assy [2].

68 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 2007 Transfer belt motor (M1) 1. See P.6. and take out the color PC drum motor [3].512 [3] [2] A00JF2C281DA 184 . Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2].154 [1] 2. Open the PWB box. [1] [3] A00JF2C280DA 6. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2]. and take out the transfer belt motor [3].154 [2] 2. 1.3. See P.69 Maintenance Color PC drum motor (M16) 1. See P. NOTE • Adjust the positioning of the PC drive gear when mounting the color PC drum motor.0 Feb. Other 6.3. Open the PWB box.

3. [1] A00JF2C282DA 6.Field Service Ver. Maintenance 1. Remove five screws [1] and the connector [2]. Open the upper right door.71 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) 2. and take out the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction drive assy [3]. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2].70 Color developing motor (M17) 6. Open the PWB box. and take out the color developing motor [3].0 Feb. 1. Other [3] [2] 2.154 .3. [1] [3] A00JF2C284DA 185 bizhub C550 1. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the intermediate transport unit [2]. See P. 2007 6. [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C283DA [1] [2] 3.

2007 4. Other Field Service Ver.0 Feb. 1.3. 1. Unhook two tabs [1] and remove the intermediate transport unit [2]. Remove two screws [1]. Open the upper right door.72 Registration motor (M2) 2. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C285DA [2] 5. [1] [1] [2] A00JF2C283DA 186 . Remove the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor assy [1]. and remove the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor [2]. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C286DA 6.6.

and remove two gears [4]. 4. [4] [3] A00JF2C287DA [1] [2] 5. Other 3. NOTE • Make sure not to lose the spring. the collar [2] and the rotating knob [3]. remove the harness from the wire saddle [2].0 Feb. [1] [2] [3] A00JF2C289DA 187 bizhub C550 [1] [2] .Field Service Ver. Remove two E-rings [1]. 2007 6. and remove the gear cover [3]. Maintenance [3] [1] A00JF2C288DA [4] [1] 6. Disconnect the connector [1]. Remove two screws [1] and the spring [2]. Remove two screws [3] and take out the pressure welding alienation sensor assy [4]. 1.

3. See P. Remove two screws [1]. and take out the shaft metal plate [2]. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C291DA 6.0 Feb. Open the PWB box. Disconnect the connector [1]. bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C290DA [1] 8. and remove the registration motor [2]. Remove two screws [2]. and remove the fusing pressure retraction motor [3].73 Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) 1. 2007 7. [1] [2] A00JF2C292DA 188 .154 [3] 2. 1. Remove two screws [1]. 3.6. Other Field Service Ver.

Other [1] 2.3. Remove the screw [1].74 Fusing motor (M30) 6.0 Feb. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C294DA [2] 4. Remove four screws [1].154 . Open the PWB box. [1] A00JF2C295DA 189 bizhub C550 1. 2007 6. See P. and remove the duct [2]. and remove the metal plate [2]. 1. A00JF2C293DA [1] 3.Field Service Ver. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1].

and remove the harness from the edge cover [2]. Disconnect the connector [1].6. Remove four screws [1]. and remove the fan motor assy /1 [2].0 Feb. [1] [1] A00JF2C298DA 190 . Disconnect two connectors [1]. 1. Other Field Service Ver. [1] bizhub C550 [2] A00JF2C296DA [1] 6. 2007 5. Maintenance A00JF2C297DA [2] [1] 7.

Remove two screws [1]. [1] A00JF2C300DA [2] 3. Remove the fan motor assy /1.0 Feb. See P.75 Switchback motor (M33) 1. and remove the switchback motor assy [2]. See the steps 1 to 7 of fusing motor removing procedure. 1.Field Service Ver. and remove the switchback motor [2].189 [2] 2. and remove the fusing motor [3]. 2007 6. Other 8. Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2]. Remove three screws [1]. [1] A00JF2C301DA 191 Maintenance bizhub C550 [2] . [1] [3] A00JF2C299DA 6.3.

2007 Exit motor (M4) 1. and remove the harness from the wire saddle [2]. [1] A00JF2C304DA 192 .0 Feb. See the steps 1 to 7 of fusing motor removing procedure. and remove the exit motor [2].6. Other 6. See P. and remove the exit motor assy [2]. Remove the fan motor assy /1. Remove two screws [1]. Remove two screws [1].3. 1.189 [2] 2.76 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF2C303DA [2] 4. Disconnect the connectors [1]. [1] A00JF2C302DA Maintenance [2] 3.

Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2]. 2007 6. Remove the screw [1].157 2.0 Feb. See the steps 1 to 11 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. 1. Other [1] 3.Field Service Ver. [4] [5] A00JF2C306DA [1] 6. . Remove the screw [4]. and remove the fan motor assy /2 [5]. 5. [2] [3] A00JF2C307DA 193 Maintenance bizhub C550 1. and remove the harness from two wire saddles [1] and the edge cover [2]. Take out the reinforcing plate. and remove the K PC drum motor [3].77 K PC drum motor (M18) 6. Open the upper right door. See P. and remove the rear right cover /5 [2].3. [2] A00JF2C305DA [3] [2] [1] 4. Disconnect the connectors [3].

[2] [3] A00JF2C308DA Maintenance 6.193 [1] 2. take out the tray1 lift-up motor assy [4] and turn it around. and remove the K developing motor [3]. Disconnect five connectors [1].6. See P.104 [3] [2] [3] 2.79 Tray1 lift-up motor (M6) 1. Other 6. See P. [4] [1] A00JF2C310DA [1] 4. Remove the fan motor assy /2. 1. and remove the tray1 lift-up motor assy [4].78 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.3. 5. See the steps 1 to 5 of K PC drum motor removing procedure.3. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the edge cover [2]. 2007 K developing motor (M19) 1. Remove two screws [3]. Remove the tray1/2.0 Feb. 3. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2] and three wire saddles [3]. [4] [3] [2] A00JF2C311DA 194 . Remove four screws [1] and the connector [2].

Remove two screws [3].104 Maintenance [3] [2] [3] 2. Remove the tray1/2. take out the tray2 lift-up motor assy [4] and turn it around. [4] [3] [2] A00JF2C313DA 195 bizhub C550 [1] [2] . 1. Remove three screws [1]. See P. A00JF2C312DA 6. [4] [1] A00JF2C604DA [1] 4.3. Disconnect five connectors [1]. Other 6. Remove the harness from the edge cover [2] and three wire saddles [3]. 2007 6. 5. 3.0 Feb. and remove the tray2 lift-up motor assy [4].80 Tray2 lift-up motor (M8) 1.Field Service Ver. Disconnect the connector [1] and remove the harness from the edge cover [2]. and remove the tray1 lift-up motor [2].

2007 6. Remove three screws [1].3. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C312DA 6. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2]. See P. and take out the tray 4 liftup motor [3]. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2].128 [1] 2. 1.82 Tray4 lift-up motor (M24) 1. and remove the tray 3 liftup motor [3].3. Remove the LCC drive unit.128 Maintenance [1] 2. and remove the tray 2 lift-up motor [2].81 Tray3 lift-up motor (M23) 1. Other Field Service Ver.6. [2] [3] A00JF2C315DA 6. See P. [2] [3] A00JF2C316DA 196 . Remove the LCC drive unit.0 Feb.

Other [2] 2. and remove the tray1 vertical transport motor assy [2]. 2007 6. Remove two screws [1]. [1] A00JF2C319DA 197 Maintenance [2] 3. 1. bizhub C550 1. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. Remove two screws [1].83 Tray1 vertical transport motor (M5) 6.3. [1] A00JF2C317DA [1] A00JF2C318DA [2] 4. See the steps 1 to 9 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. Disconnect the connector [2].Field Service Ver. See P.0 Feb.157 . and remove the harness from two wire saddles [1]. and remove the tray1 vertical transport motor [2].

4. 2007 Tray2 vertical transport motor (M7) 1. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2]. [4] Maintenance A00JF2C320DA [2] 5.157 2.3.128 [1] [3] [2] 3. See P.84 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Other 6. Remove the LCC drive unit. See P. See the steps 1 to 9 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure. Remove the paper feed/transport drive board assy. [1] A00JF2C321DA 198 . and remove the tray 2 vertical transport motor assy [4]. Remove two screws [1].6. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [3]. 1. and remove the tray2 vertical transport motor [2].0 Feb.

See P.85 Take-up motor (M22) 6. Other 1. See the steps 1 to 6 of tray 1 feed roller replacement procedure. Remove two screws [1]. Remove four screws [1]. See P. Remove the tray 2 paper feed unit.Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF2C322DA [2] 6. and remove the metal plate [2]. the collar [2]. Slide out tray 1/2.3. Remove the reinforcing plate. 2007 6. [3] [2] A00JF2C324DA 199 Maintenance bizhub C550 . [1] A00JF2C323DA [1] [4] 7. 2. 1.25 4.28 5. the belt [3] and the gear [4]. See the steps 1 to 6 of tray 2 feed roller replacement procedure.157 3. See P. See the steps 1 to 11 of high voltage unit/1 removing procedure.0 Feb. Remove the tray 1 paper feed unit. Remove the E-ring [1].

See P. 1.86 Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) Maintenance 1. Remove two screws [1]. and remove the take-up motor [2].3. Remove the imaging unit K. [2] bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C325DA 6. Other Field Service Ver.42 2.6.0 Feb. See P.218 3. [1] A00JF2C326DA 200 . See the steps 1 to 5 of IDC registration sensor/F and IDC registration sensor/R removing procedure. Disconnect two connectors [1]. 2007 8. Remove the sensor unit.

[2] A00JF2C329DA 201 Maintenance [2] [1] 5.Field Service Ver. and remove the gear assy [2]. 2007 6. and remove the charge cleaning motor/K assy [2]. Remove four screws [1]. Other 4. bizhub C550 . Remove two screws [1]. [1] [2] A00JF2C327DA A00JF2C328DA [1] 6. and remove the charge cleaning motor/K [2]. 1. Remove two screws [1].0 Feb.

Remove three screws [1]. Remove the fan motor assy /1. See P. [1] [2] A00JF2C330DA Maintenance [2] 4. Take out the paper exit rear cover.87 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.6. 2007 Cleaner motor (M38) 1. See the steps 1 to 7 of fusing motor removing procedure. See P.0 Feb. Disconnect the connector [1].3. 1.189 2. Other 6.96 3. and remove the fan motor assy /3 [2]. 6. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [2] and the edge covers [3]. [1] A00JF2C331DA [3] 5. Disconnect two connectors [1]. [2] [1] A00JF2C332DA 202 . and remove the harness from two wire saddles [2].

0 Feb. Remove two connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/2 [1]. Other 7. Remove the harness from four wire saddles [2]. Remove four screws [1]. [2] [1] A00JF2C333DA [1] 9. 1. 8. Disconnect the connector [1]. and take out the fan motor assy/4 [2] as clearing the harness. [2] A00JF2C335DA 203 Maintenance bizhub C550 . [2] A00JF2C334DA [1] 10. 2007 6.Field Service Ver.

Remove three screws [1]. 1.0 Feb. Other Field Service Ver. Remove two screws [1]. and remove the harness guide [2]. 2007 11. and remove the harness guide [2]. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C337DA [2] 13. [1] A00JF2C338DA 204 . Remove two connectors [2] on the high voltage unit/2 [1]. [2] bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C336DA [1] 12.6.

and remove the metal plate [2]. and remove the high voltage unit/2 [3]. Other 14. Remove the harness from two wire saddles [1].0 Feb. [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C340DA [1] [2] [1] 16.Field Service Ver. 1. [1] A00JF2C339DA [1] [1] [3] [1] 15. 2007 6. and take out the connector [3] on the high voltage unit/2 [2]. [1] [1] A00JF2C607DA 205 Maintenance bizhub C550 [2] [3] . Remove five screws [1] and four tapping screws [2]. Remove four screws [1].

Close the PWB box once and remove two screws [1] of the cleaner motor.0 Feb. Open the PWB box again. Other Field Service Ver. 1. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C341DA [1] 18. and take out the cleaner motor [3]. 2007 17.6. Remove the harness from three wire saddles [1]. Maintenance A00JF2C342DA [1] 19. remove two screws [1] and the connector [2]. [3] [2] A00JF2C343DA 206 .

Remove three screws [3].Field Service Ver. Other [2] [3] 2. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy. Remove two screws [1] and the connector [2].88 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) 6. 2007 6. and remove the toner cartridge motor C/ K Assy [4]. Remove the high voltage unit/2 assy. [2] A00JF2C346DA 207 Maintenance 6. bizhub C550 1. See the steps 1to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure.202 [3] 2. [2] [1] [4] A00JF2C345DA [1] 5. See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure. and remove the toner cartridge motor C/K[2]. See P. 1.3. 4.0 Feb. [1] A00JF2C344DA 1.89 Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14).202 . Disconnect the connector [2]. and take out the 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor [3].3. and remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. Remove two screws[1]. See P. 3. Clear the harness.

Remove two screws [2].90 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.6. [3] [1] A00JF2C348DA 208 . Disconnect the connector [1]. Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. 4. and remove three screws [2]. 2007 Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) 1.202 [2] 2. Remove the high voltage unit/2 Assy.0 Feb. [1] [3] A00JF2C347DA Maintenance [2] 3. 1. and remove the toner cartridge motor Y/M [3]. then remove the toner cartridge motor Y/ M Assy[3]. See P. Other 6. See the steps 1 to 17 of cleaner motor removing procedure.3.

and remove the connector cover [2]. See P.K).89 2. toner supply motor/C (M11). See P.91 Toner supply motor/Y (M9).3.Field Service Ver. toner supply motor/M (M10). [2] A00JF2C349DA 209 Maintenance [1] 6. Other 1. Remove two screws [1]. Remove three screws [1].46 4.M. toner supply motor/K (M12) 6. Remove the upper front door.101 [2] A00JF2C224DA [1] 7. and remove the exit tray front cover [2].95 3. Remove the upper left cover.42 NOTE • After the imaging unit has been removed from the main body wrap it in the light shielding cloth and store it in a dark place. DO NOT leave the imaging unit exposed to light for a extended of time as it will become damaged. See P. 2007 6. bizhub C550 . See P.Y. See P. 5. Remove the front right cover. Remove the toner cartridges (C.0 Feb. Open the lower front door and take out the all imaging units. 1.

1.0 Feb. 2007 8. Other Field Service Ver. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C350DA [1] 9. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C351DA [1] 10.6. and take out the toner cartridge inserting port cover Y/M/C [2]. Remove the screw [1] and take out the hinge convex part [2]. Disconnect the connector [1]. [2] A00JF2C352DA 210 . Remove three screws [1]. and remove the harness [2].

and pull the front cover [2] forward slowly. NOTE • Use care not to mistake in the kind of the screws. 1.0 Feb. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. Remove the screw [1]. and remove the connector cove r[2]. and remove the front cover [2]. [1] A00JF2C353DA [1] 12. 2007 6. Remove nine screws [1]. [2] A00JF2C354DA [2] 13.Field Service Ver. Other 11. [1] A00JF2C355DA 211 Maintenance bizhub C550 [2] .

and remove the front door switch assy[2].6. [2] A00JF2C358DA 212 . 1. Maintenance [2] A00JF2C357DA [1] 16. 2007 14.0 Feb. Remove the screw [1]. Other Field Service Ver. then remove the harness from the wire saddle [3]. Remove six screws [1]. and remove the toner hopper units assy [2]. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C356DA [3] [1] 15. Disconnect the connector [1].

bizhub C550 . 2007 6.92 Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) 1. the harness holder [2].25 [3] [1] 2.3. C in order. 19. then remove the toner hopper unit /Y [3]. Remove two screws [1] and disconnect the connector [2]. and remove the toner supply motor /Y [3]. 1. and remove four screws [2]. [2] A00JF2C456DA 213 Maintenance 18. See P.Field Service Ver. [2] [3] [1] [2] A00JF2C359DA [1] [2] [3] A00JF2C360DA 6. Repeat the steps 17 to 18 and take out the toner supply motor/Y. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. See the steps 1 to 6 of tray 1 paper feed roller replacement procedure. and unplug the connector [3]. Other 17.0 Feb. Disconnect two connectors [1]. M. Remove the tray 1 paper feed unit.

93 Tray 2 paper feed clutch 2 (CL2) 1. NOTE • When mounting the tray 1 paper feed clutch. and remove the tray 1 paper feed clutch [2]. set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 1 paper feed clutch. bizhub C550 [2] [1] A00JF2C457DA 6. See the steps 1 to 6 of tray2 paper feed roller replacement procedure. [1] A00JF2C458DA [2] 3. 2007 3.6.3.0 Feb. Remove the C-clip [1]. Remove the tray 2 paper feed unit.28 Maintenance [2] 2. set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 2 paper feed clutch. 1. and remove the tray 2 paper feed clutch [2]. See P. [1] A00JF2C459DA 214 . Remove the harness from the wire saddle [1]. and disconnect the connector [2]. Remove the C-clip [1]. Other Field Service Ver. NOTE • When mounting the tray 2 paper feed clutch.

[2] A00JF2C362DA 215 bizhub C550 1.95 Horizontal transport clutch 2 (CL4) Maintenance 1. Other [1] 2.0 Feb. NOTE • When mounting the horizontal transport clutch 2. and remove the horizontal transport clutch 2 [2]. and remove the horizontal transport clutch 1 [2]. [2] A00JF2C361DA 6.3.128 [1] 2.94 Horizontal transport clutch 1(CL3) 6. Remove the C-clip [1]. Remove the C-clip [1]. Remove the LCC drive unit. set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the horizontal transport clutch 2. See P.128 . 1.Field Service Ver. Remove the LCC drive unit. 2007 6. set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the horizontal transport clutch 1. NOTE • When mounting the horizontal transport clutch 1. See P.3.

Remove the C-clip [5]. Remove the C-clip [3]. 1. NOTE • When mounting the tray 3 paper feed clutch/tray 3 transport clutch. and disconnect the conector.3. 4.6. [1] [2] Maintenance [1] A00JF2C028DA [6] [4] [3] [1] [5] [1] [2] 3.0 Feb. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 3 [2] to the end. Other 6. 1. set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the clutch. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1].96 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. A00JF2C364DA 216 . 2007 Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5)/Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) 2. Slide out the tray 3. and remove the tray 3 paper feed clutch [4]. 5. and remove the tray 3 transport clutch [6].

NOTE • When mounting the tray 4 paper feed clutch. set the convex part of the stopper into the concave part of the tray 4 paper feed clutch. [1] [2] [1] [4] [1] 3. Other 2. and disconnect the connector [2]. [3] [2] A00JF2C363DA 217 Maintenance A00JF2C034DA bizhub C550 1.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. Slide out the tray 4.3. 1. Remove the harness from the edge cover [1]. Remove the C-clip [3]. 2007 6. 4. Remove two screws [1] and pull out the tray 4 [2] to the end. and remove the tray 4 paper feed clutch [4].97 Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7) 6. .

Remove the image transfer entrance guide. Disconnect the connector [1]. See the steps 1 to 4 of image transfer belt unit removing procedure. Unhook two tabs [1]. Open the upper right door. and remove the connector cover [2]. 1.0 Feb. See P. and remove the sensor unit [2].6. Remove six screws [1].3. [1] A00JF2C366DA 5.98 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Other 6. IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R). [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C367DA 218 . 2007 IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F). [2] A00JF2C365DA Maintenance 4. 1. 2.48 [1] 3.

[3] A00JF2C370DA 219 Maintenance bizhub C550 [2] [3] . Remove two screws [1]. 1. Remove seven screws [1] and the spring [2].0 Feb. Remove two screws [1].Field Service Ver. and remove the sensor cover [3]. then remove the IDC registration sensor/F [3]. [3] A00JF2C369DA [1] [2] 8. and disconnect the connector [2]. 2007 6. then remove IDC registration sensor/R [3]. [1] A00JF2C368DA [1] [2] 7. and disconnect the connector [2]. Other 6.

0 Feb.6. Remove the IR assy. See P. See P.134 2. [2] Maintenance [1] A00JF2C156DA [2] 6. [1] A00JF2C434DA 220 . Remove the original glass moving unit. See P. Remove nine screws [1]. 2007 Scanner drive cables A. Other 6. and remove the metal plate [2]. Removal procedure 1. and remove the image processing board protective shield [2].113 [1] 5.99 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. See P. Remove the scanner motor.176 4.3. Remove two screws [1]. 1.117 3. Remove the scanner assy.

2007 6. Remove the hook side spring [1] of the scanner drive cables. [1] A00JF2C436DA [1] [2] 9. Remove the bead side [1] of the scanner drive cables from the adjustment anchor. A00JF2C437DA 221 Maintenance bizhub C550 [1] . 1. Remove the C-ring [1] and bearing [2].Field Service Ver.0 Feb. A00JF2C435DA [1] 8. Other 7.

14. Remove the screw [1]. Remove the scanner drive cables [3] from each pulley [2].6. [3] [2] A00JF2C440DA 222 . and remove the scanner drive gear [2]. 11. 2007 10. 1. Remove the shaft [1] and pulleys [2].0 Feb. [2] Maintenance [1] A00JF2C439DA [2] [1] 13. Remove the screw [1] one each and take out the two pulleys [2] from the shaft. bizhub C550 [1] [3] [2] A00JF2C438DA 12. Other Field Service Ver. Remove the bearing [3].

Set the round bead [1] of the scanner drive cable (silver) to the pulley [2] at the position as shown in the illustration. [2] B [1] A A00JF2C550DA 2. which are colored differently. 1.0 Feb. <Front> 1. Other A00JF2C441DA (2) Winding of the scanner drive cables NOTE • The scanner drive cable differs in type between the front (silver) and the rear (black).Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley. [1] A00JF2C551DA 223 Maintenance bizhub C550 . 2007 B. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. Twist the A side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the front groove in anticlockwise direction five times. reinstall procedure (1) Overall figure 6.

6. Apply the tape to fix the scanner drive cable to the pulley [1].0 Feb. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. Set the round bead [1] of the scanner drive cable (black) to the pulley [2] at the position as shown in the illustration. bizhub C550 [1] Maintenance A00JF2C552DA 4. [1] A00JF2C553DA [2] [1] B <Rear> 5. Other Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that the bead snugly rests in the slit in the pulley. A A00JF2C547DA 224 . 2007 3. 1. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in clockwise direction five times.

[1] A00JF2C554DA 225 Maintenance 7.0 Feb. 1. Other 6. Apply the tape to fix the scanner drive cable to the pulley [1]. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. 2007 6. [1] A00JF2C548DA [1] A00JF2C549DA 8.Field Service Ver. NOTE • Make sure that no part of the cable rides on the other. Twist the B side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the rear groove in anticlockwise direction five times. Twist the A side scanner drive cable around the pulley [1] starting from the front groove in clockwise direction five times. bizhub C550 .

Install the bearing [1]. • Apply the screw lock on the screw. 12. NOTE • Apply the screw lock on the screw. and fix them with one screw each [3]. 2007 9.0 Feb. NOTE • Set the pulley at the direction as shown in the illustration. • Fix the pulley at the position as shown in the illustration. Other Field Service Ver. [1] [3] A00JF2C444DA 226 . [1] A00JF2C443DA [2] 11. Put the front/rear pulleys [1] into the shaft [2]. Set the shaft [1] and install the bearing [2] and the C-ring [3].6. bizhub C550 [2] [1] [2] [1] [3] [3] A00JF2C442DA Maintenance [3] [2] 10. 1. Install the gear [3] with the screw [2].

Maintenance [3] A00JF2C461DA <Rear> 15. Place the fixed bead side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley D [2]. 1.Field Service Ver. and place the fixed bead to the adjustment anchor [3]. Place the fixed bead side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley B [2].0 Feb. and place the fixed bead to the adjustment anchor [3]. [2] [1] A00JF2C448DA 227 bizhub C550 [1] . 2007 6. [3] A00JF2C452DA [2] [1] [2] <Rear> 14. Place the hook side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley C [2]. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley B. Other <Front> 13.

Maintenance [2] A00JF2C450DA 18. 2007 16. Other Field Service Ver. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C449DA [1] 17.0 Feb. Hook the end of the spring [1] to the wire and the other end to the hook [2] on the IR left frame.6. Put the scanner drive cable into the IR frame hole [2] via the pulley D [1]. 1. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley D [2]. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley D [2] via the pulley C [1]. [2] [1] A00JF2C601DA 228 .

Put the scanner drive cable into the IR frame hole [2] via the pulley B [1].0 Feb. NOTE • Make sure to hook the scanner drive cable to the outside groove of the pulley B [2]. bizhub C550 . Other <Front> 19.Field Service Ver. Place the hook side of the scanner drive cable [1] to the pulley A [2]. 1. [2] [1] A00JF2C445DA [2] [1] A00JF2C446DA 21. Place the scanner drive cable to the pulley B [2] via the pulley A [1]. [1] [2] A00JF2C447DA 229 Maintenance 20. 2007 6.

407 28. Hook the end of the spring to the wire coming from the front. [Service Mode] →[Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Feed Direction Adjustment]] See P.30 Maintenance 230 . See P. Perform the following setting. 1. Mount the original glass moving unit.501 26.0 Feb. Remove the end of the spring [1] from the hook. Remove the tape that fixes the front/rear pulleys. See P. Adjust the focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit. See P. and adjust the height of the original glass moving unit.503 27. [Service Mode] →[ADF] → [Read Pos Adj] See the DF-611 Service Manual. Perform the following setting.6. Other Field Service Ver. 24. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C462DA 23. 2007 22. See P.500 25. Adjust the position of the scanner and 2nd/3rd mirrors carriage.

Remove two screws [1]. and remove the tray 3 front cover [2]. Remove nine screws [1]. [2] A00JF2C405DA 231 Maintenance bizhub C550 NOTE • The tray 3 and 4 are of the same form and mechanism.105 2. Remove the tray from the main body.100 Tray 3/4 lift wire 6. This procedure shows the steps taken for the tray 3. 2007 6. Other 1. [1] [1] [2] [1] A00JF2C404DA [1] 3. .Field Service Ver.0 Feb. See P.3. and remove the wire cover /Fr [2]. 1.

Other Field Service Ver. Remove the bearing [1].0 Feb. 2007 4. 1. Remove the E-ring [1] and the gear cover [2]. bizhub C550 [3] [2] Maintenance [1] A00JF2C406DA 5.6. [1] A00JF2C407DA 232 . and take out the gear Assy [3].

2007 6. and then remove the wire /2 (white) [4] and the wire /1 (black) [5]. 8. Other 6. [5] [1] A00JF2C409DA 233 Maintenance [3] [1] [2] [4] bizhub C550 . 1.Field Service Ver. Remove the E-ring [1]. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3].0 Feb. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /2 (white) [4] from the shaft [3]. A00JF2C408DA [4] [3] [2] 7.

0 Feb. 1. 2007 9. Pull out and remove the wire /1 (black) toward the rear side of the lift plate [5].6. [4] [3] [1] [2] A00JF2C411DA 234 . Other [5] bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /1 (black) [4] from the shaft [3]. [1] [3] Maintenance [4] [2] A00JF2C410DA [5] 12. Pull out and remove the wire /2 (white) toward the rear side of the lift plate [5]. and then remove the wire /2 (white) [4]. 13. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3]. Remove the E-ring [1]. 11. 10.

17. and then remove the wire /3 (black) [4] and the wire /4 (white) [5]. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /3 (black) [4] from the shaft [3]. 2007 6. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3]. [5] [4] [2] [6] A00JF2C413DA 235 Maintenance bizhub C550 . Other 14. [4] [2] [1] [3] A00JF2C412DA [3] [1] 15. 16. Pull out and remove the wire /3 (black) toward the rear side of the lift plate [6].Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. Remove the E-ring [1].

1. Remove the E-ring [1] and slide the drive pulley [2] in the arrow-marked direction to remove the wire /4 (white) [4] from the shaft [3].6. To reinstall. NOTE • The same front/rear wires are used for both white and black. Pull out and remove the wire /4 (white) toward the rear side of the lift plate [5]. 21. 20. reverse the order of removal. bizhub C550 [2] [4] [1] [3] Maintenance A00JF2C414DA [5] [3] [4] 19. [1] [2] A00JF2C415DA 236 .0 Feb. Remove the pulley [2] and the wire restraining cover [3]. Remove the E-ring [1]. 2007 18. 22. and then remove the wire /4 (white) [4]. Other Field Service Ver.

use the following fuse to be replaced.Field Service Ver. [2] A00JF2E571DA 237 Maintenance bizhub C550 NOTE • When the fuse is replaced. 2007 6. Fuse (F1): Littelfuse. Remove the DC power supply. Other A.. Replacing procedure 1. Type: KLDR 6. Time delay fuse) . [2] A00JF2E571DA [1] 3. Remove two screws [1]. Reinstall the fuse cover [2] with two screws [1]. Inc. 600Vac. 6 A.101 Fuse (F1) *USA only 6.142 [1] [1] 2.0 Feb. Replace the fuse [1]. and remove the fuse cover [2]. 1. See P.3. Class CC. A00JF2E572DA [1] [1] 4.

See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 1 separation roller assy replacement procedure.27 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2.6. Other Field Service Ver. • When solvent is used to dampen a cloth. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C371DA 6. NOTE • If it is difficult to clean with dried soft cloth. See P. 6. dampen a soft cloth with a solvent.2 Tray 1 feed roller/tray 1 pick-up roller 1. [1] 4. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. wipe the transfer belt [1]. wipe the tray 1 feed roller [1] clean of dirt. • Do not wipe out with water. Using a dried soft cloth.4 bizhub C550 Cleaning procedure NOTE • The alcohol described in the cleaning procedure represents the ethanol (ethyl alcohol). Remove the transfer belt unit.0 Feb. A00JF2C372DA 238 . do not use the ones other than shown below: ethanol (ethyl alcohol) • After cleaned with the solvent. make copies more than 28-piece of A3 white paper to eliminate the image noise. 2007 6. See P. 1.4.4. Open the manual bypass tray door. Slide out the tray 1.48 2.1 Transfer belt unit 1.

3 Tray 1 separation roller 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.4 Tray 1 transport roller 2. Remove the tray 1 separation roller assy. See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 1 separation roller assy replacement procedure. wipe the tray 1 transport roller [1] clean of dirt.Field Service Ver. Other 5.27 [1] 2.4. wipe the tray 1 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. See P.0 Feb. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [1] A00JF2C375DA 239 Maintenance bizhub C550 .4. 2007 6. 1. Open the manual bypass tray door. wipe the tray 1 separation roller [1] clean of dirt. 1. A00JF2C374DA 6. [1] A00JF2C373DA 6.

Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy. A00JF2C376DA Maintenance 5.31 3. Remove the tray 2 separation roller assy.4. 2007 Tray 2 feed roller/tray 2 pick-up roller 1. See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 2 separation roller assy replacement procedure.0 Feb. 2. wipe the tray 2 separation roller [1] clean of dirt. wipe the tray 2 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. See P.6. A00JF2C374DA 240 .6 Tray 2 separation roller 1.31 [1] 2. Slide out the tray 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.5 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. See P. Open the lower right door. Other 6. See the steps 1 to 2 of tray 2 separation roller assy replacement procedure. [1] A00JF2C377DA 6. [1] 4.4. wipe the tray 2 feed roller [1] clean of dirt. 1.

1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove two screws [1]. and remove the tray 3 paper feed cover [2]. [1] A00JF2C378DA 6.4. . wipe the tray 3 feed roller [1] clean of dirt.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. wipe the tray 2 transport roller [1] clean of dirt. 2007 6. Slide out the tray 3. [2] [1] A00JF2C024DA 3.7 Tray 2 transport roller 6. Maintenance 1.Field Service Ver.0 Feb. Other 2.8 Tray 3 feed roller/tray 3 pick-up roller 2. [1] A00JF2C379DA 241 bizhub C550 1. Open the lower front door.

4.32 Maintenance [1] 2. 2007 4. [2] [1] A00JF2C024DA 242 . and remove the tray 3 paper feed cover [2].0 Feb. Remove two screws [1]. A00JF2C381DA 6. See P. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 1. wipe the tray 3 separation roller [1] clean of dirt. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 3 feed roller replacement procedure.6. 1. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. wipe the tray 3 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF2C380DA 6.10 Tray 3 transport roller 2.9 Tray 3 separation roller 1. Slide out the tray 3. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Other Field Service Ver.4.

[1] A00JF2C383DA 3. 2007 6. wipe the tray 4 feed roller [1] clean of dirt.Field Service Ver. Slide out the tray 4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. [1] A00JF2C384DA 243 Maintenance bizhub C550 . wipe the tray 4 pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. 1.11 Tray 4 feed roller/tray 4 pick-up roller 2. Other 3.0 Feb. wipe the tray 3 transport roller [1] clean of dirt. [1] A00JF2C382DA 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 1.4.

wipe the tray 4 separation roller [1] clean of dirt.4.6. See the steps 1 to 4 of tray 4 feed roller replacement procedure. A00JF2C385DA Maintenance 6.0 Feb. wipe the tray 4 transport roller [1] clean of dirt.4. [1] A00JF2C387DA 244 . 1. 1. [1] A00JF2C386DA 6. Other 6.35 [1] 2. Open the manual bypass tray door. See P. Remove the feed roller/pick-up roller assy. Slide out the tray 4. 2007 Tray 4 separation roller 1.12 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. wipe the manual bypass tray feed roller [1] clean of dirt.14 Manual bypass tray feed roller 2. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.13 Tray 4 transport roller 2.4. 1.

wipe the intermediate transport roller [1] clean of dirt. Other 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove the manual bypass tray separation roller assy.15 Manual bypass tray pick-up roller 6. See the steps 1 to 2 of manual bypass tray separation roller assy replacement procedure.4.4.40 bizhub C550 . wipe the manual bypass tray pick-up roller [1] clean of dirt. See P. [1] A00JF2C390DA 245 Maintenance 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF2C388DA 6. wipe the manual bypass tray separation roller [1] clean of dirt.17 Intermediate transport roller 2. 1.16 Manual bypass tray separation roller [1] 2. 2007 6. A00JF2C374DA 6. 1. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Open the lower right door.0 Feb.4.

0 Feb.4. wipe the original glass [1] clean of dirt. A00JF2C522DA 6.19 Scanner rails 1. [1] A00JF2C521DA [1] Maintenance [2] 2. NOTE • Apply lubricant after cleaning. Other Field Service Ver. 1. [1] A00JF2C391DA 246 .98 [1] 2. Clean the slit glass [2] with the cleaner [1].6.4. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. 2007 bizhub C550 6. Remove the original glass. wipe the scanner rails [1] clean of dirt.18 Original glass 1. See P. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.

20 Mirrors (1st/2nd/3rd) 6. 1. [1] A00JF2C393DA 3.4. [1] A00JF2C392DA 6.4. wipe the mirror 1 [1] and mirror 2/3 [2]. wipe the lens [1] clean of dirt. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol.0 Feb.98 [2] 2.21 Lens Maintenance 1. [1] A00JF2C394DA 247 bizhub C550 1. Other [2] 2. 2007 6. Using a soft cloth dampened with alcohol. Remove the original glass. Remove two screws [1] and lens cover [2]. See P. See P. Remove the original glass.Field Service Ver.98 .

Other 6. wipe the CCD sensor [1] clean of dirt. Remove two screws [1].22 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.6.4. 2007 CCD sensor 1. [2] A00JF2C396DA [1] 4.98 [1] 2. Using a soft lint free cloth dampened with alcohol. 1. Remove nine screws [1].0 Feb. and remove the image processing board protective shield [2]. A00JF2C397DA 248 . See P. Remove the original glass. and remove the CCD sensor cover [2]. [2] Maintenance [1] A00JF2C156DA [1] 3.

5 Mount the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) bizhub C550 Maintenance A00JF2E585DA 1. Remove the original glass. 1. [2] A00JF2E595DA <How to set the harness> PS204 PS205 249 . See P.98 [2] 2. Using the screw [2].Field Service Ver. mount the original size detection 2 sensor (PS205) [1] and fix it. 2007 6.0 Feb. Other 6.

1. 250 .398 Maintenance A00JF2E588DA 5.0 Feb. and set the original glass to [Table2]. Size Detecting Sensor Adj]. Size Detecting Sensor (Option): Set] is displayed on the original size detection sensor adjustment screen. 2007 3. Select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Org. Other Field Service Ver. Check to make sure that the [Org. See P.6. bizhub C550 A00JF2E587DA 4. Select [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Original Size Detection].

See P.92 2.97 4. See P. 1. [1] A00JF2C589DA [2] 5. Loosen three screws [2] of the IR front cover [1]. 2007 6. Cut out the knockouts [1] of the IR right cover. Remove the upper front cover /2. [1] A00JF2C590DA 251 Maintenance .0 Feb. Other 6. See P. Remove the upper front cover /1.6 6. Remove the IR upper front cover.Field Service Ver.92 3.1 Option counter Installation method for the key counter bizhub C550 1.6.

secure the counter mounting bracket [1].6. 1. Fix the harness of the remainder to three wire saddles [1] again. bizhub C550 [1] [2] A00JF2C591DA [2] 8. Using two screws [2]. 2007 6. Route the harness for the key counter [1] as shown in the illustration on the left and let the harness out through the hole of the IR right cover. • Use the four long screws (9646 0418 14: M4 x 18) in the key counter kit to secure the counter mounting bracket. NOTE • Secure the counter mounting bracket passing the connector into the bracket.0 Feb. Remove the harness [2] for the key counter from three wire saddles [1]. Other Field Service Ver. A00JF2C593DA 252 . 7. Maintenance [1] A00JF2C592DA [2] [1] 9.

secure the counter socket [2]. Connect the key counter socket connector [1].0 Feb. 11. bizhub C550 . Set color mode and message. Select [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] → [Key Counter Only]. [1] [2] [3] A00JF2C594DA [2] A00JF2C584DA 13. secure the key counter cover [2].Field Service Ver. [Vendor 1 + Key Counter] or [Vendor 2 + Key Counter]. Using two screws [3]. see “Adjustment/Setting. Using two screws [1]. Other 10. For details on setting.” See P.493 253 Maintenance [1] 12. 1. 2007 6.

Other Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 Maintenance bizhub C550 Blank Page 254 .6.0 Feb.

• The developing unit has a strong magnetic field. • The density is properly selected. • The units.g. high humidity. etc. or related part is dirty. bizhub C550 Adjustment / Setting 255 . • Take care not to damage the PC drum with a tool or similar device. • The original glass. • The installation site is environmentally appropriate: high temperature. 2007 7. ventilation. and supplies used for printing (developer. • If it is unavoidably necessary to service the machine with its power turned ON. • Toner is not running out. Keep watches and measuring instruments away from it. How to use the adjustment section • “Adjustment/Setting” contains detailed information on the adjustment items and procedures for this machine. • Special care should be used when handling the fusing unit which can be extremely hot.. Check to see if: • The power supply voltage meets the specifications. • Correct paper is being used for printing.. slit glass. • Do not touch IC pins with bare hands. PC drum. • The original has a problem that may cause a defective image. Advance checks • Before attempting to solve the customer problem.Field Service Ver. How to use the adjustment section Adjustment/Setting 7. • The power supply is properly grounded.” the default settings are indicated by “ ”. use utmost care not to be caught in the scanner cables or gears of the exposure unit. elevator and air conditioner that generate electric noise). parts.0 Feb. • The machine shares the power supply with any other machine that draws large current intermittently (e. CAUTION • To unplug the power cord of the machine before starting the service job procedures. levelness of the installation site. direct sunlight. the following advance checks must be made. • Throughout this “Adjustment/Setting. etc.) are properly replenished and replaced when they reach the end of their useful service life. 1.

1.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting A00JF3E532DA 4. but be sure to touch the center of each cross. 2. touch the four keys (+) on the screen in sequence. • These crosses may be touched in any order. 256 . 3. 1.]. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. Press the Accessibility key. 5. Press the Start key. Touching all four crosses will turn the Start key ON in blue.8. 2007 8.0 Feb. 8. Using the tip of a pen or similar object. bizhub C550 Utility Mode Touch Panel Adjustment • To adjust the position of the touch panel display • Make this adjustment if the touch panel is slow to respond to a pressing action. • Use care not to damage the screen surface with the tip of the pen. • Use during the setup procedure. Touch [Touch Panel Adj.

” See P.268 P.272 P.274 P.2 Utility Mode function tree bizhub C550 * The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.271 . 2007 8. 1.274 P.268 P.271 P.268 P.375 • For displaying the keys with *** marks.269 P.272 P.268 P.273 P.270 P.269 P.Print** put Settings** Fax** Output Tray Settings** AE Level Adjustment** Auto Paper Select for Small Original Blank Page Print Settings Ref. Power Save Settings* Output Settings** Low Power Mode Settings* Sleep Mode Settings* Print/Fax Out.0 Feb.271 P.268 P.Field Service Ver.269 P.275 P.275 P.” See P.272 P.269 P. see “Administrator Feature Level.272 P.270 P. • For displaying the keys with *.269 P. page P.272 P.274 P. NOTE • Keys displayed on screens are different depending on the setting.270 P.275 257 Adjustment / Setting P. Utility Mode 8.489 Utility Mode One-Touch/ User Box Registration Create One-Touch destination Address Book E-mail User Box Fax PC (SMB) FTP IP Address Fax Internet Fax Group E-mail Setting E-mail Subject E-mail Body Create User Public/Personal User Box Box Bulletin Board User Box Relay User Box Limiting Access to Destinations User Settings System Settings Apply Levels/ Address Book Groups to Group Destinations Program Language Selection Measurement Unit Settings Paper Tray Settings Auto Tray Selection Settings Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Print Lists Auto Color Level Adjust.273 P.273 P. see “Administrator Security Level. ** marks.

277 P.285 Copy Screen Fax Active Screen Copy Operating Screen TX Display RX Display Color Selection Settings Left Panel Display Default Copier Settings Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet Auto Sort/Group Selection When AMS Direction is Incorrect Default Copy Settings Separate Scan Output Method Enlargement Rotation Adjustment / Setting Auto Zoom (Platen)* Auto Zoom (ADF)* Specify Default Tray when APS Off* Select Tray for Insert Sheet* Tri-Fold Print Side Print Jobs During Copy Operation Automatic Image Rotation** Scan/Fax Settings JPEG Compression Level Black Compression Level TWAIN Lock Time Default Scan/Fax Settings Compact PDF Compression Level Printer Settings Basic Settings PDL Setting Number of Copies Original Direction Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch Banner Sheet Setting Binding Direction Adjustment 258 .282 P.277 P.279 P.283 P.279 P.0 Feb.278 P.281 P. Utility Mode Utility Mode Field Service Ver.283 P.276 P.278 P. page P.284 P.277 P. 1.280 P.282 P.282 P.285 P.281 P.280 P.276 P.284 P.281 P.8.278 P.277 P.280 P.278 P.284 P.284 P.276 P.281 P.281 P.282 P.279 P.278 P.284 P. 2007 Ref.283 P.276 bizhub C550 User Settings Custom Display Settings Copier Settings Default Tab Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut Key 2 Scan/Fax Settings Default Tab Program Default Address Book Index Default Shortcut Key 1 Shortcut Key 2 Default Address Book P.

288 Print Reports Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Change Password Change E-mail Address Administrator System Settings Settings Power Save Settings Low Power Mode Settings Sleep Mode Settings Power Save Key Enter Power Save Mode Output Settings Print/Fax Out.291 P.287 P.290 P.292 259 Adjustment / Setting P.292 P.289 P.287 P.289 bizhub C550 P.290 P.292 P.287 P.291 P.288 P.286 P.287 P.290 P. Utility Mode Ref. 1. 2007 Utility Mode User Settings Printer Settings Paper Setting Paper Tray Paper Size 2-Sided Print Binding Position Staple Punch Banner Paper Tray PCL Settings Font Settings Symbol Set Font Size Line/Page CR/LF Mapping PS Setting Print PS Errors 8.290 P.Field Service Ver.285 P.291 P.286 P. page P.285 P.288 P.285 .287 P.289 P.286 P.291 P.0 Feb.286 P.Print put Settings Fax Output Tray Settings Shift Output Each Job Date/Time Settings Daylight Saving Time Weekly Timer Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings Settings Time Settings Date Settings Select Time for Power Save Password for Non-Business Hours P.286 P.

300 P.298 P.293 P. Utility Mode Utility Mode Field Service Ver.299 bizhub C550 Administrator System Setting Setting Restrict User Access Copy Program Lock Settings Delete Saved Copy Program Restrict Changing Job Priority Access to Job Delete Other User Jobs Settings Registering and Changing Addresses Changing Zoom Ratio Changing the “From” Address Change Registered Overlay Restrict Operation Restrict Broadcasting Expert Adjustment AE Level Adjustment Printer Adjustment Leading Edge Adjustment Centering Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2) Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Erase Leading Edge *** Vertical Adjustment *** Finisher Adjustment 2-Position Staple Pitch Adjustment Center Staple Position Adjustment / Setting Half-Fold Position Tri-Fold Position Adjustment Punch Vertical Position Adjustment Punch Horizontal Position Adjustment Punch Regist Loop Size Adjustment Punch Edge Sensor Adjustment Density Adjustment Thick 1/1+ -Yellow Thick 2/3/4-Yellow Thick 1/1+ -Magenta Thick 2/3/4-Magenta Thick 1/1+ -Cyan Thick 2/3/4-Cyan Thick 1/1+ -Black Thick 2/3/4-Black Black Image Density Image Stabilization Paper Separation Adjustment P. 1.292 P.8.298 P.293 P.293 P.299 P. 2007 Ref.0 Feb.292 P.294 P.293 P. page P.294 P.301 P.294 P.295 P.300 260 .293 P.300 P.296 P.297 P.

312 P.305 P.315 List/Counter Management Job Settings List List Paper Size/Type Counter Meter Counter List Check Consumables List Reset Settings System Auto Reset Auto Reset Job Reset 261 Adjustment / Setting Trial Edge Adjust bizhub C550 P.311 P.303 P.313 P. 2007 Utility Mode Administrator System Setting Setting Expert Adjustment Color Registration Adjust Color Registration Adjust (Yellow) Color Registration Adjust (Magenta) Color Registration Adjust (Cyan) Gradation Adjustment Copy Printer (Gradation) Printer (Resolution) Scanner Area Scanner Adjustment: *** Leading Edge *** Scanner Adjustment: Centering *** Horizontal Adjustment *** Vertical Adjustment *** ADF Adjustment *** Centering*** Original Stop Position*** 8.313 P.302 .0 Feb.313 When Account is changed When Original is set on ADF NEXT JOB Staple Setting Original Set/ Bind Direction Reset Data After Job User Box Settings Delete Unused User Box Delete Secure Print Documents Auto Delete Secure Documents Encrypted PDF Delete Time Document Hold Setting Standard Size Original Glass Original Size Detect*** Setting*** Foolscap Size Setting*** P.312 P. page P.308 P.315 P.307 P. 1. of Stop Position*** Line Detection Prior Detection Setting Detection While Feeding Setting P.308 Centering Auto Adjustment*** Auto Adj.314 P.315 P.309 P.314 P.306 P.314 P.310 P.315 P.312 P.314 P.313 P.Field Service Ver.312 P.314 P.314 P. Utility Mode Ref.

324 P.316 P.319 P.323 P.318 P.323 P.321 P.324 P.316 P.316 P.315 P.325 P.326 P.317 P.319 P.326 P.316 P.AdministraUser Name List tication tive Setting Default Function Permission Settings User Registration User Counter Account Track Account Track Registration Settings Account Track Counter Print without Authentication Print Counter List External Server Settings Limiting Access to Destinations Authentication Device Settings Create Group Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations Apply Levels/Groups to Users General Settings Stored Print Job Settings 262 .320 P.320 P.318 P.317 P.0 Feb. 1.325 P.325 P.326 P.325 P.317 P.318 P.8.326 bizhub C550 Administrator System Settings Setting Stamp Settings Header/Footer Settings Fax TX Settings Blank Page Print Settings Administra.317 P.319 P.324 P.320 P.316 P.317 P. page P.321 P. 2007 Ref.318 E-mail Subject E-mail Body P.319 P.320 P. Utility Mode Utility Mode Field Service Ver.Administrator Registration tor/Machine Input Machine Address Settings One-Touch/ Create OneUser Box Touch DestiRegistration nation Address Book E-mail User Box Fax PC (SMB) FTP IP Address Fax Internet Fax Group E-mail Settings Create User Box Public/Personal User Box Bulletin Board User Box Relay User Box Annotation User Box Adjustment / Setting One-Touch/ User Box Registration List Address Book List Group List Program List E-mail Subject/Text List Maximum Number of User Boxes User Authentication/ Account Track General Settings User Authen.326 P.

327 .359 P.352 P.0 Feb. 1.354 bizhub C550 P.357 P.353 P.355 P.340 P.346 P.354 SMTP TX Settings SMTP RX Settings Detail Settings Device Setting Time Adjustment Setting Status Notifi.354 P.353 P.Register Notification Address cation Setting Total Counter Notification Settings PING Confirmation SLP Setting LPD Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting ON/OFF Setting Prefix/Suffix Setting P.348 P.359 P.358 P.349 P.358 P. 2007 Utility Mode Administrator Network Settings Settings TCP/IP Settings NetWare Settings HTTP Server Settings FTP Settings SMB Settings LDAP Settings Enabling LDAP Setting Up LDAP Default LDAP Server Setting E-mail Settings E-mail TX (SMTP) E-mail RX (POP) S/MIME Communication Settings SNMP Settings AppleTalk Settings Bonjour Setting TCP Socket Settings Network Fax Settings Network Fax Function Settings IP Address Fax Function Internet Fax Function 8.357 P.353 P. page P.357 P.358 P.359 Action for Invalid Certificate Copier Settings Auto Zoom (Platen) Auto Zoom (ADF) Specify Default Tray when APS OFF Select Tray for Insert Sheet Print Jobs During Copy Operation Tri-Fold Print Side Automatic Image Rotation Printer Settings USB Timeout Network Timeout 263 Adjustment / Setting P.336 P.352 P.338 P.357 P.357 P.343 P.358 P.340 P.356 P.358 P. Utility Mode Ref.351 P.359 P.343 P.Field Service Ver.332 P.357 P.335 P.

361 P.365 P.362 P.367 P.361 P.367 P.360 P.361 P.365 P.Dialing Method ter Setting Receive Mode Number of RX Call Rings Number of Redials Redial interval Line Monitor Sound Line Monitor Sound Vol.363 P. Reduction for RX Print Print Separate Fax Pages File After Polling TX No.359 P.366 P.364 P.363 P.364 P.361 P. Utility Mode Utility Mode Field Service Ver.368 P.362 P.360 P.368 P.360 P. 2007 Ref.363 P.365 P. page P. 1.363 P.367 P.368 bizhub C550 Administrator Fax Settings Settings Header Information Header/ Footer Position Header Position Print Receiver’s Name Footer Position Line Parame.363 P.366 P. Entry Tray Selection for RX Print Min.8.367 P.363 P.360 P. TX/RX Settings Duplex Print (RX) Letter/Ledger over A4/A3 Print Paper Selection Print Paper Size Incorrect User Box No.362 P.366 P.367 P.368 P.368 P. of Sets (RX) Adjustment / Setting Function Settings Function ON/ F Code TX OFF Setting Relay RX Relay Printing Destination Check Display Function Memory RX Setting Closed Network RX Forward TX Setting Incomplete TX Hold PC-Fax RX Setting TSI User Box Setting PBX Connection Setting Report Settings Activity Report TX Result Report Sequential TX Report Timer Reservation TX Report Confidential RX Report Bulletin TX Report Relay TX Result Report Relay Request Report PC-FAX TX Error Report 264 .362 P.0 Feb.361 P.364 P.364 P.362 P.

0 Feb.Dialing Method ter Setting Number of RX Call Rings Line Monitor Sound Function Settings PC-FAX TX Setting 8.371 P.369 P.371 P.374 P.373 P.369 P.383 P.375 P.371 P.373 P.379 P.378 P.380 P. 1.378 P.374 bizhub C550 P.370 P.370 P.379 P.376 P.369 P.372 P.378 P.369 P.383 265 Adjustment / Setting P.381 P.369 .373 P.378 P.370 P.382 P.374 Multi Lines Settings Sender Fax No. Utility Mode Ref.Field Service Ver.379 P. 2007 Utility Mode Administrator Fax Settings Settings Report Settings Broadcast Result Report TX Result Report Check Network Fax RX Error Report MDN Message DSN Message Print E-mail Message Body Job Settings List Multi Line Settings Line Parame.377 P.381 P. page P. Network Fax Settings Black Compression Level Internet Fax Self Rx Ability Internet Fax Advanced Settings System OpenAPI Connection Settings Access Setting Port Number SSL Authentication Call Remote Center Security Settings Administrator Password User Box Administrator Setting Administrator Security Levels Security Details Password Rules Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Confidential Document Access Method Manual Destination Input Print Data Capture Restrict Fax TX Hide Personal Information Display Activity Log Delete Job Log Enhanced Security Mode HDD Settings Check HDD Capacity Overwrite Temporary Data Overwrite All Data HDD Lock Password Format HDD HDD Encryption Setting P.372 P.375 P.382 P.370 P.374 P.371 P.

385 ⎯ Check Details Print List Coverage Rate Copy Print Scan/Fax Other ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ bizhub C550 Administrator Security Settings Settings Function Usage Settings for Each Function Management Maximum Job Allowance Settings Network Function Usage Settings Authentication Time Setting Stamp Settings Apply Stamps Delete Registered Stamp Check Consumable Life Meter Count Print List Adjustment / Setting 266 .384 P. Utility Mode Utility Mode Field Service Ver.8.384 P.385 P. 1.384 P.385 P.0 Feb. 2007 Ref. page P.

0 Feb. Press the Utility/Counter key.1 Utility Mode function setting procedure Procedure bizhub C550 A00JF3E533DA 1. (To change the setting value.3.Field Service Ver. first press the Clear key before making an entry. • Use the 10-key pad to enter the setting value. The Utility Mode screen will appear.3 Changing the setting value in Utility Mode functions Adjustment / Setting • Use the [+] / [-] key to enter or change the setting value.2 Exiting • Touch the [Close] key. 2007 8.3. Utility Mode 8.3 8.3. 8.) 267 . 1. 2. 8.

[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted. • Select any displayed address to check. edit or delete the setting. edit or delete the setting. edit or delete the setting.0 Feb. • Select any displayed address to check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • It will not be displayed when the authentication device is set to “Set” by the following setting. 268 . [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] 8. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (3) Fax Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the fax destinations. • Select any displayed address to check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New].4. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • Select any displayed address to check.4 bizhub C550 One-Touch User Box Registration • In a copier where the user authentication function that uses an external server or MFP is set to ON. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. edit or delete the setting. (5) FTP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change FTP address to send scanned data. when you operate the copier without performing user authentication. • At least one User Box must be registered for registering a Box address.) Functions Use • To register/change the Box address when storing the scanned data in the box in the hard disk in the main body.8. 1. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. this menu is not displayed. edit or delete the setting. • Select any displayed address to check. (4) PC(SMB) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change SMB address to send scanned data.1 Create One-Touch destination A. Address Book (1) E-mail Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change e-mail address to send scanned data. 2007 8. (2) User Box • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted.

• A new address can be registered by touching [New]. change or delete the setting. • At least one address must be registered for registering a new group. • Select any displayed group to check. edit or delete the setting. • Select any displayed address to check. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change a group to send scanned data/fax data simultaneously. 1. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. 2007 8. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] . [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) E-mail Subject Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail subject when transmitting the scanned data. E-mail Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the management device 2 is mounted. (7) Internet Fax • Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings. • Select any displayed address to check. • Select any displayed address to detail check. (2) E-mail Body Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message when transmitting the scanned data.0 Feb. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data. • The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. • Select any displayed address to detail check or delete the setting. 269 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 (6) IP Address Fax • Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings.Field Service Ver. edit or delete them. B. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data. change or delete the setting. C.

[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.0 Feb.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Relay User Box. 270 . Bulletin Board User Box • It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.2 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the bulletin board user box. • A new box can be registered by touching [New]. • A new box can be registered by touching [New]. • It will not be displayed during user authentication if the fax operation is set to “Restrict” by the function restriction. A. 1. • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. Adjustment / Setting C. Relay User Box • It will be displayed only when the optional FAX kit (FK-502) is mounted. 2007 Create User Box • It will not be displayed when the authentication device is set to “Set” by the following setting. • A new box can be registered by touching [New].8. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it.4.) • This menu is not available due to functional restriction during user authentication when [User Box] is set to Restrict. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. B. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. • Shared or personal box can be registered according to its intended use. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that the vendor is mounted. Public/Personal User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the box for storing text data in the hard disk of the machine. Utility Mode 8.

users of level 2 can access the destinations that belong to the levels 0 to 2. (3) Program Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the program.Field Service Ver. B. • A user can be included in multiple different groups. Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations (1) Address Book Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the address book. press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting. (1) Apply Levels • One of the six levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all destinations. • Select a destination. Users and destinations can be registered for the group so that the registered destinations can be accessed by the registered users. (2) Groups • A group can be made with a certain name to allow its members to access its destinations. Utility Mode A.4.3 Limiting Access to Destinations 8. 2007 8. Access restriction depending on an individual level is also applied to the group with access to the destinations determined by the combination of the user and destination levels within a group. This enables security control by restricting information that can be accessed.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] . (2) Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets a level and a group for destinations registered in the group. Outline • The Limiting Access to Destinations setting allows or restricts individual user's access to each destination. press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting. press [Apply Level] or [Apply Group] and make a setting. Depending on the combination of the destination and user levels. • Select a destination. • Select a destination. one of the levels from 0 to 5 can be assigned to all users. • A destination can be included in only one group.0 Feb. Level 5 users can access all destinations of the levels 0 to 5. but cannot access to the destinations that belong to the levels 3 to 5. Similarly. 1. destinations that a user can access can be limited. 271 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. For example.

• To establish the priority of the Tray when ATS is being set. 1.5 bizhub C550 User Settings System Settings 8.8. • The default setting is Restrict. Stop Printing (Tray Fixed) : It stops printing when the specified tray runs out of paper. Switch Trays (Tray Priority): To switch to another tray with the specified paper and print when the tray is out of paper • The default setting is Stop Printing (Tray Fixed). Allow “Restrict” (3) No Matching Paper in Tray Setting Functions Use • To set whether to switch to another tray automatically when the specified tray runs out of paper during printing. • Select the tray on the [Auto Tray Select] screen. B. Adjustment / Setting (2) Auto Tray Switch ON/OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically switch to another tray with same size paper when the paper feed tray runs out of paper during printing. “Stop Printing (Tray Fixed)” Switch Trays (Tray Priority) Setting/ Procedure 272 . Paper Tray Settings (1) Auto Tray Selection Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the tray for automatic selection when APS is being set.5.1 A.0 Feb. • To switch the paper feed tray automatically. Language Selection Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the language on the LCD display. • Set the priority on the [Tray Priority] screen. • To change the unit displayed on the control panel. • The default setting varies depending on the marketing area mm (Numerical Value) inch (Numerical Value) inch (Fraction) C. Measurement Unit Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the unit displayed on the LCD display. 2007 8. • To specify the tray to be used when APS is being set. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. • To change the language on the control panel to another language. • The language options depend on the marketing area selected in [Marketing Area] available from [System 1] under Service Mode. • To establish the priority for switching the Tray when ATS is being set.

Power Save Settings • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Low Power Mode Settings Functions • To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. 2007 8. <Paper tray> • The default setting is Tray 1. Black 1 Standard “3” Full Color 4 5 2 E. • To change the time until low power starts. D. Auto Color Level Adjust. and lower the power consumption.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Administrator Security Level] • t will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or the vendor is mounted.0 Feb. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the criterion level to discriminate between a colored original and a black-andwhite original in the auto color mode • To change the criterion level for the partly colored image to be taken as a black-andwhite original • Five levels are available to choose from and the default setting is 3. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted. • It sets the simplex/duplex printing of the output for the sales counter or the unit check list. Utility Mode (4) Print Lists • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the paper feed tray for output the list for the meter count or the unit check. • Use the 10-key pad for setting. • The default setting is 15 min. <Simplex/Duplex> • The default setting is 1-Sided. 1.Field Service Ver. “15 min.” (10 to 240) Use Setting/ Procedure 273 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .) • It will not be displayed when the authentication device 1 is set to “Set” by the following setting. • Low power: To turn LED and LCD OFF.

NOTE • [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print. Copy : Tray 1 Print : Tray 1 Report Output : Tray 2 Fax : Tray 2 274 . • To change the output tray according to the application. Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received <Printer> • The default setting is Page Print.0 Feb. • “OFF” will only be displayed when [No Sleep] in Service Mode is set. Fax and Print Reports). Utility Mode (2) Sleep Mode Settings bizhub C550 Functions Field Service Ver. Adjustment / Setting (2) Output Tray Setting • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-517/608 is mounted. • Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control. “30 min.8. Output Settings • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2. • The default settings are as follows. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted. • The default setting is 30 min.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. Printer.” (15 to 240) / OFF Use Setting/ Procedure F.) (1) Print/Fax Output Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received. <Fax> • The default setting is Batch Print. 1. • Use the 10-key pad for setting. 2007 • To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • To change the time until the sleep mode starts.

• The default setting is Do Not Print. Prohibit Copy : Does not copy since the original size cannot be detected. Copy on Small Size Copy on A4/Letter “Prohibit Copy” I. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. • To copy the original such as business cards with which the original detection is not effective. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Select wether or not to print the stamp/composition on blank pages.) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) The larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be. Utility Mode G. • The default setting is Prohibit Copy.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. 1. Print Do Not Print 275 Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure bizhub C550 . or no original is being set. To make the background level foggier: Increase the setting value To make the background level less foggy: Decrease the setting value • The default setting is 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. “2” (0 to 4) H. 2007 8. AE Level Adjustment • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2. paper feed tray needs to be selected prior to pressing the Start key. Copy on Small Size : Copies on A5 paper. • To print a stamp/composition on blank pages. Blank Page Print Settings • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2. Auto Paper Select for Small Original Functions Use • To make the copy setting when the paper is undetectably small. Copy on A4/Letter : Copies on A4 or Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size paper.

8. Utility Mode 8.5.2
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

Custom Display Settings

A. Copier Settings (1) Default Tab
Functions Use • Selects a default tab display in the copy mode. • To change the default tab display in the copy mode. Basic : Normal basic screen Quick Copy : This screen displays all options that can be selected for Paper, Zoom, and Duplex/Combine functions. For color functions, all selectable options can be displayed on the screen. The normal [Basic] screen is also displayed as another tab on the screen. • The default setting is Basic. “Basic” Quick Copy

Setting/ Procedure

(2) Shortcut Key 1/2
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Selects whether to use the shortcut key. • Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

• When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys displayed on the screen.

Adjustment / Setting

B. Scan/Fax Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Default Tab
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the basic screen display in scan/fax mode. • To change the basic screen display in scan/fax mode. • The default setting is Address Book. Address Search (LDAP) Job History “Address Book” Direct Input

(2) Program Default
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default display for the program screen during scan/fax mode. • To keep the default display on the program screen which frequently changes during scan/fax mode • The default setting is PAGE 1. Temporary One-Touch/ “PAGE1” to PAGE27

276

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 (3) Address Book Index Default
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

8. Utility Mode

• To set the default display for the address book screen during scan/fax mode. • To keep the default display instead of search string on the address book which frequently changes during scan/fax mode. • The default setting is Main. “Favorite” /ABC to WXYZ / etc

(4) Shortcut Key 1/2
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Selects whether to use the shortcut key. • Adds frequently used shortcut keys of auxiliary functions to the basic screen. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

• When this setting is set to ON, select auxiliary functions to get their shortcut keys displayed on the screen.

(5) Default Address Book
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets a default screen display for the scan/fax mode where the address book is set to be displayed. • The default setting is Index. “Index” Address Type

C. Copy Screen • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] However, this menu is available when the key counter is installed and [The next job reservation] is set to License. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Copy Operating Screen
Functions Use • To set the display on the control panel screen during printing. • To display the screen to indicate printing when printing is being carried out. Yes : The screen shows that the printing is being carried out. The job can be reserved with [Program Next Job]. No: The screen does not indicate the printing being carried out. The normal copy setting screen will be displayed. The copy reservation is available. • The default setting is No. Yes “No”

Setting/ Procedure

277

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C550

8. Utility Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

bizhub C550

D. Fax Active Screen • It will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted. • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter, vendor, or authentication device 1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) TX Display
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the screen display for the control panel when transmitting fax. • To display [Sending] on the screen when transmitting fax. • The default setting is No. Yes “No”

(2) RX Display
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the screen display on the control panel when receiving fax. • To display [Receiving] on the screen when receiving the fax. • The default setting is No. Yes “No”

E. Color Selection Settings
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Specifies a color that highlights a selection on the control panel. • The default setting is Green. “Green” Blue Yellow Pumpkin

Adjustment / Setting

F. Left Panel Display Default
Functions Use • Specifies an item that is shown as a default on the left panel display. • To change the item that is shown as a default on the left panel display. : Displays a list of jobs that are both being printed and waiting to be printed. Job List (Status Display) : Displays the status of jobs that are being processed. Check Job Settings : Displays the setting of the copy job that is being printed. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Job List. “Job List.” Check Job Settings Job List (List Display)

8.5.3

Copier Settings

A. Auto Booklet ON when Fold & Staple • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-608 is mounted.
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to set the auto booklet when fold & staple is selected. • To cancel setting the auto booklet when fold & staple is selected. • The default setting is Auto Select Booklet. “Auto Select Booklet” OFF

278

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 B. Auto Zoom for Combine/Booklet
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

8. Utility Mode

• To set whether to select the appropriate magnification when combine or booklet is selected during auto paper select. • The default setting is Auto Display Zoom Ratio. “Auto Display Zoom Ratio” OFF

C. Auto Sort/Group Selection
Functions Use • Selects whether to use the auto sort/group selection function when a job has output of two or more sheets. Yes : Automatically disables the Auto sort/group selection when a sheet of original is placed on the ADF and the start key is pressed. Automatically enables the Auto sort/group selection when two or more sheets of originals are placed on the ADF and the start key is pressed. No : Disable the Auto sort/group selection. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Yes. “Yes” No

D. When AMS Direction is Incorrect • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
Functions Use • To set whether to print when the original is set in different direction from the set paper during auto zoom select.

Print Delete Job Setting/ Procedure

: To print according to the selected direction and size of paper : To display alarm and cancel the job

• The default setting is Print. “Print” Delete Job

279

Adjustment / Setting

• To display alarm when original is set in different direction from paper and to cancel the job during auto zoom select.

bizhub C550

8. Utility Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

E. Default Copy Settings • This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to Set in the [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]. • This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to inform that the vendor's main power switch needs to be checked or coins (a card) are not inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].
Functions • To make default settings for the copy mode. * The machine is initialized at the following timings: • The main power switch is turned ON. • Panel is reset. • In an Interrupt mode. • Auto Reset • The password entry screen for account track is changed. Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the Initial mode setting to meet the user’s need. <Current Setting> • The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are registered as the default settings of copy functions. <Factory Default> • The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default settings of copy functions.

bizhub C550

Adjustment / Setting

F. Separate Scan Output Method • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
Functions Use • To set the output mode at Separate Scan setting. • To print all at once after reading all data. Page Print : Print consecutively during the read operation. Batch print : Print all at once after reading all data. Copy setting can be changed after the read operation. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Page Print. “Page Print” Batch Print

G. Enlargement Rotation • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor1 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]
Functions Use • Sets whether to rotate images of which length is more than 297 mm in the main scan direction (in the horizontal direction on the ADF or the Original glass) in the copying process. Allow : Makes an enlargement rotation only when black is selected for the color setting. Restrict : Disables an enlargement rotation regardless of the color setting. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Restrict. Allow Restrict

280

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

8. Utility Mode

Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

• To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with document set on the original glass (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.) • To function the auto magnification when the Tray is selected. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

I. Auto Zoom (ADF) • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2”. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.) • To function the auto magnification when the feed tray is selected. • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF

J. Specify Default Tray when APS Off • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled.

• The default setting is Tray (Tray 1) Before APS OFF. “Tray Before APS ON” Default Tray

K. Select Tray for Insert Sheet • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the default setting of the tray for cover sheet paper. • The default setting is Tray 2.

L. Tri-Fold Print Side • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels] • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-608 is mounted.
Functions Use • Specifies the side of copies to be folded. Inside : Folds paper in three with the printed side in. Outside : Folds paper in three with the printed side out. • The default setting is Outside. “Outside” Inside

Setting/ Procedure

281

Adjustment / Setting

• To set the tray for the initial setting when APS is cancelled.

bizhub C550

H. Auto Zoom (Platen) • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]

8. Utility Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

bizhub C550

M. Print Jobs During Copy Operation • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
Functions Use • To set whether to accept the printing job for print data or fax data during copy operation. • To refuse print data or fax data during copy operation. Accept : Receives the print data or fax data to print. Receive Only : Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished. • The default setting is Accept. “Accept” Receive Only

Setting/ Procedure

N. Automatic Image Rotation • [It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 1” or “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets whether to automatically rotate images to print if the original and specified paper directions are not consistent with each other. • The default setting is On. “On” Off

8.5.4

Scan/Fax Settings

A. JPEG Compression Level
Adjustment / Setting
Functions Use • To set the JPEG compression method when scanning with JPEG while in scan/fax mode. • To change the compression rate when JPEG scanning. High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning. Standard : Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning. High Compression: Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning. • The default setting is Standard. High Quality “Standard” High Compression

Setting/ Procedure

B. Black Compression Level
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the monochrome compression method for scanning in the monochrome mode while in scan/fax mode. • To be used when changing the monochrome mode while in scanner mode. • The default setting is MMR. MH “MMR”

282

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 C. TWAIN Lock Time
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

8. Utility Mode

• To set the period of time for unlocking the operation panel while in TWAIN scanning. • The default setting is 120 sec. 120 sec. (30 to 300 sec.)

D. Default Scan/Fax Settings • This menu is unavailable if user authentication is not made while either of authentication devices is set to Set in the [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]. • This menu is not available when the key counter is set or when a warning appears to inform that the vendor's main power switch needs to be checked or coins (a card) are not inserted under the condition where the vendor is set to Set in the [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].
Functions • To make default settings for the fax/scan mode. * The machine is initialized at the following timings: • The main power switch is turned ON. • Panel is reset. • In an Interrupt mode. • Auto Reset • The password entry screen for account track is changed. Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the Initial mode setting to meet the user’s need. <Current Setting> • The settings made on the control panel before entering the setting menu screens are registered as the default settings of fax/scan functions. <Factory Default> • The settings made at the time of shipment from the factory are registered as the default settings of fax/scan functions.

E. Compact PDF Compression Level
Functions Use • Selects a compression method applied to scanned data that is produced with the use of Compact PDF in the scan/fax mode. • To change the compression ratio applied to scanned data that is produced with the Compact PDF format. High Quality : Lowers the compression rate and puts priority in quality while scanning. Standard : Compression rate and quality are normally balanced while scanning. High Compression: Makes the compression rate higher and puts priority in lowering the data volume while scanning. • The default setting is Standard. High Quality “Standard” High Compression

Setting/ Procedure

283

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C550

8. Utility Mode 8.5.5
bizhub C550

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

Printer Settings

A. Basic Settings (1) PDL Setting
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the PDL (Page Description Language) for PC printing. • To fix the PDL as necessary. It usually switches automatically. • The default setting is Auto. “Auto” PCL PS

(2) Number of Copies
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number to be copied when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the number cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc. • The default setting is 1. “1” (1 to 9999)

(3) Original Direction
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the default setting for the direction of the original during PC printing. • The default setting is Portrait. “Portrait” Landscape

Adjustment / Setting

(4) Spool Print Jobs in HDD before RIP
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to store the print data to HDD when receiving the next job during RIP process of the current job. • The default setting is ON “ON” “OFF”

(5) A4/A3 ↔ LTR/LGR Auto Switch
Functions Use • To set whether to switch between A4 and Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size paper, and A3 and Ledger (11 x 17) size paper in reading. • To output Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size document to A4 size, and Ledger (11 x 17) size document to A3 size. • To output A4 size document to Letter (8 1/2 x 11) size, and A3 size document to Ledger (11 x 17) size. NOTE • When switching the size, the image will be printed in the same magnification. • The image will not be reduced when there is image deficiency. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

284

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 (6) Banner Sheet Setting
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to print on the banner (front cover) page. • To use when the banner (front cover) page is to be printed. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

8. Utility Mode

(7) Binding Direction Adjustment
Functions Use • Specifies the alignment between the sides of paper (binding position adjustment) in duplex printing. • To achieve faster printing performance, select Productivity Priority. To address misalignment problems between sides of copies in the horizontal and vertical directions, select Finishing Priority. Finishing Priority : Able to optimize sides aligning operation as the process is performed after the machine receives all of the print data. Productivity Priority : Able to accelerate print speed as sides alignment proceeds together with data reception and print operation. Control Adjustments : Comply with the command from the printer driver and does not take the side alignment step. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Finishing Priority. “Finishing Priority” “Productivity Priority” Control Adjustments

B. Paper Setting (1) Paper Tray
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the paper feed tray when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when paper feed tray cannot be specified by the printer driver when printing from Windows DOS, etc. • The default setting is Auto.

(2) Paper Size
Functions Use • To set the paper size when not specified by the printer diver during printing. • To use when the paper size cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc.

(3) 2-Sided Print
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out duplex print during PC printing when not specified by the printer driver. • To use when 2-sided printing cannot be specified by the printer driver while printing by Windows DOS, etc. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

285

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C550

8. Utility Mode (4) Binding Position
bizhub C550
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

• To set the binding direction during duplex printing when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when binding direction cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing by Windows DOS, etc. • The default setting is Left Bind. Top Bind “Left Bind” Right Bind

(5) Staple • The menu is available only when the optional finisher FS-517/608 is mounted.
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to staple or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use hen staple is not specified by the printer driver during printing by the Windows DOS, etc. • The default setting is OFF. 1 Position 2 Position “OFF”

(6) Punch • The menu is available only when the optional finisher FS-517/608 is mounted.
Functions Use • To select whether to make punch-holes or not when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify punching during printing from Windows DOS, etc. • The default setting is OFF. 2-Hole/3-Hole/4-Hole “OFF”

Adjustment / Setting

Setting/ Procedure

* The number of punch holes being set is available from [Service Mode] → [Finisher].

(7) Banner Paper Tray
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the feed tray for printing on the banner (front cover) page. • To set the feed tray for printing on the banner (front cover) page. • The default setting is Auto.

C. PCL Settings (1) Font Settings
Functions Use • To set the font when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the printer driver cannot specify the font during printing from Windows DOS, etc. • It can be selected from the Resident font or the download font. • The default setting is Courier. 1. When selecting from the Internal font, touch [Internal], and select the one from the displayed font list.

Setting/ Procedure

286

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 (2) Symbol Set
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

8. Utility Mode

• To set the font symbol set when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To use when the font symbol set cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc. • The default setting is Roman-8 or PC8, Code Page 437.

(3) Font Size
Functions Use • To set the font size when not specified by the printer driver during PC printing. • To set the font size when it cannot be specified by the printer driver during printing from Windows DOS, etc. • To set scalable font (: Point) and bitmap font (: Pitch) respectively. • The default setting is Scalable Font : 12.00 points Bitmap Font : 10.00 pitch

Setting/ Procedure

(4) Line/Page
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of lines per page for printing the text data. • To change the number of lines per page for printing the text data. • Default setting value differs depending on the values by the following two different settings. [Utility] → [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Basic Setting] → [Original Direction] [Utility] → [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Paper Setting] → [Default Paper Size]

(5) CR/LF Mapping
Functions Use • To set the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. • To change the mode for replacing data when printing the text data. Mode 1 : CR → CR-LF LF=LF FF=FF Mode 2 : CR=CR LF→CR-LF FF→CR-FF Mode 3 : CR→CR-LF LF→CR-LF FF→CR-FF OFF : Does not replace • The default setting is OFF. Mode 1 Mode 2 Mode 3 “OFF”

Setting/ Procedure

D. PS Setting (1) Print PS Errors
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print or not the error information when an error occurred during PS rasterizing. • To print the information concerning the postscript error. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

287

Adjustment / Setting

“60 or 64 lines” (5 to 128)

bizhub C550

8. Utility Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

bizhub C550

E. Print Reports • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.)
Functions Use • To output the report or demo page concerning the print setting. • To check the setting concerning the printer. The types of report available for output are as follows. Configuration Page Demo Page PCL Font List PS Font List Setting/ Procedure 1. 2. 3. 4. : The list of printer setting will be output. : The test page will be output. : PCL font list will be output. : PS font list will be output.

Touch [User Setting] → [Printer Setting] → [Print Reports]. Select the report to be output. Select the feed tray. Select Simplex or Duplex print, and touch the Start key.

8.5.6

Change Password

• When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete. • This menu is available only when box administrator authentication is established during user authentication or account track.
Functions Use • To modify the password used for the user authentication. • To modify the user authentication password currently used. • Enter the user authentication password with the keys on the control panel. Current Password New Password Retype Password : Enter the user authentication password currently used. : Enter the new user authentication password to be used. : Enter the new user authentication password again.

Adjustment / Setting

Setting/ Procedure

NOTE • When [Password Rules] which can be displayed by the following setting is set to “ON”, password using the single letter or the password same with the previous one, less than 8-digit will not be modified. [Utility] → [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] • When the following setting is set to “ON”, entering the incorrect password three times will cause access lock. When an access lock occurred, turn the main power switch OFF, and wait for 10 seconds or more and turn main power switch ON again to enter the password again. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

8.5.7

Change E-mail Address

• When conducting user authentication (MFP only), it will be displayed only when the authentication is complete. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Administrator Security Levels]
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To modify the e-mail address which is registered as a user. • To use when modifying the e-mail address currently being used. • Enter the new e-mail address using the keys on the control panel.

288

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

8. Utility Mode

8.6

Administrator Settings
bizhub C550 Adjustment / Setting

• The Administrator Settings will be available by entering the administrator password (8 digits) set by the Administrator Settings or Service Mode. (The administrator password is initially set to “12345678.”) NOTE • When the following setting is set to “ON”, entering the incorrect administrator password three times will cause access lock. The access lock is released after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the main power switch is turned OFF and then ON more than 10 seconds later. The access lock can be released by touching keys as follows. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator unlocking]. 8.6.1 System Settings

A. Power Save Settings (1) Low Power Mode Settings
Functions • To set the time until low power starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • Low power: To turn LED and LCD OFF, and lower the power consumption. • To change the time until low power starts. • Use the 10-key pad for setting. • The default setting is 15 min. “15 min.” (10 to 240)

Use Setting/ Procedure

(2) Sleep Mode Settings
Functions • To set the time until sleep mode starts operating after the last key operation has been completed. • Turn all lines OFF except 5 V line for control. • “OFF” will only be displayed when “No Sleep” in Service Mode is set. • To change the time until the sleep mode starts. NOTE • The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to “OFF.” • Use the 10-key pad for setting. • The default setting is 30 min. “30 min.” (15 to 240) / OFF

Use

Setting/ Procedure

(3) Power Save Key
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the type of the power save mode which starts by pressing the Power Save key. • To change the power save function which starts by pressing the Power Save key. • The default setting is Low Power. “Low Power” Sleep

289

8. Utility Mode (4) Enter Power Save Mode
bizhub C550
Functions Use

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

• To set whether to immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax during power save mode. • To immediately switch to the power save mode after printing in case of receiving the fax during power save mode. Normal : Switches to the power save mode according to the normal power save mode after the printing. Immediately : Switches to the power save mode immediately after the printing. • The default setting is “Normal.” Normal “Immediately”

Setting/ Procedure

B. Output Settings (1) Print/Fax Output Settings
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timing for printing for the PC print job or fax received. Batch Print : Starts printing when all data are received Page Print : Starts printing every time data for each page are received <Printer> • The default setting is Page Print. <Fax> • The default setting is Batch Print. NOTE • [FAX] will be displayed only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.

Adjustment / Setting

(2) Output Tray Settings • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-517/608 is mounted.
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the priority output tray for each application (Copy print, Printer, Fax and Print Reports). • To change the output tray according to the application. • The default settings are as follows. Copy : Tray 1 Print : Tray 1 Report Output : Tray 2 Fax : Tray 2

(3) Shift Output Each Job • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-517/608 is mounted.
Functions Use • To set whether to offset each job when paper is printed using the finisher FS-514. • Some paper type may fail to be discharged or get deteriorated loading when large volume copies are printed using the finisher. This function is used to print large volume copies when finisher is mounted. (When this function is set to “No”, the paper is discharged without offsetting the paper to the center of the tray.) • The default setting is Yes. “Yes” No

Setting/ Procedure

290

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007 C. Date/Time Settings
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the date/time and the time zone to start the clock. • To change settings concerning the date/time. • This setting should be carried out for set up.

8. Utility Mode

• For time zone, set the time difference with the world standard time. • Setting range for the time zone: -12:00 to +12:00 (by 30 minutes) • When the following setting is set to “ON”, [Set Data] will be displayed. Touch [Set Data] and modify the time. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Detail Settings] → [Time Adjustment Setting]

D. Daylight Saving Time
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to set the daylight saving time. • To set the time difference in setting the daylight saving time. • To set the daylight saving time. • The default setting is No. Yes “No”

• When setting to ON, set the time difference to move up. “60 min.” (1 to 150)

E. Weekly Timer Settings (1) Weekly Timer ON/OFF Settings
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use or not to use the weekly timer.

• The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

(2) Time Settings
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time to turn ON/OFF the weekly timer for each day of the week. 1. Touch the key of the day to be set. 2. Using the 10-key pad, input the ON time and the OFF time. 3. For cancelling the setting, press [Clear].

291

Adjustment / Setting

• To set the weekly timer.

bizhub C550

8. Utility Mode (3) Date Settings
bizhub C550
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

• To select the date or the day of the week for the weekly timer to function. 1. Select the Year/Month with [+] / [-] keys. 2. For setting by the date, touch the appropriate key of the day. 3. For setting by the day of the week, touch the appropriate key of the week by [Daily Setting]. 4. Check to make sure that the set key of the day is highlighted, and touch [OK].

(4) Select Time for Power Save
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time to turn power OFF/ON when the weekly timer is set and the power is ON. • To turn power OFF for a certain period of time when the weekly timer is set. • The default setting is No. Yes “No”

<Set Time for Power Save> • Using the 10-key pad, input the time to turn OFF and to turn back ON again.

(5) Password for Non-Business Hours
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to input the password before using when the weekly timer is set. • To set the password for turning the power ON temporarily when the weekly timer is set. • The default setting is No. Yes “No”

Adjustment / Setting

• When setting to Yes, enter the password (eight digits).

F. Restrict User Access (1) Copy Program Lock Settings
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the prohibition for modifying the registered copy program. • To be used when prohibiting the user from changing the copy program. 1. Touch the key for the appropriate copy program. 2. Touch [OK].

(2) Delete Saved Copy Program
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the registered program job. • To delete the registered program job. 1. Touch the appropriate program job. 2. Touch [Delete]. 3. Touch [Yes] on the check screen to delete the program job.

292

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

8. Utility Mode

<Changing Job Priority>
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the print priority for the job. • The default setting is Allow. “Allow” Restrict

<Delete Other User Jobs>
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict job delete by other users when the user is authenticated. • The default setting is Restrict. Allow “Restrict”

<Registering and Changing Addresses>
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change of the registered address. • The default setting is Allow. “Allow” Restrict

NOTE • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode]

<Changing Zoom Ratio>
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the change on the registered magnification. • The default setting is Allow. “Allow” Restrict

<Change the “From” Address>
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to prohibit the registered from address to be changed. • The default setting is Allow. “Allow” Restrict

293

Adjustment / Setting

bizhub C550

(3) Restrict Access to Job Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 or vendor 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]

8. Utility Mode <Change Registered Overlay>
bizhub C550
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

• Selects allow or restrict for the change of registered overlay. • The default setting is Allow. “Allow” Restrict

(4) Restrict Operation <Restrict Broadcasting>
Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to prohibit sending the fax to more than one address. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF”

G. Expert Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor 2 is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key Counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]) (1) AE Level Adjustment
Functions • To set the default setting for AE (Auto Exposure) the larger the value becomes the more emphasized the background will be. To make the background level foggier: Increase the setting value To make the background level less foggy: Decrease the setting value • The default setting is 2. “2” (0 to 4)

Adjustment / Setting

Use Setting/ Procedure

294

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

8. Utility Mode

(2) Printer Adjustment <Leading Edge Adjustment> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].
Functions Use • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in the manual bypass tray. • • • • • The PH unit has been replaced. The paper type has been changed. The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction. A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper, thick 1/1+, thick 2, thick 3, thick 4, transparencies, and envelopes. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Width A Specifications: 4.2 ± 0.5 mm Setting range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

Adjustment Specification

A00JF3C504DA

Adjustment Instructions

Setting/ Procedure

1. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray. 2. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. 3. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Leading Edge Adjustment]. 4. Select the [Normal]. 5. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 6. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 7. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. 8. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 9. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 10.If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 11.If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK]. 12.Following the same procedure, adjust for thick 1 to 3, OHP, and envelope.

295

Adjustment / Setting

If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one.

bizhub C550

8. Utility Mode

Field Service Ver. 1.0 Feb. 2007

<Centering> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].
Functions Use • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. • The PH unit has been replaced. • A paper feed unit has been added. • The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. Specifications: 3.0 ± 0.5 mm Setting range: -3.0 mm to +3.0 mm (in 0.2 mm increments)

bizhub C550

Adjustment Specification

A00JF3C505DA

Adjustment Instructions

If width A is longer than the specifications, make the setting value smaller than the current one. If width A is shorter than the specifications, make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. 2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering]. 3. Select the paper source to be adjusted. 4. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 5. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 6. If width A falls outside the specified range, change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. 7. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 8. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 9. If width A is outside the specified range, change the setting again and make a check again. 10.If width A falls within the specified range, touch [OK]. 11.Following the same procedure, adjust for all other paper sources. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the bypass.)

Setting/ Procedure

Adjustment / Setting

296

thick 2 and thick 3. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.Following the same procedure. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 1.0 mm to +3. 9. touch [OK]. • Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper.If width A falls within the specified range. 3. 4. OHP. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]. 2007 8. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. 1. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. 6. Functions Use • Makes an adjustment by changing the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing for individual types of paper. If width A falls outside the specified range. make the setting value smaller than the current one.5 mm Setting range: -3. If width A is shorter than the specifications. 5. Utility Mode <Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex Side 2)> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 11. Select the [Normal]. • When the 2nd side image on paper fed from the tray is shifted in the sub scan direction. 8. adjust for thick 1 to 3.Field Service Ver. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. and envelope. If width A is outside the specified range.2 ± 0.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification A00JF3C504DA Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. 297 Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure bizhub C550 . 7. make the setting value greater than the current one. Width A Backside Specifications: 4. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Leading Edge Adjustment (Duplex side 2)]. 10.0 mm (in 0.0 Feb. change the setting again and make a check again. thick 1/1+. 2.

• The default setting is “4 mm”.5 mm Setting range: -3. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction.If width A falls within the specified range. make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. 5.2 mm increments) A00JF3C505DA Adjustment Instructions • If width A is longer than the specifications. Utility Mode <Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)> bizhub C550 Functions Use Adjustment Specification Field Service Ver. Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.Following the same procedure. 2007 • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-sided mode. • To use when the optional automatic duplex unit AD-503 is set up. • To change the width of the area not printed along the leading edge of the paper. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. 1. use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern. change the setting again and make a check again. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Backside Specifications: 3.0 ± 0. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Printer Adjustment] → [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)]. “4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm 298 .8. touch [OK].0 Feb. •For measurement. 4. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. make the setting value smaller than the current one. 7. 3. 2. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper. If width A is outside the specified range.) Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting <Erase Leading Edge> • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2”.0 mm (in 0. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. • To make this setting independently for Front and Back sides. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray. 9. 6. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy. 10. adjust for all other paper sources.0 mm to +3. 11. • If width A is shorter than the specifications. Select the paper source to be adjusted. If width A falls outside the specified range. 8.

) (3) Finisher Adjustment • For details of adjustment method.If width A or B falls within the specified range. 1. shrunk). Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper. thick 2. adjust for [Thick 1 to 3]. 10.1 Setting Range A.” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] Functions Use 8. If width A or B is shorter than the specifications. 5. thick 3 and thick 4. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen.54 299 Adjustment / Setting Adjustment Procedure bizhub C550 . If width of A or B falls outside the specified range.Field Service Ver. change the setting value and make a check again. [OHP]. B: -7 to +7 A00JF3C506DA Adjustment Specification A Adjustment Instructions If width A or B is longer than the specifications. See P. The printed image on the copy distorts (stretched. 1. and [Envelope]. Utility Mode • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. touch [OK]. 3. If width A or B falls outside the specified range. change the setting using the [+]/[-] keys. Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 × 17 plain paper.0 Feb. 7. thick 1/1+. • • • • The l adjustment becomes necessary.9 to 8. (Check width A only for [OHP] and [Envelope]. 8.Following the same procedure. Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges. 2. make the setting value smaller than the current one. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern again.3 B: 389. see FS-517/608 Service Manual. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 11. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern. 9. 6. Width A: equivalent to one grid Width B: equivalent to 48 grids B Specifications A: 7. 4. Touch these keys in this order: [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Vertical Adjustment]. 2007 <Vertical Adjustment> • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2. make the setting value greater than the current one. When the printed image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction.1 to 392. Check width A and width B on the test pattern.

3. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Density Adjustment] → [Black Image Density]. <Black Image Density> Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black copy • To vary the density of the printed image of a black copy Lighter (2 steps). 4. 4. Darker (2 steps) If the black is light. “Std”. The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. • Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been executed.8. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue. Cyan. 2007 bizhub C550 (4) Density Adjustment <Thick Paper Image Density-Yellow. • When [D Max Density] and [Background Voltage Margin] of Service Mode are changed. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer.0 Feb. 2. 3. Adjustment / Setting (5) Image Stabilization <Image Stabilization Only> Functions Use • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. Black> Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies. touch the Darker key. “Std”. 3. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Density Adjustment]. Darker (5 steps) Light color: Touch the Darker key. 1. Touch the Lighter or Darker key as necessary to correct the image density. touch the Lighter key. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. If the black is dark. 2. 1. Magenta. 1. Setting/ Procedure 300 . Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 1. Dark color: Touch the Lighter key. 2. (Only black color adjustable for OHP transparencies) • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies Lighter (5 steps). Select a type of thick paper and a color that need to be adjusted. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Image Stabilization] → [Image Stabilization Only]. Touch the Lighter or Darker key to correct the image density.

Adjustment Range Adjustment Procedure Setting/ Procedure 301 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence. 6. Utility Mode • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized. 5. -2 mm to +2 mm (step:0. Make a print and check the image. Touch [OK] to determine the adjusted value. 4. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. 1. Select [Front] or [Back]. 2.Field Service Ver.0 Feb.1 mm) Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value 1. the paper separation position is adjusted for the first and second sides of paper. • Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after image stabilization has been executed. 4. 3. Setting/ Procedure (6) Paper Separation Adjustment Functions Use • For duplex printing of thin paper. 1. • The default setting is 0. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Image Stabilization] → [Initialize+Image Stabilization]. • Use if an image problem persists even after [Gradation Adjustment] has been executed. Change the setting value with [+] or [-] key. • To adjust the balance between paper separation and image transfer performances by changing the paper separation position in duplex printing of thin paper (64 g/ m2) in hot and humid conditions. 2. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Paper Separation Adjustment]. 3. 2007 <Initialize+Image Stabilization> Functions Use 8.

1. • Able to make an individual adjustment for each paper type of plain paper. 4. 7. Cyan)> Functions Use • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]. increase the setting. Check Procedure Check point X. • To correct any color shift. Using the [+] / [-] key. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. thick 3 and thick 4. 2. Load tray 1 with A3/11x17 or A4/8 1/2 x11 normal paper. increase the setting. 3. only the line of the selected color moves. decrease the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of B. Direction of B 4036fs3005c1 4036fs3006c1 Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y Direction of A If the cross deviates in the direction of A. decrease the setting. 2007 (7) Color Registration Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation. (At this time. increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of B. thick 1/1+.8.) 8. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. 6. If the cross deviates in the direction of B. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Color Registration Adjust]. Magenta. Select the color to be adjusted. “0” (-6 to +6 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of A. decrease the setting. <Color Registration Adjust (Yellow. Y bizhub C550 Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting 4036fs3004c0 Adjustment for X direction: Check point X Direction of A If the cross deviates in the direction of A. check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. thick 2. 1. On the test pattern produced. 5. Press the Start key. Direction of B 4036fs3007c1 4036fs3008c1 302 . change the setting value as necessary.0 Feb.

2007 8. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjustment]. 1. 4.” [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Dev. Place ten blank sheets of A3/11 x 17 paper on the test pattern and lower the original cover. Select the appropriate mode for the gradation adjustment. 7.Field Service Ver. 5. Touch [Stabilizer] and the Start key to perform image stabilization.) 9. : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts. • The image transfer belt unit has been replaced. perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems. NOTE • Before executing Gradation adjust. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice]. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. • The IU has been replaced. 1. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 2 through 7 twice (a total of three times). (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern. : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts. 3. Press the Start key. be sure to perform Stabilizer. 6. • If the image is faulty. 8. Functions Use • To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the scanner • Color reproduction performance becomes poor.0 Feb. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Bias Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. 2. 303 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . • Printer (Gradation) • Printer (Resolution) • Copy Adjustment Procedure : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts. Utility Mode (8) Gradation Adjustment • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.

relating the color to a gray of a similar lightness.0 1. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • This menu is unavailable when the key counter is not inserted while only the key counter is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice].0 1. The quality of color which can be A Value described by words such as light.” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 1 is mounted during the device power is OFF or no authentication is set. Hue described by words such as red. Utility Mode Field Service Ver.0 bizhub C550 COLOR CHART BK M C C 2. a scale may be used instead. saturation is “chroma”: this is the world of color. • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2.1 1.. yellow..6 C C M C Y Y M Y Color is “hue”.8 2. : CTC-008-01 PART NO. The quality of color which can be dull etc.25 4.6 1. lightness is “value”.5 2.8.0 3. 2007 (9) Scanner Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.25 P2 3.1 1.2 COPY DENSITY : COLOR BALANCE Y : M : C : BK : OTHERS : 4.0 Y M C 4. • If the color chart is not available.5 2. blue etc.4 1.5 2.8 3.2 Y 1.4 1.6 CHART NO. The quality of color which can be dark etc. COLOR CHART 1.0 2.2 4.2 1.5 2. 1.8 3.0 Feb.6 1. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 • A: Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge Adjustment • B: Scanner Adjustment: Centering • C: Horizontal Adjustment • D: Vertical Adjustment %RH P2 M R G B Chroma described by words such as vivid. describing the extent to which a color differs from a gray having the same value. MODEL : MACHINE S/N : DATE : COUNTER : / / °C 1. : 4036-7940-01 Printed In Japan C M C Y Y M P1 P1 B Original reference D 4038F3C517DA Adjustment / Setting 304 .8 2.

A00JF3C507DA Use Adjustment Specification A Specifications A: ± 0.0 Feb. 4. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. If the image falls outside the specified range. If the copy image exceeds the specified length. 305 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .0 to +5. Press the Start key to make a copy. 5. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment. 1. 2. decrease the setting value. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. •A width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below. 1. increase the setting value. When the original glass is replaced. 2007 <Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge> Functions 8. Press the Start key to make another copy. 9. Check point A on the image of the copy. 7. 8. 3. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the copy image is less than the specified length. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.5 mm Setting range -5.Field Service Ver. When the original width scale is replaced. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. Utility Mode • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment: Leading Edge].0 (in 0. 6.

decrease the setting value. • When the original glass is replaced.0 mm Setting range -10. 4. Press the Start key to make a copy. Check point B of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 7. 5.0 to +10. 2. 1. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. Check point B on the image of the copy. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of the Printer Adjustment. 3. 6. If the copy image exceeds the specified length. Press the Start key to make a copy. 1. Adjustment / Setting 306 . Specifications B: ± 1. Call the Administrator Setting to the screen. • When the CCD unit is replaced.8. increase the setting value. • The scanner home sensor has been replaced. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 8.0 (in 0. If the image falls outside the specified range. 9.1 mm increments) Adjustment Specification B A00JF3C508DA Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the copy image is less than the specified length. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment: Centering]. •B width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below.0 Feb. Utility Mode <Scanner Adjustment: Centering> bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. 2007 • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.

307 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 6. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. Check the C width on the image of the copy. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. Utility Mode • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section • The CCD unit has been replaced. 1.Field Service Ver. 5. 7. Press the Start key to make another copy. 2. Specifications C: ± 1.0 mm Setting range 0. decrease the setting. increase the setting.0 Feb. 4. If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. 8.001 increments) 4038F3C516DA C Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. If the image falls outside the specified range. 9. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Horizontal Adjustment]. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. 1. •Measure C width on the color chart and on the sample copy. 2007 <Horizontal Adjustment> Functions Use Adjustment Specification 8. 3.990 to 1. Press the Start key to make a copy. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.010 (in 0. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.

If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart.0 Feb. increase the setting.8.010 (in 0. Utility Mode <Vertical Adjustment> bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver.001 increments) 4038F3C518DA Adjustment Specification D Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. 2007 • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section • The scanner assy has been replaced. decrease the setting. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 9. • The scanner drive cables have been replaced.990 to 1. Press the Start key to make a copy. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. Adjustment / Setting (10) ADF Adjustment • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2. 8. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. 1. 6.5 mm Setting Range 0. see DF-611 Service Manual. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 3. •Measure D width on the color chart and on the sample copy. Press the Start key to make another copy. • The scanner motor has been replaced.26 308 . Specifications D: ± 1. Make adjustments until the specifications are met.” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] • For details of adjustment method. 1. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. 4. If the image falls outside the specified range. See P. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Scanner Adjustment] → [Vertical Adjustment]. 5. 7. Check the D width on the image of the copy. 2.

• Use when changing the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the original glass. 1 <Detection Level> • The default setting is Std. (warning code: D-1/D-2) 2: Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen. • To set the detection level of the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass.0 Feb.” [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Split Line Prior Detection] • When “No” is selected. Use Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Yes. “Yes” No NOTE • [Warning Level] and [Detection Level] can be set when “Yes” is selected. the original glass cleaning operation after the job ends does not operate. 3: Warning will be displayed on all screens. 1. • Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the lines. Normal : Normal detection level High : Stain on the glass will easily be detected. • To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected. 1: Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark.Field Service Ver. Utility Mode • To set whether or not to perform pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. 2007 (11) Line Detection <Prior Detection Setting> Functions 8. • Be aware that selecting “No” and performing the pre-detection with the following setting will display “NG.” High “2” 3 309 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . Low “Std. Low : Stain on the glass will not be detected easily. <Warning Level> • The default setting is 2.

• When the following setting is set to “0” or “1”. 0 to 6 Adjustment / Setting 310 . Setting] → [Paper Passaging Detection] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is 1. 2007 • To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.8. the range which the administrator can set will be restricted to “0 (Disable)” or “1 (Enable). 2 : When the original is fed.” [Service mode] → [System 2] → [Split Line Detect. 1. the glass will move while reading the original in order to remove the stain. the glass will move while reading the original in order to remove the stain. 0 : The glass will stop moving when the original is fed. 4. and 6 of the image process are set in this order with 3 being the most efficient in reducing the lines.0 Feb. and will not perform removing the stain. and reduce the lines. NOTE • When this function is used. The lines will be reduced also by the image process control. an image quality problem might be occurred in the side effect by the image processing control according to the dirt condition of the original glass. Utility Mode <Detection While Feeding Setting> bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. 5. 1 : The glass will move between originals when feeding the original. 3 to 6 : When the original is fed. • Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original. The level 3.

check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. 3. change the setting value as necessary. Using the [+] / [-] key. increase the setting. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation. On the test pattern produced. Select the color to be adjusted.Field Service Ver. (At this time. 2. If the cross deviates in the direction of B. decrease the setting. 2007 (12) Trial Edge Adjust Functions Use 8. 5.0 Feb. decrease the setting. 4. 8. thick 1/1+. and thick 2/3/4 “0” (-5 to +5 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of A. 7. 1. Direction of B 4036fs3005c0 4036fs3006c0 311 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . Load manual bypass tray with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/2 x 11 normal paper. only the line of the selected color moves. • To correct any color shift at trial edge. Check Procedure Check point Z Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure compare A00JF3C524DA Adjustment for Z direction: Check point Z Direction of A If the cross deviates in the direction of A. Call the Administrator Settings to the screen. • Able to make a setting on a process speed basis independently for each paper type of plain paper (color). increase the setting. Touch [System Settings] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Color Registration Adjust].) 9. 6. If the cross deviates in the direction of B. Press the Start key. Select a paper type that is set on the manual bypass tray. 1. Utility Mode • To adjust trial edge if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper.

[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To output the consumable life list • To print out the list in this setting because the list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. Select the paper type. and touch the Start key. 2. 3. and touch the Start key. Adjustment / Setting (3) Meter Counter List • Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication device. 2007 H. 2. Touch the paper size key to select the paper size. management device 2. bizhub C550 (2) Paper Size/Type Counter Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the combination of the specific paper size and the paper type. vendor 2 is mounted. 2. 1. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]) <Job Settings List> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the value set by the setting menu. Press a key out of 1 to 10 registration keys. 3. Select simplex or duplex print. 1. and touch the Start key. Touch [Meter Counter List]. List/Counter (1) Management List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. 3. 3. Setting/ Procedure 312 . Select the Feed tray.8. management device 2. vendor 2 is mounted.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. Setting/ Procedure (4) Check Consumables List • Setting will be available only when the following setting shows that either authentication device. [Utility] → [Check Consumable Life] 1. Touch [Consumable Life List]. Touch [Job Settings List]. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No. [Meter Counter] → [Details] 1. Select Simplex or Duplex print.0 Feb. Select the feed tray. and to set the count. Select Simplex or Duplex print. Select the Feed tray. • To print out the list in this setting because counter list cannot be printed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use • To output the meter counter list. 2. 1.

• To select not to reset to the default settings even when the accounts are changed through the use of a data management device.) bizhub C550 . “Copy” <System Auto Reset Time> • The default setting is 1 min. “1 min. Reset “Do Not Reset” 313 Adjustment / Setting (3) Job Reset <When Account is changed> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. “Reset” Do Not Reset <When Original is set on ADF> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Select whether to reset the function when originals are placed on the ADF. “1 min.0 Feb.” (1 to 9. or user authentication/account track is set. Utility Mode • To change the period of time until system auto reset starts functioning. • The default setting is Reset. 8. • The default setting is 1 min.” (1 to 9. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted.Field Service Ver.” • To change the period of time until auto reset starts functioning. OFF) Scan/Fax (2) Auto Reset Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the period of time until auto reset starts functioning in “Copy” and “Scan/Fax. • Reset the function when originals are set on the ADF. • The default setting is Copy. 1. Reset Settings (1) System Auto Reset Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the period of time until system auto reset starts functioning. a magnetic card is pulled out. • The default setting is Do Not Reset. <Priority Mode> • To set the functions displayed during system auto reset from Copy and Scan/Fax. No Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Selects whether to reset (initialize) a machine when the key counter is unplugged. 2007 I.

2. 1. ON “OFF” <Next Job: Original Set/Bind Direction> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to cancel the original set/bind direction when the job (which original set/bind direction is set) started and the next job setting has become available. Touch [Delete Secure Documents].) • The default setting is ON. (3) Auto Delete Secure Document Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to delete the confidential documents in the box after a certain period of time.8. User Box Settings (1) Delete Unused User Box Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the unnecessary box without data. (The address will be cleared even when [OFF] is selected. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen. • The default setting is 1 Day.0 Feb. 1. It also sets the period of time to store data. Touch [Yes] on the Check screen. 12 Hours “1 Day” 2 Days 3 Days 7 Days 30 Days Save 314 . Utility Mode <Next Job: Staple Setting> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. 1. • The default setting is OFF. making the next job setting available. Touch [Delete Unused User Box]. 2. 2007 • To set whether to cancel the staple setting when the staple setting job started and the next job setting has become available. ON “OFF” <Next Job: Reset Data After Job> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to cancel the setting for scanning or transmitting fax when the scanning is finished or fax is transmitted. (2) Delete Secure Print Documents Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To delete the whole classified documents in the box. • The default setting is OFF. “ON” OFF J.

Field Service Ver. 12 Hours “1 Day” 2 Days 3 Days 7 Days 30 Days Save (5) Document Hold Setting Functions Use • Selects whether to store the document again in the box after it was retrieved from the box. • Use to change the setting for the document size detection table. • The default setting is OFF.” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator Feature Level] (1) Original Glass Original Size Detect Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the document size detection table. 1. Stamp Settings (1) Header/Footer Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Saves or deletes header/footer settings. • Upon setup. (2) Foolscap Size Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the size for foolscap paper. the document is automatically deleted after it was retrieved. • If the function is set to No. ON “OFF” Setting/ Procedure K. Utility Mode • Specifies whether to delete encrypted PDF data stored in the box after a lapse of a predetermined period of time. • The default setting is Table1. 220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 “8 x 13” L. • Able to obtain registered header/footer data by [Application] → [Stamp/Composition] • Touch [New] to register new headers and footers. Standard Size Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “Level 2. 2007 (4) Encrypted PDF Delete Time Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. Sets the time period for which encrypted PDF data can be stored • The default setting is 1 Day. 315 Adjustment / Setting “Table1” Table2 bizhub C550 .0 Feb. • Select the size from among the following five. • To change the size for foolscap paper.

1. • The default setting is Print. B. Blank Page Print Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Specifies whether to print a stamp/page number on blank pages. “Cancel” Do Not Cancel M. Utility Mode (2) Fax TX Settings bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Administrator Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Registers administrator information displayed Help service/Administrator information screen as well as sender addresses used for E-mail transmission from the machine.6.2 Administrator/Machine Settings A.3 One-Touch/User Box Registration A. 2. Machine Name : When the file name of the transmitted file or the document name of document registered in Box is generated automatically.8. Touch [Device Name] and input the name.6. Create One-Touch Destination (1) Address Book <E-mail> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the e-mail address for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. or delete the setting. it is added. E-mail : To be used as from address at internal Fax transmission. 316 . “Print” Do Not Print 8. 2. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure 8. enter the extension No. • The default setting is Cancel. Input Machine Address Functions • To register the name of the machine and e-mail address. edit. Touch [E-mail Address] and input the E-mail address. 2007 • Specifies whether to reset a stamp setting when fax is sent. [E-mail Address] to input them. • Touch [New] to register the new address. Touch [Administrator Name].0 Feb. 1. 1. • Select any displayed address to check. Using the 10-key pad.

[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the box address for storing the scanned data to the box in the hard disk of the machine. • Select any displayed address to check. • Touch [New] to register the new address. • Touch [New] to register the new address. • At least one user box must be registered in order to register the box address. change or delete the setting.0 Feb. • Select any displayed address to check. <Fax> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the fax number for transmitting the fax. • Touch [New] to register the new address. 317 Adjustment / Setting <FTP> bizhub C550 <User Box> • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device or the vendor is mounted. • Touch [New] to register the new address. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. • Select any displayed address to check.) . 2007 8. <PC (SMB)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the SMB address for transmitting the scanned data by SMB. <IP Address Fax> • Setting will be available only when [IP Address FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. or delete the setting. 1. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the IP address fax destination when transmitting the IP address fax data. edit. edit. edit. edit. • Select any displayed address to check.Field Service Ver. or delete the setting. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register and change the FTP address for transmitting the scanned data by FTP. • Select any displayed address to check.

Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure <E-mail Body> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the e-mail message for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. • The text can be set as default by selecting the text displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. or delete the setting. • Select any displayed subject to detail check. (3) E-mail Settings • It will not be displayed when the management device 2 is set to “Set” by the following setting. 318 . Utility Mode Field Service Ver.8. 1. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Internet fax address when transmitting the internet fax data. (2) Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the group with a number of addresses to transmit data simultaneously. • At least one address must be registered in order to register the group. or delete the setting. change or delete the setting. • Touch [New] to register the new message. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] <E-mail Subject> Functions Use • To register the e-mail subject for transmitting the scanned data by e-mail. • Select any displayed address to check. • The subject can be set as default by selecting the subject displayed on the screen and pressing [Set as Default]. • elect any displayed group to check.0 Feb. • Touch [New] to register the new group. • Touch [New] to register the new subject. • Select any displayed message to detail check or delete the setting. • A new address can be registered by touching [New]. 2007 bizhub C550 <Internet Fax> • Setting will be available only when [Internet FAX] is set to “ON” in the following settings. edit. edit.

and/or filing number to the document data stored in the scanner mode. 1. time. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register/change the Relay User Box. • Touch [New] key to register the new box. Utility Mode B. • Select any displayed box to change or delete it. • Select any displayed box to edit or delete it. • Touch [New] to register the new box. (2) Bulletin Board User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the bulletin board user box.Field Service Ver. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the key counter is mounted. • A new box can be registered by touching [New]. • To register the shared or personal box for any purpose. 2007 8. Create User Box • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted.0 Feb. (4) Annotation User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the annotation user box. • To attach the image of the date. • Select any displayed box to edit or delete it. 319 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . • Touch [New] to register the new box. and to distribute them. (3) Relay User Box • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.) (1) Public/Personal User Box Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the box for storing the text data in the hard disk of the machine.

1. (4) E-mail Subject/Text List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the subject or the text list. Select the destination type to be output. and select the paper feed tray. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output. 3. Adjustment / Setting (3) Program List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the program list. 1. 5. 5.] and enter the number from which output starts. Select the simplex or duplex print. Touch [Print]. and select the paper feed tray. Touch [Starting destination No. and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses. Select the simplex or duplex print. 4. Select the paper feed tray. Touch [No. One-Touch/User Box Registration List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted.] and enter the number from which output starts. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output. 1. • To print out the list of the program addresses which are registered. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No. 2.8. 2. 4. 4. Touch [Print]. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. Select the simplex or duplex print. and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses. 2. 3. and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses. Select the destination type to be output. 2. 1.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. • To print out the list of addresses of the group which are registered. 3. Touch [Print]. Touch [No. • To print out the e-mail subject/text List which are registered. Select the simplex or duplex print. 320 . and select the paper feed tray. Touch [No. Touch [Starting destination No. 1.0 Feb. of Destinations] and specify the number of destinations to be output. and press the Start key to output the list of abbreviated addresses. bizhub C550 (2) Group List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the group list. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]) (1) Address Book List Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To output the address book list. Touch [Starting destination No. 2007 C. • To print the list of abbreviated addresses which are registered.] and enter the number from which output starts.

[Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] bizhub C550 . personal.4 User Authentication/Account Track • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter. 1. [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [External Server Settings] • Neither [ON (External Server)] or [ON (MFP)] can be selected when the presence of management device is set in the following setting.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • [Allow] cannot be selected when [Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track] is set to “Do Not Synchronize. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified. General Settings (1) User Authentication Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the user authentication method. set Max. • The default setting is OFF. • To select whether to authenticate the user by the external server or MFP.0 Feb. vendor. If a maximum number of user boxes is not specified. 1. 2. • The default setting is Restrict. “OFF” ON (External Server) ON (MFP) (2) Public User Access Functions Use • To set whether to allow or prohibit the nonregistered user to use the system when User authentication has been set.6. and group boxes that individual users can hold. Utility Mode • Set the maximum of public. • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.” 321 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. Maximum Number of User Boxes Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. “Restrict” Allow ON (Without Login) Setting/ Procedure NOTE • This setting is not available without user authentication.Field Service Ver. of Use Boxes to [OFF]. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] A. • Able to use the machine without authentication by logging in as a public user when [ON (Without Login)] is selected. set Max. or authentication device1 is mounted. No. 2007 D. 3. 8. No. Select a user box type and name. of Use Boxes to [OFF].” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • [ON (External Server)] cannot be selected when external servers are not registered in the following setting.

• The default setting is Synchronize.0 Feb. when reaching to the upper limit for the number of printed pages set by the user authentication and the account track. “Synchronize” Do not synchronize Adjustment / Setting NOTE • The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and account track. (5) Synchronize User Authentication & Account Track Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to synchronize the user authentication and account track. “OFF” ON (4) Account Track Input Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the authentication method for the account track. or to stop the machine. 2007 • To set whether to enable the account track function or not. • To select whether to authenticate by password or by account name & password. • The default setting is OFF. • To be used when not to synchronize the user authentication and account track. Utility Mode (3) Account Track bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver.8. • To stop the machine when the number of printed pages reach the upper limit set by the user authentication and the account track. (6) When # of Jobs Reach Maximum Functions • To set whether to stop the currently printing job and start the next job. “Skip Job” Stop Job Use Setting/ Procedure 322 . 1. • “Password Only” cannot be set when using both user authentication and account track. • The default setting is Account Name & Password. • The default setting is Skip Job. “Account Name & Password” Password Only NOTE • This setting is not available without the account track. • To enable the account track function.

Field Service Ver. Utility Mode • To set the number available to be assigned for the user registration and account registration. 1. • To change the number available to be assigned for the user registration and account registration.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display or not the list key for user names on user authentication screen. the number available for Account Track will be 950. • Items available for setting: Copy operation. B. (1) Administrative Setting <User Name List> • It cannot select [OFF] when the following setting is set to “ON. fax operation. User Authentication Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the user authentication. The number for the user registration will be set.0 Feb. “Allow” Restrict Setting/ Procedure 323 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . • To display the list key for user names on user authentication screen • The default setting is OFF. scan operation. 2007 (7) Number of User Counters Assigned Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. and user box operation • The default settings are Allow. • The total number to be registered for the user authentication and account track is 1000. and printing. When setting the [# of Counters Assigned for Users] to 50. ON “OFF” • [ON] cannot be selected when [ON] is specified in the following setting. • To set the function which authenticated user can use when initially authenticating the user by the external server. • The default setting is 500. NOTE • The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication and account track. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] <Default Function Permission> Functions Use • To set the default value for the function permission in user authentication by the external server.

copy. NOTE • When the “Password Only” is selected for [Account Track Input Method].0 Feb. For clearing the all counters. change or delete the account for account track. Input the [Account Name]. the output permission and the function permission can be set. 1. touch [Reset All Counters]. touch [Clear Counter]. and e-mail address. max allowance set. [Password] and [Name]. Allowance Set]. Field Service Ver. function permission. 3. • To check the status of use of the copy+print. • [Authentication Information Registration] does not appear when the presence of Authentication Device 2 is set in the following setting. Set the [Output Permission]. 3. Select the proper Account and touch [Edit]. and touch [OK]. Adjustment / Setting C. and [Function Permission] do not appear when the presence of Management Device 1 is set in the following setting. • When the “Password Only” is selected for [Account Track Input Method].8. For clearing the counter. [Account Name] does not appear. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (3) User Counter Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the status of use of the copy+print. user password. Select the user. 4. 1. Utility Mode (2) User Registration bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register or change the user. Set the output permission. [Account Name] does not appear. and touch [OK]. [Max. and touch [Edit] 2. Allowance Set]. Account Track Setting • The settings are available only when carrying out the account track. print and scan/fax for each user. 1. and [Max. 324 . Select the key to check to see the status of use. Input the user name. 3. 2007 • To register. • To register. NOTE • When the public users are allowed. (1) Account Track Registration Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register and change the account. print and scan/fax for each user. change or delete the user for authentication. copy. 2. 1. NOTE • It cannot be entered when conducting authentication by external server. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • [Output Permission]. 2. Select the user and touch [Counter Details].

” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Functions Use • To set whether to allow or restrict the print which user and account are not specified. 1. Utility Mode • To display the status of use of the copy+print. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [NetWare Settings] → [User Authentication Setting (NDS)] 325 Adjustment / Setting E. 4. Print Counter List • The setting is available only when carrying out the user authentication or account track. pages printed by unidentified users are counted and included in the count of the public user. F. print and scan/fax for each account. Select one from No. print and scan/fax for each account. <Server Type> Active Directory NTLM v1 NTLM v2 NDS LDAP NOTE • Neither [NTLM v1] nor [NTLM v2] appear when OFF is selected in the following setting. Set [Server Name] and [Server Type]. Select the simplex or duplex print. Select the key for the item to be checked. 20 and touch [NEW]. copy. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [SMB Settings] → [User Authentication (NTLM)] • [NDS] does not appear when OFF is selected in the following setting. Allow “Restrict” Setting/ Procedure Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To print out the User counter and the account counter. • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that key counter.Field Service Ver. 1. • To output the user counter and account counter to be checked. • The default setting is Restrict. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] bizhub C550 . 1. Print without Authentication • It cannot select [Allow] when the following setting is set to “ON. For clearing the counter. and press the start key to output the counter list. • When Allow is selected. • To make user authentication by external server authentication. Select the account and touch [Counter Details]. authentication device1 or management device 2 is mounted. vendor. 1. External Server Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Registers and sets an external server that is used for user authentication. 1 to No. copy. Touch [Counter List]. 2. • To allow or restrict printing which user and account are not specified. 2007 (2) Account Track Counter Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. 2.0 Feb. D. • To check the status of use of the copy+print. For clearing the all counters. 3. select an external server to be edited and touch [Edit]. touch [Reset All Counters]. 2. touch [Clear Counter]. 3. To change settings.

Set the Access Allowed Level and touch [OK]. Select a registered user. • The default setting is Yes. 1. Authentication Device Settings • The function can be displayed only when the authentication device 2 is set to Set by [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) General Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Specifies a device used for user authentication. 2007 bizhub C550 • Registers and edits groups of destinations for limiting access. 2. 1. Adjustment / Setting H. Limiting Access to Destinations (1) Create Group Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make each settings.0 Feb. Select a group and touch [Edit]. • Only [Bio Authentication] can be selected. Select a registered address. Enter [Group Name].8. (2) Apply Levels/Groups to Destinations Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets Apply Level and Apply Group for individual destinations. 1. 3. 2. Select one from Address Book. 1. Touch [Apply Group] and [Apply Level] independently to make each settings. (2) Stored Print Job Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Specifies whether to store jobs in the touch & print box when bio authentication is used. Utility Mode G. “Yes” No 326 . (3) Apply Levels/Groups to Users Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets Apply Level or Apply Group for individual users. Group. and Program.

• To set whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS setting. Manual Input “Auto Input” • When it is set to [Auto Input]. turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. select the method to obtain it automatically.0 Feb. Enable “No Limit” 327 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • [ARP/PING Setting] and [Auto IP Setting] cannot be set to “OFF” simultaneously. bizhub C550 A. 1.5 Network Setting 8. <Dynamic DNS Settings> • The default setting is No Limit. <DNS Host Name> 1. TCP/IP Settings (1) TCP/IP Settings . Touch [DNS Host Name]. Enter the DNS host name on the screen key board. • To set the dynamic DNS. 2007 8. • They will all be set to “ON” when [Manual Input] is changed to [Auto Input]. subnet mask and default gate way. “ON” OFF NOTE • When the setting is changed. • To enter the DNS host name. • To change the method for setting the IP address. set the IP address. DHCP Setting BOOTP Setting ARP/PING Setting AUTO IP Setting : : : : ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF • When it is set to [Manual Input]. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable TCP/IP settings. (3) DNS Host Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the DNS host name. • The default setting is ON. • The default setting is Auto Input.Field Service Ver. 2. and touch [OK]. (2) IP Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enter the IP address directly or to obtain it automatically.6.

• To set the DNS default domain name.” <Domain Name> 1. Enter the domain name using the keyboard on the screen and touch [OK]. 3.> • Touch the corresponding key. Touch [OK]. and input the server address by IPv4 or the IPv6 format. 2. 2. Select the necessary port number. and enter the RAW port number using the 10-key pad. “Enable” No Limit Adjustment / Setting NOTE • “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Settings] is set to “Auto Input. <DNS Server Auto Obtain> • The default setting is Enable. • Several data can be accepted at the same time by selecting several ports. 2007 • To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining for the DNS domain name.8. (6) RAW Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the RAW port number. <DNS Domain Name Auto Retrieval> • The default setting is Enable. • To enter the DNS default domain name. • To enter priority/substitute DNS server. 1. Utility Mode (4) DNS Domain bizhub C550 Functions Field Service Ver. press the Clear key to clear the value. Touch [Default DNS Domain Name] or [DNS Search Domain Name 1 to 3].” <Priority/substitute DNS server. “Enable” No Limit Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • “Enable” cannot be set when [IP Settings] is set to “Auto Input. 328 . • To set the priority/substitute DNS server. • To enter the DNS search domain name. (5) DNS Server Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the DNS server address. • To set the RAW port number for the printer. • To set the DNS search domain name. When using the selected port. 1.0 Feb.

1. Enter the address with the keys on the screen. 1. Touch [Global Address] or [Gateway Address]. 1. turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and enter the range of IP addresses to be denied using the 10-key pad.0 Feb. 2007 (7) IP Filtering (Permit Access) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the IP filtering (Permit Access). 3. When [Enable] is set. <IPv6 address> • When [Auto IPv6 Settings] is set to OFF. Touch [OK]. • When [Enable] is set. <IPv6 Settings> • The default setting is ON. Touch [OK]. (9) IPv6 Settings Functions • To set whether to use IPv6 in IP network communication. • To set whether to use the IPv6 address automatic acquisition setting. NOTE • [Link-Local Address] key appears. make the settings of global address and gateway address. 2. 3. Select Enable or “Disable”. but its settings are not allowed to be changed. To change the prefix length of global address. 8. touch [Prefix Length] and specify the number of bits within the range of 1 to 128. Select Enable or “Disable”. • To set IPv6 addresses. select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad. 2. 3. • To use IPv6 in IP network communication. 1.Field Service Ver. (8) IP Filtering (Deny Access) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the IP filtering (Deny Access). When [Enable] is set. Utility Mode • To set whether to allow only IP addresses that are within a specified range. select one from Set 1 to Set 5 and specify the range of IP addresses to be allowed using the 10-key pad. 329 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . “ON” <Auto IPv6 Settings> • The default setting is ON. 2. “ON” OFF OFF Use Setting/ Procedure NOTE • When the setting is changed.

1. • The default setting is OFF. 80 to 604800 (sec. • The default setting is Group 2.). <Group> • Among four groups (Group 1 to 4). • The default setting is OFF. 2007 • To set whether to use IPsec protocol for IP network communication. • When IPsec protocol is used to perform encrypted communication. select a group where settings are made. MD5 SHA-1 OFF Adjustment / Setting <Key Validity Period> • Set a key validity period. • The default setting is 28800 (sec. 330 . Utility Mode (10) IPsec Settings bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • The default setting is OFF.) <Diffie-Hellman Group> • Set Diffie-Hellman group. ON “OFF” <IKE Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To make the settings that relate to IKE (Internet Key Exchange) protocol which is used for IPsec communication.0 Feb. DES_CBC 3DES_CBC OFF <Authentication Algorithm> • Set an authentication algorithm used for IPsec communication. <Encryption Algorithm> • Set a encryption algorithm used for IPsec communication. • Settings can be made independently for four different sets (Group 1 to 4).8.

• Settings can be made independently for eight different sets (Group 1 to 8). DES_CBC 3DES_CBC AES_CBC AES_CTR NULL “OFF” <ESP Authentication Algorithm> • Set authentication algorithm used for ESP protocol. • The default setting is OFF.) 331 Adjustment / Setting <AH Authentication Algorithm> • Set authentication algorithm used for AH protocol. (If the combination of each selection is not allowed among different settings. AH ESP ESP_AH “OFF” <ESP Encryption Algorithm> • Set an encryption algorithm used for ESP protocol. • The default setting is OFF. the key operation of the corresponding option is locked. • After touching the key of the Group. • The default setting is OFF. MD5 SHA-1 “OFF” MD5 SHA-1 “OFF” <Lifetime After Establishing SA> • Set the period of time starting from when SA connection is established and ending when the SA connection is cut.) <Security Protocol> • Set a security protocol. bizhub C550 . • The default setting is OFF. <Group Set Number> • Among Group 1 to 8. • The default setting is 3600 (sec. select a group where settings are made. 1. 120 to 604800 (sec. 2007 <IPsec SA Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8.Field Service Ver. make the following settings.).0 Feb. Utility Mode • To make the settings that relate to IPsec SA (Security Association) which is used for IPsec communication.

select a group where settings are made. • To specify the frame type for transmission. “Auto Detect” 802. make the following setting. “ON” <Ethernet Frame Type> • The default setting is Auto Detect. NetWare Settings (1) IPX Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To enable or disable the NetWare (IPX) setting. • To set the ethernet frame type. ON “OFF” Adjustment / Setting B. • Touch [IP Address] and enter the IP address with IPv4 or IPv6 format. • The default setting is OFF. Utility Mode <Peer> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. <Perfect Forward Secrecy> • When the transport mode is selected. • To use NetWare (IPX) setting.3 Ethernet II 802.2 802. set whether to use Perfect forward secrecy. specify the IP address of destinations. • Touch [Input] and enter the Pre-shared key. <IPX Settings> • The default setting is ON. • The default setting is OFF. 2007 • To register destinations used for IPsec communication. • After touching the key of the Group. <Peer> • Among Group 1 to 10.8. 1.0 Feb. <Pre-Shared Key Text> • When the encapsulation mode is set. • Settings can be made independently for different ten sets (Group 1 to 10). specify a Pre-shared key (Key data). Tunnel Mode Transport Mode “OFF” <IP Address> • When the encapsulation mode is set.3SNAP OFF 332 . <Encapsulation Mode> • Set a encapsulation mode used for IPsec.

1. Enter the polling interval between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. • To change the NetWare print mode. 1. 1. • The default setting is NDS. • To display NetWare status. <Status> 1. • To check NetWare status. “ON” <NetWare Print Mode> • The default setting is PServer. (5) P Server Settings: NDS/Bindery Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the bindery setting when using NetWare4. <Netware Print Settings> • The default setting is ON. • To set the interval to search the print queue. 2. 3. “PServer” OFF 8.0 Feb. 2. Touch [Status].Field Service Ver. Utility Mode Use Setting/ Procedure Nprinter/Rprinter • After selecting either key in the NetWare print mode setting. Touch up/down arrow keys to select the server to check. Check the NetWare status. • To set the NetWare print mode. proceed to each setting screen.x model and after. (3) P Server Settings: Print Server Name/Print Server Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the print server name and print server password. “NDS” NDS/Bindery 333 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2007 (2) Netware Print Settings Functions • To set whether to use the NetWare print mode. Press the Clear key. (4) P Server Settings: Polling Interval Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the polling interval. Enter the print server name or the print server password (up to 63 characters) using the on-screen keyboard. and touch [OK]. • To enable the bindery service. 2. • To enter the print server name or the print server password. Touch [Print Server name] or [Print Server Password].

and touch [OK]. 1. Enter the number between 0 and 254 using the 10-key pad. • To set the printer number. and touch [OK]. Enter the File server name (up to 47 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. and touch [OK]. (8) P Server Settings: NDS Tree Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NDS tree name (name to login) • To set the NDS tree name. 2. “ON” OFF 334 . 1. 2007 • To set the full server name for the print server to logon. Touch [Print Server Name]. Touch [File Server Name]. (9) Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Print Server Name Functions • To set the print server name. Enter the NDS tree name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2. Enter the printer name (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2. 1. • The default setting is ON. 2. 1. Touch [Auto] and cancel the reverse display. • To conduct user authentication in netware environment. Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure (10) Nprinter/Rprinter Settings: Printer Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the printer number. Enter the NDS context name (up to 191 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Utility Mode (6) P Server Settings: File Server Name bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the file server name. (11) User Authentication Setting (NDS) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the user authentication setting. Field Service Ver. Press the Clear key. 1. 1. and touch [OK]. Touch [NDS Tree Name]. (7) P Server Settings: NDS Context Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NDS context name (context name to register NDS print server) • To set the NDS context name. • To set the print server name. 3. Touch [NDS Context name]. 2.0 Feb.8.

0 Feb. “ON” OFF (4) Accept IPP jobs Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict the IPP job. http Server Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. • For the response setting to see if IPP transmission supports each function. • The default setting is ON. 2. Touch [Print URI] to check the printer URI information. • The default setting is ON. 1. “ON” OFF (5) Support Information Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the operation support information. 2. (6) Printer Information Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the printer information. “ON” OFF (2) PSWC Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the PageScope Web Connection. and printer information on the on-screen keyboard. Enter the printer name. 1. • The default setting is ON. Set “ON” or OFF for each item. printer location. Touch [Support Information]. 3.Field Service Ver. 1. • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF (3) IPP Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable IPP (Internet Printing Protocol) setting. • To set the printer information. 2007 8. Touch [Printer Information]. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the http server setting. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) http Server Settings . 335 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 C.

and touch [OK]. and touch [OK]. “ON” OFF (8) Authentication Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the authentication method for IPP authentication. 1. • The default setting is ON.0 Feb. Enter the user name on the on-screen keyboard. and touch [OK]. • The default setting is ON. Enter the password on the on-screen keyboard. 2. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (11) realm Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the realm for identifying the authentication setting for IPP authentication. 1. “ON” OFF 336 . 1. 2. • The default setting is requesting-user-name. Touch [User Name]. Touch [realm]. 1. Enter the realm on the on-screen keyboard. (10) Password Functions Use • To set the password for IPP authentication. 2007 • To set whether or not to use the IPP authentication setting. • To change the authentication method when conducting IPP authentication. 2. “requesting-user-name” basic digest (9) User Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the User name for IPP authentication. FTP Settings (1) FTP TX Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use FTP TX settings. D. Utility Mode (7) IPP Authentication Settings bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver.8. Touch [Password]. • To conduct IPP authentication.

Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad. Touch [Host Address]. • The default setting is ON. 2.Field Service Ver. • To enter the proxy server port number. “ON” OFF NOTE • [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.0 Feb. 2. (5) FTP TX Settings: Connection Timeout Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connecting to FTP server. 1. 2007 (2) FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Address Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the proxy server address. 2. Press the Clear key. • Press the Clear key. • To enter the port number to be used for transmission with FTP server. 3. 8. 1. • To change the timeout period for connecting. • Not to use the machine as FTP server. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the port number to be used for transmission with FTP server. Select [Input Host Name]. [IPv4 Address Input]. (3) FTP TX Settings: Proxy Server Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the proxy server port number. Touch [Input].” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] 337 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . Utility Mode 1. • Enter the proxy server port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. (4) FTP TX Settings: Port No. (6) FTP Server Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use this machine as FTP server. 3. • To enter the proxy server address. Touch [Input]. Press the Clear key. Enter the connecting timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad. or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address. 1.

Touch [NetBIOS Name]. and touch [OK]. 2007 bizhub C550 E. “ON” OFF (3) Print Settings: NetBIOS Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set NetBIOS name. Enter the NetBIOS name (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To use when changing the NTLM version for user authentication. (4) Print Settings: Print Service Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the print service name. • To use when conducting the user authentication by NTLM (NT LAN Manager). Select the version which suits the network environment. 2. NTLM has v1 and v2. and touch [OK]. • To set NetBIOS name. • The default setting is ON. 1. • To use when setting the SMB transmission setting. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Client Settings Functions • To set whether or not to use the SMB transmission setting. SMB Setting • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. • To set whether or not to enable the user authentication setting by NTLM. 1. 2.8. • To set the NTLM version for the user authentication. “v1” <User Authentication (NTLM)> • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF v2 v1/v2 OFF Use Setting/ Procedure (2) Print Settings Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SMB port or not in printer mode. 1. Enter the print service name (up to 13 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To set the print service name. Touch [Print Service Name]. 338 . <Client Settings> • The default setting is ON.0 Feb. “ON” <NTLM Settings> • The default setting is v1.

) 1. Enter the WINS server address. • To use the WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) setting is necessary. (6) WINS Settings Functions Use • To set whether or not to enable the WINS setting. Utility Mode 1. • To use when manually entering the WINS server address. • The default setting is H Node. Touch [Workgroup]. Enter the workgroup (up to 15 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. the traffic by broadcast can be reduced. “ON” OFF Setting/ Procedure (7) WINS Settings: Automatic Retrieval Settings Functions Use • To set whether or not to enable the auto obtaining of the WINS server address. • The default setting is Enable. 8. • To obtain the WINS server address from DHCP server. If there are more than on address settings. 2. and touch [OK].Field Service Ver. (The primary address has the priority during operation. 2. 2007 (5) Print Settings: Workgroup Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the workgroup. • To acquire the WINS server address automatically. up to two can be acquired. • The primary address and the secondary address can be set. Setting/ Procedure (9) WINS Settings: Node Type Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set a node type. B Node P Node N Node “H Node” 339 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . • By using the WINS. • To change the current node type. 1. • To set the workgroup. and the communication becomes available with the network where broadcast does not reach.0 Feb. • The default setting is ON. 2 Functions Use • To set the WINS server address. Touch [1] or [2]. “Enable” No Limit Setting/ Procedure (8) WINS Settings: WINS Server Address 1.

Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure <Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Max. results of address for LDAP search. Touch the key about condition for each search item. and touch [OK]. timeout period for LDAP search. Enter the server name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 5. Search Results> Functions • To set the Max. 1. • To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search. ON “OFF” (2) Setting Up LDAP • Registration and/or setting concerning the LDAP server can be conducted. <LDAP Server Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Set the LDAP server name. 2. 4. Touch [Max. results of address for LDAP search. Touch [Server Name]. Press the Clear key. • The default setting is OFF. LDAP Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. 1. 340 . 3. <Initial Setting for Search Details> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the initial items for search conditions in LDAP detail search. timeout period for LDAP search. <Max. Enter the timeout period between 5 and 300 using the 10-key pad. • To use LDAP function. • To change the Max. Touch [Timeout].0 Feb. 2007 bizhub C550 F. and select the condition. • To change the Max. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) Enabling LDAP Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the LDAP function. Search Results]. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 2. Press the Clear key. Search result numbers between 5 and 1000 using the 10-key pad. • Touch [Setting Up LDAP]. 1. and select the optional blank key to register and/or set. 1.8. Enter the Max. 2. 3. Touch [Initial Setting for Search Details].

2. Press the Clear key. 2. • To enter LDAP server address. • To enter the directory path for LDAP server. 1.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details] → [Manual Destination Input] . Check the message and touch [Yes]. 1. [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input]. Select [Input Host Name]. • To use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server. 2. 3. • To enter the LDAP server port number. <Reset All Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To return the contents registered in the LDAP server to what they were prior to the shipping. <SSL Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SSL (data encryption) for connecting to LDAP server. 2. 1. and touch [OK]. Touch [Reset All Settings]. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad. <Server Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the LDAP server address. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check the connection with the LDAP server which has been set. 2007 8. 1. Touch [OK]. Touch [Search Base]. • The default setting is OFF. 2. Confirm a proper connection and touch [Close]. <Search Base> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the directory path for LDAP server. Enter the search base (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. 1. 341 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 <Check Connection> • It will not be displayed when [Enabling LDAP] is set to “OFF. Touch [Server Address]. Touch [Input]. 1. 3. and enter the server address. Touch [Check Connection]. ON “OFF” <Port Number> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the LDAP server port number.” • It will not be displayed when the following is set to “Restrict.

0 Feb. “ON” OFF 342 . Utility Mode <Port Number (SSL)> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Touch [Input]. NTLM (v1) : Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT. etc. GSS-SPNEGO : Method available with Windows active directory (Kerberos authentication). “anonymous” Simple Digest-MD5 GSS-SPNEGO NTLM v1 NTLM v2 Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting <Select Server Authentication Method> Functions Use • To set the authentication system when conducting LDAP server authentication. Press the Clear key. • To enter the port number for LDAP server when using SSL. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Use Set Value. Use User Authentication ID and Password : It conducts authentication with the registration data for the copier’s user authentication. • To use when changing the server authentication system. <Authentication Type> Functions Use • To set the authentication method to logon to LDAP server. anonymous : User name and password are not necessary (Dynamic authentication will be invalid when anonymous is selected. Its security has been enhanced compared to v1. • To change the authentication method to logon to LDAP server.0 SP4 and later versions. 2.) Simple : Simple method which needs the user name and the password Digest-MD5 : Method available with normal LDAP server. When failing to authenticate with Digest-MD5. Use Set Value : It conducts authentication with the setting value set by [LDAP Server Registration]. It has been applied to the Windows NT4. NTLM (v2) : Standard user authentication format used for Windows NT. “Use Set Value” Use User Authentication ID and Password Nprinter/Rprinter <Referral Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the referral setting. etc. • The default setting is anonymous. • To use when tracing the server with referral at the time of LDAP connection. 2007 • To set the port number for LDAP server when using SSL.8. Dynamic Authentication : It conducts authentication by dynamic authentication. • The default setting is ON. it automatically switches to CRAM-MD5. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-Kay pad. 3. 1. 1.

and touch [OK]. E-mail Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. Enter the logon name (up to 255 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Select the optional server. and touch [OK]. Enter the domain name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. and touch [OK]. Touch [Default LDAP Server Setting]. Touch [Domain Name]. 2. <Password> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server. NOTE • The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous. 1. 2. “ON” OFF 343 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . • The default setting is ON. • Touch [Password]. Touch [Login Name]. Utility Mode 1. (3) Default LDAP Server Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the server to be used as the default when searching LDAP 1. • To set the domain name for connecting to LDAP server. 2007 <Login Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the login name to connect to LDAP server. 1. <Domain Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the domain name for connecting to LDAP server. NOTE • The setting is not available when authentication method is set to anonymous. • To set the login name to connect to LDAP server. 8. G.0 Feb. 2. • To set the password for connecting to LDAP server.Field Service Ver. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) E-mail TX (SMTP) <E-mail TX (SMTP)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail transmission setting. • To disable the e-mail transmission setting. • Enter the password (up to 63 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

[IPv4 Address Input] or[IPv6 Address Input]. 1. Press the Clear key. 2. • To change the dividing size of the data. Touch [Host Address].8. • The default setting is ON “ON” OFF <SMTP Server Address> Functions Use • To set the SMTP server address. • The default setting is ON “ON” OFF <Total Counter Notification> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to inform the total counter by e-mail. 2007 • To set whether or not to transfer scanned data by e-mail. 2. Enter the dividing mail size between 100 and 15000 (in 100 increments) using the 10-key pad. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure <Binary Division> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out binary division for data to be transmitted • Not to carry out binary division for data to be transmitted • The default setting is OFF. Select [Input Host Name]. 1. • To use when not transferring scanned data by e-mail. and enter the server address. • The default setting is ON “ON” OFF <Status Notification> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to inform the status by e-mail.0 Feb. • To use when not informing the status by e-mail. • To use when not informing the total counter by e-mail. • To enter the SMTP server address. 1. 344 . ON “OFF” <Divided Mail Size> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the dividing size when carrying out the binary division for data to be transmitted. Utility Mode <Scan to E-mail> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver.

Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. • The default setting is OFF.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is OFF. Press the Clear key. Touch [Input]. • The default setting is No Limit. • To change the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. 1. increments) <Server Capacity> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Max. enter the [User ID]. 1.” (30 to 300.> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the port number for transmission with SMTP server. Touch [Input]. Touch the Clear key. • The default setting is 60 sec. in 30 sec. 1. 3. • To change the Max. 345 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . <Detail Settings: SMTP Authentication> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable SMTP authentication. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive. • Select the timeout period using [+] / [-] keys. ON “OFF” <Port No. “No Limit” (1 to 100) <SSL Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use SSL when sending an e-mail.0 Feb. • To use for entering the port number when using SSL. 3. • To use when sending an e-mail using SSL. 2007 <Connection Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. • To enter the port number for transmission with SMTP server. <Port Number (SSL)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the port number when using SSL. capacity per mail which SMTP server can receive. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. 2. 2. Utility Mode • To set the timeout period for connection in transmitting e-mail to SMTP server. ON “OFF” • When set to “ON”. [Password] and [Domain Name]. • To use when conducting SMTP authentication. “60 sec.

• To enter the POP server address. 1. 1. [IPv4 Address Input] or[IPv6 Address Input]. and enter the server address.0 Feb. Press the Clear key. • Select the timeout period of connection using [-]/[+] keys. • The default setting is OFF. “ON” OFF <POP Server Address> Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the POP server address. ON “OFF” 346 . 2. Touch [Input]. <Connection Timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. 3. • To disable the e-mail reception setting. 1. • The default setting is ON. • To use when conducting POP Before SMTP authentication. Enter the time for POP Before SMTP between 0 and 60 using the 10-key pad. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF” <Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Time> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time necessary for POP Before SMTP authentication. (2) E-mail RX (POP) <E-mail RX (POP)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the e-mail reception setting. • To use when receiving an e-mail which used SSL.8. • To change the time necessary for POP Before SMTP authentication. Select [Input Host Name]. <SSL Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use SSL when receiving an e-mail. 2007 • To set whether or not to enable the POP Before SMTP authentication. Utility Mode <Detail Settings: POP Before SMTP Authentication> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Touch [Host Address]. • To set the timeout period of connection in receiving e-mail to POP server. 2.

1. <Login Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To enter a login name used for POP server authentication. Enter the port number (SSL) between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Touch [Login Name]. 8. • To enter the port No. for transmitting with POP server. <APOP Authentication> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use APOP authentication • To use APOP authentication • The default setting is OFF. Touch the Clear key. “Yes” No 347 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2.> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the port No.0 Feb. Enter a login name. Enter a password. 1. <Password> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To enter a login name used for POP server authentication 1. • The default setting is Yes. 2. for transmitting with POP server. • To enter the port number when using SSL. Touch the Clear key. Utility Mode <Port Number (SSL)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the port number when using SSL. Touch [Password]. Touch [Input]. 2.Field Service Ver. 2. ON “OFF” <Check for New Messages> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically check a POP server for new messages. 3. Enter the port No. between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Touch [Input]. 2007 <Port No. 1. 3. 1.

2007 • To set a polling interval at which a POP server is checked for new messages. • The default setting is No. Yes “No” 348 . • The default setting is 15 minutes. 1 to60 minutes (3) S/MIME Communication Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to activate S/MINE communication that provides encrypted E-mail transmission. RC2-40 RC2-64 RC2-128 DES “3DES” AES-128 AES-192 AES-256 Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure <Print S/MIME Information> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select whether to print S/MIME information when sending and receiving E-mail.8. Utility Mode <Polling Interval> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • The default setting is 3DES. Yes “No” <Automatically Obtain Certificates> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to automatically acquire a certificate when sending or receiving Email.0 Feb. “Do not add signature” Always add signature Select when sending <E-mail Text Encryption Method> Functions Use • To select an encryption method used for S/MIME E-mail text. • The default setting is Do not add signature. • The default setting is No. • The default setting is OFF. 1. ON “OFF” <Digital Signature> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Set whether to add a digital signature to S/MIME messages.

SNMP Setting (1) SNMP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. (3) SNMP v1/v2c Settings Functions Use • To conduct setting when using SNMP v1/v2c. Setting/ Procedure <Write Setting> • The default setting is Enable. “ON” OFF (2) UDP Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the UDP standby port number which is used for SNMP (IP). 2007 H. and SNMP v1 (IPX). 1. “ON” OFF • To individually set whether or not to use SNMP v1/v2c (IP). Touch the Clear key. SNMP v3 (IP). Touch [Name].” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] <Write Community Name Settings> • Enter a Write community name. (4) SNMP v3 Settings <Context Name Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Set the context name which is used for SNMP v3. Enter the context name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • The default setting is ON. • To use when entering the community name for reading the Management Information Base (MIB) and writing to it. “Enable” Disable NOTE • [Enable] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. • To set the SNMP version to be used.0 Feb. • To readout management information base and to enter community name for writing. • To use when changing write setting. <Read Community Name Settings> • Enter a Read community name.Field Service Ver. 2. 1. • The default setting is ON. 2. • Not to use SNMP. 349 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. and touch [OK]. 1. Utility Mode • To set whether to use SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) or not.

2. Enter the read user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Touch [Read User Name].0 Feb. Adjustment / Setting <Security Level> Functions Use • To set the security level of the read-only user used for SNMP v3. “ON” OFF <Discovery User Name Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the name of the discovery authority Users which is used for SNMP v3. Select a type of password.8. 1. 2. auth-password : Conducts authentication only for the authentication password when the read-only user accesses. • The default setting is ON. : No authentication will be conducted when the read-only user accesses. 1. 350 . <Read User Name Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the read-only user name used for SNMP v3. 2007 • To set whether or not to enable the discovery authority user which is used for SNMP v3. • To use when changing the security level of the read-only user. NOTE • The user name same with the read user name or the write user name cannot be set. Enter the discovery user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. NOTE • The user Name same with the discovery user name cannot be used. 1. and touch [OK]. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is auth-password/privpassword. Enter the password (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. auth-Password/privpassword : Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy password when read-only User accesses. Utility Mode <Discovery User Permissions> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. and touch [OK]. OFF auth-password “auth-password/privpassword” OFF <Password Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the Authentication password for the read-only User which is used for SNMP v3. 2. 1. Touch [Discovery User Name]. and touch [OK].

2. Touch [Write User Name].0 Feb. OFF auth-password “auth-password/privpassword” I.Field Service Ver. Touch [Printer Name]. 1. 2. ON “OFF” (2) Printer Name Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network. 1. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (1) AppleTalk Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the AppleTalk setting. Enter the write user name (up to 32 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. and touch [OK].” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] bizhub C550 . NOTE • The user name same with the discovery use name cannot be used. auth-password/privpassword : Conducts authentication by authentication password and privacy password when reading/writing authority user accesses. 1. Utility Mode • To set the name of the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3. Enter the printer name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • The default setting is OFF. <Security Level> Functions Use • To set the security level for the reading/writing authority user which is used for SNMP v3. and touch [OK]. • To set the printer name displayed on the AppleTalk network. 351 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • [Authentication OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. 2007 <Write User Name Settings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. • To use for changing the security level of the reading/writing authority user. • To use AppleTalk setting. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is auth-password/privpassword. OFF : Authentication will not be conducted when reading/writing authority user accesses. AppleTalk Settings • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted. auth-password : Conducts authentication only with authentication password when reading/writing authority user accesses.

Utility Mode (3) Zone Name bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. J. Enter the zone name (up to 31 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. TCP Socket Settings (1) TCP Socket Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to set the TCP socket. • To use when operating under the Bonjour service environment. for TCP socket transmission. 1. Touch the Clear key. 1. 2. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure K. 2. Touch [Zone Name]. (4) Current Zone Functions Use • To display the current zone on AppleTalk network. • To set the port number for TCP socket transmission. • To use when using the application. Enter the Bonjour name (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • The default setting is ON. 352 . and touch [OK]. and touch [OK]. Touch [Bonjour Name]. • The default setting is ON. • To set the name for identifying over the bonjour network. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. “ON” OFF (2) Bonjour Name Functions Use • To set the bonjour name.8. 2. • To set the zone name connected with AppleTalk network. Bonjour Setting (1) Bonjour Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use the Bonjour setting. “ON” OFF <Port Number> 1.0 Feb. etc. • To check the current zone on the AppleTalk network. 2007 • To set the zone name connected with AppleTalk network. • To be used when entering the port number used for TCP socket transmission. 1.

353 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . <Port Number> 1. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. for TCP socket transmission by ASCII mode. • To use Internet fax function • The default setting is OFF. • To use IP address fax function • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF” (2) SMTP TX Settings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set SMTP TX when network fax function is being used. • The default setting is ON. 2007 (2) TCP Socket (ASCII Mode) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8.Field Service Ver. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use IP address fax function. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to use Internet fax function. • To use when using the application.) using the 10-key pad. Network Fax Setting (1) Network Fax Function Settings • It will not be displayed on the screen when all items are set to “OFF” in the following settings. “ON” OFF <Port Number (ASCII Mode)> 1. 2. Touch [Input]. 2. 2. Touch [Input]. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec. • To set the port number which is used for TCP socket transmission by ASCII mode. L. Touch the Clear key. • To set SMTP TX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Utility Mode • To set whether or not to set the TCP socket for ASCII mode. etc. <Connection Timeout> 1. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings] <IP Address Fax Function> • Setting will be available only when [IP Address Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. ON “OFF” <Internet Fax Function> • Setting will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. 1.0 Feb. • To use when entering the port number for TCP socket transmission by ASCII mode.

) using the 10-key pad. • To set SMTP RX port number and connecting time out period when network fax function is being used. “ON” OFF Setting/ Procedure <Port No.> 1. <Connection Timeout> 1. turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. Touch [Input].0 Feb. • To set the specific network speed. • To check the MAC address of the machine. • The default setting is OFF. 1. • The default setting is Auto. Adjustment / Setting <Network Speed> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the network speed. <SMTP RX> • The default setting is ON. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. 2. 2. M. (2) Time Adjustment Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to enable or disable the NTP setting. Enter the connection timeout time between 5 and 1000 (sec. 2007 • To set SMTP RX when network fax function is being used. ON “OFF” 354 . Utility Mode (3) SMTP RX Settings bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. Detail Settings (1) Device Setting <MAC Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the MAC address of the machine.8. “Auto” 10Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Full Duplex 100Mbps Half Duplex 10Mbps Half Duplex 1Gbps Full Duplex NOTE • When Network speed setting is changed. • To use SMTP RX function when network fax function is being used. • The address cannot be changed. • To synchronize the time between the server and the client. Touch [Input].

5. 2. 355 Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure bizhub C550 . Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name. 1. 8. notifications both by E-mail and by SNMP TRAP function can be set. Touch [OK] and finish the settings. Touch [Community Name] and enter a community name. 6. Touch [Host Address]. Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON]. 2. 2007 <NTP Server Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the NTP server address. <Port Number> 1. [IPv4 Address Input] or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address. • Up to 5 addresses can be registered. and enter the host name. Utility Mode (3) Status Notification Setting • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that authentication device is mounted.0 Feb. Select [Host name Input].Field Service Ver. Touch [IPX Address]. Touch [Host Address]. select an IP address where settings are made. 7. 1. Touch [Network Address] or [Node Address] and enter an address. • To enter the NTP server address. 2. up to five IP addresses and one IPX can be set. From IP address 1 to 5. 4. For E-mail. 5. 3. Select [Input Host]. Select [IP Address Input]. 2. • Use this function when setting IP addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. and enter the IP address. 3. <Register Notification Address (IPX Address)> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set IPX addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. 3. For SNMP TRAP function. Touch the Clear key. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] • To notify status. Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON]. 4. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Touch the Clear key and enter a port number within the range of 1 to 65535 using the 10-key pad. <Register Notification Address (IP Address)> Functions Use • To set IP addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. <Host Address> 1. up to ten IP addresses and one IPX address can be set. 1. • Use this function when setting IPX addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. Touch [OK] and finish the settings.

Setting/ Procedure <Model Name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the device name for identifying the copier when reporting the total counter. 2. Touch [Forward]. 5. Touch [E-mail Address Edit]. set the Interval of month(s) and date of the month. 5. When selecting [Daily] for the reporting cycle. [Address 2] or [Address 3]. • Two different schedules can be set for reporting. 1. 5. 2007 • To set E-mail addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. • Up to three e-mail addresses can be set. Enter the e-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Touch [OK] and finish the settings. select an E-mail address where settings are made. Utility Mode <Register Notification Address (E-mail Address)> bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. 1. Enter an E-mail address (up to 320 one-byte characters) using the keyboard on the screen and touch [OK]. Touch [Edit E-mail Address]. 6. 3. 3. Setting/ Procedure (4) Total Counter Notification Settings <Notification Schedule Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the schedule for informing the total counter value. 2. Select ON/OFF for each schedule. • Up to 10 addresses can be registered. 1. Touch [Notification Item] and set the items to be notified to [ON]. set the Interval of day(s). When selecting [Monthly] for the reporting cycle.0 Feb. 1. From E-mail addresses 1 to 10. • Use this function when setting E-mail addresses to which machine status notifications are sent. 356 . set the Interval of week(s) and day of the Week. Adjustment / Setting <Notification Address Setting> Functions Use • To set the e-mail address for reporting the total counter value. 4. 1. Select the reporting cycle from [Daily]. Touch [Set Schedule]. Touch [Schedule 1] or [Schedule 2]. <Send Now> Functions Use • To transfer the current total counter value to the set address. Touch [Model Name]. When selecting [Weekly] for the reporting cycle. Touch [Address 1]. 3. 4. and touch [OK]. 2. • To use when informing the total counter value by e-mail regularly. [Weekly] or [Monthly]. 4. • It can be selected whether to apply the schedule of the [Set Schedule] to each address.8. 2. and touch [OK]. Enter the model name (up to 20 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.

Touch [Host Address] for PING transmission. 2. 3. • Available number to be registered as prefix is up to 20 characters. “Continue” Delete the Job 357 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2007 (5) PING Confirmation Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the TCP/IP network diagnosis by PING. Select [Input Host Name]. [IPv4 Address Input]. “Enable” Disable (8) Prefix/Suffix Setting <ON/OFF Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to add prefix or suffix to the address when calling or entering an address. Prefix: Letters added to the top of the text (header part) Suffix: Letters added to the bottom of the text (footer part) • To register or change the address displayed for prefix or suffix. 1. “Enable” Disable (7) LPD Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use LPD during printing or not. (6) SLP Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use SLP or not. 8. • The default setting is OFF. Utility Mode 1. • Available number to be registered as suffix is up to 64 characters. Use Setting/ Procedure (9) Action for Invalid Certificate Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set how to process the job when SSL certificate becomes invalid. Device search will be available with TWAIN by setting SLP enable. • The default setting is Continue. ON “OFF” <Prefix/Suffix Setting> Functions • To register or change the prefix or suffix. Touch [Check Connection] key to check the connection. • Eight types of prefix and suffix can be added.0 Feb. • The default setting is Enable. • To add prefix or suffix to the address. • To check the condition of TCP/IP network. • The default setting is Enable. or [IPv6 Address Input] and enter a host address.Field Service Ver.

“Tray Before APS ON” Default Tray Adjustment / Setting D. Auto Zoom (Platen) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to function the auto zoom when the tray is selected with document set on the original glass (excepting at automatic paper selection mode. 1. Specify Default Tray when APS OFF Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the tray to be used when APS is cancelled. E.6. Select Tray for Insert Sheet Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the initial value for the tray for the cover sheet paper. ON “OFF” B.6 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 2007 Copier Settings A. • The default setting is OFF.0 Feb. • To set the tray (tray 1) for the default setting when cancelling APS. “Accept” Receive Only Setting/ Procedure 358 . Utility Mode 8. “ON” OFF C.) • To function the auto zoom when the tray is selected. • The default setting is Tray 2. • The default setting is Tray Before APS ON. Auto Zoom (ADF) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to function the auto zoom when the feed tray is selected with document set on the ADF (excepting at automatic paper selection mode.) • To function the auto zoom when the feed tray is selected. Print Jobs During Copy Operation Functions Use • To set whether to receive printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation. • The default setting is ON. • To restrict receiving printing jobs for print data or fax data during copy operation. Accept : Receives the print data or fax data and print Receive Only : Print data or fax data will be printed when the copy operation is finished • The default setting is Accept.8.

Network Timeout Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication are activated. • The default setting is Outside. • To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication are activated. Inside : Folds paper in three with the printed side in. 359 Adjustment / Setting “60 seconds” (10 to 1000 seconds) bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. 2. Header Information Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the name of the sender and fax ID which will be printed when transmitting fax. Utility Mode Setting/ Procedure G. 2007 F.8 Fax Settings • Settings are available only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted. “60 seconds” (10 to 1000 seconds) 8. A. “Outside” Inside 8. 1. Enter Sender Fax No.6. • The default setting is 60 seconds for input and output timeouts. [Space] displayed on the screen. Functions Use • Specifies the side of copies to be folded. • To set a longer time period when timeout happens under some network statuses. USB Timeout Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set a period of time that elapses before input and output timeouts of communication are activated.7 Printer Settings A. “ON” OFF 8. • The default setting is 60 seconds for input and output timeouts.0 Feb. • To register or change the name of the sender and fax ID 1.6. Automatic Image Rotation Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Sets whether to automatically rotate images to print if the original and specified paper directions are not consistent with each other. • The default setting is ON. (up to 20 characters) using the 10-key pad and [+]. Tri-Fold Print Side • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher FS-608 is mounted. B. Outside : Folds paper in three with the printed side out. Touch [Sender] and enter the name of the sender (up to 30 characters) on the onscreen keyboard.

1.8. • To print the footer when transmitting fax. 360 . “PB” 10 pps NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. Inside Body Text Outside Body Text “OFF” Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure NOTE • [Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for the color mode of Internet Fax/IP Address Fax. (Registered name or Fax No. C. ON “OFF” (3) Footer Position Functions Use • To set whether to print the footer when transmitting fax. • The default setting is PB. • To change the dialing method. Utility Mode B. • The default setting is OFF. Line Parameter Setting (1) Dialing Method Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the dialing method. • To print information of TX destination.) • The default setting is OFF. • The displays are different depending on the country.) when transmitting fax. 2007 bizhub C550 • To set the position to print the header when transmitting fax.0 Feb. [Service Mode] → [System 1] → [Marketing Area] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print the information of TX destination (Registered name or Fax No. Inside Body Text “Outside Body Text” OFF NOTE • [Outside Body Text] cannot be selected for Internet Fax/IP Address Fax. • To change the position to print the header. (2) Print Receiver’s Name • It will not be displayed on the screen when [Fax Target] is set to “US” or “HK” in the following settings. Header/Footer Position (1) Header Position Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • The default setting is Outside Body Text.

etc. • To change the number of times to redial when the line is busy. “3 min” (1 to 15) (6) Line Monitor Sound Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to output the line monitor sound from the speaker or not. • To change the number of times of the fake ringback tone after it starts calling until it starts receiving. • To change the interval for redialing. • The default setting is 3 X. 1.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is Auto RX. • The default setting is 3 min. (5) Redial Interval Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the interval for redialing. 2007 8.0 Feb. when connected to the external telephone. • The default setting is 2 X. “Auto RX” Manual RX (3) Number of RX Call Rings Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of times to receive call rings. “ON” OFF 361 Adjustment / Setting “3 X” (0 to 7) bizhub C550 (2) Receive Mode • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that management device 2 is mounted. “2 X” (0 to 15) (4) Number of Redials Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of redials. NOTE • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country. Utility Mode Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the fax reception mode. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] . etc. • The default setting is ON. • To change to manual reception when using the remote reception function. • The line which can be set up is different depending on the country.

• To make the setting of [Print Paper Size] enable. A3 B4 “A4” Setting/ Procedure NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. ON OFF NOTE • The default setting is different depending on the country. D. set [Tray Selection for RX Print] to [Auto]. 362 .8. ON “OFF” (2) Letter/Ledger over A4/A3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set weather to use the inch paper priority when receiving fax. • To use the inch paper priority when receiving fax. “Auto Select” Fixed Size Priority Size Setting/ Procedure (4) Print Paper Size Functions Use • To set the paper size to print the text when receiving fax. Field Service Ver. • The initial setting is A4. • To carry out the duplex print for the received original. • The default setting is Auto Select. 1. Utility Mode (7) Line Monitor Sound Vol. it will be printed on the closest size. • The default setting is OFF. • To change the volume of the speaker. TX/RX Settings (1) Duplex Print (RX) • It will not be displayed when [Print Separate Fax Pages] is set to “ON. bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the volume of the speaker. • To change the paper size for printing the received text.” Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to carry out the duplex print for the received original when receiving fax. When the size is not set. • To change the priority for paper feed tray when receiving fax. • The displays are different depending on the country.0 Feb. Auto select : Selected automatically Priority Size : Printed on size with priority. Adjustment / Setting (3) Print Paper Selection Functions Use • To set the priority for paper feed tray when receiving fax. 2007 • Change the volume by touching the [Lower] or [Higher]. Fixed Size : Printed only on the fixed size.

• To divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size. • For not deleting the original which polling transmission has been completed. ON “OFF” (9) File After Polling TX Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to delete the original which polling transmission has been completed. • The default setting is 96. • The default setting is Auto. 363 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . Entry Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the operation when the unregistered box number is entered. 8. 1.Field Service Ver. “96” (87 to 96. x1. • To change the print magnification for received text. Utility Mode • To change the operation when the unregistered box number is entered. 2007 (5) Incorrect User Box No. Reduction for RX Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the print magnification for received text. “Auto” Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 (7) Min. 1 to 10 set. • To fix the paper tray when printing the received text. • Items available for selection are different depending on the paper feed option mounted. “Print” Show Error Message Auto Create User Box (6) Tray Selection for RX Print Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To select the paper tray to be fixed when printing the received text. “Delete” Save (10) No. • The default setting is OFF.0) (8) Print Separate Fax Pages • It will not be displayed when [Duplex print (RX)] is set to “ON. • The default setting is 1 set. • To use when changing the number of copies to be printed with the received document.0 Feb.” Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to divide the original into pages when it is longer than the standard size. • The default setting is Delete. • The default setting is Print. of Sets (RX) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of copies to be printed with the received document.

6. When the delivery job is cancelled due to redial over. • The default setting is OFF.8. 1. When the delivery job is cancelled halfway by turning OFF sub power switch. ON “OFF” 364 . • The default setting is ON. 4. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during redialing. • The default setting is OFF. “ Setting/ Procedure ON “OFF” <Destination Check Display Function> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to display the list of specified addresses when sending the fax. <Relay RX> • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. “ON” Field Service Ver. turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. When delivery job is deleted in user operation during relay delivery. 5. “ON” OFF <Relay Printing> • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. • To use the machine as the relay delivery station during relay TX. 2007 bizhub C550 OFF NOTE • When the setting is changed. • The default setting is ON. 1. 3.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the relay RX function. • The relay print will be output in the following case. • To use when displaying and checking the list of specified addresses when sending the fax.0 Feb. Utility Mode E. Function Settings (1) Function ON/OFF Setting <F-Code TX> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the F code transmission. 2.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Adjustment / Setting Functions Use • To set whether to use the relay print function. • To print out the document that the machine relayed during relay TX. When main power switch is turned OFF/ON during relay print error. When the relay delivery completes appropriately.

Functions Use • To set whether to use the forward fax function. [Forward TX Setting] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON.0 Feb. and print all out Forward & Print (If TX Fails) : Forward the received text. and prints out only when fails to be forwarded <Forward TX Setting> • The default setting is No.Field Service Ver. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] bizhub C550 . • To forward the received text to the receiver which has been specified.” • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor or Authentication Device is mounted. • When set to [Yes]. • The default setting is NO. • The default setting is OFF. (3) Closed Network RX • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. set the address to forward to. and print it out when ordered. 1. Forward & Print : Forward the received text. • To receive data only from the device which password matches. • To store the received text in the hard disk without printing. [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON. 2007 8.” • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. • Enter the password (up to 8 digits) for printing when set to [ON]. Setting/ Procedure 365 Adjustment / Setting (4) Forward TX Setting • It will not be displayed when [PC-FAX RX Setting]. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the forced memory RX function. Utility Mode (2) Memory RX Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting is set to “ON. • When set to [ON]. enter the password (up to 4 digits) to be used.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Closed area RX] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the closed network function.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Compulsory Memory RX] • It will not be displayed when [PC-FAX RX Setting].

• To use TSI distribution. Adjustment / Setting (7) TSI User Box Setting • It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting]. • To re-send the data failed to be sent after a given time. (6) PC-Fax RX Setting • It will not be displayed when [Forward TX Setting]. 1. • To change setting method when there is no matched box at receiving. • The default setting is Restrict.8. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. [Memory RX] or [TSI User Box Setting] is set to “ON. specify the Incomplete TX Hold Time.” Functions Use • To set whether to use TSI distribution or not. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure To set whether to use incomplete TX hold function. Print ON/OFF.0 Feb.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Re-Transmission] • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Management Device 2 is mounted. • To set setting method when there is no matched box at receiving. “Automatically Print” Memory RX User Box 366 . Allow “Restrict” • When Allow is selected. • To store the received text file in the box in the hard disk. Yes “No” Setting/ Procedure • Press [TSI User Box Registration] and register the distribution. <Non-matched Box Setting> • The default setting is Automatically Print. and Password check ON/OFF. • The default setting is No ON “No” bizhub C550 • When set to Yes. make the settings of Receiving user box destination. Automatically Print : To print the received data. [Memory RX] or [PC-Fax RX Setting] is set to “ON.” Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use the PC-FAX reception function. <TSI User Box Setting> • The default setting is No. Memory RX Use Box : To store the received data in the forced memory receiving box. 2007 (5) Incomplete TX Hold • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON.

Report Settings (1) Activity Report • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication device is mounted. enter the external number between 0 and 9999. make the setting of Output Setting. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the activity report or not. 2007 F. • The default setting is ON. • To print out the sequential TX report. and also the timing for printing. 8. “ON” OFF 367 Adjustment / Setting • To print out the TX report.” 100/ Daily (2) TX Result Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the TX report. and also the timing for printing. “ON” OFF (4) Timer Reservation TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the reservation TX or not. • To print out the activity report. bizhub C550 . • This will be used when the machine is connected to PBX line. 1. Daily “Every 100 Comm. “ON” OFF • When this setting is set to ON. • To print out the reservation TX.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is If TX Fails. Utility Mode G. ON “If TX Fails” OFF (3) Sequential TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the sequential TX report or not. • The default setting is No. • When set to [Yes]. PBX Connection Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to use PBX connection setting or not. • The default setting is ON. • The default setting is Every 100 Comm. • The default setting is ON.

• To print out the confidential RX report. • To print out the bulletin TX report. “ON” OFF (9) PC-Fax TX Error Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the PC-Fax TX Error Report or not. • To print out the Relay request RX report during relay request RX when the machine is used as the relay delivery station.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Relay Request RX Report or not. ON “OFF” 368 . “ON” OFF Adjustment / Setting (8) Relay Request Report • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. • The default setting is ON. Utility Mode (5) Confidential RX Report bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • The default setting is OFF. 2007 • To set whether to print out the confidential RX report. • The default setting is ON. • To print out the relay TX result report after the relay delivery is completed when the machine is used as the relay delivery station. • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF (6) Bulletin TX Report Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the bulletin TX report or not.0 Feb. • To print out the PC-Fax error report when TX error occurs during PC-Fax TX. “ON” OFF (7) Relay TX Result Report • It will be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON. 1. • The default setting is ON.8.” [Service Mode] → [FAX] → [System] → [Display Setting] → [Relay] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print out the Relay TX Result Report or not.

ON “OFF” 369 Adjustment / Setting • The default setting is OFF. 1. 2007 (10) Broadcast Result Report Functions Use • To set the format to output the broadcast result report. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF” (12) Network Fax RX Error Report • Settings will be available when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. • The default setting is OFF.0 Feb. 8. • The default setting is ON “ON” OFF (14) DSN Message • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. Utility Mode • To print out the broadcast result report All Destinations : Outputs all reports after transmitting to all addresses Each Destination : Outputs a report after each transmission • The default setting is All Destinations. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print message when receiving response message to MDN request when internet fax function is being used.Field Service Ver. “All Destinations” Each Destination Setting/ Procedure (11) TX Result Report Check Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to display the TX result report screen. bizhub C550 . [Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print message when receiving response message to DSN request when network fax function is being used. ON “OFF” (13) MDN Message • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. • To display the TX result report screen. • To print the error report at unusual situation such as receiving the image data that cannot be processed. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print RX error report when network fax function is being used.

I. 2007 bizhub C550 (15) Print E-mail Message Body • Settings will be available only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. Select the simplex or duplex print. 1. “PB” 10 pps NOTE • The displays are different depending on the country. Select the feed tray. • The default setting is PB. Touch [Administrator Settings] → [Fax Setting] → [Job Settings List]. Job Settings List • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that Vendor is mounted. “2 X” (0 to 15) 370 . Adjustment / Setting (1) Line Parameter Setting <Dialing Method> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the dial method for the expanded line. • The default setting is ON. “ON” OFF H. • To change the number of artificial ringback tones with expanded line when receiving calls until it starts receiving operation. • To use when changing the dial method for the expanded line. 1. Multi Lines Settings • It will be displayed only when the optional fax multi line (ML-501) is mounted. • The default setting is 2 X. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Setting] → [Network Fax Setting] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to print mail text received normally as the report when internet fax function is being used. 3. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Software Switch Setting]) Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • The set value list of the fax set up into this machine can be printed. • To print the received mail text when printing the received image data. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. 2.0 Feb. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] (It will be displayed when the Key counter is mounted or when the following setting shows that switch No.8. and touch the Start key.33 is set to [01] at HEX assignment. <Number of Rx Call Rings> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of RX call rings for the expanded line.

enter the fax ID (up to 20 characters). “TX and RX” RX Only TX Only (4) Sender Fax No. • The default setting is ON. 371 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 1. “ON” OFF (2) Function Settings <PC-FAX TX Setting> • This setting does not appear when “RX Only” is selected for [Multi Line Settings]. 2007 <Line Monitor Sound> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 8. • Use 10-key pad or [+] / [space]. • The default setting is No Selection. • To use when setting the system for using each line when using more than one line. Utility Mode • To set whether or not to output the line monitor sound of the expanded line from the speaker. perform the transmission setting for Line 2. “No Selection” Line 1 Line 2 (3) Multi Lines Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the system for using each line when using more than one line.0 Feb. • To use when specifying the line to be used for PC-FAX transmission when using the expanded line. <Multi Line Usage> • When selecting [Normal]. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the fax ID when using the additional line.Field Service Ver. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the number of the line used for PC-FAX transmission. <Line 2 Setting> • The default setting is TX and RX. • To register the fax ID (for additional line).

1. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set black compression level at monochrome TX mode when network fax function is being used. Network Fax Settings • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. • To change black compression level at monochrome TX mode. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] Functions Use • To set image data compression system. • The following shows the options of each setting item. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 372 . 2007 bizhub C550 J. paper size and resolution. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] (1) Black Compression Level • It will be displayed only when either [IP Address Fax] or [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. Compression Type “MMR” “MR” “MH” ⎯ Paper Size “A3” “B4” “A4” ⎯ Resolution Ultra Fine Super Fine Fine Std. • To limit the data acceptable with internet fax. “MH” MR MMR (2) Internet Fax Self Rx Ability • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. • The default setting is MH. which can be received by the machine with internet fax.8.0 Feb.

MDN/DSN Response Watch Time : To set the period to observe the response from the other machine when sending MDN/DSN request. Enter the port number between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.Field Service Ver. MDN Request : To set whether to send MDN (Message Disposition Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax. 2007 8. NOTE • Only MDN Request will be sent when both MDN Request and DSN Request are set to “ON. “Allow” Restrict (2) Port Number Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the access port for other systems with OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator. TX/RX and record when internet fax function is being used. 1.” Setting/ Procedure • Default settings are shown below. time out message is notified. or Port Number (SSL). • The default setting is Allow. 2. • To restrict access from other systems with OpenAPI. Max Resolution : To set maximum resolution for reading. and touch [Input].9 System Connection A. In the case of time over. OpenAPI Settings (1) Access Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To allow or restrict the access from other systems with OpenAPI when using Page Scope Data Administrator. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] . Select Port No. Utility Mode Functions Use • To set advanced functions of internet fax. 373 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 (3) I-Fax Advanced Settings • It will be displayed only when [Internet Fax] is set to “ON” in the following settings. 1. Press the Clear key. MDN Request DSN Request MDN Response MDN/DSN Response Watch Time Max Resolution : “ON” : ON : “ON” : “24 hours” (1 to 99) : 400 x 400 OFF “OFF” OFF OFF “600 x 600” 8. 3.6. MDN Response : To set whether to response for MDN request made by the other machine when receiving through internet fax.0 Feb. DSN Request : To set whether to send DSN (Delivery Status Notification) request when transmitting through internet fax. • To change the access port number for other systems with OpenAPI.

see “CS Remote Care. 1. when the CS Remote Care setup is complete.421 Adjustment / Setting 8. Administrator Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set/change the administrator password. 2007 bizhub C550 (3) SSL • It will be displayed when certificate is issued from PageScope Web Connection. • To encrypt access by SSL from other systems using OpenAPI. Current Password : Enter the current administrator password New Password : Enter the new administrator password to be used Re-Input Password : Re-enter the new administrator password NOTE • When selecting Utility → [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Security Details] leads to [Password Rules] being ON. • The default setting is OFF. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. the password which is same as the previous one and the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed. enter the login name and the password to be set. ON “OFF” (4) Authentication Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to authenticate access of other systems which uses OpenAPI when using PageScope Data Administrator.” See P. • The default setting is OFF. • Enter the administrator password on the on-screen keyboard.0 Feb. ON “OFF” • When setting to [ON]. B.8. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To call the CS Remote Care center from the administrator. 374 . Call Remote Center • It will be displayed when the setup at the CS Remote Care center is complete. the password with the same letters.10 Security Settings A.6. For details. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to encrypt access from other systems by SSL when using Page Scope Data Administrator. • To set authentication of the access from other systems using OpenAPI. • To change the administrator password.

Allow “Restrict” NOTE • [Allow] cannot be selected when user authentication and account track are not conducted. Setting Functions Use 8. Prohibit : Not to allow the user to set neither Level 1 nor Level 2 • The default setting is Prohibit.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • Set the password when setting to [Allow]. • To make part of the administrator settings items open to the user. • To allow the box administrator to use the system. • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. [Daylight Savings Time Setting]. NOTE • [Allow] cannot be set when the user authentication or account track is not carried out. NOTE • When the following setting shows that [Password Rules] is set to “ON”. [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)]. or the password with less than eight letters cannot be accepted. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] bizhub C550 . [AE Level Adjustment]. who is allowed to browse contents in common box / individual box without the password. Level 2 : [Power Save Setting]. [Auto Magnification Selection (ADF)]. Administrator Security Levels • It will not be displayed when the following setting shows that vendor or authentication device 1 is mounted. [Output Setting]. [Specify Default Tray when APS Off]. [Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)]. Utility Mode • To set whether to allow or restrict the box administrator to use the system. Level 1 : [Power Save Setting]. [Select Tray for Insert Sheet]. [Date/Time Setting]. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Restrict. [Auto Magnification Selection (Platen)]. the Password using only a single letter or the password same with the previous one. [Specify Default Tray when APS Off]. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] Functions Use • To set the level for administrator settings item open to the user. 1.0 Feb. 2007 B. and [Select Tray for Insert Sheet] are available to users. The box administrator is the special administrator for box. Level 1 Level 2 “Prohibit” Setting/ Procedure 375 Adjustment / Setting C.Field Service Ver. and [Print Jobs During Copy Operation] are available to users. User Box Admin.

” [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [CE Authentication] [CE Authentication] will not be displayed and cannot be set to “OFF” when [Password Rules] is set to “ON. administrator password. user box password. • Details of the password rules: Password except user password. ON “OFF” NOTE • [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. Utility Mode D.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhances Security Mode] • [ON] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “OFF. passwords for confidential documents. • Passwords to be covered: CE password. the password cannot be changed or registered unless it follows the above conditions. Password same with the one prior to change is prohibited. user password. When the password rule is set to [ON]. Password with only the same letter is prohibited. (Case-sensitive) User box password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. (Case-sensitive) User password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters. 1.8. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. 2007 bizhub C550 • To apply the password rule to enhance security. account track password. Field Service Ver. Security Details (1) Password Rules Functions Use • To set whether to apply the password rules. user box password shall be 8 digits of one-bite alphanumeric characters.” Adjustment / Setting 376 .0 Feb.

the access lock is released automatically after the lapse of a Administrator authentipredetermined period of time. The number of times failure occurred will be counted. When the machine goes into an access lock condition. release the lock in the following procedure. authentication will be prohibited and the access will be locked.Field Service Ver. • To use when setting the system to prohibit authentication failure when conducting authentication by password. the access lock is released. For CE authentication and administrator authentication. • Authentications which are subjected to this function: CE authentication. administrator authentication. Mode 2 : When failed to authenticate. “Mode 1” Mode 2 NOTE • [Mode1] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. Mode 1 : When failed to authenticate. cation • [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [Administrator unlocking] • The lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 → 3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter Count] → [Check Details] → [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. 2007 (2) Prohibited Functions When Authentication Error Functions Use 8. authentication operation (entering the password) will be prohibited for a certain period of time. 1. authentication operation (entering the password) will be prohibited for a certain period of time. 377 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . set the number of times where checks are made before access is locked. CE authentication Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Mode 1. user box authentication. or turn main power switch OFF/ON to cancel it. only turning main power switch OFF/ON will cancel it. [Administrator Settings] SNMP authentication → [Security Setting] → [Security Details] → [Prohibited secure print authentiFunctions When Authentication Error]. cation Then touch [Release].0 Feb. When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting. user+ accounts authentication • Touch keys in the following order. touch [Release] on the main body. • Touch [Release Time Settings] and set a period of time that elapses before access lock is released. etc. Utility Mode • To set the function for prohibiting authentication operation in order to prevent the unauthorized access. user box authentication • After the main power switch is turned OFF and ON. When the access is locked.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • Only the number of times for trials up to the access lock can be changed. SNMP authentication. secure print authentication. user+ accounts authentication. • When [Mode 2] is selected. and when the number reaches to the specified time.

“Mode 1” Mode 2 (4) Manual Destination Input Functions Use • To set whether to allow or prohibit to manually enter the destination address on the Destination Input screen. • It cannot be changed at the operator’s option since it will automatically be set according to the [Prohibit Functions When Auth.0 Feb. NOTE • [Mode1] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. 2007 • To display the status of the authentication system on the control panel for the confidential document access. and print them with authentication by password. It will be set to [Mode 2] when [Prohibit Functions when Auth. Mode 1 : This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID and password.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Mode 1. “Allow” Restrict Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure (5) Print Data Capture Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether to allow or restrict capturing the print job data. Utility Mode (3) Confidential Document Access Method bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. Mode 2 : This mode is for authentication by confidential document ID. • The default setting is OFF. • To be used when carrying out [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Data capture]. ON “OFF” 378 . Error] is set to [Mode 1]. • To prohibit entering the destination address manually. Error] setting.8. It displays the list of the corresponding confidential document. 1. • To prohibit sending fax. Error] is set to [Mode 2]. • The default setting is Allow. “Allow” Restrict NOTE • [Allow] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] (6) Restrict Fax TX Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to prohibit sending fax. • The default setting is Allow. • It will be set to [Mode 1] when [Prohibit Functions When Auth. It displays the list of the corresponding confidential document to print them.

Utility Mode • Not to display file names and destinations that appears on job logs for security protection purpose. “ON” OFF (9) Delete Job Log Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Clear the all job logs. 1.0 Feb. 1. 8. 379 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2. Touch [Delete Job Log]. ON “OFF” (8) Display Activity Log Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Selects whether to display communication logs for scan/fax transmission. 2007 (7) Hide Personal Information Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Selects whether to display file names and destinations in job logs.Field Service Ver. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK]. • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is ON.

ON (Cannot be changed) OFF (Cannot be changed) Only “Read” is allowed (Cannot be changed) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Prohibited (Cannot be changed) Adjustment / Setting Password Rules Prohibit Functions When Auth. CE Password : Change it with the one which meets password rules. Setting Temporary Data Overwrite Setting Secure Document Access Method SSL FTP Server SNMPv1/v2c Registering and Changing Addresses Public User Access Print Data Capture Mode 1 OFF ON Read/Write allowed Allow Restrict Allowed 380 . 1. Error User Name List Print without Authentication User Box Admin. Utility Mode E.0 Feb. Field Service Ver. and cancel the setting. Enhanced Security Mode bizhub C550 Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enhance security.” • The default setting is OFF. User Authentication : Set to “User Authentication (MFP)” or “User Authentication (External Server)”. 2007 • To use when enhancing the security function at user’s option.) SSL Certificate : Register self-certificate for SSL communication from the PSWC. HDD Lock Password or Encryption word : Set the HDD lock password or encryption word with 20 characters. Name of the function Default setting OFF Mode 1 OFF Restrict Restrict OFF When Enhanced Security Mode is ON ON (Cannot be changed) Mode 2 (Cannot be changed) set to three times *Can change times (from once to three times) OFF (Cannot be change) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Restrict (Cannot be changed) Mode 1 (Cannot be changed to Mode 2) Mode 2 (Cannot be changed) *It will be changed according to “Prohibit Functions When Auth.8. Error”. • The following settings are necessary for setting the security enhancement “ON”. Administrator Password : Change it with the one which meets password rules. CE Authentication : Set to [ON]. ON “OFF” Use NOTE • Setting the Enhanced Security Mode “ON” will change the setting values for the following functions. (Encryption word can be set only when SC-503 is mounted. CS Remote Care : Conduct RAM clear. Management Function Choice : Set to “Unset. Image Controller Setting : Set to [Controller 0].

When erasing data.0 Feb. Utility Mode • To display the used space capacity.Field Service Ver. the security level of the data will be enhanced before writing to HDD. and destroy the image data itself.) “Encryption Priority” Overwrite Priority 381 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . scanning and fax transmission. It is used for performing the overwriting and erasing according to the HDD data erase standard. the remaining data included in the image data will not leak. • To check the capacity and the status of use of the hard disk (2) Overwrite Temporary Data • When the image becomes unnecessary. (Only when the optional security kit SC-503 is mounted. “OFF” Mode 1 Mode 2 NOTE • [OFF] cannot be selected when the following setting is set to “ON. overwriting will be executed with the value besides the value specified by the selected mode. perform overwriting to the area data were once written in HDD or memory in order to enhance security. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF. and the remaining capacity of the hard disk. so overwriting and erasing will be performed without fail using the specified value in the selected mode. Encryption Priority : When the encryption word is set. • To change overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function. they will all be converted into encryption data before overwritten. Mode 2: Overwrite 0x00 → overwrite 0xff → overwrite 0x61 →validation • “Encryption Priority/Overwrite Priority” can be selected when the optional security kit SC-503 is mounted. total space capacity. The structure of image data will be destroyed so that in case HDD is stolen. When the operation is complete. 2007 F. • To set overwriting method to use temporary data overwrite function. copier print. HDD Settings (1) Check HDD Capacity Functions Use 8. Using the HDD lock password function or optional security kit (SC-503) along with this function will provide a high level of security which prevents images of great importance from leaking. Mode 1: To overwrite 0x00 one time. • All data are temporarily written into HDD or memory during PC print. It is recommended to use HDD lock password function or security kit (SC-503) along with this function for those who require high level of security. Overwrite Priority : Standard encryption method will be applied to data written to HDD even when the encryption word is set. • To use when making temporary data overwrite function valid. temporary data overwrite function will write meaningless data over all area where images are stored. 1. NOTE • It is necessary to make HDD format when encryption priority/overwrite priority setting is changed. Therefore.” [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • The default setting is Encryption Priority. Functions Use • To set whether or not to use overwrite temporary data.

• To enter. • To use when disposing of the hard disk. 2007 • To delete the whole data in the hard disk by overwriting. Mode 2 : Overwrites with random numbers → overwrites with random numbers → overwrites with 0x00 Mode 3 : Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with random numbers → verifies Mode 4 : Overwrites with random numbers → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff Mode 5 : Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff Mode 6 : Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with random numbers Mode 7 : Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0xaa Mode 8 : Overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0x00 → overwrites with 0xff → overwrites with 0xaa → verifies 1. Mode 1 : It overwrites 0x00 once. Touch [Yes] on the check screen. Touch [HDD Lock Password]. 382 . 3. When the password is forgotten. • To initialize the area of use for the user stored in NVRAM. 2. change or delete the lock password for the hard disk. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after. 4. Utility Mode (3) Overwrite All Data bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. • Don’t forget the password.8. 1. • Select the overwriting method from Mode 1 through 8.0 Feb. Touch [YES] on the confirmation screen. 2. 1. Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting (4) HDD Lock Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the lock password for the hard disk. Touch [Overwrite]. NOTE • Password using only a single letter is not acceptable. Re-enter the password to confirm. 4. Enter the password (20 characters) on the on-screen keyboard. the replacement of hard disk is needed. 5. 3. Touch [Overwrite All Data]. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. and touch [OK].

2007 (5) Format HDD Functions Use • To conduct logical formatting of HDD. 1. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.] → [HDD Format]. 3. Setting/ Procedure 1. 5. ➀ Address data ➁ Authentication data : Authentication mode.Field Service Ver. 2. fax transmission history Setting/ Procedure 1. 383 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 3. box for fax ➃ Job history. Utility Mode NOTE • It is subject to logical formatting here. 4. (6) HDD Encryption Setting • It can be set only when the optional security kit (SC-503) is mounted. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. • To re-set encrypting word due to exchange of NVRAM board or etc. • To setup security kit SC-503. therefore if starting with physical formatting. Open [Administrator Settings] and conduct HDD formatting according to the instruction appeared on the panel. Enter encryption key (20 characters) with the keyboard on the operation panel and press [OK].0 Feb. • HDD formatting is required after this setting. 2. • To initialize HDD. The following data will be lost after HDD formatting. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. NOTE • Double-byte and identical characters are not acceptable. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK]. user authentication setting. Therefore it is necessary to retrieve certain data from HDD in advance. NOTE • This setting is available only when the optional security kit SC-503 is mounted. 8. follow as [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj. setting information of each box. Functions Use • To set encryption key necessary to mount the optional security kit SC-503. Press [HDD Encryption Setting]. Touch [HDD Formatting]. account track setting ➂ Box setting data : Box and text in the box.

2007 bizhub C550 G. 1. Function Management Setting (1) Each Function Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that Vendor 2 or Management Device is mounted. [PC print]. [Print others] is not displayed when Vendor is connected. • [ON] for [Send Data] will not be displayed when the optional image controller (IC-406) is mounted. PC-FAX transmission/Using the HDD TWAIN driver to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Using PageScope Box Operator to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Using PageScope Scan Direct to retrieve documents in user boxes/Using PageScope Job Spooler to view and retrieve documents in user boxes/Box operations using the PageScope Web Connection • The default setting is ON. • To set whether to use Management function for each item of [Copy]. [Send data] and [Print others]. Exercise caution since it will stay in “OFF” setting even when “unset” is selected on vendor or management device setting in Service Mode later. [PC print]. this setting is set to OFF. • The default setting is ON. • Not to use the network function whose counter is difficult to be managed when management function has been set. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions • To set whether to use management function for each item of [Copy].8. [Send data] and [Print others]. [Print others] is not displayed when vendor is connected. “ON” OFF Prohibit Use Setting/ Procedure (2) Max Copy Set • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that vendor is mounted. 1 to “9999” Adjustment / Setting (3) Network Function Settings Functions Use • To set whether to use network function or not when management function has been set. • The following are target functions. Utility Mode Field Service Ver. Setting/ Procedure 384 . when the vendor or management device setting in the Service Mode is set. • The default setting is 9999.0 Feb. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the upper limit of the number of copy or PC print when management function has been set. “ON” OFF NOTE • However.

(2) Delete Registered Stamp Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Deletes registered stamps. 385 Adjustment / Setting H.0 Feb. authentication reset is set after completing the job in [Authentication Time]. 1 to 30 min. 2. “Yes” No “Touch and Go” Setting/ Procedure Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Selects whether to add a stamp to documents when jobs are printed or fax/scanned data is sent. [Service Mode] → [Billing Setting] → [Management Function Choice] . Touch and Go : Card is placed only when authentication is made with the device and if the card is left for a given time (Authentication reset time) the authentication setting is reset. <Authentication Method> • The default setting is Touch and Go. and copy protect/repeat stamps. Keep Card : Authentication is available leaving the card in the given place when making authentication with the device. 1. Utility Mode Functions Use • To set the authentication mode when authentication device is used. 2007 8. • When selecting “Touch and Go”. 1. Keep Card <Authentication Time> • The default setting is 1 min. Stamp Settings (1) Apply Stamps bizhub C550 (4) Authentication Time Setting • It will be displayed only when the following setting shows that authentication device 1 is mounted. Select [Yes] on the confirmation screen and touch [OK] to delete the registered stamps. 3. Apply “Do Not Apply” • Touch “Apply” to make stamp settings independently for print and transmission modes. • To change the authentication mode when authentication device is used. • The each default setting is Do Not Apply. <Authentication Log-out When Job is Completed> • The default setting is Yes. Select [Stamp] or [Copy Protect/Stamp Repeat].Field Service Ver. Touch [Delete Registered Stamp].

Adjustment item list Field Service Ver. bizhub C550 Adjustment item list Replace separation roller assy Replacement part/Service job Replace paper feed roller Replace transfer belt unit Change marketing area Replace mirror unit Replace CCD unit Adjustment/setting items Print Positioning: Leading Edge No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Print Positioning: Side Edge Paper Feed Direction Adj. Touch Panel Adjust State Confirmation Memory/ HDD R/W Check HDD HDD Format Table Number Re-entry of setting values System 1/2 Serial Number Scan Calibration Line Mag Setting Counter ADF Enhanced Security Re-entry of Utility settings Re-entry of Enhanced Security settings Parallel adjustment of scanner/mirrors carriage Positioning scanner unit Scanner motor belt adjustment Original glass moving unit height adjustment F/W upgrading Installation of original size sensor Remounting of NVRAM (MFP board) Replace transfer belt unit Life Counter Clear Gradation Adjust Read Pos Adj *1 NVRAM Data Backup Image Process Adjust- Adjustment / Setting Firmware Version (1) (2) ❍ ❍ (3) ❍ 22 ❍ 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 (1) (2) 386 Replace PH unit Replace IU Install LCT . Image position: Leading Edge (4) ❍ (3) (4) (5) (4) (5) ❍ (1) (2) (3) (5) Printer Area Scan Area Machine Image position: Side Edge Cross Direction Adjustment Feed Direction Adjustment Org. 2007 9. Skew adjustment Skew adjustment Skew adjustment reset Service Mode LD delay adjust.9.0 Feb. Detecting Sensor Adj. LD adjustment LD lightness balance adjust. 1.

during the adjustment procedures is indicated by the corresponding number in the parentheses. . Priority order. 1. 2007 9.R Replace scanner motor Replace printer control board Replace scanner assy Replace original glass Replace original glass moving unit Replace original size detection sensor Execute F/W update Replace MFP board Execute add. option Replace hard disk Replace scanner home sensor Execute initialize Add key counter No 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 (2) ❍ (5) (2) (3) (3) (1) (6) (2) (2) (2) ❍ (4) (3) ❍ (1) Add fax board (3) (4) (2) (2) ❍ (4) (1) ❍ (2) (3) (1) (1) (1) ❍ (1) (1) ❍ (2) ❍ ❍ (1) (5) 387 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 • This table shows the adjustment items that are required when a part of the machine has been replaced.Field Service Ver. Adjustment item list Replace image processing board Wind scanner drive cables Replace glass step sheet Replace IDC/registration sensor/F.0 Feb. if applicable.

1. A. Press the following keys in this order. re-enter the right password. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • If a wrong CE password is entered. authentication by CE password is necessary. They should NEVER be shown to any unauthorized person not involved with service jobs. The machine will not enter Service Mode unless the CE password is entered correctly. When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting. Enter the 8 digits CE password. if the access lock is activated. • The service code entered is displayed as “✽.. Procedure Press the Utility/Counter key. the access lock is released. operation will be prohibited since it indicates authentication failure by failing to enter the correct CE password within the specified number of times. the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 → 3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter Count] → [Check Details] → [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On. 3. and touch [END]. To return to the Basic screen. When the following setting is set to “Mode 2”. The Service Mode menu will appear.”) • When the following setting is set to “ON”. Service Mode Field Service Ver.10. 2007 10. 2.1 Service Mode function setting procedure NOTE • Ensure appropriate security for Service Mode function setting procedures. CE password authentication is necessary. Service Mode bizhub C550 10. Stop → 0 → 0 → Stop → 0 → 1 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • When selecting [CE Authentication] under [Enhanced Security] available from Service Mode. Touch [Details] on meter count display. turn OFF the sub power switch and turn it ON again. 1.” 4. A00JF3E534DA 388 .0 Feb. (The initial setting for CE password is “92729272.

• Use the 10-key pad to enter the setting value.0 Feb. Exiting • Touch the [Exit] key. Service Mode B. • For the procedure to change the CE password.Field Service Ver.) 389 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 NOTE • Be sure to change the CE password from its default value.487 . 2007 10. C. (To change the setting value. first press the Clear key before making an entry. Changing the setting value in Service Mode functions • Use the [+] / [-] key to enter or change the setting value. See P. 1. see the Enhanced Security.

399 P.412 P. Page P. *5: It will be displayed only when the [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON.398 P.408 Cyan Magenta Yellow Skew adjustment Skew adjustment Skew adjustment reset LD adjustment LD delay adjust.410 P. *3: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-517/608) is mounted. *1: Settings are available only when the optional fax kit (FK-502) is mounted.402 P. 2007 10.0 Feb.410 P.411 P. 1. Service Mode Field Service Ver. Scan Area Image Position: Leading Edge Image Position: Side Edge Cross Direction Adjustment Feed Direction Adjustment Printer Resist Loop Ref. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.412 P.10.407 P.” Service Mode Machine Color alignment Adjustment Fusing Temperature Fusing Transport Speed Org.413 P.403 P.398 P.397 P.405 P. Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment Lead Edge Erase Adjustment Thick Paper Mode Split Line Prior Detection Firmware Version P.413 P.2 Service Mode function tree bizhub C550 ✽ The function tree is shown to comply with the format displayed on the screen.401 P. Printer Area Leading Edge Adjustment Centering Leading Edge Adj.409 Adjustment / Setting Color Registration Adjustment 390 .412 P. *4: It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-608) is mounted. LD lightness balance adjust.406 P.404 P.410 P. *2: It will be displayed only when the optional fax multi line (ML-501) is mounted.396 P.400 P. (Duplex Side 2) Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) Paper Feed Direction Adj.

415 P. 1.417 P.416 P.419 P.445 P.443 P. Stabilization Only 10.419 P.418 P.443 P.421 P.414 P.443 P.418 Initialize+Image Stabilization Thick Paper Density Adjustment Thick 1.420 P.442 P.442 P.Field Service Ver.415 P. Bias Choice CS Remote Care System 1 Marketing Area Tel/Fax Number Serial Number No Sleep Foolscap Size Setting Original Size Detection Install Date Initialization Data Clear System Error Clear Charging CH cleaning Cleaning Self-Cleaning Trouble Isolation Communication System Setting Post card transfer table P. 2007 Service Mode Imaging Process Adjustment Gradation Adjust Transfer Belt Cleaning Bias Auto Cleaning D Max Density TCR Level Setting Background Voltage Margin Transfer Output Fine Adjustment Stabilizer Primary transfer adj.413 .442 P.417 P.1+ Thick 2.443 P.442 bizhub C550 P.441 P.3.416 P.445 391 Adjustment / Setting P. Service Mode Ref.419 P. Page P.444 P.0 Feb.441 P.4 Paper separation adjustment TCR Toner Supply Monochrome Density Adjustment Dev.418 P. Secondary transfer adj.444 P.

452 P.460 P.10.449 P.455 P.454 P.460 P.446 P.451 P.474 P.448 P.474 P.453 P.457 P. 2007 Ref.0 Feb.474 P.461 P.447 P.445 P.447 P.460 P.456 P.458 ⎯ P.457 P.447 P.475 P.446 P.448 P. Page P.460 bizhub C550 System 2 HDD Image Controller Setting Option Board Status Consumable Life Reminder Unit Change Software Switch Setting Scan Calibration LCC size setting LCT Paper Size Setting Line Mag Setting Data Capture Split Line Detect.456 P.460 P.456 P.456 P.457 P.473 P. Setting Stamp Network Fax Settings Counter Life Jam Service Call Counter Warning Maintenance Service Total Counter Of Each Mode Adjustment / Setting Service Call History (Data) ADF Paper Pages Paper Jam History Fax Connection Error Split Line Counter Parts Counter (Fixed) Counter Reset List Output Machine Management List Adjustments List Parameter List Service Parameter Protocol Trace State Confirmation Sensor Check Table Number Level History1 Level History2 Temp.455 P.460 Last Error Fax Setting List Fax Analysis List P.447 P.456 P. & Humidity CCD Check 392 . 1. Service Mode Service Mode Field Service Ver.460 P.446 P.455 P.

479 P.477 P.476 P.0 Feb.480 P.475 P.481 P.482 P.483 bizhub C550 P.478 P.480 P. Page Compress / Decompression Check JPEG check Memory Bus Check Work Memory In/Out Check HDD Version Up HDD R/W Check HDD Format Memory/HDD State Color Regist IU Lot No.476 P.481 P.478 P. Auto Stop Position Adjustment Paper Passage Sensor Check Original Tray Width Read Pos Adj Feed Zoom Orig. Feed Zoom Ad Auto Adjust Scanning Light Adjustment P.478 P.482 P.483 393 Adjustment / Setting P.475 .476 P. 2007 Service Mode State Confirmation Memory/HDD Adj.477 P. Adjustment Data List Test Mode Gradation Pattern Halftone Pattern Lattice Pattern Solid Pattern Color Sample 8 Color Solid Pattern CMM Pattern Running Mode Fax Test ADF Original Stop Position Registration Loop Adj.Field Service Ver.482 P. Service Mode Ref. Memory Check 10.476 P.477 P. 1.

483 P.485 P.483 bizhub C550 FAX *1 Line 1 *1 Finisher *3 FS-FN adjustment *3 Center Staple Position *4 Half-Fold Position *4 Punch Vertical Position Punch Horizontal Position Punch edge detection Punch Resist Loop Size (Body) Tri-Fold Position *4 2 Position Staple Dist.10.0 Feb. 1.483 P. Page Modem/NCU *1 NetWork *1 System *1 Fax File Format *1 Communication *1 List Output *1 Function Parameter *1 Initialization *1 Line 2 *1 Modem/NCU *1 NetWork *1 Communication *1 Initialization *1 P. *4 finisher check P. Internet ISW Internet ISW Set HTTP Setting *5 FTP Setting *5 Forwarding Access Setting *5 Download *5 P. Service Mode Service Mode Field Service Ver.483 Adjustment / Setting Load Data Staple option setting Punch Option setting Fold power of pages restrict.486 394 .484 P. 2007 Ref.

and minute. or minute. Press the following keys in this order. 10. Call the Service Mode to the screen. hour. 4. (Year 4 digits → Month 2 digits → Day 2 digits → Hour 2 digits → Minute 2 digits) . day. 2007 10. 2. Service Mode 10. in that order. Enter year.3. Stop → 1 → 1 → 4 → 4 → Clear 3.3 Date/Time Input mode • This mode is used to set time-of-day and date. month.1 Date & Time Setting mode screen bizhub C550 A00JF3E537DA NOTE • When setting the month. Make sure that correct figures have been entered and then touch [Entry]. Touch [END] to return to the Service Mode. enter “0” first if the data one digit. day. from 10-key pad. hour. Date & Time Setting mode setting procedure 1. 1. 5. 395 Adjustment / Setting A.0 Feb.Field Service Ver.

“0” (-6 to +6 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of A. 1. (If color shift is found on both areas. increase the setting. (At this time. • Uses this function when color shift occurs at the trailing edge of images. Call the Service Mode to the screen.) 9. Select the paper type to be adjusted. If the cross deviates in the direction of B. 3. Check Procedure <compare two places> Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting A00JF3C524DA If the cross deviates in the direction of A. Using the printed test pattern. • Able to make a setting on a process speed basis independently for each paper type of plain paper (color). change the setting value as necessary. 6.4. If the cross deviates in the direction of B.1 Functions Use Color Alignment Adjustment • To adjust color shift if color shift is found at the trailing edge of either plain paper or thick paper by the comparison of originals and their output. 2. and thick 2/3/4. perform the following adjustment. perform [Color Registration Adjustment]. Using the [+] / [-] key.4 Machine bizhub C550 10. check color shift in the sub scan direction on both leading and trailing edge areas. increase the setting. 5. 1. only the line of the selected color moves. 2007 10.10. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Color Registration Adjustment]. decrease the setting. Direction of A Direction of B 4036fs3005c1 4036fs3006c1 396 . 4. Select the color to be adjusted. 7. decrease the setting. thick 1/1+. Press the Start key. 8. Service Mode Field Service Ver. If color shift is found only around the trailing edge.0 Feb. Load manual bypass tray with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/2 x 11 plain paper.

thereby coping with varying fusing performance under changing environmental conditions. Enve.0 Feb. 1. gloss of print can be improved. 7. If curling of the paper occurs. 397 Adjustment / Setting Adjustment Instructions If fusing performance is poor. increase the setting. 3.Field Service Ver. 2007 10. Make the adjustment for each type of paper. • By setting the temperature lower (-).2 Functions 10. or wax streak or offset occurs when the type of paper is changed or environmental conditions change. • Use when the curling of the paper due to the paper type or environmental change occurred. Call the Service Mode to the screen. as well as stapling or folding position error occurred due to the curling of the paper. 6. Select the paper type and fusing roller type (Heater Roller or Pressure). If wax streaks occur. 2. • When fusing performance is poor. Output two or three test printing and check to see whether the image has any problem. decrease the setting. If the further adjustment is necessary. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Temperature].4. Service Mode Fusing Temperature • To adjust individually the temperature of the heating roller and the fusing pressure roller for each type of paper. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] key. adjust on the heating side first. Setting range -20 °C to +5 °C -20 °C to +5 °C -20 °C to +5 °C -20 °C to +5 °C -20 °C to +5 °C -20 °C to +5 °C -20 °C to +5 °C -20 °C to +5 °C -5 °C to +5 °C step 5 °C 5 °C 5 °C 5 °C 5 °C 5 °C 5 °C 5 °C 5 °C Use Adjustment Range Setting/ Procedure NOTE • To adjust the fusing temperature. • By setting the temperature higher (+). decrease the setting. exit roller mark can be reduced. or when the paper jam. If offset is poor. Return to the basic screen. bizhub C550 . 4. 1. Paper type Plain Paper OHP Film Thick 1 Thick 1+ Thick 2 Thick 3 Thick 4 Post. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. 8. 5. adjust on the pressure side. decrease the setting.

0 Feb. Check the copy image for any image problem. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Thick 4. Adjustment / Setting 10. 3. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Fusing Transport Speed]. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. Thick 1+: monochrome/color Thick 2. Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the adjustment has been successfully made. 4. 1. • Brush effect or blurred image is evident as a result of changes in environmental conditions or degraded durability. • To display if the original size detection 2 Sensor is mounted. Service Mode 10. When an optional sensor has been added.4 Functions Use Org. Press the Start key.]. • To automatically adjust the original detection distance for the original size sensor. decrease the setting. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.10.4. When the marketing area setting is changed. Select the transport speed. 2007 Fusing Transport Speed • To adjust the speed of the fusing drive motor so as to match the fusing speed with transport speed. check the optional original size sensors for correct installation and change the defective sensor or harness. Size Detecting Sensor Adj. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Org. 6. Place a blank sheet of A3 or 11 × 17 paper on the original glass and lower the original cover. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Size Detecting Sensor Adj.3 bizhub C550 Functions Use Variable Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. 1. Thick 3. vary the setting value and check for image. When an erroneous original size detection is made. it completes the adjustment procedure. at which the brush effect or blurred image has occurred. If the adjustment has turned out to be unsuccessful. envelope. 5. 2. Transport speed 264 mm/s 216 mm/s 132 mm/s 108 mm/s Paper Setting Plain paper: monochrome Plain paper: color Thick 1. -20 to +20 (in 1 increments) If brush effect is evident. postcard: : monochrome/color OHP film: monochrome 4.4. 3. If a blurred image occurs. 2. 398 . • • • • When the sensor is replaced with a new one.

5. 12.5 Printer Area 10. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Leading Edge Adjustment]. This setting can be made independently for plain paper. make the setting value smaller than the current one. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 4. Thick 1/1+. Thick 3. A faint image occurs on the leading edge of the image. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 6. If width A is shorter than the specifications.5 mm Setting range: -3. 11. If width A falls outside the specified range.Field Service Ver. Service Mode Functions • To vary the print start position in the sub scan direction for each of different paper types in the manual bypass tray. (To adjust the timing where paper is sent out from the timing roller) • • • • • The PH unit has been replaced.2 ± 0. and envelopes.2 mm increments) Use Adjustment Specification A00JF3C504DA Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. make the setting value greater than the current one. The image on the copy deviates in the sub scan direction. 2. touch [END]. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.0 mm (in 0.4. change the setting again and make a check again. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. 7. and Enve. OHP film. Leading Edge Adjustment . Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. 8. Width A Specifications: 4. 3. 9. OHP transparencies. 10. 1.0 Feb.0 mm to +3.If width A falls within the specified range. 1. Thick 4. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. 2007 10. Select the [Plain Paper]. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Thick 2. adjust for Thick 1 to 3.If width A is outside the specified range. Call the Service Mode to the screen.Following the same procedure. Setting/ Procedure 399 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 A. The paper type has been changed.

Service Mode B. 2. Select the paper source to be adjusted. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. 3. make the setting value greater than the current one.0 Feb. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the bypass. • The image on the copy deviates in the main scan direction. If width A is outside the specified range. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. If width A falls outside the specified range. 8.0 mm (in 0.If width A falls within the specified range. 6. 2007 • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source. 9.5 mm Setting range: -3.10. adjust for all other paper sources. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. Centering bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Width A Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range.0 mm to +3. 11. Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting 400 . Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. change the setting again and make a check again. • The PH Unit has been replaced. 4. 10. touch [END].0 ± 0. make the setting value smaller than the current one. • A paper feed unit has been added. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Centering]. 5.Following the same procedure.) 1.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification A00JF3C505DA Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. Specifications: 3. 1. 7. If width A is shorter than the specifications. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern.

• This adjustment can be made independently for each of plain paper. Service Mode • For individual types of paper.Following the same procedure. make the setting value smaller than the current one.0 mm (in 0. thick paper 2. change the setting again and make a check again. and thick paper 3.5 mm Setting range: -3. Width A Backside Specifications: 4. 2007 C. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. thick paper 1/ 1+. • This adjustment is made when the image on the 2nd side of paper deviates from the original position in the sub scan direction. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Leading Edge Adj.Field Service Ver. adjust for Thick paper. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. Leading Edge Adj.0 Feb. 3. 7. 11. (Duplex Side 2)]. 1. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 10. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. touch [END]. 6. Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. 8. (Duplex Side 2) Functions Use 10. 2.2 mm increments) Adjustment Specification A00JF3C504DA Adjustment Instructions If width A is longer than the specifications. Place A3 paper on the manual bypass tray.If width A is outside the specified range. make the setting value greater than the current one. 12. Select the [Plain Paper]. this function allows the adjustment of the image write start position in the sub scan direction on the 2nd side of duplex printing. If width A falls outside the specified range. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. If width A is shorter than the specifications.0 mm to +3. 5.2 ± 0. 1. Setting/ Procedure 401 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 9.If width A falls within the specified range. 4.

8. • If width A is shorter than the specifications. If width A is outside the specified range. 9.0 Feb. • The image on the backside of the 2-sided copy deviates in the main scan direction. Service Mode D. 4. Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern on the backside of the copy. 2. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Centering (Duplex 2nd Side)]. touch [END].) Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting 402 . Check the dimension of width A on the test pattern. make the setting value greater than the current one. 1. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. 10.10. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Centering (Duplex 2nd Side) bizhub C550 Functions Use Adjustment Specification Field Service Ver.0 mm (in 0. •For measurement.0 mm to +3. change the setting again and make a check again. 2007 • To vary the print start position in the main scan direction for each paper source in the 2-Sided mode. make the setting value smaller than the current one. 1.Following the same procedure.If width A falls within the specified range. 7. If width A falls outside the specified range. 3. use the image produced on the backside of the test pattern. Backside Specifications: 3. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. Width A •Width A on the test pattern produced should fall within the following range. 11. 6.0 ± 0. Select the paper source to be adjusted.2 mm increments) A00JF3C505DA Adjustment Instructions • If width A is longer than the specifications.5 mm Setting range: -3. adjust for all other paper sources. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. (Use A4 or 8 1/2 × 11 plain paper for the manual bypass tray. 5.

2. adjust for thick paper. When the print image on the copy is stretched in the sub scan direction. 6. touch [END]. Thick 3. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern again. 10. Functions Use 10. B: -7 to +7 A00JF3C506DA Adjustment Specification A B Adjustment Instructions If width A or B is longer than the specifications.9 to 8. and Thick 4. Load manual bypass tray with A3 or 11 × 17 plain paper. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Paper Feed Direction Adj]. 1. 4. Check width A (equivalent to one grid) and width B (equivalent to 48 grids) on the test pattern. 2007 E. 7. change the setting value and make a check again. Thick 1/1+.Check width A and width B on the test pattern. shrunk).3 B: 389. Touch [Machine] → [Printer Area] → [Paper Feed Direction Adj. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. make the setting value greater than the current one.0 Feb.If width A or B falls within the specified range. 5. Select [Plain Paper]. If width of A or B falls outside the specified range. If width A or B is shorter than the specifications. 3. Adjustment Procedure 403 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 1. change the setting using the [+]/[-] keys.Following the same procedure. The print image on the copy distorts (stretched. This setting can be made independently for plain paper.1 Setting Range A. Service Mode • To synchronize the paper transport speed with the image writing speed. 8. Width A and width B on the test pattern produced should fall within the following ranges. 9. Thick 2. 12. • • • • Feed Direction Adjustment becomes necessary. Paper Feed Direction Adj.Field Service Ver.1 to 392. make the setting value smaller than the current one. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 13.]. Width A: equivalent to one grid Width B: equivalent to 48 grids Specifications A: 7.If width A or B falls outside the specified range. 11.

: 4036-7940-01 Printed In Japan C M C Y Y M P1 P1 B Original Reference D 4038F3C517DA A. a scale may be used instead.5 2.6 1.8 3. : CTC-008-01 PART NO. 1.0 Feb. 5.0 COLOR CHART BK M C C 2. 8. 2.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the copy image is less than the specified length. relating the color to a gray of a similar lightness. The quality of color which can be dark etc.2 Y 1. MODEL : MACHINE S/N : DATE : COUNTER : / / °C %RH 1. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. Chroma described by words such as vivid. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. 1. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Image Position: Leading Edge]. Call the Service Mode to the screen. If the copy image exceeds the specified length. blue etc. 9. The quality of color which can be A B 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Value described by words such as light. 2007 Scan Area • Use the following color chart for the adjustment of the scanner section.4.5 2. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale.6 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Leading Edge Adjustment] of [Printer Area].4 1.0 2.8 2..8 3. 6. 3. COLOR CHART 1.0 (in 0.2 4. yellow. •B width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of A width satisfies the specifications shown below. Press the Start key to make another copy.0 Y M C 4.8 2. describing the extent to which a color differs from a gray having the same value.1 1. • • • • 2 1 A: Image Position: Leading Edge B: Image Position: Side Edge C: Cross Direction Adjustment D: Feed Direction Adjustment P2 M R G Hue described by words such as red. 404 . A00JF3C507DA Use Adjustment Specification Adjustment / Setting A Specifications A: ± 0. decrease the setting value.25 P2 3. saturation is “chroma”: this is the world of color.1 1. Service Mode 10..25 4.5 mm (10 ± 0. lightness is “value”.0 3.0 1.2 COPY DENSITY : COLOR BALANCE Y : M : C : BK : OTHERS : 4.5 mm if a scale is used) Setting range -5.5 2.10.6 CHART NO.6 1. 7.2 1. 4. • If the color chart is not available.5 2.0 to +5. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. Check point A on the image of the copy. Image Position: Leading Edge Functions • To adjust variations in mounting accuracy and sensitivity of the scanner home sensor and in mounting accuracy of the original width scale by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction. The quality of color which can be dull etc.4 1.6 C C M C Y Y M Y Color is “hue”. If width A on the copy falls outside the specified range. • When the original glass is replaced.0 1. Press the Start key to make a copy. • When the original width scale is replaced. increase the setting value.

8.0 Feb. If the copy image exceeds the specified length. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Check point B of the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. • When the CCD unit is replaced. If the image falls outside the specified range. 9. 3.Field Service Ver. 2007 B. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of [Centering] of [Printer Area]. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. 4. 405 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .0 mm A00JF3C508DA Adjustment Specification B Setting range -10. increase the setting value.0 (in 0. 1. Check point B on the image of the copy. decrease the setting value. Press the Start key to make a copy. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. Press the Start key to make a copy.0 to +10. • When the original glass is replaced. 1. Image Position: Side Edge Functions Use 10. 7. •A width on the color chart and one on the copy sample are measured and adjusted so that the difference of B width satisfies the specifications shown below. Service Mode • To adjust part-to-part variations in accuracy of IR parts and their mounting accuracy by varying the scan start position in the main scan direction.1 mm increments) Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the copy image is less than the specified length. 2. 6. • The scanner home sensor has been replaced. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Image Position: Side Edge]. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. Specifications B: ± 1.

8.0 mm 4038F3C516DA Setting range 0. increase the setting.990 to 1. 1. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. decrease the setting. 9. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Cross Direction Adjustment].” of [Printer Area].010 (in 0. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. 4. Service Mode C. Check the C width on the image of the copy. Cross Direction Adjustment bizhub C550 Functions Use Adjustment Specification Field Service Ver.001 increments) Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the C width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. If the C width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart. 2. 7. 6. If the image falls outside the specified range.10.0 Feb. 2007 • To adjust the zoom ratio in the main scan direction for the scanner section • The CCD unit has been replaced. 3. 1. Press the Start key to make a copy. Adjustment / Setting 406 . and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key. C Specifications C: ± 1. •Measure C width on the color chart and on the sample copy. Press the Start key to make another copy. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 5.

Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Scan Area] → [Feed Direction Adjustment]. Feed Direction Adjustment Functions Use 10.010 (in 0. Position the color chart correctly so that the original reference point is aligned with the scale. 1. If the D width on the copy sample exceeds one on color chart.001 increments) Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure If the D width on the copy sample is less than one on color chart. increase the setting. Make adjustments until the specifications are met. and adjust the gap to be within the following specification. • The scanner motor has been replaced. 2. 1. Press the Start key to make another copy.5 mm 4038F3C518DA Adjustment Specification Setting range 0. D Specifications D: ± 1. Check the image on the copy to see if the specifications are met. Press the Start key to make a copy.990 to 1. 6. 7. 8. 4. 5. 3.Field Service Ver. If the image falls outside the specified range. Check the D width on the image of the copy.” of [Printer Area]. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 9. • The scanner drive cables have been replaced. Service Mode • To adjust the zoom ratio in the sub scan direction for the scanner section • The scanner assy has been replaced. •An adjustment must have been completed correctly of “Paper Feed Direction Adj. •Measure D width on the color chart and on the sample copy. 407 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2007 D.0 Feb. decrease the setting. change the setting using the [+] / [-] key.

4. 2. 1.4. • Use “Paper Passage” for paper passage check. Service Mode 10. Select a paper source and a processing speed where the settings are made by touching the corresponding keys. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad.10. Tray 1/2 264 mm/sec 216 mm/sec 132 mm/sec 108 mm/sec 420 mm/sec -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -9 to +9 -10 to +10 ⎯ Tray 3/4 LCT ⎯ -5 to +5 ⎯ ⎯ 0 to +3 Manual -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -9 to +9 -10 to +10 ⎯ Duplex -5 to +5 -5 to +5 -9 to +9 -10 to +10 ⎯ Use Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Range Setting/ Procedure 1. LCT. When a paper skew occurs. When a paper misfeed occurs. To decrease the loop amount: Increase the setting value To increase the loop amount: Decrease the setting value • The adjustable range is different depending on paper source and processing speed. • To adjust the length of the loop formed in paper before the registration rollers.0 Feb. and duplex. 3. bypass. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Adjustment / Setting 408 . 2007 Printer Resist Loop • To set the correction value of the paper loop length for each process speed of tray 1 to tray 4.7 bizhub C550 Functions Field Service Ver. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Printer Resist Loop].

1.) 8. increase the setting. Cyan. • This setting can be made independently for plain paper. check for deviation between the black line and the line of each color at positions X and Y. Y Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure 4036fs3004c0 Adjustment for X direction: Check point X Direction of A If the cross deviates in the direction of C. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Color Registration Adjustment]. Service Mode Functions Use • To adjust color shift if there is any when comparing the original with copy of the plain or thick paper. • To correct any color shift. 2. 2007 10. Thick 3. 4. Call the Service Mode to the screen. decrease the setting. Thick 2. On the test pattern produced.4. Produce another test pattern and make sure that there is no deviation.Field Service Ver. Load manual bypass tray with A3/11 x 17 or A4/8 1/2 x 11 plain paper. Direction of B Direction of A 4036fs3007c1 4036fs3008c1 409 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 A. Using the [+] / [-] key. and Thick 4. 5. Direction of B 4036fs3005c1 4036fs3006c1 Adjustment for Y direction: Check point Y If the cross deviates in the direction of A. only the line of the selected color moves. “0” (-6 to +6 dot) If the cross deviates in the direction of A. Select the color to be adjusted. increase the setting. 1. Press the Start key. 7. Yellow . Thick 1/1+. Check Procedure Check point X. increase the setting. If the cross deviates in the direction of D. decrease the setting.8 Color Registration Adjustment 10.0 Feb. change the setting value as necessary. If the cross deviates in the direction of B. 6. 3. decrease the setting. (At this time. Magenta. If the cross deviates in the direction of B.

5. Enter the values described on the side of the PH unit using 10-key pad. • This adjustment is made when the service EEPROM board is replaced or the backup of information on position settings is lost. Enter the skew value described on the new PH unit with the 10-key pad.10. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 10. 3. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Call the Service Mode to the screen. • Use this function when the current skew correction motor’s position becomes unavailable due to the skew adjustment interrupted by the door being opened or the main power switch being turned OFF. LD delay adjust.9 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 1. 2.4. perform [Skew adjustment] and then execute this function. Functions Use • LD delay adjust sets adjustment values by adjusting LD light emission delay amount. Touch the start key and execute the skew adjustment reset. Touch [OK]. 2007 Skew adjustment A. Use Adjustment Range Setting/ Procedure B. 4. Call the Service Mode to the screen. be sure to perform [Initialize + Image Stabilization]. Skew adjustment Functions • This function allows you to set the default position of the skew correction motor. • Adjusts and sets a value that is used as an individual skew correction motor's reference position for skew correction control. NOTE • After the skew adjustment reset is complete. 3. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Skew adjustment] → [Skew adjustment]. Proceed to [Skew adjustment reset]. • After addressing the alert code P-14 and completing an action to the problem. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Skew adjustment] → [Skew adjustment reset]. perform this function. 3. 0 to 480 (step:1) 1. Setting/ Procedure 410 . 2. • Use this function when the information of the motor’s position setting is lost due to the replacement of the service EEPROM board or other reasons.) • This setting is made after the PH unit is replaced.4. Service Mode 10. 4. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [LD adjustment] → [LD delay adjust. 1. 1. • After PH unit replacement. Select the color to be set. Select the color to be set. 5. • This setting is made after the PH unit is replaced.0 Feb. Touch [OK].]. (Values to be entered are described on the side of the PH unit. 2. Skew adjustment reset Functions Use • Returns the skew correction motor to the default position and clear the backup copies of the cumulative skew amount.10 LD adjustment A. 6.

it is decided that which pair of small squares corresponds to which LD. • This adjustment is made to prevent uneven density in highlighted halftone area processed with error diffusion being caused by inappropriate laser intensity. 8. • This setting is made after the PH unit or the service EEPROM board is replaced. Enter the adjustment value corresponding to the pattern you selected (see the above illustration) or a value close to the adjustment value using the ten key pads on the panel. Depending on individual print timing. The test print includes seven rows of patterns produced with different levels of LD2 light intensity towards LD1. Functions Use 10. 3. 411 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . LD lightness balance adjust. Call the Service Mode to the screen. The two small squares diagonal to each other are printed using the same LD. 1. Setting/ Procedure -9 % -6 % -3 % 0% +3 % +6 % +9 % A00JF3C527DA 5. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [LD adjustment] → [LD lightness balance adjust.] and press Start key. Check that LD2 small squares have no image noise of woodgrain.]. From the test pattern.0 Feb. 2007 B. 10. 6.Touch [OK]. Service Mode • This function adjusts the LD lightness balance between the two LDs to correct the difference of LD lightness between the LDs. Select [For adjustment] and press Start key. Select [For effect confirmat. 7. 1. 2. Three squares each made up by four small squares are printed with the different four colors. The pair of small squares where image density changes corresponds to LD2. 9. 4. select the pattern where the least density difference appears between LD1 and LD2 for each color.Field Service Ver.

Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment]. the paper interval can be changed. Productivity : Operates with the paper interval closer to the normal Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Productivity. 7. • To reduce the effect of vibrations on image quality by widening paper interval. Call the Service Mode to the screen. it is possible to specify the void area where image is not printed along the leading edge.4. 6.11 bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver.2 mm is the actual amount to be erased in print based on the control system of the machine. ✽ Make the adjustment again if the results are [NG]. Touch [Min.4. Width].12 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Lead Edge Erase Adjustment • To set the leading edge erase amount of the paper. 2. “4 mm” 5 mm 7 mm Adjustment / Setting NOTE • When “4 mm” is selected. • To resolve image failure (black streaks) in the main scan direction due to the vibrations created when the trailing edge of the preceding paper is passing by the timing roller. 10. Image Quality : Operates with the paper interval longer than normal. 3. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 301 mm. • Use when a false paper size is displayed when the manual bypass is used. 5. 1. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK]. 4.13 Functions Use Thick Paper Mode • For thick paper. Width. Image Quality “Productivity” 412 .]. 4.0 Feb. Touch [Max. 1. • Upon user requests. Press the Start key and check that the results are [OK]. 8. Load the bypass tray with paper having a width of 89 mm. 2007 Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment • To set the maximum width and the minimum width for the manual bypass paper size unit of the manual bypass guide • Use when the manual bypass paper size unit of the manual bypass guide has been changed.10. Setting/ Procedure 10. • The default setting is 4 mm.4. Service Mode 10.

3. Adjustment Specification Dark : 0 ± 100 Highlight : 0 ± 60 413 Adjustment / Setting 10. • The image transfer belt unit has been replaced. • When the firmware is upgraded or PWB is replaced.14 Functions Use 10.6. Bias Choice] Functions Use • To make an automatic adjustment of gradation based on the test pattern produced and the readings taken by the Scanner • Color reproduction performance becomes poor. 1. Value to 0. ✽ The Adj. Touch these keys in this order: [Machine] → [Split Line Prior Detection].Field Service Ver. • [Split Line Prior Detection] will be conducted with the detection level set by the following setting. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch [Firmware Version]. 1. 4. • Stablizer • Gradation Mode : Before Gradation adjust. 3. “NG” will be displayed even though the pre-detection is conducted. Setting] → [Prior Detection] When the above setting is set to “Not Set”. 2. Call the Service Mode to the screen.6 Imaging Process Adjustment bizhub C550 . • Use when the firmware is upgraded. etc. clean the glass and check again. : It gives the highest priority to gradation performance of the image as it adjusts. • High Compression Mode : It gives the highest priority to increasing the number of images to be stored in the memory as it adjusts. recovering from the sleep/low power mode. Conv. Press the start key to start the pre-detection.1 Gradation Adjust • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”. the more ideal the image. 10.4. perform image stabilization.5 Firmware Version Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To check the firmware version. 2007 10. • Resolution Mode : It gives the highest priority to reproduction performance of letters and lines as it adjusts. ✽ The closer the Conv. 10. 2. Setting/ Procedure * When the result says “NG”. • To manually perform the pre-detection of the stain which is normally conducted when the main/sub power switch is turned ON. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Split Line Detect. 1. Values of “Dark” and “Highlight” shown on the gradation adjust screen represent how much corrections are made to produce an ideal image output. Check to make sure that “OK” is displayed for the result. [Service Mode] → [Image Process Adjustment] → [Dev. Value shows the difference from the ideal image density. Service Mode Split Line Prior Detection • To check the stain on the ADF original glass and display the result.0 Feb. Select the appropriate key from 1 to 3 to check the Firmware Version. • The IU has been replaced.

Values of each color (C. 6. 2007 bizhub C550 1. Touch [OK] and repeat steps from 4 through 8 twice (a total of three times). • The each default setting is 0. Dark: 0 ± 100 and Highlight: 0 ± 60: It completes the adjustment procedure. P-7.Use the following procedures to check the Conv. Adjustment / Setting • If a fault is detected. Select the appropriate mode for the gradation adjustment. If neither Dark nor Highlight falls outside the ranges specified above: Perform steps from 4 to 8. and P-28 is on the screen and [Gradation Mode] is selected. NOTE • When the image stabilization performed in step 3 is NG. Place ten blank sheets of A3/11x17 paper on the test pattern and lower the original cover. 10. 10. further adjustment may not be necessary. it strengthen the Transfer Belt cleaning bias in order to make the cleaner more effective. P-9. after turning off the main power switch. 4. Touch [Stabilizer] and the Start key to perform image stabilization. 7. • When one of the alert codes. perform the troubleshooting procedures for image problems. 11. be sure to perform Stabilizer. • If either Dark or Highlight still remains outside the specified ranges perform D Max Density. the Start key stops functioning. turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and then make the gradation adjustment again.0 Feb. NOTE • If the convergence falls within the specified range after the second Gradation Adjustment. • If a total of four sequences of gradation adjust do not bring the values into the specified range. Cleaning Bias Functions Use • To set the level of transfer belt cleaning bias independently for each process speed. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Press the Start key to let the machine produce a test pattern. positive and negative output values can be set. P-6.10. P-5. • When the image pattern is not completely removed. Touch these keys in this order: [Image Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust]. 5. 8.Touch [Gradation Adjust] to display the Adj. Service Mode Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Values and Conv. Place the test pattern produced on the original glass.) 9. the Start key stops functioning.6. • For each processing speed. check the image. -5 to +5 (step:1 *) *: One step corresponds to 5µA. “0” is displayed for all values. Value. Y and K) for Dark and Highlight. NOTE • Before executing Gradation adjust. 1.2 Transfer Belt A. • If the image is faulty. Setting/ Procedure 414 . M. 3. (The machine will then start scanning the test pattern. In that case. Press the Start key. P-8. 2.

10 sec) which are performed nine times.03 in density difference. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [D Max Density]. 2007 B. 1. • An image quality problem is not corrected even after gradation adjust has been run. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad or [+/-]. 9. be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value. 30 sec). Service Mode • To set whether to perform the long regular transfer belt cleaning operation (approx. 6. 10 sec) but not the long cleaning operation (approx. 30 sec) after the normal regular cleaning operations (approx. Select the color to be adjusted. To decrease the maximum amount of toner sticking. 4. Select [COPY] or [Printer]. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Enable. Auto Cleaning Functions Use 10. decrease the setting value.Field Service Ver. -10 to +10 (step: 1 *) *: 1 step corresponds to 0. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure To increase the maximum amount of toner sticking. 8. Enable : Performs the long cleaning operation (approx. Touch [Stabilizer Mode]. 5. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value.0 Feb. • The default setting is 0. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 10. 7. 2.3 Functions D Max Density • To adjust gradation.6. 3. increase the setting value. • The long cleaning operation (approx. 1. color. 30 seconds) can be used to take more effective measures against toner filming on the surface of the transfer belt.Check the copy image for any image problem. Touch [Stabilizer]. Touch [END] to return to the [Process] menu screen. and image density to target reproduction levels by varying the maximum amount of toner sticking to paper through auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of gamma of each color after gradation adjust. “Enable” Disable 10. NOTE • If the setting value has been changed. 30 sec). 415 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . Disable : Performs only the normal regular operations (approx.

10. Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Adjustment Procedure 10.5 % increase. To make the background level less foggy.5 Functions Use Background Voltage Margin • To adjust the highlight portion (fog level) to the target reproduction level by making an auxiliary manual fine-adjustment of γ of each color after gradation adjust. 6. 1. Enter the new setting from the 10-key pad. 1 step in negative (-) direction: 0. Check the copy image for any image problem.0 Feb. NOTE • If the setting value has been changed. 8. Select the color to be adjusted. Touch [Stabilizer]. decrease the setting value. 1. be sure to run an image stabilization sequence to make valid the new value. 3. To decrease T/C. Touch [END] to return to the [Image Adjust] menu screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Process] → [TCR Level Setting]. Service Mode 10. 5.6. increase the setting value. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. 9. decrease the setting value. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Background Voltage Margin].) To increase T/C. 5. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 6.6. -3 to +3 (1 step in positive (+) direction: 0. 1. 4. Check the copy image for any image problem. 2. Press the Start key to validate the adjustment value. • Use when a foggy background occurs due to a printer problem • The default setting is 0. Touch [Stabilization Only]. Select the color to be adjusted. 2007 TCR Level Setting • To adjust the T/C control level when an abnormal image density occurs as a result of a change in the amount of charge of toner and carrier due to an environmental change. 7. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Enter the new setting from the 10-Key Pad and [+/-] key. 2. -5 to +5 (step: 1) To make the background level foggier. 3. Adjustment Range Adjustment / Setting Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure 416 .05 % decrease. Center value 0 corresponds to 7 % T/C ratio. increase the setting value. • Use when T/C changes due to changes in environmental conditions of the user site • The default setting is 0.4 bizhub C550 Functions Field Service Ver. 4.

Secondary transfer adj. Change the setting value using the [+] / [-] keys. 5. NOTE • For envelopes. adjust with the following procedure. When the test pattern image has white spots. bizhub C550 A. 2. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Transfer Output Fine Adjustment]. 2007 10. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Select the paper type with the transfer failure. Gradually increase the adjustment value to the acceptable white spots level while checking the test pattern. on which the transfer failure occurs. 1. 4. Touch [OK] key to set the adjustment value.Field Service Ver. • The default setting is 0. Select [Test Mode] → [Halftone Pattern] to output the red or green test pattern. Select the side of the image (1st side or 2nd side).480 3. Select the color.0 Feb.6. 8. Enter the new setting from the [+] / [-] keys. 6. decrease the setting value. 7. 2. 8. To decrease the ATVC value (in the direction of a less foggy image). 6. • The default setting is 0. -8 to +7 (step: 1) To increase the ATVC value (in the direction of a foggier image). 1. . Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions • Adjust the 2nd image transfer output (ATVC) on the 1st page and the 2nd page for each paper type. -8 to +7 (step: 1) Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage by. Primary transfer adj. 4. Check the print image for any image problem.]. 3. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Transfer Output Fine Adjustment]. • To use when white spots appeared. Setting/ Procedure 417 Adjustment / Setting B. See P. Check the image on the test print or the color chart when adjusting. Touch [END] to validate the adjustment value. • To use when the transfer failure at the trailing edge occurs. Select [Secondary transfer adj.6 Transfer Output Fine Adjustment 10. Select [Primary transfer adj.]. Increasing it: Increase the setting value (white spots will decrease) Decreasing it: Decrease the setting value 1. NOTE • PC Drum memory may occur by taking measure to white spots occurred by increasing the 1st image transfer voltage to adjust it. only first side can be selected. increase the setting value. Service Mode Functions Use Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure • Adjust the output value for the 1st image transfer voltage. 7. 5.

Touch [Initialize+Image Stabilization].6. Call the Service Mode to the screen.6. 2. The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence. 1. 2. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Stabilizer]. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue. • When color shift correction is needed again after the machine maintenance. Setting/ Procedure B. 3. 5. 2. 4. • After executing the skew adjustment reset. Call the Service Mode to the screen. • Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been executed. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Stabilization Only]. 3.8 Functions Use Thick Paper Density Adjustment • To fine-adjust density of printed images of each color for thick paper and OHP transparencies. Stabilization Only Functions Use • The image stabilization sequence is carried out without clearing the historical data of image stabilization control. Touch the Lighter or Darker key for the desired color to correct the image density. 1+] or [Thick 2.0 Feb. • Use if an image problem persists even after gradation adjustment has been executed. • Use if tone reproduction and maximum density are faulty even after Stabilizer Mode has been executed. 1. Press the Start key to start Stabilizer. 4]. Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure 418 . 3. 4. Select [Thick 1. Stabilizer is completed when the Start key turns blue. Initialize+Image Stabilization Functions Use • To carry out an image stabilization sequence after the historical data of image stabilization control has been initialized. The Start key turns red and stays lit up red during the Stabilizer sequence. 1. -5 to +5 (step: 1) Light color: Touch the Darker key.10. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Thick Paper Density Adjustment]. 4. Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting 10. 3. (Only black color adjustable for OHP transparencies) • To change the density of the printed image for each color with thick paper and OHP transparencies • The default setting is 0. Service Mode 10. 1. 2007 Stabilizer A. • When [D Max Density] and [Background Voltage Margin] of Service Mode are changed. Press the Start key to start stabilizer.7 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Dark color: Touch the Lighter key. Call the Service Mode to the screen.

2.10 Functions TCR Toner Supply • To adjust the set T/C level by replenishing an auxiliary supply of toner when a low ID occurs due to a lowered T/C after large numbers of prints have been made of originals having a high image density. -2 mm to +2 mm (step: 0. • When there is a drop in T/C.9 Functions Use 10. Make a print and check the produced image. for which supply of toner is to be replenished. -2 to +2 (step: 1) If the black is light. Use Setting/ Procedure 10.6.11 Functions Use Monochrome Density Adjustment • To fine-adjust the density of the printed image for a black print. • The default setting is 0. Select [First Side] or [Second Side].0 Feb. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 5. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Monochrome Density Adjustment]. 3. if the density is lower than a reference value. Priority on image transfer performance: Decrease the setting value. only a developer agitation sequence is carried out. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [TCR Toner Supply]. Select the color. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 3. Touch [Lighter] or [Darker] as necessary to correct the image density. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Paper separation adjustment]. Service Mode Paper separation adjustment • For duplex printing with the use of thin paper. Pressing the Start key will let the machine detect the current toner density and. the paper separation position is adjusted for the first and second sides of paper. 1. 2007 10. 2. touch the Lighter key. 4. 1. Use the [+] or [-] key to change the setting value. 5. Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure 419 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. 3.1 mm) Priority on paper separation performance: Increase the setting value.6. a toner replenishing sequence and then a developer agitation sequence are run.6. 1. 2. 6. 4. • To vary the density of the printed image of a black print • The default setting is 0. If the toner density is found to be higher than the reference value. Touch [OK] and determine the adjustment value. These sequences are repeated up to a maximum of four times until the toner density reaches the reference value. • To ensure proper balance between paper separating and image transferring performances by varying the paper separation position applied for duplex printing of thin paper (64 g/ m2) in hot and humid conditions. Adjustment Range Adjustment Instructions Setting/ Procedure 10. touch the Darker key. If the black is dark.

• Use when patches of white occur in the image in an ambience of low atmospheric pressure. 2007 Dev. 1.0 Feb.10.12 bizhub C550 Functions Field Service Ver.6. thereby preventing voltage leak from occurring. the screen doesn't display [Service Mode] → [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [Gradation Adjust] and the Gradation Adjust is not allowed. such as in high altitudes. it decreases the developing bias voltage. ON “OFF” Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment / Setting 420 . • The default setting is OFF. Bias Choice • To change the setting of the developing bias voltage • When this function is turned ON. Service Mode 10. • If ON is set.

Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care]. 2. Select Set. 1 2 Clearing the RAM 1. Touch [RAM Clear].Field Service Ver. Data which show the status of use of the machine such as total count. * For connecting the modular cable. and touch [Detail Setting].7. Service Mode 10. b. use the recommended modem. • Data which CS Remote Care handles can be divided into the following groups. See P. see the manual for the modem. clear the RAM for CS Remote Care before resetting. 3.2 Setting up the CS Remote Care bizhub C550 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • For resetting up the machine which CS Remote Care has already been set up. (For recommended modem. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] 10. when the fax line is used. See P.431 421 . It also enables the computer at the center to contact the machine for the necessary data. 1.) Procedure Step Using the telephone line modem Using the Fax line modem *1 Using E-mail 0 Register the device ID to the application at CS Remote Care center. Data on adjustment d. Data on setting NOTE • It cannot be set when the following setting is set to “ON”.7 CS Remote Care 10. 2007 10. PM count. The initial connection is not available unless the device ID is registered. a. • CS Remote Care enables the machine to call the computer at the center when trouble occurs. c. Data which show the abnormal situation on the machine such as where and how often errors occur. Connecting the modem Turn the power for the modem OFF. and touch [OK]. contact responsible person of KMBT.0 Feb.1 Outlines • CS Remote Care enables the machine and the computer at CS Remote Care center to exchange data through telephone/fax line in order to control the machine. Connect the machine and the modem with a modem cable. Connect the modem and the wall jack with a modular cable.431 • When using the telephone line for connection. Be sure to remove the Be sure to remove the telephone line modem telephone line modem when e-mail is used.7.

See P. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device Telephone Number]. and touch [Detail Setting]. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Device ID]. Touch [Date & Time Setting]. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. and touch [Detail Setting]. See P. 2.10. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care].431 Setting the Respond Timeout 1.431 Setting the telephone number of the Center 1. and input the Center ID (five digits). and input Device ID (nine digits). 3. and touch [Detail Setting]. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. 2. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [ID Code]. 2. See P.430 Setting the date and time for CS Remote Care 1. there is no need to change the default setting. NOTE • Under normal conditions. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center Telephone Number]. [-]. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. [W]. 3. 2. → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection]. Input the Device telephone number using the 10-key pad and [P]. Input the seven digits ID of the service person. Touch [Machine Setting] → [Center ID].431 Setting the Center ID 1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care].431 5 6 7 Adjustment / Setting 8 9 Inputting the device telephone number Proceed to step 10. See P. and touch [Detail Setting]. Service Mode Procedure Field Service Ver. and touch [Detail Setting]. 1. and touch [ID Code]. See P. Input the telephone number of the center using the 10-keys pad and [P]. and touch [Set]. [T]. 2007 bizhub C550 Step Using the telephone line modem Selecting the CS Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remove Care] → [System Selection]. [W].431 422 . Using the Fax line modem *1 Using E-mail 3 Selecting the CS Selecting the CS Remote Care function Remote Care function Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → Select [Service Mode] [System Setting]. See P. 1. Touch [Respond Timeout] and enter the response timeout using the 10-key pad. and touch [ID Code] again. and touch [E-Mail]. time and the time zone using the 10-key pad. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. 2. and touch [Detail Setting]. 2. 4 Inputting the ID Code 1. See P. and touch [Fax]. [T]. and touch [Modem]. 3. 2.0 Feb.431 Setting the Device ID 1. Input the date. [-].

NOTE • When receiving the initial connection Email message from the center while CS Remote Care-related screen is being displayed.432 5.) • For details on AT command. and try again.432 Setting the DIPSW for CS Remote Care NOTE • This setting is not normally necessary. 423 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 Step Using the telephone line modem Using the Fax line modem *1 . Mail Check. Connection Time Out and APOP Authentication. and APOP Authentication. and set POP3 server address. Executing the initial transmission 1. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → and touch [Detail Setting]. See P. 2. 10 Inputting the AT com. • For sending the initial connection E-mail. the current setting information will be deleted. 2. • Messages can be exchanged only between the center with initial connection and the copier.Field Service Ver. Connection Time Out. NOTE • Change this command only when it is necessary. POP3 login name. Touch [Send]. CS Remote Care setting screen will be displayed. and the E-mail address of the center will be stored in the copier. POP3 password and POP3 port number. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. and CS Remote Care setting will be displayed. Service Mode Using E-mail Setting the E-mail address 1. the device ID. see the manual for the modem.432 3.Proceed to step 11. (They do not need to be changed in normal condition. If it fails to exchange messages. 3. Touch [AT Command]. See P. the E-mail address of the center will be displayed by selecting [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting]. and set the E-Mail address. and touch [Detail Setting]. Touch [TX/RX Test]. Input AT Command. Touch [initial transmission] key on the right bottom of the screen to start initial transmission. Touch [Server for RX]. See P. and press Start key to carry out a transmission/reception test.432 Proceed to step 12. 2007 Procedure 10. • The initial connection from the center will be carried out.0 Feb. mand for initializing the modem 1. 1. [Basic Setting] → [E-Mail address]. and set the SMTP server address. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care]. 3. Take this step only when necessary in a specific connecting condition. NOTE • The initial transmission key at the right bottom of the screen will be displayed only when the center ID. see the error message to take necessary measure. see the manual for CS Remote Care center. and touch [Server Set]. • When the initial registration is complete. 2. See P. Press [Receive]. When the machine is properly connected with the center. See P.431 11 12 Receiving the initial connection E-mail message Sending the initial connection E-mail message from the center to the address of the copier.432 4. See P. SMTP port number. Telephone number of the center and the device telephone number have been input.

]. Touch [Bit Assignment]. be sure to restore the previous state. (For setting by hexadecimal numbers. 1. List of software SW for CS Remote Care NOTE • Do not change any bit not described on this table. NOTE • About functions of each switch.3 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Service Mode 10. In case you changed bit data by accident. and input using the 10-key pad or A to F keys. and input the switch number (two digits) using the 10-key pad. see to “B.7. 3. touch [HEX Assignment] key. List of software SW for CS Remote Care. SW No.” B. and touch [Software Switch Setting]. Touch [Fix]. SW 01 Bit 0 1 Dial mode Reservation Reservation Reservation Baud rate Functions 0 Pulse — — — *1 *1 *1 *1 Emergency transmission Auto call on date specification Reservation Reservation Reservation Auto call on the IC Life Auto call on CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Reservation Reservation Auto call on the toner empty Reservation Auto call on the waste toner bottle full Do not call Do not call — — — Do not call Do not call — — Do not call — Do not call — — 1 Tone — — — *1 *1 *1 *1 Call Call — — — Call Call — — Call — Call — — Default 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 Adjustment / Setting 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 02 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 03 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 04 0 to 7 Reservation 424 . Input procedure 1. and input 0 or 1 using the 10-key pad. 2007 Software SW setting for CS Remote Care NOTE • SW bits data are written into the NVRAM every time a change is made. Touch [Switch No. and select switch bit number using the arrow keys.10. 2.0 Feb. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting]. A.) 4.

2007 SW No. SW 05 Bit 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 06 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 07 0 Reservation Redial for response time out Modem redial times Functions Modem redial interval 0 *2 *2 *2 *2 — *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 — Do not redial — *4 *4 *4 *4 — *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 Reservation — — *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 10. Service Mode 1 *2 *2 *2 *2 — *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 *3 — Redial — *4 *4 *4 *4 — *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 *5 — — *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 *6 Default 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 to 7 Reserved SW 08 0 1 2 3 4 to 7 Reservation SW 09 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 10 SW 11 Retransmission times on e-mail delivery error Retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 to 7 Reservation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Timer 1 RING reception → CONNECT reception 425 Adjustment / Setting 1 bizhub C550 1 . 1.Field Service Ver.0 Feb.

1.10. Service Mode SW No. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 13 SW 14 0 to 7 Reservation 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SW 15 0 1 2 3 Timer 5 Wait time for other side’s response Timer 4 Line connection → Start request telegram delivery Functions Timer 2 Dial request completed → CONNECT reception Field Service Ver. Do not call Call 1 1 to 7 Reservation SW 19 to SW 40 0 to 7 Reservation — — — — 0 0 426 .0 Feb. 2007 0 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 — *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 — — 1 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 *7 — *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *8 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 *9 — — Default 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 bizhub C550 SW 12 Adjustment / Setting 4 5 6 7 SW 16 SW 17 SW 18 0 0 to 7 Reservation 0 to 7 Reservation Attention display To set weather to give the alarm display when using the modem but the power for the modem is OFF.

Field Service Ver.0 Feb. 1. 2007 *1: Baud rate Mode 9600 bps 19200 bps “38400 bps” 01-7 0 0 1 01-6 1 1 0 01-5 1 1 0 10. Service Mode 01-4 0 1 0 *2: Modem redial interval Mode 1 minute 2 minutes “3 minutes” 4 minutes 5 minutes 6 minutes 7 minutes 8 minutes 9 minutes 10 minutes 05-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 05-2 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 05-1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 05-0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 *3: Modem redial times Mode 0 to 9 times “10 times” 11 to 99 times 0 0 06-6 06-5 06-4 06-3 06-2 06-1 06-0 0 1 0 1 0 000 1011 to 110 0011 *4: Retransmission interval on e-mail delivery error Mode 0 minute 10 minutes 20 minutes 30 minutes 40 minutes 50 minutes “60 minutes” 70 minutes 80 minutes 90 minutes 100 minutes 110 minutes 120 minutes 08-3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 08-2 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 08-1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 08-0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 427 Adjustment / Setting 000 0000 to 000 1001 bizhub C550 .

1.10. 2007 09-3 09-2 09-1 09-0 000 0000 to 000 1001 0 1 0 1 0 000 1011 to 110 0011 *6: Timer 1 (RING reception → CONNECT reception) Mode 0 to 31 sec “32 sec” 33 to 255 sec 0 0 1 11-7 11-6 11-5 11-4 11-3 11-2 11-1 11-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 *7: Timer 2 (Dial request completed → CONNECT reception) Mode 0 to 63 sec “64 sec” 65 to 255 sec 0 1 0 12-7 12-6 12-5 12-4 12-3 12-2 12-1 12-0 0000 0000 to 0011 1111 0 0 0 0 0 0100 0001 to 1111 1111 *8: Timer 4 (Line connection → Start request telegram delivery) Mode 0 to 31 (x 100 msec) 14-7 14-6 14-5 14-4 14-3 14-2 14-1 14-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1111 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 Adjustment / Setting “32 (x 100 msec)” 33 to 255 (x 100 msec) 0010 0001 to 1111 1111 *9: Timer 5 (Wait time for other side’s response) Mode 0 to 29 sec “30 sec” 31 to 255 sec 0 0 0 15-7 15-6 15-5 15-4 15-3 15-2 15-1 15-0 0000 0000 to 0001 1101 1 1 1 1 0 0001 1111 to 1111 1111 428 .0 Feb. Service Mode *5: Retransmission times on e-mail delivery error bizhub C550 Mode 0 to 9 times “10 times” 11 to 99 times 0 0 09-6 09-5 09-4 Field Service Ver.

Touch [CS Remote Care]. When starting the maintenance Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care]. They are controlled by the distributor.) will transmit the information to the Center side and tells that the maintenance has started. 1. Touch [ID Code]. . Call the Service Mode to the screen. Touch [Maintenance Complete]. 3. inputting the ID code of CE (seven digits: numbers which CE can identify. Adjustment / Setting 429 bizhub C550 • Follow the steps below to make sure that CS Remote Care has been properly set up. When the maintenance is finished.7. B. * The Start key blinks while maintenance is being carried out.4 Setup confirmation 10.7. Check to make sure that only selected item is displayed. A. 10.5 Calling the maintenance • When CE starts maintenance.Field Service Ver. 2. Service Mode 1. and input ID Code. Select Service Mode and touch [CS Remote Care]. 2. 3. 2. 1.0 Feb. touching [Maintenance Complete] key will transmit the information to the center and tells that it is finished. Touch [ID Coke]. When finishing the maintenance 1. 2007 10.

2. 4. • Use to newly build or change the system. refer to the manual for CS Remote Care center. Touch [Admin. Select [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care].7. Touch [Communication Log Print].7. the administrator can call the CS Remote Care center. 430 . • Use when registering and changing service ID. • Fax is available only when the optional fax kit is being installed. Press the Start key to output transmission log. Modem. and touch [System Connection].8 A.7. the Admin.10. • Touch [ID code] to register the ID. 3. When the setup is not complete or another transmission is being carried out.0 Feb. System Selection Functions • To select the system type for remote diagnosis. 1. or Fax. 1. and touch [Detail setting].7 Checking the transmission log • The transmission log list will be output to be checked.6 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. E-Mail Modem Fax Adjustment / Setting Use Setting/ Procedure B. Press the Start key. NOTE • For transmitting data of the machine by calling the center on the specified date and time. • The [Detail Setting] will appear when the ID has been registered. Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S paper. Service Mode 10. and the transmission is not available. ID Code Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the service ID. 2. transmission key will not be displayed. Select [Administrator Settings]. 1. 3. 2007 Calling the center from the administrator • When the CS Remote Care setup is complete. (0000001 to 9999999) <Registration> • Touch ID code and enter the service ID. • Enter a 7-digit code from the 10-key pad. • Select E-Mail. transmission]. Detail on settings 10. 10.

and the phone No. Touch [CS Remote Care]. 2. 1. 10. 3. * When entering the phone number. (3) RAM Clear Functions • To clear the following data at the center ID Code. 10-keys and keys on the screen have following meanings. Touch [Detail Setting] to access Date & Time Setting. • The default setting is “Unset. 2007 C. Service Mode Primary Setting • Set the center ID. 4. Touch [CS Remote Care]. 3. Call the Service Mode to the screen. • To be used for reset the every data of the center to default. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 5. 1. [-] Pose : Waits to start transmitting after dialing [W] Wait : Detects the dial tone of the other end [T] Tone dial : Carry out tone dialing [P] Pulse dial : Carry out pulse dialing [*]. time-of-day. Touch [SET] to start the clock. Detail Setting (1) Basic Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Execute the primary setting.” Set “Unset” Use Setting/ Procedure 431 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . • To be used for setting CS Remote Care. RAM clear processing will be implemented at the time the transmission is completed regardless of whether it is done properly or not.) (2) Date & Time Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the data and time-of-day • Use to set or change the date and time-of-day. Enter the date (month. • When e-mail is selected for system and all setup procedures are completed. and the time zone from the 10-key pad. Date/Time Input (Time Zone). • Use to register the machine to the CS Remote Care center. Touching the [Detail Setting] will display the primary setting. e-mail address of the center is displayed.Field Service Ver. Primary Setting. Device ID. (Only when the modem or fax is selected on the system Input. Software SW Setting and AT Command. • Use to change the set contents.0 Feb. NOTE • If RAM clear is selected during transmission. day and year). 2. 1.[#] : To be used as necessary Initial Transmission • Touching the Initial Transmission key will sent the information to the CS Remote Care center to register the machine.

[0 to 255] <Input FQDN> • Enter the domain name.424 (6) Response Time Out Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • It sets the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error occurred. <Input IP Address> • IP address version 4 format [0 to 255].[0 to 255].0 Feb. • To set the address of the POP3 Server. See P. 1. Touch [CS Remote Care]. (5) Software Switch Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To change the CS Remote Care settings.[0 to 255]. • The default setting is 60 minute. Press Start key to print out the communication log. • This setting is available only when [Modem] is selected for the system setting. 2. 5. • To use when changing the intervals for resending e-mails when transmission error occurred. (1) Server for RX <POP3 server> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the POP3 server address used for the CS Remote Care. • To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization. 4. • Use to output and use the communication log. 2007 Call the Service Mode on the screen. 1. AT Command Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the command to be issued at the time of modem initialization. 432 . • POP3 server address can be set with IP address or the domain name. 3. Load tray 1 or bypass tray with A4S or 81/2 x 11 paper. • Enter the command and touch [SET] to register. Server Setting • Server Setting can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting. Field Service Ver.10. Service Mode (4) Communication Log Print bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To print out the communication log. E. • To change the settings for CS Remote Care as necessary. • Refer to “Software SW setting for CS Remote Care” for the setting. Touch [Detail Setting] to access communication log print. • It can be set only when [E-Mail] is selected by System Setting. “60 minute” (10 to 1440) Adjustment / Setting D.

• Up to 129 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used. “60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec) 433 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 1. <POP3 password> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the logon password for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care. <Mail Check> Functions Use • To set whether or not to use mail check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care. • The default setting is 110. • The default setting is No. • The default setting is No. • Up to 15 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used. • To change the timeout period for connection during reception. • To set the logon name for the POP3 server. • Up to 64 characters (alphanumeric characters and symbols) can be used.0 Feb. <POP3 port number> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the POP3 port number used for the CS Remote Care.Field Service Ver. • To set the e-mail address. • The default setting is No. • The default setting is 60 Sec. No) Setting/ Procedure <Connection timeout> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for connection during reception. “110” (1 to 65535) (2) Receive <E-mail Address> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the e-mail address used for the CS Remote Care. • The default setting is No.. • To set the port number for the POP3 server. Service Mode • To set the logon name for the POP3 server used for the CS Remote Care. • To set whether or not to use mail check and the time interval for the POP server used for the CS Remote Care. • To set the logon password for the POP3 server. • To change the time interval for mail check. 2007 <POP3 login name> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. “No” (1 to120 min.

Yes “No” (3) Send <SMTP server> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the SMTP sever address for transmission used for the CS Remote Care. • To authenticate the APOP during reception. 2007 • To set whether or not to authenticate the APOP during reception. “60 Sec” (30 to 300 Sec) 434 .0 Feb. • The default setting is 60 Sec. Service Mode <APOP Authentication> bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. <Input IP Address> • IP address version 4 format [0 to 255]. • To change the timeout period for connection during transmission.10.[0 to 255].[0 to 255] <Input FQDN> • Enter the domain name. • The default setting is 25. • The default setting is No. <SMTP port number> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the SMTP port number for transmission used for the CS Remote Care.[0 to 255]. • To set the Port Number of the SMTP Server. • To set the SMTP server address • SMTP server address can be set by the IP address or the domain name. 1. “25” (1 to 65535) Adjustment / Setting <SMTP Connection Time-out> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the timeout period for transmission.

(4) TX/RX Test Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care. Yes “No” 435 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . “OFF” POP Before SMTP SMTP Authentication * Setting to “POP Before SMTP” will set the time for POP Before SMTP. • The default setting is No. • Press the Start key to let the machine start the transmission and reception test. 2007 <Authentication Setting> Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Domain name : Enter the domain name for SMTP authentication. Password : Enter the password for SMTP authentication. 1. Service Mode • To set whether or not to authenticate during transmission via SMTP server. User ID : Enter the user ID for SMTP authentication. SMTP authentication • The default setting is OFF. • The default setting is 60 Sec.Field Service Ver. • The test procedure and result will be displayed on the screen. (5) Data Initialization Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To initialize the contents for the sever setting. touch the “Setting Check” key for authentication. Available authentication mode: POP Before SMTP.0 Feb. “60 Sec” (0 to 60 Sec) * When setting to SMTP authentication. • Use to determine the correct transmission and reception using CS Remote Care. • Use to initialize the contents for the server setting. • To use when authenticating during transmission.

turn the modem power OFF and ON. • Check center ID setting of the of start request telegram.) • If the same error is detected several times. 1. 436 .) • Set the initial registrations again for all including the host side.) If the same error is detected several times. • Check if the power of the modem is ON. Break Interrupt (BI) indicator (When the modem detects Break Interrupt (BI) indicator. 0018 0019 • Check center ID setting of the Center ID error (Center ID of the host is not identical with the one main body side. RS232C driver over run (When the modem detects over run. • No solution. • Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main body. When connecting by modem Error code 0001 0002 Error The line is busy (Busy detection) Failure of the Modem default setting at transmitting (When the transmission completes with modem initial setting failed) Solution • Transmit again manually.7. • Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main body. • Transmit again manually • Check if the power of the modem is ON. turn the modem power OFF and ON. 0003 Timeout of CONNECT at transmitting (No response to ATD) 0005 Timeout of CONNECT at receiving (No response to ATA) 0006 0008 Shut down of the data modem line (Host) (Carrier OFF is detected) • Transmit again manually. • If the same error is detected several times. • Check if the power of the modem is ON.) • Check the setting condition of the main body side. Service Mode 10. turn the modem power OFF and ON. Timeout of start request telegram delivery (Start request telegram is not delivered after line connection) Timeout of finish request telegram delivery • Transmit again manually. tion (9600 bps to 38400 bps).) main body side. (Finish request telegram is not delivered (Start of shut down).) Machine ID has already been registered (Request telegram 2 (SET-UP) comes from the main body that has already registered machine ID. • If the same error is detected several times.0 Feb.10. reject receiving. 2007 List of the CS Remote Care error code A. turn the modem power OFF and ON. 0009 Adjustment / Setting 000A 000B 000C 000D 0011 Baud rate ERROR • Check the baud rate of the soft(When selected baud rate is out of the specificaware DipSW. because the line is shut down at the host side.9 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. • Check the connecting condition between the modem and the main body.) Receiving rejection • Check the setting condition of (Receiving is made when the main body is set to the host side.

contact KMBT and inform the error code. 2007 Error code 001A Error 10.) side. (Setting cannot be changed because the setting change is made during the machine is printing or starts printing. 1. emergency call) comes from the main body that • Check the setting of the host has not registered machine ID yet.0 Feb.) Transmission / receiving collision (Receiving is detecting during transmitting processing) • Try communication again. of start request telegram. NOTE • When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed.) • Check the setting of the host side.Field Service Ver. 001E 0020 0027 • Try communication again. . 437 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 Device ID inconsistency • Check device ID setting of the (Device ID of the host is not identical with the one main body side. Service Mode Solution 001B Device ID unregistered • Check device ID setting of the (Request telegram 2 (Constant data transmitting.) Timeout of telegram delivery (At waiting mode of telegram delivery the machine fails to receive the telegram in a given time. Impossible to change (during printing) • Try again when the machine is not printing. main body side.

0 Feb. 1092 Adjustment / Setting 2039 203E Network is down. • Check the POP3 server on User side. ified due to the copy job currently performing. • Check the connection between the copier on the user’s side and the network connector. • Check the SMTP server and POP3 server on user side. 3000 3001 3002 3003 3004 3005 3006 3007 POP3_AUTHORIZATION_ERR POP3_TRANSACTION_ERR POP3_CONNECT_ERR POP3_TIMEOUT_ERR POP3_FORMAT_ERR POP3_MEMORY_ERR POP3_JOBID_ERR POP3_NO_DATA_ERR 438 . Service Mode B. Frame No. on host side. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. 1.10. has passed. • Received an e-mail which tells that machine ID • Check the machine ID setting mismatches. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. • Check the status of the machine registration on host side. 1062 1081 1084 Date expired • Ask the host to send another • Expiration date for data modification command instruction mail for modifying. • Check the SMTP server on User side. • LAN cable on the copier side is detached. When connecting by e-mails bizhub C550 Error code 0001 0### 0003 0005 Error Connection timeout during transmission Transmission error ***: SMTP responding code (hexadecimal) Connection timeout when receiving Receiving error Field Service Ver. Received an error mail when center setup is not complete Socket is not connected. • There are missing frame No. • Check the status of the machine registration on host side. error • The last frame has not been received. 1030 Machine ID mismatching • Check the machine ID setting. • LAN cable on the copier side is detached. Modifying not available due to the copy job currently performing • Ask the host to send another • When informing the host that it cannot be modinstruction mail for modifying. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. • Check the POP3 server on User side. • Check the network environment on the user’s side. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. 2007 Solution • Check the SMTP server on User side. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side.

1. NVRAM writing error. • Check the status of the Machine registration on host side. . Service Mode Solution • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side.Field Service Ver. C. 439 Adjustment / Setting Serial number received from the host not correct. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. 4104 4105 4106 NOTE • When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed. 2007 Error code 3008 3009 Error POP3_DELETE_FAIL_ERR POP3_MAILBOX_FULL 10. see the FK-502 Service Manual. • Contact KMBT and inform the error code. status after power was turned ON. bizhub C550 • Check the POP3 server environment on user’s side. • Check the status of the Machine registration on host side. 4103 Not ready • Tried to transmit or receive an e-mail when the • Wait for a while and try transmachine was not yet in the e-mail receiving mitting again. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. contact KMBT and inform the error code. • Contact KMBT and inform the error code. Host command error. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. • Wait for a while and try transmitting again. SMTP channel not ready POP3 channel not ready Not Ready other than the ones listed above. R81 R82 Disconnection of writing instruction from host during machine is running.0 Feb. R83 R84 NOTE • When a code other than the ones listed above is displayed. When connecting by Fax modem Error code T50 R80 Error Host terminal ID not correct Solution • Check the telephone number set for host. Disconnection of FAX-CSRC instruction when FASX-CSRC is not allowed.

cate with the center.• Communicate with the center cate with the center.436 ⎯ ⎯ Complete successfully Modem trouble Although the machine tries to communi.10 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. At this time. Busy line Adjustment / Setting No response 440 . Although the machine tries to communi. Shift the screen in the order of [Service Mode] → [CS Remote Care] → [Detail Setting]. Display of communication result Communicating Communication trouble with the center Cause ⎯ Solution ⎯ Although the machine tries to communi.• Check if the power of modem cate with the center. in the modem. there is any trouble and confirm the corresponding and the communication completes point. 1. there is any trouble in ON. unsuccessfully. Service Mode 10. 2007 Troubleshooting for CS Remote Care If communication is not done properly.• Communicate with the center again. 1. the line to the center is busy.0 Feb. Although the machine tries to communi. response from the center. in the cases of initial transmitting / administrator transmitting / maintenance start transmitting / maintenance finish transmitting. See P. the following message will be displayed based on its success or failure. check the condition by following the procedures shown below. * For the communication result. • Check if there is any problem in connection between the modem and the main body.7.10. there is no again.• See the list of error message cate with the center. • Check the communication environment of the center side. the communication result will be displayed at the top of the screen.

) according to the applicable marketing area. 2007 10. • Upon setup. Touch the [Fax Target]. <Marketing Area> • Select the applicable marketing area and touch [END] to set the marketing area. • Upon setup. Simplified Chinese English.8 System 1 10. 10. Traditional Chinese <Fax Target> 1. Japanese English. Spanish.0 Feb. Spanish. Japanese English.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Marketing Area • To make the various settings (language. Service Mode 10.” 441 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2.Field Service Ver. Japanese English. French. Italian. • Enter the tel/fax number (19 digits) from the 10-key pad. and touch [END]. JAPAN US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 ✽ These are the languages that can be selected on the Utility screen according to different marketing area settings: Japan US Europe Others1 Others2 Others3 Others4 English. Select the applicable marketing area using [+] and [-] keys. Spanish. fixed zoom ratios.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Tel/Fax Number • To enter the tel/fax number of the service contact that will appear on the control panel when a malfunction occurs in the machine. paper size. French. etc.8. French. French. • Use Interrupt key to enter “-.8. Spanish. Traditional Chinese. Japanese English. Hungle English. 1. German.

1.3 bizhub C550 Functions Field Service Ver.8. Duplex. CSRC communication is not available if a wrong serial number is entered. Printer. 442 . ZU (Not used) 10. was not entered. Sorter/FN. Vendor. • To change the size for foolscap paper.” Permit “Prohibit” Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 10. ADF. Scanner. 220 x 330 mm 81/2 x 13 81/4 x 13 81/8 x 131/4 8 x 13 10. Use Setting/ Procedure • Type the serial numbers.0 Feb. LCT. will be displayed.8. • Upon setup. NOTE • The sleep mode will begin in 48 hours even if it sets it to “OFF. • Select the size from among the following five.10. the message to require entering the serial No. • Use to change the setting for the document size detection table. • Do not change the serial number registered in the machine. enter the original correct serial number.8.6 Functions Use Original Size Detection • To change the document size detection table.4 Functions Use No Sleep • To display the option of “OFF” for the sleep mode setting screen available from administrator settings. Be careful to enter the correct serial number since characters other than alphanumeric can be also entered.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Foolscap Size Setting • To set the size for foolscap paper. If memory data is lost and entering the serial number is required.8. Copy Glass : To change the size detection table for the document glass. Setting/ Procedure <Copy Glass> • The default setting is “Table1. • Upon setup.” “Table1” Table2 NOTE • Table 2 can be set only when original size detection 2 sensor is being mounted. NOTE • When main power switch was turned ON while the serial No. • The numbers will be printed on the list output.” • The default setting is “Prohibit. • To display the option of “OFF” for the sleep mode setting. • To use the serial number as Machine ID during CS Remote Care communication. Service Mode 10. Fax2. 2007 Serial Number • To register the serial numbers of the machine and options. Fax1. RU.

4.499 NOTE • When removing or installing the hard disk after registering the data below. Select the key as follows. 443 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . and other improper displays. 1. 2007 10. Select the key as follows. 1. [Trouble]. 4.0 Feb. • When image problems occur. 10.8. Data Clear Functions Use • To initialize the setting data. Enter the date (Year 4 digit → Month 2 digit → date 2 digit) from the 10-key pad. 3. Press the Start key. see “Contents to be cleared by reset function. • To clears the setting data. When [OK] is displayed. Referring data: One-touch registration.” See P. 3.8 Initialization A. [System 1] → [Charging CH cleaning] → [Cleaning]. When [OK] is displayed. turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. 2. [System 1] → [Initialization] → [Data clear].9 Charging CH cleaning A. 2.499 1. Select the key as follows. • Upon setup. Service Mode Install Date • To register the date the main body was installed. see “Contents to be cleared by reset function. 4.7 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. 3.8. [System 1] → [Install Date]. you can execute the cleaning operation manually. Press the Start key. Select the key as follows. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Call the Service Mode on the screen. 2. System Error Clear Functions Use • To reset the trouble data.” See P. Setting/ Procedure 1. Touch [Entry] to set the date of installation. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Setting/ Procedure 10. [System 1] → [Initialization] → [System Error Clear]. • Use to clear the [Jam].8. For details on items to be cleared. Call the Service Mode to the screen. turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. be sure to clear the data. 1. Cleaning Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Cleaning operation can be executed to the comb electrode of the imaging unit /K. [Error] displays. Press the Start key. 3. you can confirm that the cleaning operation has been completed. B.Field Service Ver. For details on items to be cleared. user authentication/account track. 4. 2. When the Start key changes its lighting from red to blue.

See P. OFF : The machine does not perform the self cleaning operation. 444 . Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is ON. ON : The self cleaning operation occurs every 2700 sheets of print. See the “Trouble shooting” section for the corresponding trouble codes. 2007 • This setting allows you to select the self cleaning of the comb electrode section in the imaging unit /K. NOTE • For color imaging units. • When a problem occurs.10 Functions Use Trouble Isolation • Individual units and options have a set or unset setting for the trouble isolation function. • The machine isolates only units that have a “set” setting.8. Self-Cleaning bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. NOTE Adjustment / Setting • The malfunction detection mechanism is not applied to units and options that are being isolated.0 Feb. • This function can be selected for the following units and options.539 Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Unset for individual units and options. synchronizing the transfer belt cleaning operation. “ON” OFF 10. 1. if the specified malfunctions occur on the above listed units or options. the comb electrode section needs to be cleaned by hand every time when a toner cartridge of the corresponding color is replaced. this function enables the continuous use of the units that are not affected by separately controlling them and isolating other units that have a problem.10. an alert screen appears and asks users whether to isolate the units or options where malfunction occurs. Service Mode B. • This setting can be used to temporarily stop the self cleaning operation in order to address problems. Set “Unset” • After changing the setting. touch [Decision] and turn the main power switch OFF and ON to make the new setting effective. Half-Fold/Tri-Fold Center Stapling Cover Sheet Feeder Z fold Punch Staple Tray 1 Tray 2 Tray 3 Tray 4 LCT manual Scanner • Though trouble isolation is not selected.

• To switch RS-232C port in order to connect with the JScribe.9. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Thick 3. Thick 3 : The normal thick3 2nd image transfer table is used when printing on thick 3 postcards. • For the use of thick 3 postcards.200 bps 8 bit None 1 bit Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Off. Post.9 System 2 10. “Off” JScribe1 JScribe2 10. • Communication requirements for each setting are shown below. you can select the transfer table suitable for postcards.200 bps 7 bit Odd 1 bit JScribe2 19. JScribe1 Baud rate Data bit Parity bit Stop bit 19.11 Functions Use 10. : The postcard 2nd image transfer table is used when printing on thick3 postcards.8.12 Functions Use Post card transfer table • This setting allows you to select the transfer table to be used for thick3 postcards. Service Mode Communication System Setting • To select communication system used for RS-232C port. 2007 10. “Thick 3” 10.8.enabled-device. 1. Post.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Not used. HDD 445 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .0 Feb. • This setting is used to improve transfer performance to postcards.Field Service Ver.

9. fusing unit. Controller 2 : undefined. • After changing setting.9. make sure to turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after.3 Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Option Board Status • To set when the optional fax mount kit. turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. imaging unit (C. “Controller 0” : The standard controller is used. Others : undefined.2 bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Controller 3 : undefined. scan accelerator is mounted. this setting cannot be changed. 1. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] When [Enhanced Security Mode] is set to “ON”.” “Yes” No Use Setting/ Procedure 446 . 10. M. K) • Use to select not to give the display of PM parts lifetime. 10.” Fax (circuit 1) Fax (circuit 2) JPEG : Set : Set : Set “Unset” “Unset” “Unset” NOTE • When the setting has been changed. • When setting up the controller. scan accelerator is mounted. • Setting modes are Fax (circuit 1). prompting the user to replace the part. • The default setting is “Yes.0 Feb. Controller 1 : undefined. Mode 3: undefined. Mode 1: undefined.9. Peripheral Mode • Select the operating mode of the Scanner. • [Peripheral Mode] appears when [Others] is selected. • Applicable units: Transfer belt unit. Image Controller Setting • Select the controller to be used.10. 2007 Image Controller Setting • To set the type of the controller. • Use when setting up the optional fax mount kit. NOTE • When the following setting is “ON”. this setting should be set to “Controller 0”. Fax (circuit 2) and JPEG.4 Functions Consumable Life Reminder • To select whether or not to give the display of PM parts lifetime PM parts lifetime display: An entire screen warning is given when the service life of a specific unit has been reached. Service Mode 10. Mode 2: undefined. Y. • The default settings are “Unset.

0 Feb. “ON” OFF NOTE • When the setting is changed.9. 10. Others1/2/3 “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service “User” Service Use Setting/ Procedure Toner Cartridge Imaging Unit Waste Toner Box Punch Dust Box 10.Field Service Ver. the function becomes available by turning the sub power switch OFF and ON again. S 447 Adjustment / Setting • To be used when CCD unit has been changed. 1.6 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Software Switch Setting • Not used. the default value needs to be set since the calibration value set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD). • When the unit life arrives.9. When “Service” is selected : Life warning. Others 4 : “User” Service : User “Service” : User “Service” : User “Service” Europe. bizhub C550 .8 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure LCC Size Setting • To set the paper size for the LCC • Use to change the paper size for the LCC (tray 3/4). After replacing the CCD unit. the warning display is intended for the specific person who is going to replace the unit. • The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is ON.7 Functions Use Scan Caribration • To set whether to use the calibration adjustment value set prior to the shipping. Service Mode Unit Change • To select who is to replace a unit. 2007 10. When “User” is selected : Printing is inhibited. Japan. 10.9. • Upon setup • The following are the default settings: US. A4 B5 8 1/2 x 11 16K A5 5 1/2 x 8 1/2 Post. • The original calibration adjustment value can be disabled to address image failure and other problems caused by individual CCD performance difference.5 Functions 10.9.

1.10.9. “ON” OFF Setting/ Procedure NOTE • When the setting is changed.10 Functions Use Line Mag Setting • To set whether to use the offset value which has been set prior to the shipping. A4 81/2 x 11 10.0 Feb. the default value needs to be set since the magnification offset value between the lines set for each unit changes to control the differences in reading performance on each scanner (CCD). • To be used after replacing the CCD unit. 2007 LCT Paper Size Setting • To set the paper size for the LCT • Use to change the paper size for the LCT (LU-301). Adjustment / Setting 448 .9. the function becomes valid by turning the sub power switch OFF and ON again. • The default setting is ON. After replacing the CCD unit.9 bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. Service Mode 10. • The default setting depends on the setting made for the applicable marketing area. • The original offset value can be disabled to address image failure and other problems caused by individual CCD performance difference.

1. [FTP Server Settings: ON] must be set. 4. When selecting [Security Setting] → [Security Details] → [Print Data Capture] in Administrator Settings. User name: capture Password: sysadm 4037F3E539DA 449 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 1.Field Service Ver. The hard disk must be mounted to the machine. this will be used to analyze the cause of the error according to the print job data.) NOTE • The original offset value can be disabled to address image failure and other problems caused by individual CCD performance difference. • When an error occurs. When selecting [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [FTP Settings]. 2.11 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Input the user name and the password. Connect the PC (Windows) and the machine with ethernet cable. Check the IP address of the machine. Service Mode Data Capture • When an error occurs. 3. (While the Data Capture setting is [ON]. 4037F3E538DA 5. Select [Service Mode] → [System 2].0 Feb. the print job data from the PC will be stored in the hard disk. NOTE • The following conditions are necessary for this function. Start the DOS command prompt of the PC.9. 2007 10. Select [ON]. [Allow] must be set. it acquires the print job data in order to analyze the cause of the error. and touch [Data Capture]. and specify the IP address of the machine to start FTP.

Adjustment / Setting 4037F3E541DA 450 .10. 2007 6. bizhub C550 4037F3E540DA 7. 1. Service Mode Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. set the File transfer mode to the binary transfer. Using the “binary” command. display the list of the file available for capture.0 Feb. Using the “ls” command.

1. Prior Detection Functions Use • To set the detection level for the pre-detection of stain on the ADF original glass. 2007 Setting/ Procedure 8. Not Set : Detection of stain on the glass will not be conducted.0 Feb. Normal : Normal level detection. select [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Security Details]. When HDD Format or Overwrite Temporary Data is performed. NOTE • Be aware that selecting “Not Set” and performing the pre-detection with the following setting will display “NG. job data is deleted. A. Finish the command prompt. recovering from the sleep/low power mode. the original glass cleaning operation after the job ends does not operate. • Use when changing the setting for whether or not to detect the stain on the ADF original glass when opening/closing ADF as well as its detection level as the main/sub power being ON.” [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Thin Line Prior Detection] • When “Not Set” is selected. transfer the data for capture to PC.Field Service Ver. NOTE • After receiving capture data.12 Split Line Detect. 10. Setting bizhub C550 .” Not Set Low “Normal” High 451 Adjustment / Setting 10. High : Stain on the glass will easily be detected. etc. Using the “get” command. and select [Restrict] for print data capture in order to delete the job data stored in the hard disk. Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is “Normal. Low : Stain on the glass will not be detected easily.9. Service Mode 4037F3E542DA 9.

the glass will move while reading the original in order to remove the stain. 2007 • To set how to display the warning when stain on the ADF original glass is detected. • Use when changing the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original.10. • Use when changing the display of the warning which requests the cleaning of the stain on the glass detected by the pre-detection of the lines. and reduce the lines. and 6 of the image process are set in this order with 3 being the most efficient in reducing the lines.13 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Stamp • To set the mounting status of the optional stamp unit SP-501. 1 : The glass will move between originals when feeding the original. an image quality problem might be occurred in the side effect by the image processing control according to the dirt condition of the original glass. and will not perform removing the stain. 3: Warning will be displayed on all screens. • When setting to “0” or “1”. 0: Warning will not be displayed. (warning code: D-1/D-2) 2: Warning will be displayed on the message area on the basic screen. • The default setting is Unset. The level 3.9.” Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is 2. the setting area available for the administrator by the following setting will be restricted to “0 (Disable)” or “1 (Enable). 5. • To use when setting up the stamp unit SP-501. The lines will be reduced also by the image process control. Warning Level bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver. 2 : When the original is fed.0 Feb. 1: Warning will be displayed by the maintenance mark. Paper Passaging Detection Functions Use • To set the operation for detection and removing operation of stain on the ADF original glass when feeding the original. 4. 1. NOTE • This setting is invalid when [Prior Detection] is set to “Not Set. 3 to 6 : When the original is fed. Set “Unset” 452 . Service Mode B. NOTE • When this function is used. 0 to 6 Adjustment / Setting 10.” [Administrator Setting] → [System Setting] → [Expert Adjustment] → [Line Detection] → [Detection While Feeding Setting] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is 1. 0 : The glass will stop moving when the original is fed. 0 1 “2” 3 C. the glass will move while reading the original in order to remove the stain.

internet fax). Service Mode Network Fax Settings • To set whether or not to use network fax function. 1. IP Address Fax : SIP-Fax : Internet Fax : ON Not Used ON “OFF” “OFF” Setting/ Procedure 453 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. [Administrator Settings] → [Network Settings] → [Network Fax Settings] → [Network Fax Function Settings] • The default settings are OFF.0 Feb. 2007 10. • Selection will be available when each network fax function is set to “ON” in the following settings.14 Functions Use 10.9. • To use network fax function (IP address fax.

To clear the counts of two or more counters within a group or across different groups at once. select the specific counters to be cleared. : Period of time over which the black imaging unit has been used. : Number of times the color toner filter has been used. Two or more counters can be selected. • 3rd. Imaging Unit and TCR new article detection. 1.10. 10. press the Interrupt key.10. 10. • When each of the maintenance parts is replaced. : Period of time over which the yellow imaging unit has been used. transfer belt unit. select the specific part and press the Clear key.10 Counter bizhub C550 • The counter displays the counts of various counters to allow the technical representative to check or set as necessary.2 Functions Life • To check the number of hours or times each of the different maintenance parts has been used. : Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 1 : Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 2 : Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 3 : Number of sheets of paper fed from tray 4 : Number of sheets of paper fed from the bypass : Period of time over which the cyan imaging unit has been used. : Period of time over which the magenta imaging unit has been used. Service Mode Field Service Ver. and touch [END]. which will undo the clearing operation.0 Feb. 2.10. • 4th.1 Procedure 1. touch [Counter Reset]. Select the specific counter to be displayed. • To clear the count of a counter. : Number of sheets of paper fed from the LCT : Number of sheets of paper fed through the take-up section of the ADF : Number of sheets of paper fed through the turnover unit of the ADF : Number of sheets of paper fed out of the sorter/finisher Adjustment / Setting 454 . 2007 10. Touch [Counter] to show the counter menu. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly. • To clear the count of each counter. • It is not possible to clear the count of the counters for the fusing unit. 3. • Manual Tray <2> • Imaging Unit (C) • Imaging Unit (M) • Imaging Unit (Y) • Imaging Unit (K) • LCT Parts • ADF Feed • ADF Reverse • Sorter/Finisher Use Setting/ Procedure : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times a sheet of paper is fed through : Number of times the ozone filter has been used. which are provided with a new unit detection function. <1> • Fusing Unit • Transfer Roller Unit • Image Transfer Belt Unit • Ozone Filter • Color Toner Filter • 1st. • 2nd.

5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Warning • To check the number of warning conditions detected according to the warming type • To clear the count of each counter. press the Interrupt key.4 Functions Service Call Counter • To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred at different locations in the machine • To clear the count of each counter. which will undo the clearing operation. 1. 10. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly.10. • Touching the oil mark will display the warning code screen. which will undo the clearing operation. which will undo the clearing operation. • To check the number of warning conditions that have been detected • To clear the count of a counter. 2007 Setting/ Procedure 10. • To clear the count of each counter. 455 Adjustment / Setting • To clear the count of a counter. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly. • TCR new article detection (M) : Period of time over which the magenta toner cartridge has been used. • TCR new article detection (K) : Period of time over which the black toner cartridge has been used.3 Functions Jam • To check the number of misfeeds that have occurred at different locations in the machine. select the specific part and press the Clear key. • If a counter is cleared mistakenly. Service Mode <3> • TCR new article detection (C) : Period of time over which the cyan toner cartridge has been used.0 Feb. • To check the number of paper misfeeds that have occurred • To clear the count of a counter. select the specific part and press the Clear key. • To check the number of malfunctions that have occurred Use Setting/ Procedure 10. • TCR new article detection (Y) : Period of time over which the yellow toner cartridge has been used.10. • When a warning condition occurs. an oil mark appears at the lower left corner of the basic screen.Field Service Ver.10. select the specific part and press the Clear key. bizhub C550 . Use Setting/ Procedure 10. press the Interrupt key. press the Interrupt key.

Service Total (Duplex) : No. • Use to check the No.9 Functions Use Service Call History (Data) • To display the trouble history in chronological order. Paper Size Functions Use • To display the count value for service total counter of each paper size. and fax. printer.8 Functions Use Counter of Each Mode • To display the printed pages in the following specified modes. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder. • When any given part is replaced.10. • Use to check the trouble history in chronological order. Maint. • To check the total number of printed pages including the one at Service Mode according to each paper size. It also displays the count value of using the specified mode. Service Total : No. printer. and fax. Total Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Service Total • To display the count value for the service total counter. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode. Maint.10.7 A.-Count • Counts up when a sheet of paper is fed through the machine. 10. • Pressing the Clear key will clear the count. • Use to check the printed pages in the following specified modes. in order to know the using condition. B. Service Mode 10. as well as No. of pages printed by user mode and Service Mode in duplex.0 Feb. • Use to check the total No. which will undo the clearing operation.10. 1. 10. press the Interrupt key.10 ADF Paper Pages Functions Use • To display the No. of pages fed to the automatic document feeder. 10.-Set • Enter the maintenance counter value from the 10-key pad.10. scanner.6 bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. copy. 456 . copy. • If the count is cleared mistakenly. of times each mode was used. scanner. of printed pages including the ones printed by the Service Mode.10. 2007 Maintenance • To set a count value for maintenance of any given part.10. Adjustment / Setting 10.

) • If the count is cleared mistakenly. select the items to be cleared. which will undo the clearing operation.10.0 Feb.Field Service Ver.11 Paper Jam History Functions Use • To display the jam history in chronological order. 10.10. 457 Adjustment / Setting Use • Used for checking the number of detected stain on the ADF original glass.515 10. Detect Split line in acting : Number of detected stain on the original glass during the original feed divided by the number of scanning by ADF (average number of detected lines) will be displayed. 10. bizhub C550 . Setting/ Procedure • To clear each counter value. of fax transmission errors occurred. Pre-detect Large Size : Large-sized detected stain divided by the number of times pre-detection is practiced (average number of detected lines) will be displayed.10.12 Fax Connection Error Functions Use • To display the No.” See P. of fax transmission errors occurred. 1. For details of JAM code. and press the Clear key. see “Trouble shooting. Pre-detect Small Size : Small-sized detected stain divided by the number of times pre-detection is practiced (average number of detected lines) will be displayed.13 Split Line Counter Functions • To display the average number of detected stain on the ADF original glass at the predetection. (When selecting [Pre-detect Large Size] or [Pre-detect Small Size] is selected. 2007 10. both values will be cleared. Service Mode • Use to check the jam history in chronological order. press the Interrupt key. NOTE • [Code] displayed on the screen of JAM history indicates JAM code. • Use to check the No.

10.14 Parts Counter (Fixed) bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.000 *1 staple. 2007 • It will be displayed only when the optional finisher (FS-517 or FS-608) is mounted. 1 count at the start of a large size job (A4 SEF/8 1/2 x 11 SEF or larger) in the staple mode. touch the key of the part where the counter is reset. 2-staple and the stitch-and15JM-5011 *2 200. 2. Use A. Not used Not used 5 46 FNS paper exit opening motor 12QR-361 ⎯ 6 47 FNS center press knife motor FNS bypass SD 120H8001 ⎯ 7 48 12QR-263 ⎯ 8 9 10 49 ⎯ ⎯ FNS DM gate SD PI sheet paper feed clutch (Upper) PI sending roller pair/ A (Upper) 12QR-263 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 458 . their counters need to be reset to update the service history. Touch the Clear key. the parts counter screen displays the relevant parts and their counts. and also makes 1 count each time a copy is exited in the staple mode. Fixed parts to be counted No.10. Touch in the order of [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [↑] → [Parts Counter (Fixed)]. • Service history can be maintained from this menu.000 *2 fold. and makes 1 count each time a copy is exited. When the relevant parts are replaced. To reset the count value. Check the parts counter or display the relevant part of which counter will be reset. 1 CSRC parameter Parts name FNS Up/Down motor Parts number 15JK-478 Limit value ⎯ Count condition 1 count each time a sheet of paper is exited into the FS main tray. stitch-and-fold and the three-folding modes. 1 count each time a copy is exited in the staple mode (A4/B5/8 1/2 x 11/16K size) 1 count each time a copy is exited in the three-folding mode. • When the optional finisher (FS-517 or FS-608) is mounted. 3. the relevant parts counter can be checked from this menu. Check the part count. 1. 12QR-361 ⎯ 1 count each time an even number of copies is exited in the sort mode. stitch-and-fold and the three-folding jobs. 42 2 43 44 45 FNS stapler/front FNS stapler/rear FNS shift motor Adjustment / Setting 3 4 A07RA7350 *1 300.0 Feb. Functions • When the optional finisher (FS-517 or FS-608) is mounted. And makes 1 count at the start of the folding.000 *2 is exited in each mode of the 1A07RA7360 *1 300. Service Mode 10.000 *1 1 count each time a copy of paper 15JM-5011 *2 200. Setting/ Procedure 1. 1 count each time a copy is exited in the folding. NOTE • See the table below for the relevant parts and count method.

000. 1 count for a sheet in the staple/ saddle stitching/half-fold/Tri-fold mode. Parts name Parts number Limit value Count condition . paper roller/A PK counter Punch scrap transportation motor pair Punch clutch 13QE4531 100. Service Mode 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ PI sending roller pair/ B (Upper) PI reversal rubber pair (Upper) PI torque limiter (Upper) PI sheet paper feed clutch (Lower) PI sending roller pair/ A (Lower) PI sending roller pair/ B (Lower) PI reversal rubber pair (Lower) PI torque limiter (Lower) PI resist FNS output roller/A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 122H4825 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 100. 1 count for a sheet in the staple/ saddle stitching/half-fold/Tri-fold mode.Field Service Ver. roller/4 FNS transportat. 2007 CSRC parameter 10.000 Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 1 count for a sheet ejected to the FNS main tray.000 22 ⎯ 20AK4210 200. Number of punching at PK.000 ⎯ ⎯ *1: FS-517 only *2: FS-608 only 459 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 No. 1 count for a set ejected in the staple mode.000 23 24 25 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ A04E00Y001 (PK-511) ⎯ ⎯ 3. 1. Not used Not used 21 ⎯ FNS transportat.0 Feb.

11. see FK-502 Service Manual.4 Service Parameter For details.11. Adjustment / Setting 10.3 Parameter List For details. in Service Mode. • Press the Start key.11. and others. • The time-of-day and date will also be printed. total counter values. 10. 10. Service Mode Field Service Ver.5 Protocol Trace For details. see FK-502 Service Manual. 460 . 2007 10. 10. adjustment values. process adjustment. 10. which will let the machine produce the list. see FK-502 Service Manual. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. see FK-502 Service Manual. etc. 10.10.11.11.2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Adjustment List • To output the adjustment list for machine adjustment.11.6 Fax Setting List For details. • Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source.11 List Output bizhub C550 10.7 Fax Analysis List For details. • At the end of setup or when a malfunction occurs. • The time-of-day and date will also be printed. which will let the machine produce the list. • Load the A4S plain paper to a paper source.0 Feb. 1. see FK-502 Service Manual.11. • Press the Start key.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Machine Management List • To produce an output of a list of setting values.

Check that the data for “Paper feed” under “Tray 2” is “0” (sensor blocked). 461 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2007 10.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Sensor Check • To display the states of the input ports of sensors and switches when the machine remains stationary. 6. For the tray 2 paper feed sensor.” For “Paper feed” under “Tray 2. 5. From the sensor check list that follows. • Used for troubleshooting when a malfunction or a misfeed occurs. 2. Service Mode 10. • The operation of each of the switches and sensors can be checked on a real-time basis. Check that the data for “Paper feed” under “Tray 2” changes from “0” to “1” on the screen. A. the tray 2 paper feed sensor is considered to be responsible for it. 1.” select “1” on the left-hand side of the screen. 7. Select [State Confirmation] → [Sensor Check] and then select the screen that contains “Paper feed” under “Tray 2. • It can be checked as long as the 5-V power line remains intact even when a door is open. Move the actuator to unblock the tray 2 paper feed sensor.” change the sensor. 1. 4. Electrical components check procedure through input data check • When a paper misfeed occurs in the paper feed section of the machine. Call the Service Mode to the screen.12 State Confirmation 10. check the panel display of the tray 2 paper feed sensor.” 3. you check the data of “Paper feed” of “Tray 2. 8.0 Feb.Field Service Ver.12. Remove the sheet of paper misfed. If the input data is “0.

Sensor check screens • These are only typical screens which may be different from what are shown on each individual machine. 2007 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 B. 1.0 Feb. Service Mode Field Service Ver.10. (1) Sensor monitor 1/2 A00JF3E514DA 462 .

Service Mode A00JF3E515DA 463 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 1.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. 2007 (2) Sensor monitor 3/4 10.

0 Feb. 2007 Adjustment / Setting A00JF3E516DA 464 . 1.10. Service Mode (3) Sensor monitor 5/6 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.

0 Feb. Service Mode A00JF3E517DA 465 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. 2007 (4) Sensor monitor 7/8 10. 1.

1. 2007 Adjustment / Setting A00JF3E518DA 466 .0 Feb.10. Service Mode (5) Sensor monitor 9/10 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.

Field Service Ver.0 Feb. 1. Sensor check list (1) Sensor monitor 1 (Main body) 10. 2007 C. Service Mode Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Operation characteristics/panel display 1 0 Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Paper not present Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 Paper feed tray 1 device detection paper empty Near Empty Vertical transport Paper feed Tray 1 device detection sensor Tray 1 paper empty sensor Tray 1 near empty sensor Tray 1 vertical transport sensor Tray 1 paper feed sensor In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present At raised position In position Paper not present Blocked Paper present At raised position PS6 Upper Limit Tray 1 upper limit sensor PS9 PS10 PS11 PS12 PS13 Paper feed tray 2 device detection paper empty Near Empty Vertical transport Paper feed Tray 2 device detection sensor Tray 2 paper empty sensor Tray 2 near empty sensor Tray 2 vertical transport sensor Tray 2 paper feed sensor PS14 ⎯ PS19 PS22 PS21 Paper feed tray 3 Upper Limit Tray 2 upper limit sensor ⎯ Tray 3 paper empty sensor Tray 3 near empty sensor Tray 3 paper feed sensor Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Not at raised position Out of position Paper present Unblocked Paper not present Not at raised position device detection paper empty Near Empty Paper feed PS20 ⎯ PS24 PS27 PS26 Paper feed tray 4 Upper Limit Tray 3 upper limit sensor ⎯ Tray 4 paper empty sensor Tray 4 near empty sensor Tray 4 paper feed sensor device detection paper empty Near Empty Paper feed PS25 Upper Limit Tray 4 upper limit sensor 467 Adjustment / Setting Paper not present bizhub C550 .

roller. sensor device detection multi FD size 1 multi FD size 2 multi FD size 3 Bypass set sensor Multi FD size sensor/1 Multi FD size sensor/2 Multi FD size sensor/3 Bypass paper empty sensor Manual paper empty PS35 Upper Limit Bypass paper limit sensor PS36 Lower Limit Sensor in front of tim. roller.0 Feb. Exhaust OHP detection loop amount detection 1 loop amount detection 2 Bypass paper lower sensor PS39 PS40 Toolcami transportation PS38 Timing roller sensor Exhaust sensor OHP detection sensor Loop amount detection sensor/1 Loop amount detection sensor/2 Adjustment / Setting PS41 PS42 468 . Service Mode Field Service Ver.10. 2007 Operation characteristics/panel display 1 0 Paper not present Paper not present Unblocked OFF OFF OFF Not at raised position Not at raised position Not at lower limit position Paper not present Paper not present Not OHP Loop not present Loop not present bizhub C550 Symbol Panel display Sensor in front of mid. Part/signal name Tray 3/4 PS28 PS29 PS30 PS31 PS32 PS33 PS34 Intermediate roller sensor Paper present Paper present Blocked ON ON ON At raised position At raised position At lower limit position Paper present Paper present OHP Loop present Loop present Horizon. TransporHorizontal transport sensor tat. 1.

C toner empty M toner empty Y toner empty K toner empty Pressure welding alienation sensor/K Pressure welding alienation sensor/color Waste toner box set sensor Waste toner full sensor Pressure home sensor Toner empty sensor/C Toner empty sensor/M Toner empty sensor/Y Toner empty sensor/K Not Retracted Not Retracted Blocked Blocked Not Retracted Toner present Toner present Toner present Toner present Retracted Retracted Unblocked Unblocked Retracted Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Toner not present Toner 469 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 1. welding alienat. 2007 (2) Sensor monitor 2 (Main body. alienat. Service Mode Symbol Panel display Part/signal name Operation characteristics/panel display 1 0 Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked Unblocked PS43 Photo conductor PS44 PS45 PS46 ⎯ PS1 PS2 PS3 PS4 PS5 PS6 Duplex PS47 PS48 LCT Charging CL home Charging cleaner home sensor sensor (this side) Charging CL home Charging cleaner return sensor sensor (interior) Black and white PC encoder 1 Black and white PC encoder 2 LCT detection Tray set sensor upper limit sensor Paper feed paper empty Near empty 1 Near empty 2 Toolcami 1 Toolcami 2 ADU transport sensor/1 ADU transport sensor/2 See the LU-301 Service Manual. (black) Press. See P. LCT) 10. (color) Waste toner box set Waste toner full Roller pressure weld.0 Feb.32 K PC encoder sensor/1 K PC encoder sensor/2 Blocked Blocked Blocked Blocked Paper present Paper present Paper not present Paper not present Fusing Waste toner transfer belt secondary transfer PS50 Pressure welding alienation Pressure welding alienation sensor Not Retracted Retracted PS51 PS52 PS53 PS54 PS55 PZS/C PZS/M PZS/Y PZS/K Press.Field Service Ver. welding alienat.

10. 1.50 Adjustment / Setting M3 PS5 PS8 PS9 PS11 PS13 PS14 470 . Service Mode (3) Sensor monitor 3 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 2007 Symbol PS1 PS4 PS19 PS12 PS16 PS6 PS18 PS32 PS307 PS3 PS31 PS2 PS7 PS15 M7 Sensor monitor3/built -in finisher1 Sensor monitor3/built -in finisher1 Panel display printer output detection FNS entrance passage detection SUb-tray full detection paper exit detection gate HP detection output 1 detection roller shift HP detection 100 piece paper exit HP detection resist shutter HP detection tray lower limit detection 100 piece needle cutting rubbish box existence detection tray upper limit detection staple output upper limit detection tray 0 piece lower limit detection Output roller drive motor trouble tray Up/Down drive motor trouble Stacker entrance detection flat binding adjustment HP detection output belt HP detection stapler movement HP detection Stapler head HP detection stapler clinch HP detection Part/signal name Operation characteristics/panel display 1 0 See the FS-517/608 Service Manual.0 Feb. See P.

0 Feb.50 M15 Sensor monitor4/built -in finisher2 M10 PS22 PS23 PS24 PS25 F clincher drive motor R clincher drive motor 100 piece flat binding connection recognition filing connection recognition BM Center Fold connection recognition BM stapler rear and stopper detection BM filing adjustment HP detection BM center press eject detection 471 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .Field Service Ver. See P. Service Mode Symbol PS20 MS1 Sensor monitor4/built -in finisher2 Panel display stacker 0 piece detection FNS front door opening detection F stapler head drive motor HP no needle U-shaped needle no cartridge clinch start R stapler head drive motor HP no needle U-shaped needle no cartridge clinch start Part/signal name Operation characteristics/panel display 1 0 M14 M9 See the FS-517/608 Service Manual. 2007 (4) Sensor monitor 4 10. 1.

See P.50 Adjustment / Setting ⎯ ⎯ (6) Sensor monitor 6 • Not used.10. (9) Sensor monitor 9 • Not used.10 SP305 ⎯ PK connection recognition 1 PK connection recognition 2 FNS connection detection See the FS-517/608 Service Manual.50 See the PK-512/513 Service Manual. (7) Sensor monitor 7 • Not used. 2007 Symbol Panel display BM center press passage detection BM center press full detection BM center press drive malfunction motor trouble PK punch drive motor HP detection Sensor monitor5/built -in finisher3 PK punch encoder PK hole-punch scrap box existence detection PK hole-punch scrap box existence detection PK punch swing drive M HP detection Edge detection sensor signal 1 Edge detection sensor signal 2 Edge detection sensor signal 3 Edge detection sensor signal 4 Edge detection sensor signal 5 Part/signal name Operation characteristics/panel display 1 0 PS26 PS29 M20 PS301 PS306 PS302 PS304 PS303 See the FS-517/608 Service Manual. Service Mode (5) Sensor monitor 5 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 1. See P.0 Feb. See P. 472 . (8) Sensor monitor 8 • Not used.

2007 (10) Sensor monitor 10 10. the machine independently displays each Vg/Vdc output value that is calculated based on the density (toner amount stuck on the belt) of the test pattern created on the transfer belt.2 Functions Table Number • When IDC is detected.12.0 Feb. Thick 2/3/4.Field Service Ver. M. • Reference values: C. Vg: around 500 V • Used for troubleshooting of image problems. correct so that the image density becomes low. • If the value is low. Y K Vdc: around 400 V. Service Mode Symbol Scanner Panel display Part/signal name Operation characteristics/panel display 1 0 Out of home Raised 20 degree or more PS201 S201 PS202 Home Sensor Original Cover 20 Degree Original Size Detection 1 Original Size Detection 2 Original Size Detection 3 Original Size Detection 4 Original Size Detection 5 Original Size Detection 6 Original Size Detection 7 Original Size Detection 8 Scanner home sensor Original cover sensor 20 degree sensor At home Lowered Less than 20 degree PS204 Original size detection 1 sensor Original Original not loaded. Thick 1/1+. not loaded mounted ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Org. and Black. Detecting Sensor PS205 Original size detection 2 sensor Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used 10. not loaded mounted Original Original not loaded. for Plain paper. • If the value is high. correct so that the image density becomes high. Use Setting/ Procedure 473 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 1.

Y. • Used for troubleshooting of image problems. 1.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Temp. • IDC Sensor: Shows the intensity adjustment value (0 to 255) of the IDC sensor. : Shows the latest IDC data. • • • • • Temp-Inside Temp-Heater Temp-press. • ATVC (2nd) : Shows the second image transfer ATVC adjustment value (300 to 5000 V). • TCR-C/-M/-Y/-K • IDC1/IDC2 • Middle heat temperature • • • • : Shows the T/C output reading taken last. Pressurizing side temperature : Displays the latest temperature of the pressure roller.3 bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. 10. • Used as reference information when a malfunction occurs. M. IDC/registration sensor output values. : Displays the latest temperature on the middle of the heating roller. Adjustment / Setting 10.4 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Level History 2 • IDC Sensor (Transfer belt bare surface level) as adjusted through the image stabilization sequence and ATVC value. Humidity Absolute Humidity : 0 to 100 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 255 °C in 1 °C increments : 0 to 100 % in 1 % increments : 0 to 100 in 1 increments 474 . “Reading taken last” means • Density of toner of the latest image • When a test print is produced by pressing the Start key while level history 1 is being displayed. Soaking side temperature : Displays the latest temperature of the soaking roller. • ATVC (C. • Used for troubleshooting of image problems. and fusing temperature. Service Mode 10. & Humidity • To display the temperature and humidity of a specific location (AIDC sensor portion) inside the machine and fusing temperature.10. Heat edge temperature : Displays the latest temperature at the edges of the heating roller.12.12. NC sensor temperature : Displays the temperature detected by NC sensor.12.0 Feb. K): Shows the first image transfer ATVC adjustment value (10 to 100 µA). 2007 Level History1 • To display TCR (T/C ratio).

Rough Check • A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made in a very limited area. 4. 10. Memory Check Functions • To check correspondence of data written to and that read from memory through write/read check. GO and GE. • Used for troubleshooting for the CCD sensor. 1.6 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 10. The difference between each pair of RO and RE. GAIN : The difference from the CLAMP values (R. Compress / Decompression Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check whether compression and decompression are carried out properly. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj.Field Service Ver. CLAMP: The difference between the max. 3. If the check results are NG. and BO and BE should be within 30. • The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a compression/decompression check sequence. 1.] → [Compress / Decompression Check]. either [Rough Check] or [Detail Check]. Service Mode CCD Check • To display the D/A value of CCD clamp/gain for R. the results are shown on the screen. Call the Service Mode to the screen. • Use the following guidelines on the correct range of values. A. 5.0 Feb. B) should be within (90 for R and B. 1. 475 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 4. 2. and B. output values should be within ±100. 2.7 Memory/HDD Adj. 3. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Use Adjustment Procedure • If the copy image is faulty. Select the desired type of check. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. Detail Check • A check is made to see if the image data reading and writing are correctly made at the addresses and buses in all areas.12. G. and min. The difference from the CLAMP value (G) should be within ±50 for G. 2007 10. B.12.] → [Memory Check]. check the memory for connection or replace the memory with a new one. • If the copy image is faulty. The check result will be displayed. Press the Start key to start the check procedure. • The progress of the check sequence is displayed in percentage. When the check procedure is completed. ✽ Press the Stop key to interrupt the check sequence.

Call the Service Mode to the screen. Memory Bus Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check to see if image data is correctly transferred from scanner to memory. • If the copy image is faulty.) other than image data in HDD. 1. F. The check result will be displayed. and wait for ten seconds to turn back ON. 2. The check result will be displayed. 3.] → [Work Memory In/Out Check]. 2. 2. 5. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Work Memory In/Out Check Adjustment / Setting Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To check to see if input and output of image data of work memory are correctly performed. Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • This function enables you to check whether image data are compressed properly through the scan accelerator kit (SA-501). Service Mode Field Service Ver. 4. The check result will be displayed. HDD Version Up Functions Use Adjustment Procedure • To upgrade administration data (Document management information. Select either [Scanner → Memory]. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. Set the following setting. etc. NOTE • Make sure to turn main power switch OFF when upgrading is complete. [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj. 1. E. Select either [Input Check]. 3. address information. Pressing the Start key will start the memory bus check and be terminated automatically. 4. Open the Service Mode. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. 2007 bizhub C550 C. 2. [OK] or [NG]. Pressing the Start key will automatically start to complete a JPEG check sequence. 4. 3. you can refer to JPEG check. 476 .] → [JPEG check]. 1. Touch the Start key to start upgrading the version.10. When upgrading the version is complete. and from memory to printer. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 4. JPEG check • This function is available only when the optional scan accelerator kit (SA-501) is mounted. • If the print image is faulty. the outcome will be displayed on the screen. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. D. [Memory → PRT].0 Feb. 1.] → [Memory Bus Check]. [Output Check]. • When a copy image problem occurs.] → [HDD Version Up] 3. 5. Pressing the Start key will start the work memory input/output operation check sequence and be terminated automatically. or both. or both. [OK] or [NG].

3. (1) Physical Format 1. (2) Logical Format (only when initial is set up) 1. Touch [Physical Format]. 4. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. and if read/write operation of the hard disk is correctly performed. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence. 4. 3.0 Feb. 3. Pressing the Start key will start the hard disk R/W check sequence and be terminated automatically. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 2. Use Adjustment Procedure 10. the malfunction code “C-D010” will appear. The check result will be displayed.Field Service Ver. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. • When the hard disk is to be initialized. Service Mode • To check to see if the hard disk is connected properly. • When the hard disk is mounted. [OK] or [NG]. 2007 G. 2. HDD Format Functions • To format the hard disk • The function proceeds in the order of physical format to logical format. H. Touch these keys in this order: [State Confirmation] → [Memory / HDD Adj. • Use to check the condition and amount of the memory and hard disk. Touch [Logical Format]. 1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. The sequence will be automatically terminated as it is completed. HDD R/W Check Functions Use Adjustment Procedure 10. Press the Start key to start the formatting sequence.12. ✽ Formatting the hard disk will erase all data contained in it. 4. Turn off the main power switch and turn it on again more than 10 seconds after. • If the hard disk is yet to be formatted. (Physical format to logical format) 1. 2.] → [HDD Format]. • To display the mounting condition of the optional encryption board (security kit SC-503). Ignore this code and continue with the formatting procedure. • When the hard disk is mounted. 1. • When the encryption board is mounted.8 Functions Memory/HDD State • To display the condition and amount of the memory and hard disk. the machine automatically recognizes it and displays [Set]. 2. Use Setting/ Procedure 477 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .] → [HDD R/W Check]. • Use to setup the optional security kit SC-503.

and Y for color shift amount. Nonetheless. the color shift amount (in X and Y directions) at two locations (one at the front and the other in the rear) and the difference in color shift amount between the front and rear (X and Y directions) are displayed.0 Feb.10. since the machine is unable to read the lot number when the main power switch is turned ON with the front door open. and Black IUs. and Y.11 Adjustment Data List Functions Use • To display the adjustment and setting value set in the main body. Magenta. (The engine obtains the IU lot number information when the front door is closed. • Use for check when color shift is evident. Adjustment / Setting 478 . • The lot number data is stored in EEPROM of each IU.9 bizhub C550 Functions Field Service Ver.12. • Display unit: dots Use Setting/ Procedure 10. Yellow. • For each of C.10 IU Lot No. Service Mode 10.) 10. • The data is updated after a color shift correction has been made or color shift adjustment has been completed. • Use for checking the IU Lot No. 2007 Color Regist • To check each of C. however. M. • The IU lot number is displayed even with the front door opened. • Use to check the adjustment and setting value set in the main body. Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To display the 10-digit lot number for each of Cyan.12. the lot number will be displayed when the front door is closed.12. 1. the display is blank. M.

2007 10. Touch the desired test pattern key. Magenta. Select FEET or “HYPER”. 479 . • The machine searches through the paper sources in the order of tray 2.13. 4Color. Set up the desired functions and press the Start key.13. 4036fs3042c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). • Used for checking gradation reproducibility.Field Service Ver. • Black (1PC): Uses one color of black. tray 4. 3. It also tests the printing operation in running mode.0 Feb. 1. Select the color mode. Black (1PC) • Black (4PC): Uses four colors. Service Mode 10. 8Color. as well as the fax transmission. and tray 1 for paper of the maximum size for printing. 2. tray 3. 10. Yellow. Touch [Test Mode] to display the test mode menu.1 Procedure for test pattern output bizhub C550 Adjustment / Setting 1. “Cyan”. Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. Black (4PC).2 Functions Use Pattern SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Gradation Pattern • To produce a gradation pattern. CMYK. 10.13 Test Mode • To check the image on the printer side by letting the machine produce various types of test pattern.

• Used for checking fine line reproducibility and uneven density. 4 Color. MIX • Type the density level (0 to “255”). Green. 480 . Blue. (Only select HYPER) Select the color mode. • Type the density level (0 to “255”). Red. SINGLE HYPER Gradation Cyan Density: 255 4036fs3043c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). • Select “Normal” or Reverse. 1. Black (1PC). Service Mode 10. SINGLE FEET Cyan CD Width: 5 FD Width: 5 Density: 255 Normal 4036fs3044c0 Adjustment / Setting Pattern Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Black (1PC) • Enter CD width and FD width (0 to 191 dots). “Cyan”.4 Functions Use Lattice Pattern • To produce a lattice pattern. 2007 Halftone Pattern • To produce a solid halftone pattern. Green. Select Gradation or Resolution. Blue. Magenta.10. 4 Color. Magenta.0 Feb.13. Red. 3 Color. • Used for checking uneven density and pitch noise. 3 Color. Yellow. Yellow. Black (4PC). Select “FEET” or HYPER. CMYK.3 bizhub C550 Functions Use Pattern Field Service Ver.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. • A reverse pattern is also used to check for fine line reproducibility of white letters on a solid background. Select FEET or “HYPER. Select the color mode. Black (4PC).13. “Cyan”. 10. CMYK.

Select FEET or “HYPER.0 Feb. Y. SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 M C 4036fs3045c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). and B. and K solid patterns.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected. K. 1. Produce 12-gradation-level patches of C. 4036fs3046c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). Service Mode Solid Pattern • To produce each of the C. • Used for checking reproducibility of image density.5 Functions Use Pattern K Y 10. • Used for checking reproducibility of each of the different colors.13. 2007 10. Type the density level (0 to “255”). M.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected.13. Y.Field Service Ver. M.6 Functions Use Pattern Color Sample • To produce a color sample. 481 Adjustment / Setting SINGLE HYPER Gradation bizhub C550 . Select FEET or “HYPER. and a patch of each of the 12 reference colors in the hue circle with lightness and saturation corrected. 10. R. G.

10. • Use to check the printing operation in running mode from each paper source.13. • Used to check color difference depending on the places where output is made. 4. Gradation. Select FEET or “HYPER.8 Functions Use Pattern CMM pattern • To produce a CMM (Color Management Module) pattern. 90 degrees. 482 . and 270 degrees. 6. or Resolution. Select the paper type. Type the density level (0 to “255”). • Select an angle from among “0 degrees”.13. Service Mode 10. SINGLE HYPER Gradation Density: 255 4036fs3047c0 Setting/ Procedure • • • • • # of Print (“1” to 999) Select “SINGLE” (single copy) or MULTI (multi copy). 2. 3. 5. Select the paper size (Tray 1. bypass only). • Select “Error diffusion”. Call the Service Mode to the screen. 1. Pressing the Stop key will stop operation. 2007 8 Color Solid Pattern • To produce an 8-color solid pattern.9 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Running Mode • To test the printing operation in running mode.0 Feb. • Used for checking color reproducibility and uneven density of each color.10.” Select “Gradation” or Resolution if HYPER has been selected.13. Touch these keys in this order: [Test Mode] → [Running Mode]. 180 degrees.7 bizhub C550 Functions Use Pattern Field Service Ver. Adjustment / Setting Error diffusion 270 degrees A00JF3C525DA Setting/ Procedure • # of Print is always “1”. 1. Press the Start key to start the running mode. 10.

Data Input Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable downloading using the HTTP protocol. • For details for upgrading the firmware. A. ON “OFF” 10. this setting will automatically be set to “OFF” and cannot be changed. • To use when upgrading the firmware by Internet ISW. 10. refer to “Firmware upgrade” in the Maintenance section. • To use when accessing the server using the HTTP protocol. 1. See P. See P.17.1 Functions Use Internet ISW Set Adjustment / Setting • To set whether or not to enable each setting for Internet ISW. see FK-502 Service Manual. 2007 10.56 10. • The default setting is OFF. ON “OFF” 483 bizhub C550 For details. Service Mode 10.10 Fax Test 10.26 10. • Setting on the proxy server will be valid when this setting is “ON”.14 ADF For details.17 Internet ISW • By using this setting. See P.54 10. see FK-502 Service Manual.15 FAX For details. see DF-611 Service Manual.16 Finisher For details. NOTE • When the following setting is set to “ON”. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF.Field Service Ver.2 HTTP Setting • It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”.13. the firmware stored in the server can be downloaded over internet for upgrading. . • Each setting such as Server setting will be valid by setting this to “ON”.17.0 Feb. see FS-517/608 Service Manual.

A. 1. • Setting this to “ON” will enable the proxy server setting. 30 to 300 sec. <Password> • Enter the password (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard.3 FTP Setting • It will be displayed only when [Internet ISW Set] is set to “ON”. • To use when accessing the server with FTP protocol. Connect Proxy bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver.10. • To use when accessing the server via proxy server.17. • The default setting is OFF. Service Mode B. • To use when accessing the server via proxy server. Connection Time-Out Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the time for the timeout for accessing the server. <Port Number> • Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad.0 Feb. Proxy Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the address and the port number for the proxy server. Proxy Authentication Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the login name or password when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server. “ON” OFF 484 . • The default setting is ON. • To use when changing the time for the timeout for accessing the server. or FQDN format. ON “OFF” Adjustment / Setting <Log-in Name> • Enter the login name (up to 32 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Data Input Setting Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to enable downloading using FTP protocol. E. (The default setting is 80) D. <Server Address> • Enter an address using IPv4. ON “OFF” C. 2007 • To set whether or not to connect via proxy server when accessing the server. IPv6. 10. • The default setting is 60 sec. <Authentication> • The default setting is OFF. • To use when authentication is necessary for accessing the proxy server.

IPv6. <Connection Time Out> • Enter the value between 1 and 60 (min. • The default setting is OFF. <Port Number> • Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Password Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the password for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored. 1. and the time for timeout when accessing the FTP server. and also to set whether or not to enable PASV mode. Select [User ID]. 2.17. • To use when connecting by the PASV (passive) mode (FTP server side will inform the connection port before connecting). <PASV Mode> • The default setting is OFF. 2. B. • To use when accessing the server via proxy server.0 Feb. <Server Address> • Enter an address using IPv4. ON “OFF” 10.4 Forwarding Access Setting A. Enter the password (up to 64 characters) on the on-screen keyboard.) using the 10-key pad. 1. Connect Proxy Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not to access the server via proxy server. Service Mode C. D. Enter the user ID (up to 64 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. • To use when accessing the server via proxy server. • To use when accessing the FTP server.Field Service Ver. of the proxy server. 485 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . or FQDN format. User ID Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the user ID for accessing the program server where firmware is to be stored. <Port Number> • Enter the value between 1 and 65535 using the 10-key pad. Connection Setting Functions Use • To set the port No. 1. Select [Password]. 2007 B. ON “OFF” Setting/ Procedure 10. Proxy Server Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set the address and the port No.

URL bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. or failed to download. See P. When connecting to http http:// (Host name or IP address)/ directory name or https:// (Host name or IP address)/directory name.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Download • Access the program server according to the Internet ISW setting. 2. Check the cause of the error by the error code. 1. Service Mode C.0 Feb.17. NOTE • When it failed to connect to the program server. When connecting to ftp ftp:// (Host name or IP address) / directory name. and follow the message for resetting. The message to show the status will be displayed on the screen while connecting and transferring data. Select [URL]. and download the firmware. Refer to “Error cord list” for the error codes. 2007 • To register the address and directory of the program server where the firmware is to be stored in URL. 1. 10.81 4. FileName Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To register the file name of the firmware data to be downloaded. Adjustment / Setting 486 .10. Touch [ISW Start] to start downloading the firmware. the main body will automatically be restarted to complete the Internet ISW. NOTE • Enter the URL which format suits the protocol to be used. the error code and the message will be displayed. D. 1. Select [FileName]. 1. Enter the URL (up to 256 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. 2. • To use when updating the firmware via network. Enter the file name (up to 63 one-byte characters) on the on-screen keyboard. Select [Download]. 2. When the firmware is normally upgraded. 3.

1.489 P.490 487 Adjustment / Setting . bizhub C550 A00JF3E535DA 11.489 P.490 P.488 P. Enhanced Security 11.488 P. 2007 11.490 P.0 Feb.1 Enhanced Security function setting procedure 11.489 P. 2.2 Enhanced Security function tree Service Mode Enhanced Security CE Password Administrator Password Administrator Feature Level CE Authentication IU Life Stop Setting NVRAM Data Backup Operation Ban release time Administrator unlocking Ref. Page P. Press the following keys in this order.1 Procedure 1.1. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Enhanced Security menu will appear. 11.1.2 Exiting • Touch the [Exit]. Stop → 0→ Clear 3.Field Service Ver. Enhanced Security 11.

Enhanced Security Field Service Ver.” New Password : Enter the new administrator password. the password with the same letters as well as the password which is same as the previous one cannot be changed.2 Functions Use Administrator Password • To set and change the administrator password. • Use this function when the administrator forget the administrator password because a new password can be set without entering the current administrator password with this.3. call responsible person of KMBT. 11. NOTE • When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON].3. 1.3 Settings in the Enhanced Security bizhub C550 11.0 Feb. New Password : Enter the new CE password. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 488 . • Use to change the administrator password. • Use to change the CE password. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] • NEVER forget the CE password. Re-Input Password : Enter the new administrator password again. NOTE • When the following setting leads to the Password Rules [ON]. 2007 11.11. • The initial setting is “92729272. the password with the same letters. the password which is same as the previous one and the password of less than eight digits cannot be changed.” Current Password : Enter the currently using CE password. Re-Input Password : Enter the new CE password again. • Enter the CE password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard. • Enter the administrator password (8 digits) on the on-screen keyboard.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure CE Password • To set and change the CE password. When forgetting the CE password. • The initial setting is “12345678.

3. Functions Use • To determine whether or not to authenticate CE password as entering Service Mode. • Use when allowing the administrator to use some modes in Service Mode. • Use when authenticating CE password as entering Service Mode. Enhanced Security Administrator Feature Level • To set which modes to be allowed for the administrator to use in Service Mode.3.5 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure IU Life Stop Setting • To select whether or not to stop a print cycle when the IU reaches its service life. 2007 11. Level1 Level2 “Prohibit” 11. of Stop Position [Standard Size Setting] Original Glass Original Size Detect Foolscap Size Setting Level 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Level 2 [System Setting] → [Expert Setting] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is Prohibit. ON “OFF” 11.3. • Use to select not to stop the print cycle when the IU reaches its service life. 1. “Stop” No Stop 489 bizhub C550 . [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules] Setting/ Procedure • The default setting is OFF.Original Stop Position ment Centering Auto Adjustment Auto Adj. set the CE Authentication to “ON” and change the initial CE password beforehand. Administrator settings function Printer Adjustment Erase Leading Edge Leading Edge Adjustment Scanner Adjustment Centering Horizontal Adjustment Vertical Adjustment Centering ADF Adjust. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] or [Password Rules]. • The modes allowed for the administrator to use in each setting are as follows. NOTE • For setting the following setting to “ON”.Field Service Ver.3 Functions Use 11.0 Feb. The default setting is Stop.4 CE Authentication Adjustment / Setting • It will not be displayed when the following settings are set to “ON”.

Refer to “Troubleshooting” for details on restoration procedure. See P. 2007 NVRAM Data Backup • To backup NVRAM data in the main body to the flash memory. the machine releases the access lock that is activated after the administrator password authentication. Check the message [Backup is completed.11. this setting provides another way to release the access lock. the lock release timer starts to operate by input the Stop → 0 → 9 → 3 → 1 → 7 in [Meter Count] → [Check Details] → [Coverage Rate] after the main power switch is turned OFF and On.8 Functions Use Administrator unlocking • To release an access lock that is activated after an administrator password authentication. Enhanced Security 11. Setting/ Procedure 11. • The default setting is 1 (minutes). Setting/ Procedure 490 . Touch [Administrator unlocking]. which aims to prevent the unintentional release of the access lock.3. When [OK] is displayed.608 1. Wait for ten seconds or more and turn main power switch back ON. • To release the access lock with service authority when an administrator password authentication fails and the access lock is activated. • To set the period of time that elapses before the machine releases the access lock. if the access lock is activated. Touch [unlocking] to release an access lock.3. 3.6 bizhub C550 Functions Use Field Service Ver.3. • After the CE password authentication. • When the main power switch is turned OFF and ON or the period of time set in the Release Time Settings elapses. Touch [NVRAM Data Backup]. 2. 1. touch [OK]. • To backup current data in order to prevent data in NVRAM from being erased unexpectedly. 2.7 Functions Use Operation Ban release time • To set the time that elapses before the machine releases an access lock that is activated after the CE password authentication.]. Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure 11. Touch [Start] to start making a backup. 1 to 60 (minutes) NOTE • When Enhanced Security Mode is set to ON in [Administrator Settings] → [Security Settings] → [Enhanced Security Mode]. the period of time that can be set in this setting is 5 minutes or more. It usually makes backup every hour automatically. • To backup data manually.0 Feb. the access lock is released. • Backup data can be restored by following the specified procedure when the trouble (CD3XX) occurred. and turn main power switch OFF. When the timer reaches the time specified in this setting. In addition to these operations. 3. 1.

Stop → 9 3. Billing Setting 12. Press the following keys in this order.1 Procedure 1.2 Billing Setting function tree Service Mode Billing Setting Counter Setting Management Function Choice Coverage Rate Clear Ref.498 491 Adjustment / Setting . 12. Page P.492 P.1.1.2 Exiting • Touch the [Exit]. Call the Service Mode to the screen. Billing Setting 12. 1.Field Service Ver. 2. 2007 12.1 Billing Setting function setting procedure 12.0 Feb. bizhub C550 A00JF3E536DA 12. Billing Setting menu will appear.493 P.

B4.0 Feb. Others 2.) • Use to change the counting method for the counters. Others 3) A3. B4. 2007 12. 3: 3 counts.3 Settings in the Billing Setting bizhub C550 12. : When it exceeds 215 mm in the main scan direction and 355 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 337 mm at fax scan). 11 x 17. Total Counter Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle (Default: Others 4. it is regarded as the large size (However the size in the main scan direction changes according to the foolscap size setting. Europe. Japan) Mode 2: Large size is double counts (Default: US. and 81/2 x 14 (Default: Europe. it is regarded as the large size. Others 3) NOTE • The content of this setting is reflected in the count method with the key counter. 4: 4 counts Setting/ Procedure Long Length Paper Counter Mode • Not used. • To set the size regarded as the large size (2 counts. Others 2.) • A3/B4/11 x 17/8 1/2 x 14 • A3/11 x 17/B4/81/2 x 14/Foolscap Adjustment / Setting • • • • Not counted (Default: Others 4. Others 1. it is regarded as the large size. Size Counter • A3/11 x 17 : When it exceeds 279 mm in the main scan direction and 420 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 399 mm at fax scan). Japan) A3 and 11 x 17 (Default: US) A3. 1: 1 count. : When it exceeds 203 mm in the main scan direction and 330 mm in the sub scan direction (exceeds 313 mm at fax scan). and 81/2 x 14 ✽ Count-up table Copying Size Mode 1 Total Size 2-sided Total 1 0 0 1-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 2 1 0 0 Specified sizes Mode 1 1 1 0 2 2 1 0 1 2 0 1 2-Sided Sizes other than those specified Mode 2 2 0 1 Specified sizes Mode 1 2 2 1 2 4 2 1 0: No count.12. Foolscap.3. 1. 11 x 14. Others 1. 492 . 11 x 17.1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Counter Setting • To set the counting method for the total counter and size counter. Billing Setting Field Service Ver. 2: 2 counts.

[Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Management Function Setting] → [Network Function Setting] A. PC FAX transmission / HDD TWAIN/PS Box Operator / PS Scan Direct / PS Job Spooler / Fiery: Scan to Box Also. • Set when the authentication unit (biometric type) is mounted.2 Management Function Choice 12. 1. Key Counter. • When the Authentication Device mount setting is set to “mount”. Billing Setting NOTE • It will not be displayed when the following setting is set to “ON”.3.Field Service Ver. C. the following applications will be invalid. make sure that the [Internet Fax] setting is set to “OFF” with [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings]. 2007 12. make sure that the [Internet Fax] setting is set to “OFF” with [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Network Fax Settings]. or Vendor . bizhub C550 • To set whether or not the following items are to be mounted. Authentication Device 2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the authentication device 2 is installed. Authentication Device 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the authentication device 1 is installed. Management Device (Data controller). Authentication Device. the following setting will be set to “Disable”. 493 Adjustment / Setting NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting].0 Feb. Key Counter IF Vendor Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • Not used B. NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting]. • When the Authentication Device mount setting is set to “mount”. [Management Device 2] or [Vendor 2] is mounted. [Administrator Settings] → [Security Setting] → [Enhanced Security Mode] • When the setting shows that [Management Device 1]. • Set when the authentication device 1 (PageACSES) is mounted.

• The default setting is Ban.12. Billing Setting D. 494 . 2007 • To set whether or not the key counter is installed. License “Ban” ✽ The next job reservation • Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed. Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle • When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting] and large size is selected on [Large Size Counter Mode] Mode 1: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 6 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 8 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 10 counts per 1 copy cycle • When [Mode 2] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting] and sizes other than large size are selected on [Large Size Counter Mode] Mode 1: 1 count per 1 copy cycle Mode 2: 2 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 3: 3 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 4: 4 counts per 1 copy cycle Mode 5: 5 counts per 1 copy cycle Adjustment / Setting Setting/ Procedure ✽ Message Select the message type when the administrative unit is mounted. • Set when the key counter is mounted. Key Counter Only bizhub C550 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Field Service Ver. • Select [Color Mode] and [Message] when the key counter is mounted. ✽ Color Mode • When [Mode 1] is set on [Total Counter Mode] after selecting [Billing Setting] → [Counter setting]. • The default setting is Ban. Type 1: Message for key counter Type 2: Message for card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management Type 4: Message for remote SW ✽ Confirmation copy • Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed. License “Ban” NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting]. 1.0 Feb.

1. Management Device 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the management device 1 is installed. “Do not synchronize” of user authentication and account track or “Allow” of public user access has been set with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings]. Management Device 2 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure • To set whether or not the management device 2 is installed. “Password Only” of account track.) Mode 2: Use non-contact type device (Logout with ID key is allowed.0 Feb.) NOTE • The setting is not available when either “External Server” of user authentication. F. 2007 E.Field Service Ver. Vendor 1 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure 495 Adjustment / Setting • Not used. bizhub C550 . • Set when the management device 2 is mounted. G. • Set when the management device 1 is mounted. ✽ Management Setting • Select the Management Setting Mode Mode 1: Use contact type device (Logout with ID key is not allowed. Billing Setting NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication is set “OFF” and account track is set “Off” or “Account Name + Password” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Settings]. 12.

✽ Message Type 1: Message for key counter Type 2: Message for card scanning Type 3: Message for ID management “Ban” Adjustment / Setting NOTE • The setting is available only when user authentication and account track are set “OFF” with [Administrator Settings] → [User Authentication/Account Track] → [General Setting]. inserting the key counter will set it to the “Key Counter Mode” and removing it will set it to the “Vendor Mode”. • The default setting is Ban. Vendor 2 bizhub C550 Functions Use • To set whether or not the vendor 2 is installed. Field Service Ver. (Only for key counter. the type of the color mode and message are same after mounting. License • Select message of vendor. NOTE • When using the vendor along with the key counter. 2007 • Set when the vendor 2 is mounted. • The default setting is Ban.12. • Select color mode and message of key counter. License “Ban” Setting/ Procedure ✽ The next job reservation • Set whether to allow the reservation of the next job when a key counter is installed.) ✽ Confirmation copy • Set whether to allow a confirmation copy when a key counter is installed. 496 . 1.0 Feb. Billing Setting H.

⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 497 Adjustment / Setting Changing Job Priority. PC print. Send Data. It needs resetting when cancelling the setting in order to set back to “not mounted” because the setting value will remain. ⎯ ⎯ Management Device 2 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Factory Default Factory Default [Yes] Rx Display [Yes] ⎯ Utility Direct Input ⎯ ⎯ [Job List] Each Function Setting Copy. and Print others will be set to “OFF”. Copy. Deleting Other User’s Jobs. 1. Changing Zoom Ratio will be set to “Restrict”. PC print. Send Data. ⎯ Copy. bizhub C550 NOTE • Performing the setup for each unit to be mounted will internally change the setting values below. Send Data. PC print. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ OpenAPI Setting Access Setting will be set to “Restrict”. and Print others will be set to “ON”.0 Feb. ⎯ ⎯ Administrator Security Level Administrator Settings Weekly Timer ON/OFF Setting Restrict Access to Job Settings System Settings Forward TX Setting OFF Prohibit ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ OFF Access Setting will be set to “Restrict” and Authentication will be changed to “OFF” setting. PC print. and Print others will be set to “ON”. 2007 12. Send Data. Registering and Changing Addresses. . Billing Setting Setting Item Default Copy Settings Default Scan/ Fax Settings Copy Operating Screen Fax Active Screen Scan/Fax Settings Default Tab Left Panel Display Default Vendor 2 Authentication Device 1 Key Counter ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Management Device 1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Copy will be set to “ON”. and Print others will be set to “ON”.Field Service Ver.

Billing Setting Setting Item Vendor 2 Authentication Device 1 IPP Setting will be set to “OFF”. E-mail TX Setting. ⎯ Key Counter Field Service Ver. “Unset” 498 . Print Setting will be set to “OFF”. All setting items will be set to “OFF”. Set • Touching [END] key will clear the coverage rate.0 Feb. E-mail Notification. Meter Count Notification will be set to “Restrict”.3 Functions Use Setting/ Procedure Coverage Rate Clear • To clear the coverage rate • Use to clear the coverage rate • The default setting is Unset.3. 1. Scan to Email. OFF Scan Setting. 2007 Management Device 1 Management Device 2 bizhub C550 IPP Setting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ AppleTalk Setting Administrator Settings SMB Setting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ E-mail TX (SMTP) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Status Notification Setting Notification Item Setting Image Log Transfer Settings Service Mode ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ [No] ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Management function choice Confirmation copy will be set to “Ban”. and Accept IPP job will be set to “OFF”. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Adjustment / Setting 12.12.

5. 4. or opening and closing the front door.) Service Mode (System 1/2) Counter Setting Billing Setting Management Function Choice ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Fusing Optical ⎯ ⎯ Front door open/close Main power switch OFF/ON ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ *1 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Trouble resetting ⎯ ⎯ Initialization System Error Clear Data Clear Adjustment of the touch panel position : Will be cleared (initialized) -: Will not be cleared *1: Items to be cleared Marketing Area (Fax Target only) Foolscap Size Setting System 1 Install Date Tel/Fax Number No Sleep Original Size Detection System 2 HDD Image Controller Setting 499 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 . 2. Turn OFF the main power switch. After turning off the main power switch. Check to make sure that [OK] is displayed and the it has been reset. 1.2 Contents to be cleared by reset function Items for clearing Contents to be cleared Jam display Rank A Malfunction display Rank B Rank C Erratic operation / display Utility Mode (Except items on Expert Adjustment.0 Feb. Use Setting/ Procedure 13. Procedure for resetting 13. 2007 13. turn it on again more than 10 seconds after and check if the machine starts correctly. or opening and closing the front door in case of a trouble. 3. Procedure for resetting 13. Turn main power switch ON while pressing the Utility/Counter key. 1. clear the status of the machine. Touch [Trouble Reset]. • To be used when the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again.Field Service Ver.1 Trouble resetting Functions • If the all troubles occur and the status would not be cleared by turning main power switch OFF and ON again.

14. [4] [2] [4] A00JF3C526DA 500 . Perform this step three times. Temporarily secure the scanner motor assy [1] with three screws [2]. 1. 3. With the scanner drive gear set screw [1] located on the right-hand side as shown on the left.1 Mechanical adjustment of the scanner section 14.0 Feb. • The scanner drive cables have been rewound.1 Adjustment of the scanner motor belt This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner motor assy has been removed. Tighten the three screws [4] to fix the scanner motor assy into position. 2007 14. Mechanical adjustment bizhub C550 14. slide the scanner motor assy [2] to the left and check that it is returned to the original position by the tension of the spring [3]. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. 1. [2] [1] [2] [2] A00JF3C538DA [1] [4] [3] Adjustment / Setting 2.1.

2007 14. [2] [1] A00JF3C008DA [1] 2. Then conduct scanner positioning adjustment.Field Service Ver. A00JF3C009DA 501 . Mechanical adjustment Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit bizhub C550 Adjustment / Setting This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound 1. Move the mirror unit [1] to the center and push it against the notches [2] on the rail. loosen the mirror unit adjustment screw [1] and adjust the mirror unit position until it pushes its both sides against the notches.1. 1. When the mirror unit do not push its both sides against the notches.2 14. 3. Tighten the adjustment screw.0 Feb.

• Focus positioning of the scanner and mirrors unit must be completed. Slide the mirror unit until it hits the end of the IR right frame. Move the scanner assy and the mirror unit to the end of the right. 3. 2007 Scanner position adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The scanner drive cables have been rewound. 1. Provide the length of 21. See P.407 6. When the length is ensured.3 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.14. [2] [2] [1] A00JF2C425DA 4. [Service Mode] → [ADF] → [Read Pos Adj] See the DF-611 Service Manual.44 502 . Mount the original glass moving unit.503 5. Mechanical adjustment 14. 1. Whenever the scanner drive cables have been removed. and adjust the height of the original glass moving unit. Perform the following setting.0 mm between the end of the left indentation [1] on the scanner assy upper surface and the end of the IR right frame upper surface.0 mm Adjustment / Setting 2.0 Feb.1. See P. be sure to carry out the [Feed Direction Adjustment] procedure. See P. [1] A00JF2C424DA 21. tighten the two screws [2].

Set the height adjustment jig for the original glass moving unit [1]. [2] A00JF3C011DA [1] [2] A00JF3C012DA 3. 2007 14. Pull the paper [2] while pressing the height adjusting jig for the original glass moving unit [1] and make sure that the paper will not come out. NOTE • Pull the paper [2] while pressing the height adjusting jig for the original glass moving unit [1] and make sure that the paper will not come out. 1.1. [1] 1. [2] A00JF3C010DA [1] 2. Press the height adjusting jig for the original glass moving unit [1] on the original glass moving unit side [2]. When the paper comes off.4 14.Field Service Ver. Insert the paper [2] between the original glass and the height adjusting jig for the original glass moving unit. 503 . Mechanical adjustment Adjusting the height of the original glass moving unit bizhub C550 Adjustment / Setting This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When replacing the original glass moving unit. the adjustment of the height is necessary by the following procedure.0 Feb. 4.

1.2 mm thickness A00J 2909 ##: 0.5 mm in diameter. Remove four screws [1] from the original glass moving unit.0 Feb. Install four spacers [1] and make a height adjustment. [1] [1] A00JF3C608DA 504 .1 mm thickness • Each spacer can be identified by the number of holes [1] which are 1. A00J 2903 ##: 0. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF3C014DA Adjustment / Setting NOTE • Prepare and use the spacers described below as necessary.5 mm thickness A00J 2908 ##: 0. 2007 5. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF3C013DA [1] 6.14.

1.Field Service Ver. or tilt will occur. Adjustment / Setting A00JF3C001DA 505 bizhub C550 [1] .5 mm) to adjust the height.0 Feb.1. Mechanical adjustment 7. Secure the original glass moving unit with four screws [1]. 8. Check the height repeating step 1 to 3. 9. bending. bend. or tilt occurred during original feeding by ADF. [2] A00JF2C602DA 14. 1. Temporarily secure the original glass moving unit [2] with four screws [1].5 Adjusting the height of the guide support for the original glass moving unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • Only when original jam. and adjust so that no original jam. Adjust the guide support for the original glass moving unit by rotating the small screws (one on the near side and one on the far side) with the hexagon wrench (1. 2007 14. Turning clockwise: Up Turning counterclockwise: Down NOTE • Feed a paper with ADF.

1. [1] A00JF2C402DA 506 . Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made. the paper size used for the tray3/4 needs to be changed. Remove two screws [1] and remove the end guide plates [2]. [3] [1] [1] [2] Adjustment / Setting [1] A00JF2C401DA [2] 3.14.1 Tray3/4 paper size change This adjustment must be made in the following case: • Upon user requests.2 Mechanical adjustment of the paper feed section bizhub C550 14.0 Feb.2. 2007 14. 1. [1] 2. Remove four screws [1] and remove the paper guide plates (front [2]/rear [3]). Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.

Align it with the front marking and secure it. 2. Gap between paper and the paper guide plate (front):0 < 1mm 6. Select the tray where paper size needs to be changed and change paper size in the following screen.2 Centering adjustment of the tray 1/2 This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When an image printed on a copy is displaced from the correct position with the use of the tray1/2. Make a test print and check the amount of misalignment. Secure the front side of the paper guide plate (front) with two screws.447 9. To set A5/Post card size: • Insert the paper guide plate (rear) into the hole. 1. A00JF2C403DA 5. Stretch the paper guide [1] to the maximum size position.2. 8. Adjustment / Setting 14. remove the paper and secure the back side with two screws. Mechanical adjustment 4.0 Feb. A00JF3C002DA 507 bizhub C550 8. and set the paper guide plate (front) against the edge of the paper. To set B5/8. [1] 3.5/16K sizes: • Insert the paper guide plate (rear) into the hole. Align the paper guide plate (rear) with the marking on the bottom and secure it with four screws. 2007 14. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [LCC Size Setting] See P.5" 100 POST A5 11" 16K B5 A4 . Align it with the back marking and secure it. 7. 1. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made. Align the end guide plate with the marking on the bottom and secure it.Field Service Ver. Make a test print. Insert paper of the size to be placed in the tray.

Stretch the paper guide [1] to the maximum size position. Tighten two screws [2].0 Feb. bizhub C550 [1] A00JF3C003DA [1] 5. 6. [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Centering] 1. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. Make another test print and check the amount of misalignment.2. [1] Adjustment / Setting [2] A00JF3C004DA 14. 7. A00JF3C005DA 508 . [1] 3. Loosen two screws [1].3 Centering adjustment of the tray 3/4 This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When adjustment in the following screen does not resolve a problem. 2. Pull out the tray where this adjustment is made. 2007 4. Move the paper guide [1] complete according to the amount of the miscentering you checked in step 1 and adjust the center position of it. 1.14. Make a test print and check the amount of misalignment.

bizhub C550 A00JF3C006DA [1] [1] [2] 5. Tighten ten screws [2]. 1. Loosen ten screws [1].0 Feb. Move the paper guide [1] complete according to the amount of the miscentering you checked in step 1 and adjust the center position of it.Field Service Ver. [1] A00JF3C007DA 509 Adjustment / Setting . Make another test print and check the amount of misalignment. 2007 14. 7. 6. Mechanical adjustment 4.

3. 1.0 Feb. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. [1] [2] A00JF3C539DA [1] 2. Align one of the six gear ribs [1] with the match mark [3] on the bypass guide rack gear [2]. 2007 14.1 Adjustment of the bypass paper size unit This adjustment must be made in the following case: • The bypass paper size unit has been removed. Attach the holder [1] with two screws. Adjustment / Setting A00JF3C540DA 510 .3 Mechanical adjustment of the bypass tray section bizhub C550 14.14. [1] [2] 1.

Align the mark of the gear [1] with the mark [2] on the rack gear so that those gears are engaged. 2007 14. Call the Service Mode to the screen and select [Machine] → [Manual Bypass Tray Adjustment]. check that the lever of the bypass paper size unit moves smoothly in a manner operatively connected to the bypass guide. Install the bypass unit cover so that part A (edge) [2] of the rack gear [1] for the bypass paper size unit and part B [3] of the bypass unit cover are aligned in a straight line. 1.0 Feb. Then. carry out manual bypass tray adjustment. 6. Mechanical adjustment 3.Field Service Ver.412 511 bizhub C550 . [2] [1] [2] [1] A00JF3C541DA [2] 4. See P. Adjustment / Setting A00JF3C542DA [1] 5. After the bypass paper size unit base has been mounted.

2. See P.4.184 • When the main drive unit was removed. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver. Checking method [3] [1] [4] [2] A00JF2C453DA Adjustment / Setting 1. Fix the PC drive gear/1 [1].1 PC drive gear positioning adjustment This adjustment must be made in the following case: • When the color PC drum motor was removed. and fit the hole A [3] and B [4] with the gear holes as shown on the above figure. Visually check if the hole A [3] and B [4] are fit with each gear hole at the same time. Slowly turn the PC drive gear/1 [1]. [1] [3] A00JF2C454DA 512 .4 Mechanical adjustment of the main drive unit section bizhub C550 14. and then fit the hole B [3] with the PC drive gear/2 [4] hole while visually checking. See P. B.14. 2.126 A. Adjusting method [2] [4] 1. 2007 14. and fit the hole A [2] with the PC Gear/1 [1] hole while visually checking. 1.0 Feb. Turn the PC drive gear/1 [1].

2007 14.Field Service Ver. Mechanical adjustment 3. [1] A00JF2C455DA 513 Adjustment / Setting bizhub C550 .0 Feb. Mount the color PC drum Motor [1] while two hole positions are well set. 1.

1.14. Mechanical adjustment Field Service Ver.0 Feb. 2007 bizhub C550 Adjustment / Setting Blank Page 514 .

misfeed location. and paper location are displayed on the control panel of the machine. 1.519 P.523 P.526 515 Troubleshooting . 2007 15.522 P.1 Misfeed display • When a paper misfeed occurs.Field Service Ver.524 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] Misfeed at manual bypass Manual bypass tray door feed section Misfeed at duplex preregistration section Misfeed at LCT feed section Misfeed at LCT transport section Misfeed at vertical transport section Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section Manual bypass tray door. Jam display 15.0 Feb.520 P.37 P.521 P. Jam display Troubleshooting 15. the misfeed message. Lower right door Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit Upper right door.525 P. bizhub C550 A00JF4C501DA Display Code *1 1101 1201 1301 1401 1001 9201 1501 1708 2001 1709 Jam type Misfeed at tray 1 feed section Misfeed at tray 2 feed section Misfeed at tray 3 feed section Misfeed at tray 4 feed section Misfeed processing location Manual bypass tray door Lower right door Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit Lower right door Action P. See P. Duplex door See the LU-301 Service Manual.

Regarding jam at paper exit options.1. and close the door. To identify misfeed locations. 2007 Jam type 2nd image transfer section Tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section Misfeed at exit section Misfeed at duplex transport section Misfeed processing location Upper right door Lower right door.51 See the FS-517/608 Service Manual. See P.0 Feb.527 P. Tray 3/4 horizontal transport unit Upper right door Duplex door Action P. Jam display Display Field Service Ver. See P. clear the sheet of paper misfed. 1. 516 .1 Misfeed display resetting procedure • Open the corresponding door. 15.530 Code *1 3001 1710 3201 9301 6601 6602 6603 6604 6605 7216 7217 7218 7219 7220 7221 7222 7223 7224 bizhub C550 [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] See the DF-611 Service Manual.528 P.101 [20] [21] 7225 7226 7228 [20] 7229 7230 7248 7281 [21] 7282 7283 7290 7542 7543 [21] Troubleshooting *1: JAM code is displayed at [Paper Jam History] under [Counter] available from Service Mode. use the jam codes and refer to the above list.529 P. jam codes are available by selecting [Service Mode] → [Counter] → [JAM].15.

517 Troubleshooting PS29 . 1.2 Sensor layout bizhub C550 [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [10] [8] [9] [1] [2] Exhaust sensor ADU transport sensor/1 PS39 PS47 PS38 PS40 PS48 PS4 [6] [7] [8] [9] A00JF4C502DA Tray 2 vertical transport sensor Intermediate roller sensor Tray 4 paper feed sensor Horizontal transport sensor PS12 PS28 PS26 [3]*1 Timing roller sensor [3]*1 OHP detection sensor [4] [5] ADU transport sensor/2 Tray 1 vertical transport sensor [10] Tray 3 paper feed sensor PS21 *1: Two different types of sensors are located in the area near [3]. Jam display 15. 2007 15.0 Feb.Field Service Ver.

Check item Does paper meet product specifications? Is the paper curled. deformed. Troubleshooting 518 . rect position to accommodate the paper? Are the actuators operating correctly? Correct or replace the defective actuator. or is the paper path deformed or worn? Are rolls/rollers dirty. wavy.15. 1.3. or damp? Is a foreign object present along the paper path. or worn? Replace paper. Replace paper. Clean or replace the defective roll/roller.0 Feb. Jam display Field Service Ver. Action Are the edge guide and trailing edge stop at the corSet as necessary. Clean the paper path and replace if necessary. first perform the following initial check items.3 Solution bizhub C550 15. 2007 15.1 Initial check items • When a paper misfeed occurs.

a door or cover is opened and closed. jam B. Detection timing .0 Feb. loop forming in front of the timing roller is not complete before the rise timing of the registration motor.3. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. sensor check CL1 operation check M22 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN4PFTDB-8 (ON) PFTDB CN4PFTDB-14 (ON) PFTDB CN5PFTDB-5 to 8 — — Location (Electrical component) — P-5 P-5 P-3 — — 519 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 A.2 Misfeed at tray 1 feed section Type Detection of misfeed at tray 1 feed section Detection of paper left in tray 1 feed section Tray 1 feed section loop registration reversing jam Description 15. • The tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON. Tray 1 feed section • For paper fed from the tray1. due to a delay in paper arrival. Jam display • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray1 starts to feed paper. Action Relevant parts Take-up motor (M22) Tray 1 paper feed clutch (CL1) Tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PS4 I/O check. TOD permit continues to be disabled for a predeTOD permit waiting termined period of time after the timing of TOD output. • For paper fed from the tray1.Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 15.

Jam display 15.0 Feb.3. TOD permit continues to be disabled for a predeTOD permit waiting termined period of time after the timing of TOD output. sensor check CL2 operation check M22 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN8BPFTDB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN8APFTDB-1 (ON) PFTDB CN5PFTDB-5 to 8 — — Location (Electrical component) — P-6 P-6 P-3 — — Troubleshooting 520 . a door or cover is opened and closed. • Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON. Tray 2 feed section • For paper fed from the tray2. jam B. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.15. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at tray 2 feed section Detection of paper left in tray 2 Description • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray2 starts to feed paper. Action Relevant parts Take-up motor (M22) Tray 2 paper feed clutch (CL2) Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PS12 I/O check. 2007 Misfeed at tray 2 feed section A. 1.3 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.

Jam display Type Detection of misfeed at tray 3 feed section Detection of paper left in tray 3 Description • The leading edge of the paper does not block the tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 3 starts to feed paper.Field Service Ver. Detection timing . 1. sensor check CL5 operation check M25 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN10PFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN25PFTDB-5 (ON) PFTDB CN12PFTDB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — V-6 V-5 V-12 — — 521 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 A. 2007 15. jam B. Action Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Tray 3 paper feed clutch (CL5) Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PS21 I/O check.0 Feb. • Tray3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON. a door or cover is opened and closed. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Tray 3 feed section • For paper fed from the tray3.4 Misfeed at tray 3 feed section 15. TOD permit continues to be disabled for a predeTOD permit waiting termined period of time after the timing of TOD output.3.

Jam display 15. 2007 Misfeed at tray 4 feed section A. 1. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at tray 4 feed section Detection of paper left in tray 4 Description • The leading edge of the paper does not unblock the tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the tray 4 starts to feed paper. TOD permit continues to be disabled for a predeTOD permit waiting termined period of time after the timing of TOD output.0 Feb. Action Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Tray 4 paper feed clutch (CL7) Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Initial check items PS26 I/O check. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. a door or cover is opened and closed.3. Tray 4 feed section • For paper fed from the tray4. • Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON.5 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. jam B. sensor check CL7 operation check M25 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN9PFTDB-3 (ON) PFTDB CN24PFTDB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN12PFTDB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — V-8 V-7 V-12 — — Troubleshooting 522 .15.

sensor check PS36 I/O check. sensor check PS35 I/O check.0 Feb. 2007 15. TOD permit waiting jam B. loop forming has not been complete before a sheet enters the timing roller because the rise timing of load to perform registration is earlier than the rise timing of load to form a loop. Manual bypass feed section loop registration reversing jam • For paper fed from the manual bypass. • The bypass paper limit sensor (PS35) is not blocked after the lapse of a predeDetection of termined period of time after the paper lifting plate is started to be raised from misfeed at manual the standby position to the paper feed position. sensor check M27 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN4PFTDB-8 (ON) PFTDB CN26PFTDB<B>-10 (ON) PFTDB CN26PFTDB<A>-11 (ON) PFTDB CN26PFTDB<B>-1 to 4 — — Location (Electrical component) — P-5 P-11 P-12 — — 523 Troubleshooting P-12 bizhub C550 A.3.6 Misfeed at manual bypass feed section 15. the bypass paper lower sensor (PS36) is not blocked after the lapse of a predetermined period of time after the paper lifting plate is started to be lowered from the paper feed position to the standby position.Field Service Ver. 1. Jam display Type Description • The leading edge of the paper does not turn ON the tray1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the manual bypass starts to feed paper. bypass feed section • For paper fed from the manual bypass tray. Action Relevant parts Bypass paper feed motor (M27) Tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) Bypass paper limit sensor (PS35) Bypass paper lower sensor (PS36) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Initial check items PS4 I/O check. • For paper fed from the manual bypass. Detection timing . TOD permit continues to be disabled for Manual bypass feed section a predetermined period of time after the timing of TOD output.

15. • For the second-side feed of paper in the duplex mode. TOD permit continues to Duplex pre-registration section be disabled for a predetermined period of time after the timing of TOD output. TOD permit waiting jam B. sensor check PS40 I/O check.3. 1. Jam display 15. 2007 Misfeed at duplex pre-registration section A. loop forming has not Duplex pre-registration section loop been complete before the second side of a sheet enters the timing roller registration reversbecause the rise timing of load to perform registration is earlier than the rise ing jam detection timing of load to form a loop. Action Relevant parts ADU transport motor/1 (M31) ADU transport motor/2 (M32) Timing roller sensor (PS38) OHP detection sensor (PS40) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Initial check items PS38 I/O check.0 Feb. • For the second-side feed of paper in the duplex mode. • The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time after a duplex paper feed sequence has been started.7 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at duplex pre-registration section Description • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after a duplex paper feed sequence has been started. sensor check M32 operation check M31 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PRCB CN36PRCB-6 (ON) PRCB CN36PRCB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN17PFTDB-10 to 13 PFTDB CN17PFTDB-14 to 17 — — Location (Electrical component) — K-4 K-4 to 5 P-8 P-9 — — Troubleshooting 524 .

Action Relevant parts Tray 1 vertical transport motor (M5) Tray 2 vertical transport motor (M7) Vertical transport motor (M26) Tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Intermediate roller sensor (PS28) Timing roller sensor (PS38) OHP detection sensor (PS40) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Control signal — PFTDB CN4PFTDB-8 (ON) PFTDB CN8BPFTDB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-18 (ON) PRCB CN36PRCB-6 (ON) PRCB CN36PRCB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN5PFTDB-1 to 4 PFTDB CN5PFTDB-9 to 12 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Initial check items PS4 I/O check.Field Service Ver. loop forming has not been complete before a sheet enters the timing roller because the rise timing of load to perform registration is earlier than the rise timing of load to form a loop.8 Misfeed at vertical transport section Type Description 15.3. B. • The tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has turned ON the PS12. Detection of misfeed at vertical transport section • The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has turned ON the tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4). sensor check PS40 I/O check. • The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked the PS12. 1. sensor check PS28 I/O check. sensor check PS12 I/O check. • The tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is not turned OFF even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has turned ON the PS4. 2007 15. sensor check M5 operation check M7 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB — P-5 P-6 V-11 K-4 K-4 to 5 P-3 P-4 — — 525 Troubleshooting Step Action Location (Electrical component) bizhub C550 A. Vertical transport section loop registration reversing jam • For paper fed from the tray 1/2/3/4 or LU-301. • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has turned ON the tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4). Detection timing . sensor check PS38 I/O check. Jam display • The tray 1 vertical transport sensor (PS4) is not turned ON even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has turned ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12).0 Feb.

2007 Misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section A.15.9 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.3. sensor check CL3 operation check CL4 operation check CL6 operation check M25 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN10PFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-15 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-8 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN10PFTDB-10 (ON) PFTDB CN12PFTDB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — V-6 V-11 V-10 V-10 V-7 V-12 — — Troubleshooting 6 7 8 9 526 .0 Feb. • The tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the PS21. • The horizontal transport sensor (PS29) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21). Jam display 15. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Action Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Tray 3 transport clutch (CL6) Horizontal transport clutch 1 (CL3) Horizontal transport clutch 2 (CL4) Tray 3 paper feed sensor (PS21) Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 Initial check items PS21 I/O check. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at tray 3/4 horizontal transport section Description • The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is not unblocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has blocked the horizontal transport sensor (PS29). B. a door or cover is opened and closed. sensor check PS29 I/O check. Detection of paper left in tray 3/4 horizontal transport section • Horizontal transport sensor (PS29) is blocked when the main power switch is turned ON. 1.

or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. Detection of paper left in 2nd image transfer section B. sensor check PS39 I/O check.0 Feb. a door or cover is opened and closed. sensor check PS40 I/O check. • The leading edge of paper does not unblock the exhaust sensor (PS39) since the registration motor (M2) is activated. Action Relevant parts Registration motor (M2) Fusing motor (M30) Timing roller sensor (PS38) OHP detection sensor (PS40) Exhaust sensor (PS39) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Initial check items PS38 check. a door or cover is opened and closed. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. • The OHP detection sensor (PS40) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON.3. 1. • The timing roller sensor (PS38) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON. Jam display Type Detection of misfeed at 2nd image transfer section • A sheet of paper does not turn OFF the OHP detection sensor (PS40) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet turns ON the PS40. sensor check M2 operation check M30 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PRCB CN36PRCB-6 (ON) PRCB CN36PRCB-2 (ON) PRCB CN36PRCB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN23PFTDB-1 to 4 PRCB CN7PRCB-3 (REM) PRCB CN7PRCB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — K-4 K-4 to 5 K-4 P-9 K-7 — — 527 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 A. 2007 15. Detection timing .10 Misfeed at 2nd image transfer section Description 15. • A sheet of paper does not block the timing roller sensor (PS38) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet unblocks PS38.Field Service Ver.

1. sensor check CL3 operation check CL4 operation check M25 operation check M26 operation check M7 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN8BPFTDB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN9PFTDB-3 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-18 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-15 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-8 (ON) PFTDB CN11BPFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN12PFTDB-6 (LOCK) PFTDB CN19PFTDB-1 to 4 PFTDB CN5PFTDB-9 to 12 — — Location (Electrical component) — P-6 V-8 V-11 V-11 V-10 V-10 V-12 V-11 P-4 — — Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 528 . • A sheet of paper does not unblock the horizontal transport sensor (PS29) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the PS29. sensor check PS29 I/O check. 2007 Misfeed at tray 3/4 intermediate transport roller section Description • A sheet of paper does not turn ON the tray2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet turns ON the intermediate roller sensor (PS28).3. Detection timing Type • A sheet of paper does not turn ON the intermediate roller sensor (PS28) after a Detection of predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet unblocks the tray4 misfeed at tray 3/4 paper feed sensor (PS26). intermediate transport roller section • A sheet of paper does not block the tray4 paper feed sensor (PS26) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet unblocks the PS26. a door or cover is opened and closed. Action Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Vertical transport motor (M26) Tray 2 vertical transport motor (M7) Horizontal transport clutch 1 (CL3) Horizontal transport clutch 2 (CL4) Tray 2 vertical transport sensor (PS12) Tray 4 paper feed sensor (PS26) Intermediate roller sensor (PS28) Horizontal Transport sensor (PS29) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 Initial check items PS12 check.11 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. or a misfeed or malleft in tray 3/4 intermediate transport function is reset.15. Detection of paper • The intermediate roller sensor (PS28) is turned ON when the main power switch is turned ON. sensor check PS28 I/O check.0 Feb. sensor check PS26 check. Jam display 15. roller section B. A.

0 Feb. Detection timing . or a misfeed or malfunction is reset. • The ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the switchback sequence is started. B. 1. a door or cover is opened and closed.Field Service Ver. sensor check PS47 I/O check. Action Relevant parts Exit motor (M4) Fusing motor (M30) Switchback motor (M33) Gate switch solenoid (SD) Exhaust sensor (PS39) ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Initial check items PS39 I/O check.3.12 Misfeed at exit section 15. sensor check M4 operation check M30 operation check M33 operation check SD operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PRCB CN36PRCB-2 (ON) PFTDB CN17BPFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN14PFTDB-5 to 8 PRCB CN7PRCB-3 (REM) PRCB CN7PRCB-6 (LOCK) PFTDB CN14PFTDB-1 to 4 PFTDB CN14BPFTDB-9 (ON) — — Location (Electrical component) — K-4 P-8 P-2 K-7 P-2 C-20 — — 529 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 A. 2007 15. • The exhaust sensor (PC39) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON. Jam display Type Detection of misfeed at exit section Detection of paper left in exit section Description • The exhaust sensor (PC39) is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the paper has unblocked PC39.

0 Feb. Jam display 15. 2007 Misfeed at duplex transport section A.3. B. or a misfeed or malfunction is reset.15. or ADU transport sensor/2 (PS48) is unblocked when the main power switch is turned ON. • ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47) is blocked. Detection timing Type Detection of misfeed at duplex transport section Detection of paper left in duplex transport section Description • A sheet of paper does not unblock the ADU transport sensor/2 (PS48) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47). • A sheet of paper does not unblock the ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47) after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the sheet blocks the PS47. sensor check PS48 I/O check. Action Relevant parts ADU transport motor/1 (M31) ADU transport motor/2 (M32) ADU transport sensor/1 (PS47) ADU transport sensor/2 (PS48) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Initial check items PS47 I/O check.13 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. a door or cover is opened and closed. 1. sensor check M31 operation check M32 operation check Change PFTDB Change PRCB Action Control signal — PFTDB CN17BPFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN17BPFTDB-3 (ON) PFTDB CN17PFTDB-14 to 17 PFTDB CN17PFTDB-10 to 13 — — Location (Electrical component) — P-8 P-7 P-9 P-8 — — Troubleshooting 530 .

Malfunction code 16. Malfunction code 16.1 Alert code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that.Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 16. on detecting a malfunction. • Touching the maintenance call mark will display the corresponding warning code on the state confirm screen. gives the corresponding warning code and maintenance call mark on the control panel. bizhub C550 Troubleshooting A00JF4E511DA maintenance call mark 531 .0 Feb.

• The thin line detection level and the warning display can be changed by the following setting. This warning will be displayed if the original is set to ADF when stain exist. the corresponding warning code appears. sensor’s output voltage with selected light intensity is 1. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Thin line Detect.0 V or under. it detects whether or not stain exist at the scanning guide when the ADF is closed. sensor’s output value of each color for hyper 0 gradation after the primary approximation is half the detection level on the belt surface or under • All density readings taken from the density pattern produced on the transfer belt are 1. output voltage detected for all eight sample patterns are 4. [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [This Line Detect.16. 2007 Alert code list • If an image stabilization or scanner fault occurs.1. it detects whether or not stain exist at the original glass moving unit when the ADF is closed. 1. density adjustment (Vg/Vdc adjustment). detected output value for IDC sensor did not go below threshold (half the value of what is detected by IDC sensor on the belt surface) for three consecutive times (position of the pattern end is not detected). • While recovering from the power save mode or when the main/sub power switch is ON.0 Feb. • When adjustment is complete. Setting] • While recovering from the power save mode or when the main/sub power switch is ON. • During image stabilization (gamma correction control).3 V or more. • The difference between the skew default position setting value and the cumulative amount of skew adjustment values goes over the predetermined value. This warning will be displayed if the original is set to ADF when stain exist. Malfunction code 16.0 g/m2 (IDC sensor photo receiver output) or less during max. • This setting is valid only when the [Detection during Paper Passing] available from the following setting is set to one between 2 and 6. D-2 Read guide trouble P-5 P-28 IDC sensor (front) failure IDC sensor (rear) failure Troubleshooting P-6 P-7 P-8 P-9 P-14 Cyan imaging unit failure Magenta imaging unit failure Yellow imaging unit failure Black imaging unit failure Skew correction trouble P-16 PC charge cleaning trouble 1 532 . • Charging cleaner home sensor is not transmitted even after the specified time has passed while the wire cleaning material is moving forward.1 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Setting] • When adjusting the IDC sensor. • During image stabilization (gamma correction control). Code S-1 D-1 Item CCD gain adjustment failure Split line detect Description • It is detected that the CCD clamp gain adjustment value is faulty.

• On the color shift test pattern. • The number of points detected in the main scan direction is more or less than the specified value during main scan direction registration correction. P-21 Color regist test pattern failure P-22 Color regist adjust failure P-27 P-31 Secondary transfer ATVC failure K PC encoder sensor malfunction 533 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 . 1. Malfunction code Description • Charging cleaner return sensor is not interrupted even after the specified time has passed when the wire cleaning material is moving forward. When the charging cleaner home sensor is not interrupted after the specified time has passed during the return operation. * Under the situation above occurs. • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during main scan direction registration correction. 2007 Code P-18 Item PC charge cleaning trouble 1 16. trouble code C-2101 will be given.Field Service Ver.0 Feb. the maximum and minimum deviations detected in the main and sub scan directions go over the predetermined value. • The number of points detected in the sub scan direction is more or less than the specified value during sub scan direction registration correction. • An abnormal average value is detected during an adjustment of the second image transfer ATVC value. • The color shift amount is greater than the specified range during sub scan direction registration correction. • While the K PC drum motor is rotating at a stable pace and lock signals are in an active (LOW=0) condition. an abnormal encoder pulse width continues to be detected over the predetermined period of time. control will be switched to the return operation after the warning is given.

and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if faulty. 16.2. Clean the lens.2. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. 1.3 D-2: Read guide trouble Relevant parts ADF scanning guide (DF-611) Troubleshooting Step 1 Action Wipe clean the surface of the ADF scanning guide with a soft cloth. See the DF-611 Service Manual.16. Change CCD sensor unit. Change IPB. Change IPB. 16.2. mirrors.1 S-1: CCD gain adjustment failure Relevant parts Scanner assy CCD sensor unit Image processing board (IPB) Action Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Correct the harness connection between CCDB and IPB if faulty.2 Solution bizhub C550 16.12 534 . 2007 16.2 D-1: Split line detect Relevant parts Original glass moving unit Image processing board (IPB) Printer control board (PRCB) Action Step 1 2 3 5 6 Wipe clean the glass surface of the original glass moving unit.0 Feb. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. Change original glass moving unit. See P. if it is dirty. CCD surface. or change scanner. Correct the harness connection between IPB and PRCB if faulty. Change PRCB.

Reinstall or reconnect IDCS/F or IDCS/R.2. Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. and select [State Confirmation] → [Level History 1] to check the IDC value. run an image stabilization sequence. 1. readjust. 2007 16. Change imaging unit. Malfunction code Relevant parts IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) Printer control board (PRCB) High voltage unit/1 (HV1) Transfer belt unit Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth. Clean IDCS/For IDCS/R if it is dirty Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. 535 Troubleshooting Select [Imaging Process Adjustment] → [D Max Density] and. IDC2: IDCS/R If the value is 1. if it is dirty Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged. IDC1: IDCS/F. Change the transfer belt unit. sensor shutter or connector. change IDCS/F or IDCS/R.7 16.4 16.6 16.0 Feb. Clean the contact of the imaging unit connector if dirty. Open/close the front door. Clean the IDC/registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) or IDC/registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) window if dirty.Field Service Ver.5 P-5: IDC sensor (front) failure 16.0 V or less. Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16.2.2. Change PRCB.9 P-6: Cyan imaging unit failure P-7: Magenta imaging unit failure P-8: Yellow imaging unit failure P-9: Black imaging unit failure Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y Imaging unit /K Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Transfer belt unit High voltage unit/1 (HV1) Printer control board (PRCB) Action Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary. bizhub C550 P-28 IDC sensor (rear) failure .2. Change PRCB.2. if it is installed or connected improperly.2. if the setting value is negative.8 16.

Change imaging unit. After the problem is resolved.16. See P. take actions to address the problem.2.10 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.410 • When this alert code is displayed. NOTE • After the PH unit is replaced.12 Troubleshooting P-16: PC charge cleaning trouble 1 P-18: PC charge cleaning trouble 2 Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44) Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 PS43 I/O check. 2007 P-14: Skew correction trouble Relevant parts IDC registration sensor/F (IDCS/F) IDC registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) PH unit Imaging unit Action Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Check the drive transmission portion of the Imaging Unit and correct as necessary. reset the skew default position for each color. Clean the contact of the imaging unit connector if dirty. sensor check PS44 I/O check.2. Malfunction code 16. Change REYB/PH. 1. Change PRCB.410 16. Clean IDCS/For IDCS/R if it is dirty Change IDCS/F or IDCS/R. sensor check M15 operation check Change imaging unit /K Change M15 Change PRCB Printer control board (PRCB) Action 536 . Touch keys as follows for this setting. sensor shutter or connector. according to the list. [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Skew adjustment] → [Skew adjustment] See P. select [Service Mode] → [Machine] → [Skew adjustment] → [Skew adjustment reset] and perform the skew adjustment reset.0 Feb.11 16. Reinstall or reconnect IDCS/F or IDCS/R. Change PH unit. if it is installed or connected improperly.2.

2. Change PRCB. Malfunction code Printer control board (PRCB) Action Wipe clean the surface of the transfer belt with a soft cloth. Check the vertical transport guide for installed position and correct as necessary. Change HV2. Check the image transfer entrance guide for proper installation and correct if necessary.14 P-22: Color regist adjust failure Relevant parts IDC/registration sensor /F (IDCS/F) IDC/registration sensor/R (IDCS/R) Step 1 2 3 4 Printer control board (PRCB) Action Slide out the imaging unit and reinstall it in position. 1. Change the transfer belt unit. Check the contact at the joint of the 2nd image transfer assy and HV2.13 P-21: Color regist test pattern failure Relevant parts Transfer belt unit PH unit Step 1 2 3 4 16.2. 537 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 . if it is dirty. 16. Change PRCB. Reinstall or reconnect IDCS/F or IDCS/R if it is installed or connected improperly. Clean the joint or correct if necessary. Check that the spring does not come off during the pressure operation of the 2nd transfer roller and correct if necessary.0 Feb. Change the image transfer belt unit if the transfer belt is damaged.Field Service Ver. Change PRCB. Change the PH unit. 2007 16. Clean the joint or correct if necessary.2. 16.15 P-27: Secondary transfer ATVC failure Relevant parts High voltage unit/2 (HV2) Printer control board (PRCB) Image transfer entrance guide 2nd image transfer assy Transfer belt unit Action Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Check roller opposed to the 2nd image transfer roller is grounded.

A sensor is faulty if its value does not change. For details how to display.16.16 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.0 Feb. clean of dirt if any. Malfunction code 16. Call the [Sensor Check] screen to the screen by way of Service Mode. Troubleshooting 538 . During the stabilizer sequence. check to see if the values of the phase detection sensors (K PC encoder sensor/1 and K PC encoder sensor/2) change. *1 Check the sensor. 4. Wipe the sensor. Change PRCB. Open the front door and turn ON the main power switch of the machine. for installed position and proper connector connection. change the transport drive assy. 1. 2. Close the front door and start [Stabilizer]. *1: Faulty sensor check procedure 1. If P-31 persists. for which a faulty condition has been checked. see “Adjustment /Setting.” See P.2. 2007 P-31: PC home sensor (K) malfunction Relevant parts K PC encoder sensor/1 (PC45) K PC encoder sensor/2 (PC46) Step 1 2 3 4 5 Transport drive assy Printer control board (PRCB) Action Perform the faulty sensor check procedure.461 3. for which a faulty condition has been checked. 5.

Field Service Ver. B Tray 3/4 B Tray 1 B Tray 2 B Tray 3 B Tray 4 B C0216 LCT up/down abnormality See LU-301 Service Manual.1 Trouble code list * For the details of the malfunction codes of the options. see the Service Manual for the corresponding option. • The tray 2 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.40 C0301 Suction fan motor’s failure to turn • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • The tray 3 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started. • The tray 4 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started. See P. 2007 16. C0105 Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing C0202 Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality C0204 Tray 2 feeder up/down abnormality C0206 Tray 3 feeder up/down abnormality C0208 Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality • The lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • The tray 1 upper limit sensor is not blocked even after the lapse of a given period of time after the lifting motion has been started.3 Trouble code • The machine’s CPU performs a self-diagnostics function that.3.• The lock signal remains HIGH for a predetation motor failure to turn termined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.0 Feb. gives the corresponding malfunction code on the control panel. Code Item Detection timing Trouble isolation com. LCT ⎯ B B 539 . on detecting a malfunction. 1. bizhub C550 Troubleshooting A00JF4E512DA 16.Rank pliant unit C0104 Tray 3/4 feeder transpor. Malfunction code 16.

the charging cleaner home sensor is not blocked after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. See P. Punch B ⎯ B 540 . 1.19 • During backward movement of the cleaner. 2007 Trouble isolation com.0 Feb.Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.115 ure C1102 Tray ascent/descent drive failure C1103 Aligning plate drive failure C1104 Paper exit roller drive failure C1105 Paper exit drive failure C1106 Stapler movement drive failure C1107 Stapler clincher rotation drive failure C1108 Stapler rotation motor drive failure C1109 Stapler F unit drive failure C1110 Stapler R unit drive failure C1111 Stapler F unit clincher drive failure C1112 Stapler R unit clincher drive failure C1113 Saddle stitching stopper motor drive failure C1114 Stapler side guide motor drive failure C1115 Folding knife motor drive failure C1116 Folding transfer motor drive failure B B B B B B B B staple B B B B B B Half-Fold/ Tri-Fold Center Stapling B B Troubleshooting C1127 Punch kit movement motor drive failure C2101 PC charge cleaning malfunction See PK-512/513 Service Manual. C0351 Paper cooling fan trouble ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ staple ⎯ ⎯ B C1101 Shift roller motor drive fail. Malfunction code Field Service Ver.16. See P.See FS-517/608 Service Manual.

1. the pressure welding alienation sensor/K or the pressure welding alienation sensor/color is not in the status corresponding to each of the transfer belt pressure/retraction operations.Rank pliant unit C2151 Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation • The pressure welding alienation sensor doesn’t turn OFF (retracting) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd image transfer roller is retracting.0 Feb. See the table below. 2007 16. the pressure welding alienation sensor/K or the pressure welding alienation sensor/color is not in the status corresponding to each of the transfer belt pressure/retraction operations. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com.Field Service Ver. See the table below. • Even after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the transfer belt starts pressure/retraction operation. • At the completion of transfer belt pressure/ retraction operations. • The pressure welding alienation sensor doesn’t turn ON (pressuring) even after the lapse of a given period of time after the 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor has started rotating during the 2nd image transfer roller is pressuring. Sensor status (K: Color) ON (not blocked) :OFF (blocked) ⎯ B C2152 Transfer belt pressure welding alienation Operation • Color and K retraction → K pressure • Color and K pressure → K pressure • Color and K retraction → Color and K pressure • K pressure → Color and K pressure • K pressure → Color and K retraction • Color and K pressure →Color and K retraction Position ⎯ B K pressure Color and K pressure ON (not blocked):ON (not blocked) Color OFF (blocked): and K OFF (blocked) retraction 541 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing .

⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B 542 . C2351 K toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn C2352 Color toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning. C225C K PC drum motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a turning at abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. C2255 Color developing motor’s failure to turn • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. ⎯ B ⎯ B C2258 Cleaner motor’s turning at • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. 2007 Trouble isolation com. ⎯ B C2253 Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn ⎯ B C2254 Color PC drum motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a turning at abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning. • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning. C225B K PC drum motor’s failure • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a to turn predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning. C2257 Cleaner motor’s failure to turn • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.16. ⎯ B ⎯ B Troubleshooting C225A K developing motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a turning at abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. a leak IU identification process is executed. Then the trouble code corresponding to the IU color is displayed.0 Feb. C2160 PC charge (C) malfunction C2161 PC charge (M) malfunction C2162 PC charge (Y) malfunction C2163 PC charge (K) malfunction C2164 PC charge malfunction C2204 Waste toner agitating motor’s failure to turn ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ B B B B B • The waste toner agitating motor lock sensor continues to be blocked or unblocked for a predetermined period of time when the motor is turning. C2164 is displayed at the first detection and then after the trouble is reset. In this case. 1.Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing • When electrostatic charge output is ON. electrostatic charge leak detection system continues to detect leaks for a predetermined period of time. ⎯ B ⎯ B C2256 Color developing motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a turning at abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. C2259 K developing motor’s failure to turn • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning.

C2551 Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor • When sampling data is determined in TC ratio calculation control. 1. ⎯ B ⎯ B C2451 Release new transfer belt • A new installation is not detected when a unit new transfer cleaner unit (image transfer belt unit) is installed. • When sampling data is determined in TC ratio calculation control. is a predetermined value or more for a given number of times consecutively.Field Service Ver. is a predetermined value or more for a given number of times consecutively. C2554 Abnormally high toner • TC ratio in the developing unit. ⎯ B ⎯ B C2552 Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor ⎯ B C2553 Abnormally low toner • When sampling data is determined in TC density detected magenta ratio calculation control. TCR sensor output is higher than a predetermined value for a predetermined number of times in a row even though there is toner in the sub hopper. which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism.0 Feb. ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B C2556 Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor ⎯ B C2557 Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor ⎯ B 543 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing . TCR sensor output is higher than a predetermined value for a predetermined number of times in a row even though there is toner in the sub hopper. • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning. TCR sensor output is higher than a predetermined value for a predetermined number of times in a row even though there is toner in the sub hopper. • TC ratio in the developing unit. C2555 Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor • When sampling data is determined in TC ratio calculation control. which is density detected magenta determined by toner replenishing amount TCR sensor control mechanism. is a predetermined value or more for a given number of times consecutively. • TC ratio in the developing unit which is determined by Toner replenishing amount control mechanism.Rank pliant unit C2353 IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn C2354 Rear side cooling fan motor’s failure to turn • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor is turning. TCR sensor output TCR sensor is higher than a predetermined value for a predetermined number of times in a row even though there is toner in the sub hopper. 2007 16. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com.

Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing • TC ratio in the developing unit.0 Feb. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ Troubleshooting C3101 Fusing roller separation failure • With the fusing roller being retracted. which has been read out. • The error was found when reading out the counter value. the pressure home sensor did not turn ON (pressed) even after the fusing retraction position sensor counted up the specified number of pulse after the fusing pressure retraction motor started rotating. is read out again and found as error. checked and founded as error. • TCR sensor automatic adjustment does not function properly. is a predetermined value or more for a given number of times consecutively. C2558 Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor ⎯ B C2559 Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure C255A Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure C255B Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure C255C Black TCR sensor adjustment failure C2650 Main backup media access error C2651 EEPROM access error (IU C) C2652 EEPROM access error (IU M) C2653 EEPROM access error (IU Y) C2654 EEPROM access error (IU K) C2A01 EEPROM access error (TC C) C2A02 EEPROM access error (TC M) C2A03 EEPROM access error (TC Y) C2A04 EEPROM access error (TC K) ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ B B B B ⎯ C C C C C C C C • Contact the responsible people of KMBT before taking some countermeasures.16. • With the pressure roller being pressed. ⎯ B 544 . 2007 Trouble isolation com. • The error was found when reading out the counter value. is read out again and found as error. which is determined by toner replenishing amount control mechanism. checked and founded as error. 1. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ • The re-written data. the encoder pulse sensor does not change even after the specified period of time has passed after the fusing pressure retraction motor started rotating. • With the fusing roller being pressed. failing to adjust to an appropriate value. which has been read out. • The re-written data. the pulse of the encoder sensor does not change even after the specified period of time has passed after the fusing pressure retraction motor started rotating.

the NC sensor does not detect a temperature as high as a predetermined one though a predetermined period of time has elapsed. • After warm-up operation starts. • The signal is turned ON to activate the hard ratchet in the middle of the heating side. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com. pulse signals are not input either of the heating roller rotation sensor/1 or the heating roller rotation sensor/2 within a predetermined period of time. 2007 16. • The signal is turned ON to activate the hard ratchet at the edges of the heating side.Rank pliant unit C3102 Fusing roller failure to turn • When the IH power supply is turned ON. C3423 Fusing heaters trouble (pressurizing side) • After warm-up operation starts. • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • A new installation is not detected when a new fusing Unit is installed. the fusing pressure roller thermistor does not detect a temperature as high as a predetermined one though a predetermined period of time has elapsed. 1. C3201 Fusing motor failure to turn C3202 Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ A C3424 Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side) ⎯ A C3425 Fusing heaters trouble (NC sensor) ⎯ A C3461 Release new fusing unit C3721 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Center of the heating roller) ⎯ A C3722 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) ⎯ A 545 Troubleshooting ⎯ B bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing . • After warm-up operation starts. ⎯ A ⎯ B ⎯ B C3303 Fusing cooling fan motor/ • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for 1 failure to turn a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.0 Feb.Field Service Ver. • The heating roller thermistor/3 continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. C3304 Fusing cooling fan motor/ • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for 2 failure to turn a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • The heating roller thermistor/2 continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. C3305 Fusing cooling fan motor/ • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for 3 failure to turn a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. the soaking roller thermistor does not detect a temperature as high as a predetermined one though a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

C3922 Fusing sensor wire breaks • At the warm-up stage. the heating roller detection thermistor/3 voltage does not decrease by (Center of the heating predetermined steps (temperature rise) roller) within a predetermined time. • The signal is turned ON to activate the hard ratchet on the soaking side. ⎯ A Troubleshooting ⎯ A ⎯ A ⎯ A ⎯ A 546 . Malfunction code Field Service Ver. C3923 Fusing sensor wire breaks • At the warm-up stage. • The soaking roller thermistor/1 continues to detect a temperature lower than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. C3924 Fusing sensor wire breaks • At the warm-up stage. the NC sensor voltdetection (NC sensor) age does not increase by predetermined steps (temperature rise) within a predetermined period of time.16. • The heating roller thermistor/2 continues to detect a temperature lower than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. the fusing pressure detection (pressurizing roller thermistor voltage does not decrease side) by predetermined steps (temperature rise) within a predetermined period of time.0 Feb. 2007 Trouble isolation com. • The NC sensor continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. • The fusing pressure roller thermistor continues to detect a temperature lower than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. • The soaking roller thermistor/1 continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. the heating roller detection thermistor/2 voltage does not decrease by (Edge of the heating predetermined steps (temperature rise) roller) within a predetermined period of time. 1. • The NC sensor continues to detect a temperature lower than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. the soaking roller detection (soaking side) thermistor/1 voltage does not decrease by predetermined steps (temperature rise) within a predetermined period of time.Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing • The fusing pressure roller thermistor continues to detect a temperature higher than a predetermined one for a predetermined period of time. C3925 Fusing sensor wire breaks • At the warm-up stage. C3723 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (pressurizing side) C3724 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side) ⎯ A ⎯ A C3725 Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NS sensor) C3822 Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) C3823 Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (pressurizing side) C3824 Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking side) C3825 Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC sensor) ⎯ A ⎯ A ⎯ A ⎯ A ⎯ A C3921 Fusing sensor wire breaks • At the warm-up stage.

this status cannot be detected mechanically. ⎯ A C3B03 IH malfunction (monitor) ⎯ A C3B04 IH malfunction C4101 Polygon motor rotation trouble ⎯ A ⎯ B C4301 PH cooling fan motor failure to turn C4501 Laser malfunction ⎯ B ⎯ B C5104 Transfer belt motor’s failure to turn ⎯ B C5105 Transfer belt motor’s • The motor lock signal remains LOW for a turning at abnormal timing predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. (Malfunction of IH heater operation) • Malfunction occurs in the fusing CPU.0 Feb. • The fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • The motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. 2007 16. • The polygon motor fails to turn stably even after the lapse of a given period of time after activating the polygon motor. ⎯ B 547 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing . (IH heater operation failure) • Though the IH heater is OFF. • SOS signal is not detected even after the lapse of a given period of time after staring the laser output. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com. C5304 IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn C5305 IH cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn C5306 IH cooling fan motor/3’s failure to turn C5351 Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn C5354 Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. the ON status is detected. 1. • SOS signal is not detected for a given period of time during printing or IDC sensor adjustment. • The fan motor lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.Rank pliant unit C3B02 IH malfunction (CPU) • A failure in communication with the fusing CPU continues for a predetermined period of time. • Motor lock signal detects HIGH for a given period time consecutively during the polygon motor is rotating. mechanically. • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B ⎯ B C5370 MFP control board cooling • The fan Lock signal remains HIGH for a prefan motor’s failure to turn determined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary.Field Service Ver. • Though the IH heater is ON.

16. 1. C6102 Drive system home sensor malfunction B C6103 Slider over running Scanner B C6301 Optical cooling fan motor’s failure to turn C6704 Image input time out B C C6751 CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure B C6F01 Scanner sequence trouble 1 Scanner C C6F02 Reserved C6F03 Reserved C6F04 Reserved Troubleshooting C6F05 Reserved C6F06 Reserved C6F07 Reserved C6F08 Reserved C6F09 Reserved C6F10 Reserved C6FDC Reserved 548 .0 Feb. • The fan lock signal remains HIGH for a predetermined continuous period of time while the motor remains stationary. at which it blocks the scanner home sensor.Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing • The scanner home sensor is unable to detect the scanner located at its home position. • Image data is not input from the image processing board (IPB) to the printer control board (PRCB). • The adjustment value is 0 or 255 during a CCD clamp adjustment. • The scanner home sensor is unable to detect a scanner even when the scanner motor has been driven to move the scanner over the maximum travelling distance. 2007 Trouble isolation com. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. • The peak value of the output data is 64 or less during a CCD gain adjustment. • The scanner home sensor detects the scanner at its home position during a period of time that begins with the time when a prescan command and a scan preparation command are executed and ends when a home return command is executed. • The original transport interval becomes shorter than the designed value due to an original transport control error in original reading in ADF. • The scanner home sensor detects the scanner when the scanner has moved the maximum travelling distance from the position.

sequence error among FAX boards See DF-611 Service Manual. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com. See FK-502 Service Manual. • A controller hardware error is detected in the network I/F. • The controller of the printer control board (PRCB) is faulty. See P.59 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ B B B B B A • The output from the CCD sensor is a predetermined value or less during CCD sensor gain adjustment. Scanner Scanner A ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C C C C C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C 549 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing . 1. • A controller start failure is detected in the controller interface. • The average output value of the CCD sensor with the scanner at its standby position is a predetermined value or more at the end of a scan job.Rank pliant unit C8101 Before reading pressure welding alienation mechanism C8102 Turn around pressure welding alienation trouble C8103 Lift up mechanism trouble C8104 Glass movement trouble C8302 Read cooling fan trouble C9401 Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection C9402 Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection CA051 Standard controller configuration failure CA052 Controller hardware error CA053 Controller start failure CB001 FAX board error 1 CB002 FAX board error 2 CB003 FAX board error 3 CB051 FAX board mount failure line 1 CB052 FAX board mount failure line 2 CB110 FAX driver error: Instance generation error or observer registration error CB111 FAX driver error: Configuration space initialization NG CB112 FAX driver error: Semaphore acquisition. release error CB113 FAX driver error: Sequence error among main body tasks CB114 FAX driver error: Message queue control error CB115 FAX driver error: Main body .Field Service Ver. 2007 16.0 Feb.

board nonresponse (Nonresponse after initialization) CB117 FAX driver error: ACK waiting timeout error CB118 FAX driver error: Receiving undefined frame CB119 FAX driver error: DMA transfer error CB120 JC soft error CB122 Device error (GA LOCAL SRAM) CB123 Device error (DRAM) CB125 Device error (GA) CB126 Timeout error due to nonresponse from DC during suspension process CB127 Timeout error due to nonresponse from CC during suspension process CB128 Timeout error due to nonresponse from LINE during suspension process CB129 Timeout error due to nonresponse from file system/ file driver during suspension process CB130 MIF driver error: Driver soft error CB131 MIF driver error: Reception frame length error from main CB132 MIF driver error: Reception frame header error from main CB133 MIF driver error: 232C i/f sequence error CB134 MIF driver error: DPRAM i/f sequence error CB135 MIF driver error: DPRAM CTL/STL register error CB136 MIF driver error: AKC waiting timeout ⎯ C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C C C C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ ⎯ C C Troubleshooting ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C 550 . Malfunction code Field Service Ver.Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing CB116 FAX driver error: FAX See FK-502 Service Manual. 1.0 Feb.16. 2007 Trouble isolation com.

2007 16. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com. 1. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C C C C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C C ⎯ C 551 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing .0 Feb.Field Service Ver.Rank pliant unit CB137 MIF driver error: DPRAM RESET reception CB140 MSG I/F Error with JC CB141 I/F error with main: I/F error with driver CB142 I/F error with main: Undefined command reception CB143 I/F error with main: Command frame length error CB144 I/F error with main: Command parameter length error CB145 I/F error with main: Undefined parameter CB146 I/F error with main: Command/response sequence error CB150 Line control: External class instance acquisition error CB151 Line control: Job start error (Starting job parameter error/child job generation error) CB152 Line control: Doc access error (Report buf access error) CB153 Line control: Response wait timeout from external task CB154 Line control: Internal que table control error (create/enque/deque) CB160 1 destination control: Instance generation error CB161 1 destination control: Timeout error CB162 1 destination control: Interface error CB163 1 destination control: Message que control error CB164 1 destination control: Semaphore acquisition release error CB165 1 destination control: Observer registration error See FK-502 Service Manual.

Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing CB166 1 destination control: See FK-502 Service Manual. ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting ⎯ C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C ⎯ C 552 .0 Feb. 1.16. Reception resource check error CB167 1 destination control: Deployment error of sending image information CB168 1 destination control: Serialization error of receiving image CB169 1 destination control: Access error to quick memory data CB170 Page control: Internal que table control error (create/enque/deque) CB171 Page control: Instance generation error CB172 Page control: Timeout error CB173 Page control: Interface error CB174 Page control: Semaphore acquisition release error CB175 Page control: Observer registration error CB176 Page control: Unable to check TTI domain CB177 Page control: Error return from TTI rasterizer CB178 Page control: Receiving job generation error CB185 Page control: Receiving data size logic error (Receiving data are not multiples of dotline) CB186 Page control: Image buf acquisition (alloc) error CB187 Page control: Error return from compressor CB188 Page control: BandBuf control error (newInstance/get/free) CC001 Vendor connection failure • It is detected that communications with the vendor are interrupted for a given period of time or more with “Installed” selected for the setting of vendor installation. 2007 Trouble isolation com. Malfunction code Field Service Ver.

• The data abnormality is detected by the HDD verify check. See P. • Hard disk is faulty. CC153 ROM contents error upon • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM startup (PRT) contents check of the mechanical control board (MFPB) during starting.0 Feb. 1. • The file has any abnormality. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ 553 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing . C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C CD004 Hard disk access error CD005 Hard disk error 1 CD006 Hard disk error 2 CD007 Hard disk error 3 CD008 Hard disk error 4 CD009 Hard disk error 5 CD00A Hard disk error 6 CD00B Hard disk error 7 CD00C Hard disk error 8 CD00D Hard disk error 9 CD00E Hard disk error A CD00F Hard disk data transfer error CD010 Hard disk unformat CD011 Hard disk out of specifications mounted CD020 Hard disk verify error CD030 Hard disk management information reading error CD201 File memory mounting error C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C • Data transfer from the hard disk is faulty.115 See DF-611 Service Manual. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com. • A hard disk that falls outside the specifications is connected.59 ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C CC163 ROM contents error (PRT) • The wrong model of firmware is detected in the engine during the initial connection to the engine is being checked. • Unformatted hard disk is connected.Rank pliant unit CC151 ROM contents error upon • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM startup (MSC) contents check of the MSC (PRCB) during starting CC152 ROM contents error upon • A fault is detected in a sequence of ROM startup (scanner) contents check of the IPB during starting. 2007 16.Field Service Ver. See P. See DF-611 Service Manual. CC155 Finisher ROM error CC156 ADF ROM error See FS-517/608 Service Manual. • Unable to communicate between the hard disk and printer control board (PRCB).59 • The error in save of JOB data to the memory/ hard disk and its read error are detected. • The file memory is not mounted. See P. • The machine fails to read administrative information data saved in the hard disk. CC164 ROM contents error (MSC) CC165 ROM contents error (ADF) CD002 JOB RAM save error • The wrong model of firmware is detected in the MFP board when the main power switch is turned ON.

CD202 Memory capacity discrepancy ⎯ C CD203 Memory capacity discrepancy 2 CD211 PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure CD212 Compression/extraction timeout detection CD231 No Fax memory at FAX board mounting ⎯ ⎯ C C ⎯ C ⎯ C CD241 Encryption board setting error CD242 Encryption board mounting error ⎯ ⎯ C C CD251 No JPEG board mounting • JPEG board (Scan Accelerator Kit) is not at JPEG board mount mounted when the JPEG board mounting is setting set ON at Service Mode.0 Feb. CD402 ACK command incorrect CD403 Checksum error CD404 Receiving packet incorrect CD405 Receiving packet analysis error CD406 ACK receiving timeout CD407 Retransmission timeout 554 . • Initialization error of the encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting. • Hardware related to the BTC compression function of the Printer control board (PRCB) fails to respond. • File memory capacity necessary for duplex printing is not enough during Duplex unit mounting. CD3## NVRAM data error CD370 NVRAM data multiple errors • Abnormality is detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM data. • The faulty of the installation of encrypted ASIC is detected during the machine is starting. 1. • File memory capacity on the Printer control board (PRCB) is not enough. • Multiple errors (Over 5) are detected by the abnormal check of each NVRAM data. • Hardware related to the transfer of memory image of the Printer control board (PRCB) fails to respond. Troubleshooting CD401 NACK command incorrect • When abnormality is found in the communication of controller. • The DIMM for FAX is not mounted during the FAX board is mounting. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C C C CDC## Trouble related to security • Contact the responsible people of KMBT before taking some countermeasures.Rank pliant unit bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing • File memory capacity on the Printer control board (PRCB) is not enough. 2007 Trouble isolation com.16. • The FAX board is not mounted when the FAX board mounting is set ON at Service Mode.

• An undefined malfunction occurs in the scanner section.0 Feb.Field Service Ver.). ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ C C C C C C C C C C • An undefined malfunction occurs in the MSC of the printer control board (PRCB). etc. Malfunction code Trouble isolation com. 555 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Detection timing . 1. ⎯ ⎯ ⎯ CEEE3 Engine section undefined • An undefined malfunction occurs in the malfunction engine section (MFPB.Rank pliant unit CE001 Abnormal message queue CE002 Message and method parameter failure CE003 Task error CE004 Event error CE005 Memory access error CE006 Header access error CE007 DIMM initialize error CEEE1 MSC undefined malfunction occurring CEEE2 Scanner section undefined malfunction • Printer control board (PRCB) is faulty. 2007 16.

1.0 Feb. units. • When the system program is aborted. Code Item An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected Parameter in the System F/W. option. 2007 bizhub C550 • The machine displays an abort code (CF###) on the control panel as it becomes unable to process tasks properly through its software control. and connection relating to the specific type of the abort condition.16. and options • MFP board (MFPB) Rank C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C ASIC1 error ASIC2 error ASIC3 error Image transfer malfunctions Compression malfunctions Compression malfunctions C C C C C C C C C C CF001 CT_singleList table abnormal CF002 CT_doubleList table abnormal CF003 CT_doubleList table abnormal CF004 CT_queue full abnormal CF011 Array link abnormal CF012 FAT link abnormal CF013 File size abnormal CF021 setDelayMessage Table OverFlow CF022 procSetBootParamTcpipAddress() injustice CF023 MsgQue OverFlow CF031 getJobPageToIPE() page number injustice CF032 getJobHDDPageToIPE() page number injustice CF033 setDivTbl() limitation over CF034 HDDQUEUE Over Flow CF041 getAPPPtrFromAPPID() abnormal CF042 getAPPIndexFromAPPID() abnormal CF051 CC_InputPageEntry:operator[] page injustice CF061 IdeCommand_Set() status abnormal Troubleshooting CF062 IdeCommand_Set() parameter abnormal CF091 PCI ASIC1 ERROR CF092 PCI ASIC2 ERROR CF093 PCI ASIC4 ERROR CF101 SCAN TIME OUT CF111 Compress TIME OUT CF112 Compress table OverFlow CF113 Compress table check CF121 Expand TIME OUT CF122 Expand table OverFlow CF123 Expand expandLine abnormal 556 . Relevant electrical components. unit. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. check the electrical component.

• MFP board (MFPB) CF131 Print TIME OUT C C C C C C C C C C CF201 startIRReadAnd Compress()Sequence CF202 startWorkSave()Sequence abnormal CF203 convAPItoIJCParameter()page abnormal CF204 calcCompresserUse()CmpExpID Abnormal CF211 setParameterBandColorPlane() Table OverFlow CF212 convAPItoIJCParameter()page abnormal CF213 calcExpandUse() CmpExpID abnormal CF221 startPrintOutput outputsize zero CF222 Next request comes during processing of startPrintOutput () CF223 Next request comes during processing of startWorkLoadOutput () CF300 IR Bus Check Timeout C Image transfer error on IR input bus Communication error (between IR-Systems) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CF411 Parity error CF421 Overrun error CF431 Parity error + Overrun error CF441 Framing error CF451 Parity error + Framing error CF461 Overrun error + Framing error CF471 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF412 Parity error CF422 Overrun error CF432 Parity error + Overrun error CF442 Framing error CF452 Parity error + Framing error CF462 Overrun error + Framing error CF472 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF510 Parity error 557 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Rank . 2007 16. and options Image transfer malfunctions An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected parameter in the system F/W. Malfunction code Relevant electrical components.0 Feb. 1.Field Service Ver. units.

16. 1.0 Feb. and options Communication error • MFP board (MFPB) (IR detected) bizhub C550 Code CF520 Framing error Item Rank C C C C C C C CF530 Parity error + Framing error CF540 Overrun error CF550 Parity error + Overrun error CF560 Overrun error + Framing error CF570 Parity error + Overrun error + Framing error CF580 Frame distortion of ADF CF600 Report receiving of print start that is out of sequence CF601 Report receiving of paper feeding that is out of sequence CF604 Outside IF/Command queue CF614 “Output sequence” queue • MFP board (MFPB)/ Engine C C • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C An exceptional instance occurred CF624 Panel LCD date queue due to the unexCF704 Common data “Delete-waiting pected parameter in HDD accumulated job ID” queue the system F/W. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 2007 Relevant electrical components. C C C 558 . CF714 IRC/Command queue CF724 Engine/Command queue CF734 Panel/Command queue CF744 File memory transfer start-waiting command queue CF754 File memory compression requesting command queue CF764 Panel instruction delete job queue CF774 Warning delete job queue • MFP board (MFPB)/ Engine • MFP board (MFPB)/ Control Panel • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CF784 Application instruction delete job queue CF794 Output page information for duplex back side queue CF7A4 Paper feed completion output pate information queue CF7B4 Exposure compaction output page information queue CF7C4 Pre-discharge completion output page information queue CF7D4 Touch panel coordinate data queue CF7E4 Direct key data queue CF7F4 Scan sequence queue An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected parameter in the system F/W. units.

IRC CF912 SIO receiving port.ENG C C C CF806 SIO sending port..PIC/PIC terminal CF9ED SIO receiving port...... units.PIC/PIC terminal CF8ED SIO sending port..... and options • MFP board (MFPB)/ Engine • MFP board (MFPB) CF802 SIO sending port.Field Service Ver.ADF CF812 SIO sending port. Malfunction code Relevant electrical components. units..Fiery CF815 SIO sending port.EPNet CFA01 getOneImgTransInfoFromTh() No applied thread CFA02 chkEnableAllocExec() default error CFA03 setTransBandAndRepeatNum() error CFA04 Application ID error CFA05 Thread selection image processing mode error CFA06 getOneImgIndexNumFromTh() No applied thread CFA07 setBufBandFromOut() No applied thread CFA08 chkStartOutput() No applied thread CFA09 rptReleaseMemResultACS() No applied thread CFA10 rptEndBandTrans() No applied thread CFA11 cancelTransExec() No applied thread CFA12 CC_ImgTransInfo:allocTransIndex CFA13 CC_MultiThreadProfile:rptBuf2 MemClrEnd CFA14 Thread software error An exceptional instance occurred due to the unexpected parameter in the system F/W.IRC CF807 SIO sending port.... and options C 559 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Rank . 2007 16. 1.0 Feb.... C C C C C C C C C C C C C • Whole electrical components...Fiery CF915 SIO receiving port..EPNet CF902 SIO receiving port.ENG • External controller I/F board • MFP board (MFPB) C C C • MFP board (MFPB)/ Engine • MFP board (MFPB) • External controller I/F board • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C CF906 SIO receiving port...

0 Feb. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 Relevant electrical components.16. units. and options • MFP board (MFPB) bizhub C550 Code Item Rank C C C C CFB00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 CFB01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 CFB02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 CFB03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 CFB04 ASIC117 first sheet DMA04 CFB05 ASIC117 first sheet DMA05 CFB06 ASIC117 first sheet DMA06 CFB07 ASIC117 first sheet DMA07 CFB08 ASIC117 first sheet DMA08 CFB09 ASIC117 first sheet DMA09 CFB0A ASIC117 first sheet DMA10 CFB10 ASIC117 first sheet DMA16 CFB11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 CFB12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 CFB13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 CFB14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 CFB15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 CFB16 ASIC117 first sheet DMA22 CFB17 ASIC117 first sheet DMA23 CFB18 ASIC117 first sheet DMA24 CFB19 ASIC117 first sheet DMA25 CFB1A ASIC117 first sheet DMA26 CFB1B ASIC117 first sheet DMA27 CFB1C ASIC117 first sheet DMA28 CFB1D ASIC117 first sheet DMA29 CFB1E ASIC117 first sheet DMA30 CFB20 ASIC117 second sheet DMA00 • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CFB21 ASIC117 second sheet DMA01 CFB22 ASIC117 second sheet DMA02 CFB23 ASIC117 second sheet DMA03 CFB24 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 CFB25 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 CFB26 ASIC117 second sheet DMA06 CFB27 ASIC117 second sheet DMA07 CFB28 ASIC117 second sheet DMA08 CFB29 ASIC117 second sheet DMA09 CFB2A ASIC117 second sheet DMA10 CFB30 ASIC117 second sheet DMA16 CFB31 ASIC117 second sheet DMA17 CFB32 ASIC117 second sheet DMA18 CFB33 ASIC117 second sheet DMA19 • External controller I/F board C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 560 .

Field Service Ver. Malfunction code Relevant electrical components. 1. units. 2007 16. and options • External controller I/F board CFB34 ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 CFB35 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 CFB36 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 CFB37 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 CFB38 ASIC117 second sheet DMA24 CFB39 ASIC117 second sheet DMA25 CFB3A ASIC117 second sheet DMA26 CFB3B ASIC117 second sheet DMA27 CFB3C ASIC117 second sheet DMA28 CFB3D ASIC117 second sheet DMA29 CFB3E ASIC117 second sheet DMA30 CFB40 ASIC7 DMA A CFB41 ASIC7 DMA C CFB42 ASIC7 DMA D CFB60 ASIC117 first sheet interruption CFB61 ASIC117 second sheet interruption CFB62 ASIC7 interruption CFB70 ASIC117 first sheet common register setting CFB71 ASIC117 second sheet common register setting CFB72 ASIC7 common register setting CFB80 ASIC117 first sheet PCIBridgeDMA CFB81 ASIC117 second sheet PCIBridgeDMA CFB82 ASIC7 PCIBridgeDMA CFB90 ASIC117 first sheet BTC compander/expander CFB91 ASIC117 second sheet BTC compander/expander CFB92 ASIC7 BTC compander/expander CFC00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 error interruption CFC01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 error interruption CFC02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 error interruption CFC03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 error interruption CFC04 ASIC117 first sheet DMA04 error interruption CFC05 ASIC117 first sheet DMA05 error interruption CFC06 ASIC117 first sheet DMA06 error interruption CFC07 ASIC117 first sheet DMA07 error interruption CFC08 ASIC117 first sheet DMA08 error interruption CFC09 ASIC117 first sheet DMA09 error interruption CFC0A ASIC117 first sheet DMA10 error interruption CFC10 ASIC117 first sheet DMA16 error interruption C C C C C C C C C C C • JPEG board C C C • MFP board (MFPB) • External controller I/F board • JPEG board • MFP board (MFPB) • External controller I/F board • JPEG board • MFP board (MFPB) • External controller I/F board • JPEG board • MFP board (MFPB) • External controller I/F board • JPEG board • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 561 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Rank .0 Feb.

2007 Relevant electrical components. and options • MFP board (MFPB) bizhub C550 Code Item Rank C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CFC11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 error interruption CFC12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 error interruption CFC13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 error interruption CFC14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 error interruption CFC15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 error interruption CFC16 ASIC117 first sheet DMA22 error interruption CFC17 ASIC117 first sheet DMA23 error interruption CFC18 ASIC117 first sheet DMA24 error interruption CFC19 ASIC117 first sheet DMA25 error interruption CFC1A ASIC117 first sheet DMA26 error interruption CFC1B ASIC117 first sheet DMA27 error interruption CFC1C ASIC117 first sheet DMA28 error interruption CFC1D ASIC117 first sheet DMA29 error interruption CFC1E ASIC117 first sheet DMA30 error interruption CFC20 ASIC117 first sheet SDC sleep illegal access error CFC21 ASIC117 first sheet watchdog timer error interruption CFC22 ASIC117 first sheet underrun at image output interface 1 CFC23 ASIC117 first sheet overflow at image input interface ASIC117 first sheet underrun at image output interface CFC24 1 CFC25 ASIC117 first sheet PCI master detects target abort CFC26 ASIC117 first sheet master abort by PCI master CFC27 ASIC117 first sheet PCI master detects illegal setting CFC28 ASIC117 first sheet PCI master detects retry error CFC29 CFC2A ASIC117 first sheet PCI master detects split completion byte count malfunction ASIC117 first sheet PCI master detects split completion error message ASIC117 first sheet unknown marker detected at JBIG core Troubleshooting CFC2B CFC2C ASIC117 SC count overflow detected at JBIG core CFC2D ASIC117 first sheet master read data parity error CFC2E ASIC117 first sheet master write data parity error CFC2F ASIC117 first sheet system error CFC30 ASIC117 first sheet sleep read data parity error CFC31 ASIC117 first sheet sleep write data parity error CFC32 ASIC117 first sheet address parity error CFC50 ASIC117 second sheet DMA00 error interruption CFC51 ASIC117 second sheet DMA01 error interruption CFC52 ASIC117 second sheet DMA02 error interruption CFC53 ASIC117 second sheet DMA03 error interruption • External controller I/F board C C C C 562 .16. 1. Malfunction code Field Service Ver.0 Feb. units.

Field Service Ver. Malfunction code Relevant electrical components.0 Feb. and options • External controller I/F board CFC54 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 error interruption CFC55 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 error interruption CFC56 ASIC117 second sheet DMA06 error interruption CFC57 ASIC117 second sheet DMA07 error interruption CFC58 ASIC117 second sheet DMA08 error interruption CFC59 ASIC117 second sheet DMA09 error interruption CFC5A ASIC117 second sheet DMA10 error interruption CFC5B ASIC117 second sheet DMA16 error interruption CFC5C ASIC117 second sheet DMA17 error interruption CFC5D ASIC117 second sheet DMA18 error interruption CFC5E ASIC117 second sheet DMA19 error interruption CFC5F ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 error interruption CFC60 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 error interruption CFC61 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 error interruption CFC62 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 error interruption CFC63 ASIC117 second sheet DMA24 error interruption CFC64 ASIC117 second sheet DMA25 error interruption CFC65 ASIC117 second sheet DMA26 error interruption CFC66 ASIC117 second sheet DMA27 error interruption CFC67 ASIC117 second sheet DMA28 error interruption CFC68 ASIC117 second sheet DMA29 error interruption CFC69 ASIC117 second sheet DMA30 error interruption CFC6A ASIC117 second sheet SDC sleep illegal access error CFC6B CFC6C CFC6D ASIC117 second sheet watchdog timer error interruption ASIC117 second sheet underrun at image output interface 1 ASIC117 second sheet overflow at image input interface C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CFC6E ASIC117 first sheet underrun at LCD output interface • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C C C CFC6F ASIC117 second sheet PCI master detects target abort • External controller I/F board CFC70 ASIC117 second sheet master abort by PCI master ASIC117 second sheet PCI master detects illegal CFC71 setting CFC72 ASIC117 second sheet PCI master detects retry error ASIC117 first sheet PCI master detects split completion • MFP board (MFPB) CFC73 byte count malfunctio CFC74 CFC75 CFC76 ASIC117 first sheet PCI master detects split completion error message ASIC117 second unknown marker detected at JBIG core ASIC117 second SC count overflow detected at JBIG core • External controller I/F board C C 563 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 Code Item Rank . units. 2007 16. 1.

Malfunction code Field Service Ver. and options • External controller I/F board bizhub C550 Code Item Rank C C C C C C CFC77 ASIC117 second sheet master read data parity error CFC78 ASIC117 second sheet master write data parity error CFC79 ASIC117 second sheet system error CFC7A ASIC117 second sheet sleep read data parity error CFC7B ASIC117 second sheet sleep write data parity error CFC7C ASIC117 second sheet address parity error CFCA0 ASIC7 DMA_A error interruption CFCA1 ASIC7 DMA_C error interruption CFCA2 ASIC7 DMA_D error interruption CFCA3 ASIC7 watchdog timer error CFCA4 ASIC7 PCI sleep error ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal CFCA5 processing at DMA_A CFCA6 CFCA7 CFCA8 CFCA9 CFCAA CFCAB CFCAC CFCAD CFCAE ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A. 2007 Relevant electrical components.0 Feb.16. units. error interruption ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A ASIC7 JPEG related interruption during internal processing at DMA_A ASIC7 JPEG related interruption with multiple statuses during internal processing at DMA_A • JPEG board C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting ASIC7 No EOI marker after the completion of CFCAF transmitting the amount of codes set during expansion at DMA_A CFCB0 ASIC7 compressed data go beyond the set value during compression at DMA_A C C ASIC7 no EOI marker after the completion of CFCB1 transmitting the amount of codes set during compression at DMA_A CFCB2 ASIC7 target abort CFCB3 ASIC7 master abort CFCB4 ASIC7 forced suspension CFCB5 ASIC7 PCI master detects retry error CFCB6 ASIC7 master read data parity error C C C C C C 564 . 1.

1. 2007 16. Malfunction code Relevant electrical components. units.0 Feb. and options • JPEG board CFCB7 ASIC7 master write data parity error CFCB8 ASIC7 system error CFCB9 ASIC7 sleep read data parity error CFCBA ASIC7 sleep write data parity error CFCBB ASIC7 address parity error CFCD0 CPS2300Great watchdog timer error CFCD1 CPS2300Great local bus error CFCD2 CPS2300Great sleep read data parity error CFCD3 CPS2300Great sleep write data parity error CFCD4 CPS2300Great address parity error CFCF0 PIC3400Great watchdog timer error CFCF1 PIC3400Great sleep read data parity error CFCF2 PIC3400Great sleep write data parity error CFCF3 PIC3400Great address parity error CFD00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 time out CFD01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 time out CFD02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 time out CFD03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 time out CFD04 ASIC117 first sheet DMA04 time out CFD05 ASIC117 first sheet DMA05 time out CFD06 ASIC117 first sheet DMA06 time out CFD07 ASIC117 first sheet DMA07 time out CFD08 ASIC117 first sheet DMA08 time out CFD09 ASIC117 first sheet DMA09 time out CFD0A ASIC117 first sheet DMA10 time out CFD10 ASIC117 first sheet DMA16 time out CFD11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 time out CFD12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 time out CFD13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 time out CFD14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 time out CFD15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 time out CFD16 ASIC117 first sheet DMA22 time out CFD17 ASIC117 first sheet DMA23 time out CFD18 ASIC117 first sheet DMA24 time out CFD19 ASIC117 first sheet DMA25 time out CFD1A ASIC117 first sheet DMA26 time out CFD1B ASIC117 first sheet DMA27 time out CFD1C ASIC117 first sheet DMA28 time out CFD1D ASIC117 first sheet DMA29 time out CFD1E ASIC117 first sheet DMA30 time out C C C C C • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C 565 Troubleshooting C bizhub C550 Code Item Rank .Field Service Ver.

1. Malfunction code Field Service Ver.0 Feb. units.16. and options • External controller I/F board bizhub C550 Code Item Rank C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C CFD50 ASIC117 second sheet DMA00 time out CFD51 ASIC117 second sheet DMA01 time out CFD52 ASIC117 second sheet DMA02 time out CFD53 ASIC117 second sheet DMA03 time out CFD54 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 time out CFD55 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 time out CFD56 ASIC117 second sheet DMA06 time out CFD57 ASIC117 second sheet DMA07 time out CFD58 ASIC117 second sheet DMA08 time out CFD59 ASIC117 second sheet DMA09 time out CFD5A ASIC117 second sheet DMA10 time out CFD60 ASIC117 second sheet DMA16 time out CFD61 ASIC117 second sheet DMA17 time out CFD62 ASIC117 second sheet DMA18 time out CFD63 ASIC117 second sheet DMA19 time out CFD64 ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 time out CFD65 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 time out CFD66 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 time out CFD67 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 time out CFD68 ASIC117 second sheet DMA24 time out CFD69 ASIC117 second sheet DMA25 time out CFD6A ASIC117 second sheet DMA26 time out CFD6B ASIC117 second sheet DMA27 time out CFD6C ASIC117 second sheet DMA28 time out CFD6D ASIC117 second sheet DMA29 time out CFD6E ASIC117 second sheet DMA30 time out CFDA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out • JPEG board C C C Troubleshooting CFDA1 ASIC7 DMA_C time out CFDA2 ASIC7 DMA_D time out CFE00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 time out CFE01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 time out CFE02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 time out CFE03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 time out CFE04 ASIC117 first sheet DMA04 time out CFE05 ASIC117 first sheet DMA05 time out CFE06 ASIC117 first sheet DMA06 time out CFE07 ASIC117 first sheet DMA07 time out CFE08 ASIC117 first sheet DMA08 time out CFE09 ASIC117 first sheet DMA09 time out CFE0A ASIC117 first sheet DMA10 time out CFE10 ASIC117 first sheet DMA16 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C C C C C C C C 566 . 2007 Relevant electrical components.

Malfunction code Relevant electrical components. and options • MFP board (MFPB) CFE11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 time out CFE12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 time out CFE13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 time out CFE14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 time out CFE15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 time out CFE16 ASIC117 first sheet DMA22 time out CFE17 ASIC117 first sheet DMA23 time out CFE18 ASIC117 first sheet DMA24 time out CFE19 ASIC117 first sheet DMA25 time out CFE1A ASIC117 first sheet DMA26 time out CFE1B ASIC117 first sheet DMA27 time out CFE1C ASIC117 first sheet DMA28 time out CFE1D ASIC117 first sheet DMA29 time out CFE1E ASIC117 first sheet DMA30 time out CFE50 ASIC117 second sheet DMA00 time out CFE51 ASIC117 second sheet DMA01 time out CFE52 ASIC117 second sheet DMA02 time out CFE53 ASIC117 second sheet DMA03 time out CFE54 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 time out CFE55 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 time out CFE56 ASIC117 second sheet DMA06 time out CFE57 ASIC117 second sheet DMA07 time out CFE58 ASIC117 second sheet DMA08 time out CFE59 ASIC117 second sheet DMA09 time out CFE5A ASIC117 second sheet DMA10 time out CFE60 ASIC117 second sheet DMA16 time out CFE61 ASIC117 second sheet DMA17 time out CFE62 ASIC117 second sheet DMA18 time out CFE63 ASIC117 second sheet DMA19 time out CFE64 ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 time out CFE65 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 time out CFE66 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 time out CFE67 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 time out CFE68 ASIC117 second sheet DMA24 time out CFE69 ASIC117 second sheet DMA25 time out CFE6A ASIC117 second sheet DMA26 time out CFE6B ASIC117 second sheet DMA27 time out CFE6C ASIC117 second sheet DMA28 time out CFE6D ASIC117 second sheet DMA29 time out CFE6E ASIC117 second sheet DMA30 time out CFEA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out C C C C C C C C C C C C C C • External controller I/F board C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C • JPEG board C 567 Troubleshooting C bizhub C550 Code Item Rank . 1. 2007 16.0 Feb. units.Field Service Ver.

16. and options • JPEG board bizhub C550 Code CFEA1 ASIC7 DMA_C time out CFEA2 ASIC7 DMA_D time out Item Rank C C CFF00 ASIC117 first sheet DMA00 time out CFF01 ASIC117 first sheet DMA01 time out CFF02 ASIC117 first sheet DMA02 time out CFF03 ASIC117 first sheet DMA03 time out CFF04 ASIC117 first sheet DMA04 time out CFF05 ASIC117 first sheet DMA05 time out CFF06 ASIC117 first sheet DMA06 time out CFF07 ASIC117 first sheet DMA07 time out CFF08 ASIC117 first sheet DMA08 time out CFF09 ASIC117 first sheet DMA09 time out CFF0A ASIC117 first sheet DMA10 time out CFF10 ASIC117 first sheet DMA16 time out CFF11 ASIC117 first sheet DMA17 time out CFF12 ASIC117 first sheet DMA18 time out CFF13 ASIC117 first sheet DMA19 time out CFF14 ASIC117 first sheet DMA20 time out CFF15 ASIC117 first sheet DMA21 time out CFF16 ASIC117 first sheet DMA22 time out CFF17 ASIC117 first sheet DMA23 time out CFF18 ASIC117 first sheet DMA24 time out CFF19 ASIC117 first sheet DMA25 time out CFF1A ASIC117 first sheet DMA26 time out CFF1B ASIC117 first sheet DMA27 time out CFF1C ASIC117 first sheet DMA28 time out CFF1D ASIC117 first sheet DMA29 time out • MFP board (MFPB) C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C C Troubleshooting CFF1E ASIC117 first sheet DMA30 time out CFF50 ASIC117 second sheet DMA00 time out CFF51 ASIC117 second sheet DMA01 time out CFF52 ASIC117 second sheet DMA02 time out CFF53 ASIC117 second sheet DMA03 time out CFF54 ASIC117 second sheet DMA04 time out CFF55 ASIC117 second sheet DMA05 time out CFF56 ASIC117 second sheet DMA06 time out CFF57 ASIC117 second sheet DMA07 time out CFF58 ASIC117 second sheet DMA08 time out CFF59 ASIC117 second sheet DMA09 time out CFF5A ASIC117 second sheet DMA10 time out CFF60 ASIC117 second sheet DMA16 time out CFF61 ASIC117 second sheet DMA17 time out • External controller I/F board C C C C C C C C C C C C C 568 .0 Feb. units. 1. 2007 Relevant electrical components. Malfunction code Field Service Ver.

4 How to reset • Different malfunction resetting procedures apply depending on the rank of the trouble code. See P. Malfunction code Relevant electrical components. * List of malfunction resetting procedures Trouble code rank Resetting procedures • Trouble reset For details of Trouble Reset.0 Feb. 1.Field Service Ver. see Adjustment/ Setting. units. 2007 16. and options • External controller I/F board CFF62 ASIC117 second sheet DMA18 time out CFF63 ASIC117 second sheet DMA19 time out CFF64 ASIC117 second sheet DMA20 time out CFF65 ASIC117 second sheet DMA21 time out CFF66 ASIC117 second sheet DMA22 time out CFF67 ASIC117 second sheet DMA23 time out CFF68 ASIC117 second sheet DMA24 time out CFF69 ASIC117 second sheet DMA25 time out CFF6A ASIC117 second sheet DMA26 time out CFF6B ASIC117 second sheet DMA27 time out CFF6C ASIC117 second sheet DMA28 time out CFF6D ASIC117 second sheet DMA29 time out CFF6E ASIC117 second sheet DMA30 time out CFFA0 ASIC7 DMA_A time out CFFA1 ASIC7 DMA_C time out CFFA2 ASIC7 DMA_D time out C C C C C C C C C C C C C • JPEG board C C C 16.499 • Opening/closing the front door Rank A Rank B Rank C 569 Troubleshooting • Turning main power switch OFF/ON bizhub C550 Code Item Rank .

5.0 Feb.5. Check the connector of M25 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. sensor check M6 operation check Change M6 Change PFTDB Change PRCB Control signal — — PFTDB CN4PFTDB-3 (ON) PFTDB CN18PFTDB-9 (ON) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — P-4 V-3 — — — 1 2 Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 7 570 . Check the connector of M6 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Malfunction code Field Service Ver.5 Solution bizhub C550 16.16.5. 2007 16.2 C0104: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor failure to turn C0105: Tray 3/4 feeder transportation motor turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Transport motor (M25) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M25 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PS6 I/O check. M25 operation check Change M25 Change PFTDB Change PRCB Control signal — — PFTDB CN12PFTDB-6 (LOCK) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — V-12 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 5 16.3 C0202: Tray 1 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 1 upper limit sensor (PS6) Tray 1 lift-up motor (M6) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M6 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.1 16. 1.

Check the connector of M8 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. PS22 I/O check.Field Service Ver. Check the connector of M23 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. sensor check M8 operation check Change M8 Change PFTDB Change PRCB Control signal — — PFTDB CN8BPFTDB-10 (ON) PFTDB CN6PFTDB-9 (ON) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — P-7 V-4 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16. 2007 16. 1. sensor check M23 operation check Change M23 Change PFTDB Change PRCB Control signal — — PFTDB CN10BPFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN11PFTDB-4 (ON) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — V-6 V-9 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 571 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 .5.4 C0204: Tray 2 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 2 upper limit sensor (PS14) Tray 2 lift-up motor (M8) 16. Malfunction code Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M8 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.5. PS14 I/O check.0 Feb.5 C0206: Tray 3 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 3 upper limit sensor (PS22) Tray 3 lift-up motor (M23) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M23 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

5. 1.6 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Malfunction code 16. 2007 C0208: Tray 4 feeder up/down abnormality Relevant parts Tray 4 upper limit sensor (PS27) Tray 4 lift-up motor (M24) Paper feed/transport drive board (PFTDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M24 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PS27 I/O check. sensor check M24 operation check Change M23 Change PFTDB Change PRCB Control signal — — PFTDB CN9BPFTDB-6 (ON) PFTDB CN11PFTDB-2 (ON) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — V-8 V-9 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 16. FM1 operation check Change FM1 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN11PRCB-3 (REM) PRCB CN11PRCB-5 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-3 — — 1 2 3 4 Troubleshooting 5 572 .0 Feb.7 C0301: Suction fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Suction fan motor (FM1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.5. Check the connector of M24 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.

sensor check M15 operation check Change imaging unit /K Change M15 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN8PRCB-8 (ON) PRCB CN8PRCB-11 (ON) PRCB CN8PRCB-3 to 4 — — — Location (Electrical component) — — C-13 C-13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 — — — 573 Troubleshooting C-13 bizhub C550 . 2007 16. 1. FM13 operation check Change FM13 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN10PRCB-4 (REM) PRCB CN10PRCB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-6 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16. Check the M15 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM13 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.8 C0351: Paper cooling fan trouble Relevant parts Paper cooling fan motor (FM13) 16. PS43 I/O check.Field Service Ver. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.5. sensor check PS44 I/O check.5.0 Feb.9 C2101: PC charge cleaning malfunction Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Charging cleaner home sensor (PS43) Charging cleaner return sensor (PS44) Charge cleaning motor/K (M15) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the imaging unit/K for proper connection and correct as necessary.

16. Malfunction code 16.5. sensor check M3 operation check Change M3 Change PRCB Control signal — PRCB CN36PRCB-9 (ON) PRCB CN11PRCB-1 (REM) — — Location (Electrical component) — K-4 K-3 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16. PS50 I/O check.10 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.0 Feb. sensor check PS52 I/O check.11 C2152: Transfer belt pressure welding alienation Relevant parts Pressure welding alienation sensor/K (PS51) Printer control board (PRCB) Pressure welding alienation sensor/color (PS52) 1st image transfer pressure retraction motor (M21) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M21 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.5. 2007 C2151: Secondary transfer roller pressure welding alienation Relevant parts Pressure welding alienation sensor (PS50) Printer control board (PRCB) 2nd image transfer pressure retraction motor (M3) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M3 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. sensor check M21 operation check Change M21 Change MFPB Control signal — PRCB CN11PRCB-12 (ON) PRCB CN11PRCB-15 (ON) PRCB CN17PRCB-1 to 4 — — Location (Electrical component) — K-2 K-2 K-2 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 Troubleshooting 574 . 1. PS51 I/O check.

5. Check the HV1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.Field Service Ver.5. M20 operation check Change M20 Change PRCB Control signal — — — PRCB CN15PRCB-11 to 14 — — Location (Electrical component) — — — C-12 — — 575 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 C2161: PC charge (M) malfunction .14 16.5. Malfunction code C2162: PC charge (Y) malfunction C2163: PC charge (K) malfunction C2164: PC charge malfunction Relevant parts Imaging unit High voltage unit/1 (HV1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the imaging unit for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the M20 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the connector of motor for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Change IU Change HV1 Change PRCB Control signal — — — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16. 1.5. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.16 C2160: PC charge (C) malfunction 16.5.5. 2007 16.15 16.13 16.17 C2204: Waste toner agitating motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Waste toner agitating motor lock sensor (PS23) Waste toner agitating motor (M20) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 5 6 Action Change the waste toner box.12 16.0 Feb.

18 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.21 C2255: Color developing motor’s failure to turn C2256: Color developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Color developing motor (M17) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M17 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.5.5.5.19 Color PC drum motor (M16) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M16 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the M16 connector for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.20 16. 1. M17 operation check Change M17 Change PRCB Control signal — — — PRCB CN12PRCB-14 (REM) PRCB CN12PRCB-17 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — — K-8 — — 1 2 Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 576 .16.0 Feb.5. Check the M17 connector for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. Malfunction code 16. M16 operation check Change M16 Change PRCB Control signal — — — PRCB CN12PRCB-9 (REM) PRCB CN12PRCB-12 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — — K-9 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16. 2007 C2253: Color PC drum motor’s failure to turn C2254: Color PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts 16.

1.5.5.23 C2257: Cleaner motor’s failure to turn 16.0 Feb. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.24 16.5. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.25 C2259: K developing motor’s failure to turn C225A: K developing motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts K developing motor (M19) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M19 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.Field Service Ver. Check the M38 connector for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary. M19 operation check Change M19 Change PRCB Control signal — — — PRCB CN12PRCB-2 (REM) PRCB CN12PRCB-5 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — — K-9 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 577 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 C2258: Cleaner motor’s turning at abnormal timing . Check the M19 connector for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.5.22 16. M38 operation check Change M38 Change PRCB Control signal — — — PRCB CN13PRCB-11 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — — K-10 to 11 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16. Malfunction code Relevant parts Cleaner motor (M38) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M38 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. 2007 16.

26 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.16.5. 2007 C225B: K PC drum motor’s failure to turn C225C: K PC drum motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. 1. Malfunction code 16. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.28 C2351: K toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts K toner suction fan motor (FM8) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM8 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.27 K PC drum motor (M18) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M18 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. FM8 operation check Change FM8 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN10PRCB-10 (REM) PRCB CN10PRCB-12 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-5 — — 1 2 3 Troubleshooting 4 5 578 .5. Check the M18 connector for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.5. M18 operation check Change M18 Change PRCB Control signal — — — PRCB CN13PRCB-15 (REM) PRCB CN13PRCB-18 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — — K-10 — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16.0 Feb.

2007 16.5.5.Field Service Ver. 1.29 C2352: Color toner suction fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Color toner suction fan motor (FM7) 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. Control signal — — REYB PH CN5REYB PH-1 (REM) REYB PH CN5REYB PH-3 (LOCK) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 FM15 operation check B-7 5 6 Change REYB/PH Change PRCB — — 579 Troubleshooting 4 Change FM15 — bizhub C550 . Malfunction code Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM7 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Feb. FM7 operation check Change FM7 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN10PRCB-7 (REM) PRCB CN10PRCB-9 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-5 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16.30 C2353: IU cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts IU cooling fan motor (FM15) PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM15 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.

Change PRCB — — — — Troubleshooting 580 .31 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. FM16 operation check Change FM16 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN26PRCB-2 (REM) PRCB CN26PRCB-3 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — C-16 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16.5. Malfunction code 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. 1.16.32 C2451: Release new transfer belt unit Relevant parts Transfer belt unit Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 Reinstall unit Action Control signal — Location (Electrical component) — Check there is a short circuit in the fuse of the transfer belt unit.0 Feb.5. 2007 C2354: Rear side cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Rear side cooling fan motor (FM16) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM16 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

clean them. M11 operation check (At this time.34 16. Malfunction code C2551: Abnormally low toner density detected cyan TCR sensor bizhub C550 C2553: Abnormally low toner density detected magenta TCR sensor C2555: Abnormally low toner density detected yellow TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y Toner cartridge /C Toner cartridge /M Toner cartridge /Y Toner empty sensor/C (PZS/C) Toner empty sensor/M (PZS/M) Toner empty sensor/Y (PZS/Y) Toner supply motor/Y (M9) Toner supply motor/M (M10) Toner supply motor/C (M11) Toner cartridge motor Y/M (M13) Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low.33 16.5.5. 2007 16. IU must be non-installation.5.0 Feb.) M13. Control signal — — — — M9: PRCB CN16PRCB-1 to 4 M10: PRCB CN16PRCB-5 to 8 M11: PRCB CN16PRCB-9 to 12 M13: PRCB CN17PRCB-5 to 8 M14: PRCB CN17PRCB-9 to 12 — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — C-22 to 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 K-1 7 8 9 — — — 581 Troubleshooting .Field Service Ver. Change imaging unit Change PRCB. M10. Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty Reinstall imaging unit Reinstall toner cartridge M9. M14 operation check If the toner empty senor and its surroundings inside the sub hopper are dirtied with toner. 1.35 16.

38 Imaging unit /C Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y Toner cartridge /C Toner cartridge /M Toner cartridge /Y Sub hopper unit Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty Reinstall imaging unit Reinstall toner cartridge Change imaging unit Change PRCB Change sub hopper unit Control signal — — — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16. Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty M12 operation check (At this time. Control signal — — PRCB CN16PRCB-13 to 16 PRCB CN17PRCB-9 to 12 — — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — C-22 K-1 — — — — — Troubleshooting 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 582 .0 Feb. 1.39 C2557: Abnormally low toner density detected black TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Toner cartridge /K Toner empty sensor/K (PZS/K) Toner supply motor/K (M12) Toner cartridge motor C/K (M14) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Perform image troubleshooting procedure if image density is low.37 16. Change imaging unit /K Change PRCB. clean them.5.36 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.16. IU must be non-installation. Malfunction code 16. 2007 C2552: Abnormally high toner density detected cyan TCR sensor C2554: Abnormally high toner density detected magenta TCR sensor C2556: Abnormally high toner density detected yellow TCR sensor Relevant parts 16.5.5.5.) M14 operation check Reinstall imaging unit Reinstall toner cartridge If the toner empty senor and its surroundings inside the sub hopper are dirtied with toner.

40 16.42 16.Field Service Ver. 1.5. M11 operation check Reinstall imaging unit Change imaging unit Change PRCB Control signal — M9: PRCB CN16PRCB-1 to 4 M10: PRCB CN16PRCB-5 to 8 M11: PRCB CN16PRCB-9 to 12 — — — Location (Electrical component) — 1 2 3 4 5 C-22 to 23 — — — 583 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 .5. 2007 16.0 Feb. Reinstall imaging unit Reinstall toner cartridge Change imaging unit Change PRCB Change sub hopper unit Control signal — — — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16.43 C2559: Cyan TCR sensor adjustment failure C255A: Magenta TCR sensor adjustment failure C255B: Yellow TCR sensor adjustment failure Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y Toner supply motor/Y (M9) Toner supply motor/M (M10) Toner supply motor/C (M11) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean the TCR sensor window on the underside of the imaging unit if dirty M9. M10.5.41 16.5. Malfunction code C2558: Abnormally high toner density detected black TCR sensor Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Toner cartridge /K Sub hopper unit Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the TCR connection on the underside of the imaging unit if faulty.

1. Update the firmware of the printer control board to the latest version. See P.146 2. CN1SV ERB on SV ERB.5. NOTE • Be sure not to replace Service EEPROM board. contact KMBT. and the harness between the two connectors for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change PRCB 1.0 Feb. Turn the main power switch OFF and replace the printer control board with a new one.5.44 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Check the machine will not detect either a trouble code (C-C163 or others) or an IU/TC installation error. 3.45 C2650: Main backup media access error Relevant parts Service EEPROM board (SV ERB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connectors of CN23PRCB on PRCB. — — 584 .16. Control signal Location (Electrical component) 1 — — Troubleshooting 2 — — 3 If the trouble code does not disappear after you take the above actions. After the completion of the firmware rewriting. Malfunction code 16. turn OFF and ON the main power switch and check a warm-up operation starts. M12 operation check Reinstall imaging unit /K Change imaging unit /K Change PRCB Control signal — PRCB CN16PRCB-13 to 16 — — — Location (Electrical component) — C-22 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 16. 2007 C255C: Black TCR sensor adjustment failure Relevant parts Imaging unit /K Toner supply motor/K (M12) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean or correct each contact of the imaging unit if faulty.

5.5.5.50 16.49 C2651: EEPROM access error (IU C) 16.5.51 16. 1.5. 2007 16. Malfunction code C2653: EEPROM access error (IU Y) C2654: EEPROM access error (IU K) Relevant parts Imaging unit /C Imaging unit /M Imaging unit /Y Imaging unit /K Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean the connection between the imaging unit and the machine if dirty Reinstall imaging unit Check the harness for proper connection and correct as necessary.Field Service Ver.5.48 16.47 16.46 16. Change imaging unit Change PRCB Control signal — — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — — 1 2 3 4 5 16. If not. attach the ferrite core to the harness. Change toner cartridge Check that CN29 harness on PRCB has a ferrite core.53 C2A01: EEPROM access error (TC C) C2A02: EEPROM access error (TC M) C2A03: EEPROM access error (TC Y) C2A04: EEPROM access error (TC K) Relevant parts Toner cartridge /C Toner cartridge /M Toner cartridge /Y Toner cartridge /K Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Clean the connection between the toner cartridge and the machine if dirty Reinstall toner cartridge Check the harness for proper connection and correct as necessary.5.52 16.0 Feb.5. Change PRCB Control signal — — — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — — — 1 2 3 4 6 7 585 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 C2652: EEPROM access error (IU M) .

5.16.5. sensor check M29 operation check Change M29 Change fusing unit Change PRCB Control signal — PRCB CN8PRCB-14 (ON) PRCB CN8PRCB-1 to 2 (ON) — — — Location (Electrical component) — C-14 C-12 to 13 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 16.55 C3102: Fusing roller failure to turn Relevant parts Heating roller rotation sensor/1 (PS56) Heating roller rotation sensor/2 (PS57) Fusing motor (M30) Printer control board (PRCB) Fusing unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M30 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.54 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. sensor check M30 operation check Change M30 Change fusing unit Change PRCB Control signal — PRCB CN25PRCB-11 (ON) PRCB CN25PRCB-14 (ON) PRCB CN7PRCB-3 (REM) PRCB CN7PRCB-6 (LOCK) — — — Location (Electrical component) — C-17 C-17 K-7 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 Troubleshooting 6 7 586 . PS56 I/O check.0 Feb. sensor check PS57 I/O check. 2007 C3101: Fusing roller separation failure Relevant parts Roller pressure welding alienation sensor (PS55) Fusing pressure retraction motor (M29) Printer control board (PRCB) Fusing unit WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M29 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. PS55 I/O check. 1. Malfunction code 16.

56 16. and correct the error as necessary. Malfunction code Relevant parts Fusing motor (M30) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M30 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. FM2 operation check Change FM2 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN6PRCB-4 (REM) PRCB CN6PRCB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-6 — — 1 2 3 4 5 587 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 C3202: Fusing motor turning at abnormal timing .0 Feb. Check the fusing unit.58 C3303: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 1 failure to turn Relevant parts Fusing cooling fan motor/1 (FM2) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM2 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.57 C3201: Fusing motor failure to turn 16. 1. PRCB for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Check the loading status of the fusing unit drive. 2007 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.5.5.5. M30 operation check Change M30 Change PRCB Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 — PRCB CN7PRCB-3 (REM) PRCB CN7PRCB-6 (LOCK) — — — 4 5 5 K-7 — — 16.Field Service Ver.

5. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.59 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.16.5.60 C3305: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 3 failure to turn Relevant parts Fusing cooling fan motor/3 (FM5) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM5 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. FM4 operation check Change FM4 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN11PRCB-6 (REM) PRCB CN11PRCB-8 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-3 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16. 1. Malfunction code 16.0 Feb. 2007 C3304: Fusing cooling fan motor/ 2 failure to turn Relevant parts Fusing cooling fan motor/2 (FM4) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM4 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. FM5 operation check Change FM5 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN11PRCB-9 (REM) PRCB CN11PRCB-11 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-3 — — 1 2 3 4 5 Troubleshooting 588 .

0 Feb. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door. 1. IHPU. MFPB and REDB for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change DCPU Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — — — — — — 16.61 16. Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change REDB Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — — — — — — 589 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 C3424: Fusing heaters trouble (soaking side) .5.Field Service Ver.5. IHPU. Malfunction code Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). MFPB and DCPU for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Check the fusing unit. 2007 16.5. Check the fusing unit. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door.63 C3425: Fusing heaters trouble (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position).62 C3423: Fusing heaters trouble (pressurizing side) 16.

PRCB for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. 1.16. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door. Reinstall fusing unit Change fusing unit Change PRCB Control signal — Location (Electrical component) — 1 2 3 4 5 — — — — — — — — 16.65 16. 2007 C3461: Release new fusing unit Relevant parts Fusing unit Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). Malfunction code 16. MFPB and REDB for proper connection and correct or change as necessary.67 C3721: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Center of the heating roller) C3722: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) C3725: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position).0 Feb. Check the fusing unit.5. IHPU.5. Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change REDB Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 Troubleshooting 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — — — — — — 590 . Check the fusing unit.66 16.5.5.64 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.

71 C3822: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (Edge of the heating roller) C3825: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). IHPU. Check the fusing unit.68 16. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door.5.5. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door. 2007 16.Field Service Ver. Check the fusing unit.70 16. IHPU. 1. MFPB and DCPU for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. PRCB and REDB for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change REDB 1 2 — — — — 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — — — — — — 591 Troubleshooting Control signal Location (Electrical component) . Malfunction code C3723: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (pressurizing side) bizhub C550 C3724: Fusing abnormally high temperature detection (soaking side) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change DCPU Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — — — — — — 16.0 Feb.5.5.69 16.

76 C3921: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Center of the heating roller) C3922: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (Edge of the heating roller) C3925: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (NC sensor) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). Check the open/close operation of the upper right door. PRCB and DCPU for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Malfunction code 16. Check the fusing unit.0 Feb. IHPU. PRCB and REDB for proper connection and correct or change as necessary.5.5.74 16.73 Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). 2007 C3823: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (pressurizing side) C3824: Fusing abnormally low temperature detection (soaking side) Relevant parts 16. 1.75 16.72 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.5. Check the fusing unit.5.5. Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change REDB Troubleshooting Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — — — — — — 592 . IHPU.16. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door. Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change DCPU Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — — — — — — 16.

80 16. PRCB and DCPU for proper connection and correct or change as necessary. Check the fusing unit. IHPU. 1.77 16. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door. Change fusing unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change DCPU Control signal — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 — — — — — 16.78 16. Check the fusing unit.5.5. Change fusing unit Change degaussing coil unit Change IHPU Change PRCB Change REDB 1 2 — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 — — — — — — 593 Troubleshooting Control signal Location (Electrical component) .Field Service Ver.5. Malfunction code C3923: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (pressurizing side) bizhub C550 Location (Electrical component) — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — C3924: Fusing sensor wire breaks detection (soaking side) Relevant parts Fusing unit IH power supply (IHPU) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position).5.81 C3B02: IH malfunction (CPU) C3B03: IH malfunction (monitor) C3B04: IH malfunction Relevant parts Fusing unit Degaussing coil unit IH power supply (IHPU) Relay drive board (REDB) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the fusing unit for correct installation (whether it is secured in position). degaussing coil unit.79 16. Check the open/close operation of the upper right door. IHPU.0 Feb.5. 2007 16. PRCB and REDB for proper connection and correct or change as necessary.

0 Feb.82 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 1. 2007 C4101: Polygon motor rotation trouble Relevant parts PH unit PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Control signal — — REYB PH CN4REYB PH-1 (REM) REYB PH CN4REYB PH-3 (LOCK) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 3 FM14 operation check B-7 4 5 Change FM14 Change REYB/PH Change DCPU — — — Troubleshooting 6 594 .5. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.16.5. Change PH unit Change REYB/PH Change PRCB Control signal — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — 1 2 3 4 16. Malfunction code 16.83 C4301: PH cooling fan motor failure to turn Relevant parts PH cooling fan motor (FM14) PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM14 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

Change PH unit Change REYB/PH Change PRCB Control signal — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — 1 2 3 4 16. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code PH relay board (REYB/PH) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.Field Service Ver. 2007 16.5. 1. Check M1 for proper drive coupling and correct as necessary.84 C4501: Laser malfunction Relevant parts PH unit 16.86 C5104: Transfer belt motor’s failure to turn C5105: Transfer belt motor’s turning at abnormal timing Relevant parts Transfer belt motor (M1) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the M1 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.5.85 16.0 Feb.5. M1 operation check Change M1 Change PRCB Control signal — — — PRCB CN13PRCB-3 (REM) PRCB CN13PRCB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — — K-11 — 1 2 3 4 5 6 595 Troubleshooting — bizhub C550 .

FM11 operation check Change FM11 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN26PRCB-7 (REM) PRCB CN26PRCB-9 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — C-16 — — 1 2 3 4 5 Troubleshooting 596 .16.87 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. 1.5. FM10 operation check Change FM10 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN26PRCB-4 (REM) PRCB CN26PRCB-6 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — C-16 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16.88 C5305: IH cooling fan motor/2’s failure to turn Relevant parts IH cooling fan motor/2 (FM11) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM11 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Malfunction code 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.0 Feb. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. 2007 C5304: IH cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn Relevant parts IH cooling fan motor/1 (FM10) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM10 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.5.

89 C5306: IH cooling fan motor/3’s failure to turn Relevant parts IH cooling fan motor/3 (FM12) 16. Malfunction code Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM12 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. FM12 operation check Change FM12 Change PRCB Control signal — — PRCB CN26PRCB-10 (REM) PRCB CN26PRCB-12 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — C-15 to 16 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.90 C5351: Power supply cooling fan motor/1’s failure to turn Relevant parts Power supply cooling fan motor/1 (FM9) DC power supply (DCPU) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM9 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. FM9 operation check Change FM9 Change DCPU Change PRCB Control signal — — DCPU PJ8DCPU-3 (LOCK) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — W-22 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 597 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 . 1.Field Service Ver.0 Feb.5.5. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. 2007 16.

92 C5370: MFP control board cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts MFP control board cooling fan motor (FM17) Slide Interface board (REYB/SL) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM17 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. 1. Malfunction code 16.16. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary. 2007 C5354: Ozone ventilation fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Ozone ventilation fan motor (FM6) Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM6 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Feb. FM17 operation check Change FM17 Change REYB/SL Change MFPB Control signal — — REYB/SL PJ3REYB/SL-3 (LOCK) — — — Location (Electrical component) — — L-23 — — — 1 2 3 4 5 Troubleshooting 6 598 .91 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.5.5. FM6 operation check Change FM6 Change MFPB Control signal — — PRCB CN6PRCB-1 (REM) PRCB CN6PRCB-3 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — K-6 to 7 — — 1 2 3 4 5 16.

5. Check the PS201. Change IPB. M202 operation check Change REYB/SCAN Change IPB Control signal — — REYB/SCAN CN2REYB/SCAN-3 (LOCK) — — Location (Electrical component) — — Q to R-18 — — 1 2 3 4 5 599 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 C6103: Slider over running . PS201 I/O check. Malfunction code Relevant parts Scanner home sensor (PS201) Scanner motor (M201) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct or change the scanner drive (cable. gear. 2007 16.95 C6301: Optical cooling fan motor’s failure to turn Relevant parts Optical cooling fan motor (M202) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the FM201 connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. belt) if it is faulty. Check the fan for possible overload and correct as necessary.5. pulley.0 Feb. Adjust [Image Position Leading Edge] and [Feed Direction Adjustment].94 C6102: Drive system home sensor malfunction 16. REYB/SCAN and IPB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.93 16. sensor check M201 operation check Change REYB/SCAN. M201.Field Service Ver. Correct the scanner motor set screw if loose. 1. Control signal — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 — IPB CN11IPB-3 (ON) REYB/SCAN CN5REYB/SCAN-4 to 7 — — — T-15 Q to R-18 — — 16.5.

Check the connectors between IPB and MFPB for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change CCD sensor unit Change IPB Control signal — — — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — — — 1 2 3 4 Troubleshooting 5 6 600 .5.97 C6751: CCD clamp/gain adjustment failure Relevant parts Scanner assy CCD sensor unit Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the harness connection between CCDB and IPB if faulty. and conduct the memory bus function. Malfunction code 16.5. Change MFPB Change IPB Control signal Location (Electrical component) 1 — — 2 3 4 — — — — — — 16.16. CCD surface. and shading sheet if dirty Correct reflective mirror of the scanner if faulty. mirrors.0 Feb. 1.96 bizhub C550 Field Service Ver. Check for possible extraneous light and correct as necessary. Clean the lens. or change scanner. 2007 C6704: Image input time out Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.] → [Memory Bus Check] → [Scanner→Memory].

5. and correct if necessary. Check that the connection between CCDB and IPB. and correct if necessary. Check the connection between REYB/ SCAN and the inverter board.Field Service Ver. and correct if necessary. 2007 16. Check the connection between REYB/ SCAN and IPB.0 Feb. Change INVB Change scanner assy Change IPB Change CCDB Change REYB/SCAN Control signal Location (Electrical component) — 1 — 2 — — 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 — — — — — — — — — — — — — — 601 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 .5. Malfunction code WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Correct the harness connection between main body and ADF if faulty. and correct if necessary.5.98 C6F01: Scanner sequence trouble 1 Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) DF control board (DFCB) 16.100 C9402: Exposure turning on the lamp abnormally detection Relevant parts Scanner assy Flat cable Inverter board (INVB) CCD board (CCDB) Scanner relay board (REYB/SCAN) Image processing board (IPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connection between the lamp harness and the inverter board. Change DFCB Change MFPB Control signal — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — 1 2 3 16.99 C9401: Exposure turning on the lamp trouble detection 16. 1.

5. 1.5. Change PRCB Control signal — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — 1 2 Troubleshooting 3 16.102 CA052: Controller hardware error 16.5.5.5.5. Rewrite the firmware.105 CC151: ROM contents error upon startup (MSC) 16.107 CC153: ROM contents error upon startup (PRT) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 Action Check the ROM version. 2007 16. Europe) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the vendor connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.16. Change MFPB Control signal Location (Electrical component) 1 — — 2 3 — — — — 16. If changing the setting.103 CA053: Controller start failure Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check to see if the following setting has been correctly made: [Service Mode] → [System 2] → [Image Controller Setting]. turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again after 10 seconds or more.106 CC152: ROM contents error upon startup (Scanner) 16.5. Check the connectors of the MFP board (MFPB) for proper connection and correct as necessary. Replace the appropriate board. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. Control signal — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — 602 .101 CA051: Standard controller configuration failure bizhub C550 16.0 Feb. Check the PRCB connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.104 CC001: Vendor connection failure Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) Coin vendor (Japan) Coin vendor kit (North America.

109 CC164: ROM contents error (MSC) .110 CD002: JOB RAM save error Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the hard disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.0 Feb. Malfunction code Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 3 4 Action Check the ROM version. 1. Rewrite the firmware.5. 2007 16. Replace the corresponding board. When not reviving even if the above-mentioned procedure is done.Field Service Ver.108 CC163: ROM contents error (PRT) 16.5. contact the responsible people of KMBT. Control signal — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — 16. Change MFPB. Change hard disk. Control signal — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — 1 2 3 4 603 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 16. Format hard disk.5.

Change MFPB Control signal Location (Electrical component) — — — Troubleshooting 1 2 3 — — — 604 .5. Control signal — — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — — 1 2 3 4 16.119 CD00C: Hard disk error 8 16.121 CD00E: Hard disk error A 16.112 CD005: Hard disk error 1 16.5.5.] → [HDD Format]. and conduct the HDD format function.116 CD009: Hard disk error 5 16.5.124 CD010: Hard disk unformat Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Select [Service Mode] → [State Confirmation] → [Memory/HDD Adj.5. Malfunction code 16.122 CD00F: Hard disk data transfer error 16. Change hard disk.111 CD004: Hard disk access error bizhub C550 Field Service Ver.5.5.16. Change MFPB.5.5.114 CD007: Hard disk error 3 16. Reinstall the hard disk.5. 2007 16.5.5.5.120 CD00D: Hard disk error 9 16.5.115 CD008: Hard disk error 4 16.0 Feb.117 CD00A: Hard disk error 6 16. 1.113 CD006: Hard disk error 2 16.118 CD00B: Hard disk error 7 16.123 CD020: Hard disk verify error Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Hard disk WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the hard disk connector for proper connection and correct as necessary. Change hard disk.

Change MFPB. 2007 16. Change the memory on MFPB.125 CD011: Hard disk out of specifications mounted Relevant parts Hard disk 16.Field Service Ver.128 CD203: Memory capacity discrepancy 2 Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) Memory WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check to see if the memory on MFPB is installed correctly.5.5.127 CD202: Memory capacity discrepancy 16. Action Control Signal — Location (Electrical Component) — 605 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 .0 Feb.5.126 CD201: File memory mounting error 16. Control Signal — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — 1 2 3 16.130 CD212: Compression/extraction timeout detection Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 Change MFPB.5. Change the hard disk.5.129 CD211: PCI-SDRAM DMA operation failure 16.5. 1. Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 16. Malfunction code WIRING DIAGRAM Step 1 2 Action Check the hard disk specifications.

133 CD242: Encryption board mounting error Relevant parts Encryption board (SC-503) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the encryption board connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.5.5. Malfunction code Field Service Ver. Change FAX memory. Change PRCB. Change JPEG board. Change MFPB.5.0 Feb. 2007 16.5. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — — Troubleshooting 1 2 3 — — — 606 .132 CD241: Encryption board setting error 16. Control Signal Location (Electrical Component) — — 1 2 — — 16.131 CD231: No Fax memory at FAX board mounting bizhub C550 Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) FAX board FAX memory WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check to see if the FAX memory is installed correctly. Check to see if the FAX board is installed correctly.16. Control Signal — — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — — 1 2 3 4 16. 1. Change encryption board.134 CD251: No JPEG board mounting at JPEG board mount setting Relevant parts MFP board (PRCB) JPEG board (SA-501) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the JPEG board connector for proper connection and correct as necessary.

145 CE005: Memory access error 16. 1.5.5.135 CD401: NACK command incorrect 16.139 CD405: Receiving packet analysis error 16.144 CE004: Event error 16. Malfunction code 16. Control Signal — — — Location (Electrical Component) — — — 1 2 3 16. Control signal — — Location (Electrical component) — — 1 2 607 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 16.5.136 CD402: ACK command incorrect . Check the connectors on MFPB for proper connection and correct as necessary.142 CE001: Abnormal message queue 16.146 CE006: Header access error 16.5.5.5.Field Service Ver.5.0 Feb.5.143 CE003: Task error 16.5.140 CD406: ACK receiving timeout 16.147 CE007: DIMM initialize error Relevant parts Printer control board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check the connectors on PRCB for proper connection and correct as necessary.137 CD403: Checksum error 16.5.5.5. Change MFPB.141 CD407: Retransmission timeout Relevant parts MFP board (PRCB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step Action Check whether there is an strong electromagnetic noise source near the main body. Change PRCB. 2007 16.138 CD404: Receiving packet incorrect 16.5.

The screen will be shifted to the data restoration screen to perform data restoration. Malfunction code 16. NOTE • In case it failed to restore data. Check the message which indicates that the data restoration was successfully conducted.16. [Service Mode] → [Enhanced Security] → [NVRAM Data Back Up] See P. 2007 • When the data stored due to the NVRAM trouble is lost. the screen below appears. backup data can be used for restoration. Backup can also be performed manually with the following setting. data restoration screen may not be displayed. • Data backup will be automatically performed every hour. Troubleshooting 4. When a trouble caused by NVRAM data error occurs.5.148 CD3##: NVRAM data error Field Service Ver.490 1. 1. • Trouble code [C-D370] will be displayed when multiple errors (over 5) of NVRAM data are detected. NOTE • When the restoration is performed in a short time. 608 . 3.0 Feb. return to the trouble code screen. Turn OFF the main power switch and turn it ON again more than 10 seconds after. Select [Yes] and touch [OK]. which can be restored with one restoration command. bizhub C550 A00JF4E517DA 2.

Change MFPB. conduct the following setting.] → [HDD Version Up] See P.5. Change IPB Change CCDB Control signal — — — Location (Electrical component) — — — 1 2 3 609 Troubleshooting bizhub C550 . Change hard disk.5.Field Service Ver.150 CEEE1: MSC undefined malfunction occurring Relevant parts MFP board (MFPB) WIRING DIAGRAM Step A